4 cts F iophes oe) is AR 2% Wage auars be od F faa) * = 7. * £74 = ais Son " ae hes teh “ hee rao Mena fe, ce aes Flas : Lon oer sa Sy bee ata 9S nde: bees gai Le , asap RiiteG ae Bi be ae Cah ta tape eRe ove ah F : " te a thst at Fg i here 3 se : 4 $ . 2 inne : Rhee rs aes if aw ‘ae aiate are ms bas Wie eee ; eae ; , 3 ornis ie : A ‘ dives Sah Bee and» Gar, ‘ uy, 3 + ove aia' if AS Hint ob ay eR ow re hem La Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2009 with funding from Ontario Council of University Libraries http://www.archive.org/details/proceedingsofaca43acaduoft a au = *. ; : oe AL . ’ . ¥ oth Gee : a st, ' - en 7 = & ' + = ve a Eo CH HDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. JANUARY 1. Mr. CHARLES Morris in the chair. Thirty-three persons present. A paper entitled ‘“ Basanite from Crawford Co., Ind.,” by Edward Goldsmith was presented for publication. The death of John B. Trevor, a member, December 20, 1890, was announced. The Council reported the appointment of the following Standing Committees to serve during the current year :— On Liprary.—Joseph Leidy, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, Gavin W. Hart, Charles P. Perot and J. Bernard Brinton. On Pusuications.—Joseph Leidy, Angelo Heilprin, Thomas Meehan, Edward J. Nolan and John H. Redfield. On InsrRUCTION AND LEcTURES.—Isaac C. Martindale, Harold Wingate, George A. Rex, Charles Morris and J. Bernard Brinton. 2 10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. On Two New and Undescribed Methods of Contractility Mani- fested by Filaments of Protoplasm—Pror. J. A. RypER presented the results of his recent investigations of the peculiar phenomena of contractility presented by the stalk of Vorticella and of the body of Trypanosoma balbiani. ‘The speaker pointed out that all the ac- counts of the mode of contraction of the stalk of Vorticella hitherto offered were either inadequate to account for the facts or else wholly inaccurate. No figures yet published give a correct picture of the relations of the muscular filament in a spiral, and the outer tubular sheath which invests that muscular filament. Neither has there been any correct account given of the way in which the spiral con- dition of the stalk of Vorticella is generated as a consequence of the contraction of the muscular filament. The true state of affairs is as follows:—The muscular filament of Vorticella passes downward through its sheath in a spiral manner and is only in contact along a spiral line with the iside of the transparent investing sheath. The filament thus makes eight or nine complete turns within its sheath which is itself not in contact with the spiral muscular filament except along the spiral line al- ready mentioned. It follows from this, that if this spiral line of contact is in turn traced upon the muscular filament, it will be found to describe a spiral around the latter. In a condition of contraction it will be found that the inner faces of the spirally coiled muscular filament are in a state of greater compression than the outer ones and that therefore the inner side of the muscular filament has suffered a greater contraction of its sub- stance than the outer. This face of the filament again is found to correspond to the face which is in spiral contact with the sheath in the uncontracted condition. But to fully satisfy the mechanical conditions of the problem, it is necessary to assume that the con- tractile filament of Vorticella is composed, as are ordinary striated muscular fibers in higher forms, of alternating and superposed disks of singly and doubly refractive plasma, or at least of a series of disks whose most contractile margins are permanently arranged in con- formity with the spiral line which can be traced along the surface of the filament where it is in contact with the investing sheath. In this way alone is it possible to account for the way in which the spiral coil in the contractile stalk of Vorticella is generated. In this way only can it be supposed that a muscular fibre may contract at a uniform rate so as to bend continuously and constantly in two directions so as to generate a spiral in accordance with the well- known laws which preside over the generation of uniformly coiled spirals in space. After this conclusion had been deduced from an attempt at a diagrammatic construction of the spiral stalk and an- alysis of its components, observation of mounted preparations of Carchesium polypinum showed that the coiled parts of the muscular filament are actually composed of discoidal elements such as are met with in ordinary muscular fibre alternating apparently as sin- . 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11 . gly and doubly refractive elements. Further study disclosed the remarkable fact that the disks of anisotropic matter are in con- tact along the concave or inner side of the coils and not in contact on the outer or convex sides or faces of the coils, where a wedge- shaped mass of isotropic material seems to be interposed between the outer edge of the successive anisotropic disks. ‘This is, in fact, the condition which should have existed, per hypothesis. The torsion into a spiral of the muscular stalk of Vorticella may have been due to the constant torsional strain of the crown of cilia vibrating constantly in a cyclical manner in one direction setting up a vortex movement, such a vortex tending constantly to main- tain the torsional strain and thus add the additional spirals or twists to the new parts of the muscular stalk as the latter is lengthened by growth next to the animalcules’ body. This hy pothesis of torsion the speaker had not yet verified, but he had no doubt that the facts when ascertained would countenance it. The development of a progressive spiral in either direction may be caused by rotating the wave of contraction around the center of each one of the successive disks of contractile matter, here hypothe- tically assumed and actually found to exist in some forms of Vorti- cella. This is of great importance in acquiring a comprehension of the generation of the spiral in Trypanosoma balbiani, the parasite of the alimentary canal cf the oyster, as well as in the case of many spiral Schizomycetes and long flagella, many of which have spiral rather than a simple undulatory movement. If the contraction wave for each successive disk is a little behind or a little ahead of its next neighbor, or, what amounts to the same thing, if the revo- lution of these contraction waves follows a spiral line turning to the right or left, then will the spiral be generated in a sinistral or dex- tral manner so as to determine the direction of movement either for- wards or backwards or alternately as happens in Trypanosoma bal- biont, in which the revolutions of the organism so caused, occur with the greatest velocity. In this connection it is interesting to mention the extraordinary behavior of a string of gyrostats w hen set rotating in a connected series suspended one to the other. If they then be disturbed there will be generated a curious progressive cork-screw motion which will travel along the series, as pointed out by Sir William Thomson, or, as suggested to the speaker by his colleague, Prof. G. F. Barker, the analogies with some of the phe- nomena of the polarization of light are also interesting. In conclusion, the speaker insisted that the type of muscular con- tractility presented by the muscular filament of Vorticella had no analogue amongst the muscular elements of higher animals, and it, therefore, constituted a type by itself, where unequally contracting disks were fixed in a spiral order. The second form was typified by the filamentous Trypanosoma balbiani in which there is a rapid reversal of the spiral in a dextral 12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. or a sinistral direction and in which the contractile disks (here hy- pothetical) are not fixed but in which waves of contraction may be supposed to revolve, as described above, either in a sinistral or dex- tral direction, in order to continuously maintain the spiral condition, and also at the same time cause the spiral to apparently travel from one end of a filamentous organism or flagellum to the other. Two very distinct and constant types of filamentous muscular or plasmic contractility the speaker believed might be thus character- ized with Vorticella and Trypanosoma as their types, in addition to the single ordinary form presented by the usual types of smooth and transversely striated muscular fibres. The following was ordered to be printed :-— 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 RESEARCHES UPON RESPIRATION. BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D. AND ALBERT P. BRUBAKER, M. D. No. 1. On THE CONSUMPTION OF OXYGEN AND THE PRODUCTION OF CARBON DIOXIDE IN ANIMALS. Of all subjects of biological enquiry there is none, perhaps, that has attracted more attention or exceeds in importance that of the accurate determination of the consumption of oxygen and production of carbon dioxide and water in man and animals. Not only is the proper ventilation of our dwellings, lecture rooms, theatres, halls of justice, based upon such knowledge but all estimates as to the amount of radiant energy set free through the combustion of food, as determined by calorimetrical experiments, are dependent upon the same. Passing over the early observations of Boyle, Hales, Cigna, Black and Priestley which showed that the air becomes so materi- ally modified by animals breathing it as to soon render it irrespira- ble unless renewed, it may be said that Lavoisier, by his classical re- searches, first established (1785) the modern theory of respiration and calorification, namely, that the carbon dioxide and water pro- duced during respiration and the heat thereby set free are due to the oxidation of the carbon and hydrogen of the food. While subse- quent investigations, such as those of Allen and Pepys, Milne Ed- wards, Despretz, Dulong, Valentin and Brunner, Boussingault and Barral, confirmed in the main the profound views announced by Lavoisier, nevertheless the differences in the results obtained were such as to induce Regnault and Reiset' to undertake an extended series of researches upon the respiration of different animals, more particularly with the view of determining the amount of oxygen con- sumed and carbon dioxide produced. The results of this elaborate investigation, it may be added, have never, in the main, been questioned. Inasmuch, however, as the water exhaled by an animal is not determined by the Regnault-Reiset apparatus, and in so far as known to the authors they are the only experimenters who have ever had the opportunity of comparing the amount of oxygen con- 1 Recherches Chimiques sur la Respiration des animaux des diverses classes. Par MM. V. Regnault et J. Reiset, Annales de Chimie et de Physique, 3me Ser., tome XX VI, 1849. 14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. sumed asso determined directly, with the amount absorbed as deter- mined indirectly from the carbon dioxide and water produced, as obtained by means of a Voit respiration apparatus, it does not appear superfluous to submit the results of experimenting with the two kinds of respiration apparatus.' DESCRIPTION OF APPARATUS. The Regnault-Reiset respiration apparatus in the fulfilment of the physical and chemical requirements incidental to the construe- tion of such apparatus, remains to this day unsurpassed. It consists essentially of the following three parts : A central glass bell-jar or chamber for the reception of the ani- mal, communicates on the one side with two glass pipettes contain- ing an alkaline solution for the absorption of the carbon dioxide produced by the animal, and on the other side with a glass pipette filled with oxygen to replace that absorbed by the animal in the bell-jar. The central glass bell-jar or chamber A, Pl. I, tubulated above and having a capacity of about 47.6 litres,’ is cemented through its lower open portion into the inner of two grooves with which the iron-plate upon which it rests is provided. The metal plate itself presents a central opening sufficiently large for the introduction of the animal into the chamber and is hermetically closed (the animal having been introduced) by means of a circular-metal lid, the latter being tightly screwed up to the under surface of the plate by means of bolts. The inner circular portion of the metal plate and upper surface of the metal lid closing the inferior opening of the central bell-jar are painted with red lead so as to avoid any ab- sorption of oxygen through oxidation of the metal. In order that the animal should not stand directly on the circular metal disk clos- ing the inferior opening of the central bell-jar (which would cool it too much) a movable bottom consisting of a circular wooden disk pierced with holes upon which the animal is placed is passed up 1 The results obtained by Voit’s respiration apparetus will be presented ina subsequent communication. 2 The absolute capacity of the jar or that of the tubes connecting it with the pipettes need not be determined since the investigation, is based upon a comparison of the composition of a given amount of the air within the jar at the beginning and at the end of the experiment and any extra amount of air within the jar as well as that in the connecting tubes can be neglected, as they are on both sides of the equation. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 through the inferior opening of the bell-jar. This can be easily done as the wooden disk is somewhat smaller than the inferior opening of the jar. The circular wooden disk with the animal placed upon it, after being introduced through the inferior opening of the chamber is, slightly rotated and then lowered and comes to rest upon three pivots projecting inwardly over which the disk glides, it being sufficiently notched upon its sides for that purpose. If it be desired to preserve the urine and feces this can be accomplished by placing a circular metal pan within the space between the under surface of the wooden disk and upper surface of the iron lid clos- ing the inferior opening of the jar into which space the excreta would otherwise fall. The central glass bell-jar or chamber, A PI. I, with a thermometer suspended within it and containing the ani- mal resting upon the wooden disk, the inferior opening of the jar being closed by the iron lid, is surrounded by water, the latter being held by four rectangular glass plates fitting into the outer of the two grooves with which the iron plate is provided. As it is essential that the temperature of the central bell-jar contain- ing the animal should be maintained as constant as possible, that of the water surrounding it must be maintained equally so. Through the upper superior portion of the central bell-jar, A PI. I, pass four tubes L M N O. Through the tube L the jar commun- icates directly with the flask P containing a solution of soda or pot- ash and indirectly with the pipette F containing the oxygen to be respired. By means of the tube M and the small mercurial manome- ter connected with it the pressure of the gas within the jar A canbe determined from moment to moment. Through the two connecting tubes N O thejar A communicates with the two pipettes R S con- taining the alkaline solution for the absorption of the carbon diox- ide. The accessory tube T given off from the main tube O and leading to the large mercurial manometer enables us, as we shall see presently, to draw out of the jar A a sample of gas for analysis. The iron plate with the bell-jar A is firmly supported by a heavy frame-work resting upon the floor. The two glass pipettes, PI. I, RS, serving for the absorption of the carbon dioxide, connected through their lower extremities by an india-rubber tube and having a capacity of about three litres, are filled with a solution of caustic soda or potash whose weight and composition have been previously determined. The two glass pipettes R S are firmly attached to two metal supports. The supports are suspended by chains from the PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. beam V and with the movement of the latter alternately ascends and descends uniformly in a vertical manner the supports moving in a frame. The beam V is moved by the eccentric X which in turn is moved by the rotation of a number of interlocking toothed wheels W the movement of the latter being due to the fallof 150 kilogrammes, through 10 metres and regulated by a fan. The relations of the wheels, weight, etc. are such as to necessitate the winding up of the weight once only in fifteen hours. The vertical movement of the pipettes just described is such that as the pipette R, for example, ascends, the solution of soda within it passes into the pipette S which descends; the air in the latter freed of its carbon dioxide passing into the jar A while the air of A loaded with carbon dioxide passes into the pipette R. On the other hand, as the pipette S ascends and R descends, the solution of soda passing from S to R, the air of the pipette R, freed of its carbon-dioxide, passes back to the jar A and the air of the latter, loaded with carbon dioxide, passes into the pipette S. In order that the absorption of the carbon dioxide by the soda be as thorough has possible a number of glass tubes, open at both ends, are placed within the pipettes, the walls of these tubes remaining moistened with soda when the pipettes have emptied themselves of the alkaline solution. They present consequently a large absorbing surface. It will be observed that as the pipette S takes air from the upper portion of the jar A and the pipette R from the lower portion, the play of the pipettes not only ensures the absorption of the carbon-dioxide in proportion as it is produced by the animal but keeps up a continual agitation of the air within the jar A which tends to maintain its composition uniform. The frames in which the glass pipettes move, together with the wheels etc. moving them, are firmly supported by a heavy metal frame- work resting upon the floor. The pipette,’ F Pl. I, filled with oxy- gen by means of the tube d, replacing that of the jar A absorbed by the animal, has acapacity of 19,440 c.c. between the marks } and cand it communicates through its upper opening and with the flask P which in turn communicates with the jar A and, through its lower opening with a vessel e which receives the liquid that tlows out of the pipette 1 In the original experiments as performed by Regnault and Reiset three oxygen pipettes similar to the one described above were successively used, the ex- periment lasting until the last pipette was exhausted. It was found, however, by the authors, though provided with the three pipettes, thatit was easier on account of the connections to refill the same pipette when necessary than to substitute for it a second pipette previously filled. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, LT F, when the latter is filled with oxygen, and with the tube finto which the liquid flows that drives the oxygen out of the pipette over into the jar A. The oxygen made use of by the authors was obtained by heating in an iron retort a mixture of chlorate of potassium and black oxide of manganese and passing the gas so developed through a solution of caustic potassa. The gas so purified and further tested by explosion with hydrogen, appeared to be pure. In order to intro- duce the oxygen into the pipette previously filled with a concen- trated solution of calcium chloride, little or no oxygen being ab- sorbed by that liquid, the stop cock on the upper tube d putting the oxygen reservoir in communication with the pipette and that on the inferior tube 7 conducting the fluid away, must be opened, and as the oxygen passes into the pipette the solution of the calcium chloride flows out into the vessel e. The pipette should be filled under a little higher pressure than that of the atmosphere and the gas allowed to acquire the same temperature as that of the latter. By allowing a little oxygen to escape and so making its elastic force equal to that of the atmosphere, the level of the solution of calcium chloride can be brought to that of the lower mark ¢. The height of the barometer and the temperature of the oxygen must now be noted, the latter being ascertained by means of a thermom- eter suspended within the pipette. After this somewhat detailed description of our respiration ap- paratus let us endeavor to describe the manner of conducting the experiments. MetruHop oF EXPERIMENTATION. The oxygen pipette being filled under the atmospheric pressure H and a temperature t let V represent the capacity in litres of the pipette between the upper and lower marks and f the pressure of the aqueous vapor abandoned to the oxygen by the solution of cal- cium chloride, then the weight W of the oxygen delivered to the bell-jar supposing the pipette to be emptied to the lower mark,’ will be given by the equation 1 In order to be able, if necessary, to stop the experiment at any moment the pipette was graduated in litres and demilitres Owing, however, to the uncer- tainty as to the accuracy of the graduation incidental to the globular form and large size of the pipette it is undesirable to terminate the experiment before the pipette has emptied itself to the upper mark. 18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 1 H—f W=1-4298 V ——_———.. x ——- 1 + 0:00367 t 760 The pressure of the vapor from the calcium chloride solution to be deducted from the barometric pressure, was accepted by the au- thors as being from 0°47 to 0°55 of the pressure of aqueous vapor at corresponding temperatures according as the temperatures of the oxygen varied from 16° C to 21° C, the experiments being made in winter or summer. The pipettes for absorbing the carbon dioxide are now weighed and then filled with a solution of caustic potash or soda and then again weighed, the difference giving the weight of the solution, the amount of carbon dioxide present in the soda having been previously determined by analysis, the method of which will be described pres- ently. The animal is now introduced, with food and drink if necessary, into the bell-jar, the walls of which have been previously moistened. In order to maintain the temperature of the water sur- rounding the bell-jar as constant as possible, the experiment should begin with the temperature of the water a little higher than that of the surrounding atmosphere, the heat given off by the animal compen- sating for that given off by the water. The lid closing the inferior opening of the jar is now screwed up and the two-way stop cocks so turned that the interior of the bell-jar is put in communication with the interior of the oxygen pipette through the intermediation of the flask P but cut off from the atmosphere, and the carbon dioxide pip- ettes put in motion through the descent of the weight. Let us suppose that the respiration of the animal consists simply in the con- sumption of oxygen and production of carbon dioxide. It is evident that in proportion as the oxygen of the chamber is consumed by the animal and the carbon dioxide produced is absorbed by the soda of the pipettes, the elastic force of the gas within the chamber is di- minished and, if the chamber communicates with the oxygen pip- ette, the oxygen absorbed will be at once replaced by an equivalent amount of oxygen, provided that the solution of calcium chloride be added through the tube f to that in the oxygen pipette in quantity sufficient to maintain the elastic force of the gas equal to that of the 1 The number 1:4298=weight of 1 litre of oxygen at standard pressure and temperature. 0:00367=coefficient of expansion for each deg. C. 760.=standard barometric pressure in millimetres of mer- cury. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19 atmosphere. This successive addition of the solution of calcium chloride is accomplished by putting the tube of the oxygen pip- ette in communication with the reservoir G containing a con- centrated solution of calcium chloride, the level of which is main- tained very nearly constant by means of the three glass flasks 1, 2, 3 filled with the same solution and which empty themselves success- ively as the level of the fluid in the reservoir falls, the flasks differing slightly from each other in the length of their necks. In proportion as the oxygen in the pipette becomes rarefied the liquid column in the tube falls and the elastic force of the air in the tube diminishes, the consequence of which is that the solution of calcium chloride flows from the reservoir into the tube and thence into the pipette. Never- theless the elastic force in the chamber does not remain constant during the time that the pipette furnishes oxygen. It diminishes in proportion as the pipette becomes filled with the solution of calcium chloride, that is if such solution was at the same level in the tube and the pipette at the moment that the former was cemented to the tube leading from the reservoir, the pressure of the air within opposing the flow from the reservoir’. As a matter of fact, however, the vari- ations due to the cause just mentioned may be restricted to very narrow limits by simply raising the level of the solution in the tube a few inches higher than that of the solution in the pipette before joining the tube to that leading from the reservoir. By so do- ing an excess of pressure of the gas within the chamber of about 1 centimeter is maintained which is of advantage in compensating for the small amount of carbon dioxide 1 to 2 per cent always present in the chamber notwithstanding the constant play of the pipettes for the absorption of the latter. It should be mentioned, however, in this connection that absolute constancy of pressure can not be main-_ tained since variations in barometric pressure modify that of the gas within the chamber. Towards the end of the experiment, when there only remains about 500 cubic centimeters of oxygen in the pip- ette; the tubes are disconnected and the solution of calcium chloride poured into the tube until the solution in the pipette rises to the level of the upper mark when the stop cock on the tube is turned off. By this time there is an excess of pressure within the chamber of about 2 to 3 per cent and while the oxygen corresponding to this ex- 1 That such is the case is shown by disconnecting the tubes for a moment after the flow from the reservoir has ceased, for in connecting them again the flow at once begins. 20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. cess is consumed by the animal, plenty of time is afforded for making the temperature of the water and therefore of the chamber the same as at the beginning. By observing the fall of the mercury in the gauge the requisite number of millimetres of mercury is obtained which, if added to or subtracted from the observed barometric pres- sure, makes the final equal to the initial pressure.’ During this time also a sample of the gas of the chamber is drawn off for analysis. In order to draw off a sample of gas from the chamber for analy- sis the tube already referred to as being given off from the tube T is put in communication with the large mercurial manometer. In this case as the mercury flows out the gas flows into the manometer whence, as will be presently described, it is transferred for analysis to the Hempel burettes. It is indispensable that the sample of gas should be drawn from the chamber as the pipette R ascends, inas- much as at that moment the gas of the chamber loaded with carbon di- oxide passes into that pipette and consequently into the manometer. If the sample was drawn as the pipette descends, the gas so obtained being freed of its carbon dioxide would not represent the composition of the gas within the chamber. The sample of gas having been drawn from the chamber at the moment that the pressure of the gas was the same as at the beginning of experiment the movement of the pipettes for the absorption of the carbon dioxide is stopped. The animal is removed and weighed together with food and excreta and the pipettes at once also weighed. The increase in weight of the pipettes at the end of the experiment as compared with their weight at the beginning represents both the carbon dioxide absorbed and the hygrometric water fixed by the concentrated solution of soda. The weight of the carbon dioxide contained in the solution of soda is then determined by analysis and deducting therefrom the the weight of the carbon dioxide that the solution contained at the beginning of the experiment as previously determined, the difference will be the weight of the carbon dioxide absorbed during the experi- ment by the solution of soda. This weight added to that of the car- bon dioxide remaining in the chamber at the end of the experi- ment as determined by analysis of the sample drawn from the cham- 1 If for convenience it be necessary to terminate an experiment at any mo- ment, and a difference still exists between the final and initial temperatures, and between the final and initial pressures, the error so arising, due to the initial vol- ume of the gas of the chamber being thereby increased or diminished, must be taken into consideration in the summing up of the general results. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21 ber will give the total weight of the carbon dioxide produced by the animal. It is evident if during the experiment, oxygen has only been consumed and carbon dioxide only produced, the latter being as rapidly absorbed as produced, that the composition of the gas of the chamber will be the same at the end as at the beginning of the ex- periment. That the gas of the chamber during the experiment does not differ to any great extent from that of the atmosphere is shown not only by the analysis of the air but from the fact that the ani- mals do not experience any discomfort even after a much longer so- journ in the chamber than that to which they were subjected in the experiments by the authors. It should be added in this connection that the air of the chamber is neither altered by the food nor ex- ereta of the animal. Let us consider now the data at our disposal by means of which the composition of the air of the chamber at the beginning and end of the experiment can be determined. ‘The vol- ume of air at the beginning of the experiment is equal to that which is contained in the chamber, in the pipettes for the absorbing of the carbon dioxide, and in the connecting tubes less the volume of air displaced by the animal and food which are introduced into the the chamber. The determination of both the latter volumes when the density of the food can not be determined, can only be made ap- proximately but in taking it as equal to the volume of air displaced by an equal weight of ‘water the error committed can be but slight. This is equally true at the end of the experiment, for apart from the oxygen consumed and carbon dioxide produced and nitrogen present being in relatively large quantities it must be remembered that by far the greatest part of the food consumed is still present either within the animal or in its excreta. Indeed the only part of the food actually disappearing and which diminishes its volume is that entering into the formation of the carbon dioxide and which must in any case occupy less volume than the water having the same weight as the carbon dioxide produced. Let V represent the volume in li- tres of the air of the chamber on the supposition that the animal has just been enclosed within the latter, H the elastic force of that air, at its temperature, f the pressure of the aqueous vapor at that tem- perature to be deducted from H, it acting in opposition to it, then the weight of the oxygen and nitrogen that the chamber contains at the beginning of the experiment can be determined by substituting in the following equations 22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 1 H—f Weight of oxygen=0°2095. 1°, 4298. V. ———-———.. — 1-++-0°00367.t 760 1 H—f Weight of nitrogen=0°7905. 1%, 2562. V, ———-———. — 1-+-0°00567.t 760 the values of V, H, t and f obtained by observation; 0°-2095 and 0:7905 representing the amounts of oxygen and nitrogen per volume in 100 volumes of air and 1°*°4298 and 1°°°2562 the weight of a li- tre of oxygen and nitrogen respectively at standard pressure and tem- perature. At the end of the experiment H, t and f being made the same as at the beginning, the total volume of air then within the chamber will be unchanged its composition having been modified by the amount of carbon dioxide or other gases produced and remain- ing in the chamber. The weight of carbon dioxide oxygen and ni- trogen or other gases present in the chamber at the end of the ex- periment is then determined by multiplying the weight of the gases obtained from the sample of gas drawn from the chamber by the ra- tio of the volume of air of the chamber V to that of the sample v. Let us suppose that C, O and N represent the weight of the carbon dioxide oxygen and nitrogen in the sample of air drawn from the chamber and that YM; then CM, OM and NM will be the weight of the carbon dioxide, oxygen and nitrogen in the chamber at the end of the experiment. The weight of the carbon dioxide present in the chamber must be added as already mentioned to that obtained from the pipettes to obtain the total amount of carbon dioxide produced while the weight of the oxygen remaining in the chamber must be de- ducted from the sum of the weight of oxygen present in the cham- ber at the beginning of the experiment and that delivered to the chamber during the experiment to obtain the total weight of oxygen consumed. Finally the increase or diminution in the weight of the nitrogen within the chamber at the beginning and end of the experi- ment amounting to perhaps the 0°02 of a gramm the authors regard as being due to errors in the eudiometrical readings rather than as nitrogen exhaled or inhaled by the animal, the amount of nitrogen in the chamber present being the same at the end as at the beginning of the experiments. Mernop or DETERMINING THE WEIGHT OF THE CARBON Diox1pE ABSORBED BY THE SOLUTION OF SODA IN THE PIPETTES. The method made use of by the authors in determining the weight of the carbon dioxide absorbed by the soda solution in the pipettes 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23 was essentially that recommended by Regnault. It depends upon the decomposition of the sodium carbonate in the solution through the addition of sulphuric acid and the reabsorbing of the carbon di- oxide so set free by passing the latter through bulbs, ete. containing soda, the increase in the weight of the bulbs giving the weight of the carbon dioxide absorbed. The apparatus represented in F Plate II consists of a litre flask B into which is poured a sample of the soda solution from the pipettes to be analyzed. Through the cork closing the flask pass three tubes, the first tube communicates with the U shaped tube A containing soda and pumice stone for the ab- sorption of the carbon dioxide in the air that passes through the ap- paratus at the end of the experiment. The second tube serves for the introduction of the sulphuric acid which should be a little less dense than the alkaline solution and added gradually to the iatter, the mixture being slowly heated by gas jets to boiling. The third tube communicates with the narrow flask C containing concentrated sul- phurice acid, the latter communicating in turn with the tube D containing pumice stone and sulphuric acid for drying the air and through which the carbon dioxide developed passes on its way to the Liebig bulbs E containing a concentrated solution of soda and the tube F containing pumice stone and small pieces of caustic soda. The remaining tubes G and H contain pumice stone and concentrated sulphuric acid. The increase in weight of the three tubes E F and G at the end of the experiment, the tubes having been previously weighed at the beginning, gives the weight of the earbon dioxide absorbed. To ensure accuracy in the weighing of the tubes E, F, G three similar tubes disposed in the same manner and displacing an equal volume of air should be used as counter weights. The tube H containing pumice stone and sulphuric acid serves to prevent the moist air depositing water in the tube G. Finally by means of the aspirating jar I a current of air is made to pass through the apparatus and of so carrying the last traces of carbon dioxide to the soda solution absorbing it. In order to maintain the tubes firmly bound together and to facilitate their connection and disconnection they are all clamped to a solid wooden frame- work by means of which they can all be removed together and in position when desirable. The weight of the carbon dioxide pre- viously existing in the soda solution placed in the pipettes at the beginning of the experiment for absorption of the carbon dioxide 24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. produced by the animal is determined by means of the same appara- tus and must of course be deducted from the weight of the carbon dioxide absorbed, present in the soda solution at the end of the ex- periment. It has already been mentioned, that by means of the accessory tube T Pl. I given off by the tube leading from the chamber, to the carbon dioxide pipette R, that a sample of gas can be drawn into the large mercurial manometer. By so turning its three-way stop cock, as to let the mercury flow out, the sample so obtained is after- wards driven over to the absorbing or explosion apparatus for anal- ysis. This is accomplished by pouring mercury into the limb of the manometer opposite that containing the sample, the three-way stop cock being so turned as to put both limbs in communication and then of retransferring to the manometer for determination of volume of gases absorbed. The method made use of by the authors, however, in order to expedite the analysis is to draw the sample of gas from the chamber directly into a Hempel graduated burette B* filled with mercury, the latter, Plate III, Fig. 1, flowing out of the burette as the mercurial reservoir A with which the burette com- municates is lowered by means of the wheel work C attached to the solid wooden frame fastened to the table. The sample of gas so ob- tained reduced to standard temperature and pressure is then driven out of the burette B by elevating the mercurial reservoir into a Hempel pipettte F containing a concentrated solution of soda and after remaining there long enough for the absorption of any carbon dioxide present is driven back into the graduated burette by lower- ing the mercurial reservoir, the diminution in volume, the latter re- duced to standard temperature and pressure, representing the carbon dioxide absorbed. ‘The pipette for the absorption of the carbon diox- ide being removed, the burette is connected with one containing pyro- gallic acid into which the sample of gas just freed of its carbon diox- ide is driven by elevating the reservoir and in which it is allowed to remain until the oxygen present is absorbed. The sample of gas. being then driven back into the graduated burette by lowering the reservoir the diminution in volume, reduced to standard temperature and pressure, represents the volume of oxygen absorbed. The volume of gas now remaining in the burette the authors regarded as consist- ing of nitrogen. At least the volume of residual gas in the burette was 1 Neue Methoden fiir Analyse der Gase, von Dr. W. Hempel, Braun- schweig, 1880. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 usually such as it ought to be on the supposition that it was nitrogen, and as can be shown experimentally by transferring the gas to the Explosion Apparatus Plate III, Fig. 2. The connection with the burette containing the gas is made with that limb of the apparatus A which has been previously filled with a solution of soda the latter being forced up by the mouth applied at the end of the other limb F and the latter then clamped. A known volume of oxygen being then introduced, and a sufficient volume of detonating gas developed elec- trolytically by means of three Daniell cells connected with the plati- num plates, through the binding screws H H the gaseous mixture is exploded by connecting a Ruhmkorff apparatus with the platinum terminalsG G. The fact of there being no diminution in the volume of the residual air as ascertained by transferring the gas back to the graduated burette proves the absence of at least hydrogen, heavy car- buretted hydrogen, C, H, and light carburetted hydrogen or marsh gas, C H, the gases which are the most likely to be present, the two former coming from the rectum of the animal the latter from its food. That there is no free hydrogen’ is further shown in the absence of absorption on passing the residual gas through palladium. The following tabulated actual experiment will serve to illustrate the gen- eral method and order of experimentation. Experiment No. 17. Oct. 29th, 8.45 P. M. 2 PIGEONS. BEGINNING OF EXPERIMENT. Weight of animal . : ; : : ; , a 0 Dag, ir food : : : A : . 07000 Barometer : , : : é : : ; Pere coke Temp. of Chamber . é ; : : : : : 18°C Pressure of Aq. Vap. ; : : ; ; oF lea. Vol. of Gas of Chamber — LIr. 748—15°35 1 at standard temp. = 47°6—0°567.————_———-—__ — 42°53 and pressure 760 (1-+-00567°18) 1 Were these gases present in the residual air then after explosion with oxygen water and carbon dioxide would be formed and retained in the pipette the volume of the gas being consequently diminished. It should be mentioned, how- ever, in this connection that it is extremely difficult whatever the kind of apparatus used, to determine such very small volumes of hydrogen or carburetted hydrogen or marsh gas as are likely to be present in the sample of gas drawn from the cham- ber for analysis and in neglecting to take these gases into account no very sensible error, at least in most instances, will be introduced into the result. 3 26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. GRAMMES. Weight of . Oxygen in = 0°2095 1:4298 gr. 42°53 = 1 2iia9 Chamber. Weight of Nitrogen in = 0°7905 1:2562 gr. 42°53 == 42-220 Chamber Temp. of Oxygen in Pipette . : ‘ 19* Pressure of Aq. Vap. aband. by Calcium ‘Chloride sole ee 15) GRAMMES. Weight of 748—7-67 Oxygen in = 1°4298 gr. 19°440 — = 25°297 Pipette. 760 Gia 19) Weight of Pipettes and Soda sol... . == 7683-000 " : = 6238-000 5 Soda sol. or difference. ; : . == 1445000 Sample of Soda sol. analyzed — 140° ce Weight of tubes at end : : : ., = 25ea0 S ns beginning . ‘ -. ==) digo Carbon dioxide absorbed or difference. ; - ==" 0000S Carbon dioxide in Soda sol. used = 8-77 Enp oF EXPERIMENT. Duration of experiment : ; ; : : 21 hours. Weight of animal : ‘ ; : : . ==") Sez cs excreta : ¢ ‘ : ; _ = 0°038 MM. Barometer : : 5 ; : : . 758 Pressure in gauge 5 : ; : : : 10 Elastic force of gas in chamber : : : : 748 Temperature of chamber ; ; : ; : 18°C Vol. of gas of chamber EIT. at standard = 42°55 temp. and press. ANALYSIS OF SAMPLE GAs. Barometer. : : : : 76276 Temperature of Ehesnins: : : : : 18°S 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27 Pressure of aq. vapor. : ins Vol. of sample of gas at ppaeeved ine sel press = tice Vol. of sample reduced to stand. temp. and press. before absorp- == 65°32 ce tion of carbon dioxide. Vol. of sample after absorption of carbon dioxide. = 64-40 ce Carbon dioxide absorbed. _ =U mee Vol. of sample after absorption of Oxygen. nee Oxygen absorbed. == 1269%ec CoMPOSITION OF GAS OF CHAMBER. Volume of Gas of chamber. 42530 = = 651 Volume of Gas of sample. 65°32 BED. GRAMMES. 0-92 651 — 0:6 1°966 — 1:179 = Carbon dioxide. ie 12°69 651 = 8-2 1-429 — 11°789 = Oxygen. ee oe ‘51-71 651 =: 33-6 1:256 = 42-238 — Nitrogen. pte Shae Composition per volume. Composition per cent. Carbon dioxide. 0°60 1-4 Oxygen. 8:25 pe 1G55 Nitrogen. 39°62 79°71 42-47 100-0 GRAMMES. Weight of Oxygen delivered to chamber from Pipette = 25°297 ‘“‘ in chamber at beginning of exp. = 12°739 a “available = 38:036 f “in chamber at end of exp. eee Oe z “ consumed by animal = OLAS :§ e os * .* -per-hour a= 1-249 + is xe By ee) wie Der Rig. == 2-202 i Pipettes and Soda‘sol. == F712;000 66 “ = 6238-000 ee Soda sol. or difference —a 4 4-0 28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Weight of sample of Soda. sol. analyzed 140 ce ; Tubes at end == pine zs “ at beginning == 20420 Carbon dioxide absorbed or difference == | 003750 1474 gr. of Soda sol. at end contained Carbon dioxide == 37-060 1445“ «at beg. Z = 8770 Carbon dioxide produced by animal == 23260 ef “absorbed by Soda sol. rem. in chamber = 1179 Total CO, produced by animal = . 297459 Weight of Oxygen in Carbon dioxide produced = 21a Weight of Oxygen in Carbon dioxide produced ; 21-424 $$ ————— ——— —— —___—_____ = Rep. Quot. = = 0°816 Weight of Oxygen consumed 26-247 Weight of Nitrogen in chamber at beginning = 42°22 e ey cs at end = 42:20 00°02 W. of CO, produced by animal per hour = 1-402 W. of CO, produced per hour per kil. of animal = 2°472 In order to test the accuracy of the method of experimentation just described by control experiments the authors burned within the chamber a given weight of stearic acid. 6°*"7 of stearic acid (Cys H,, O.) when burned should theoretically produce 18°9 gr. CO,. When burned in the chamber of the respiratory apparatus, that amount of stearic acid actually produced 18°5 gr. of CO, The loss 0-4 CO, or 2:1. pe. was not, therefore, greater than what might been have anticipated. The animals experimented with, rabbits, monkeys, pigeons, tur- tles, enjoying good health at the beginning of the experiment, did not appear to suffer in any way from their sojourn in the chamber of the respiratory apparatus. The food placed in the chamber when the animals had not been previously fed was in some instances not eaten, the animal apparently not being then hungry. The period cf experimentation extended through the winter, spring and summer months of 1890. The hour of experiment selected, day or night, de- pended upon the convenience and the amount of time at the dis- posal of the experimenters. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Experiment No. 1. Jan, 15th. RABBIT. Weight of animal Weight of food Duration of experiment Difference between the initial and anal temperature 9 kil O--O 7 hours, day. of the gas of the chamber --0°°5 C. Difference between the initial and final etter of the gas of the chamber ieee Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment per cent Carbon dioxide 0807 Carbon dioxide 2-00 Oxygen 7331 Oxygen 18-00 Nitrogen 33°737 Nitrogen 80°00 41°875 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed oe 15-994 Weight of carbon dioxide produced 19-762 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon fide 14372 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed 0°898 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour 2:284 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per ihe gramme of animal : 0°913 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per nee 2°823 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal 1-129 Experiment No. 2 Jan. 20th. RABBIT. Weight of animal 2.4 Weight of food, turnips : OF 4 Duration of experiment ; : : 12 hrs. 45 min. night. Difference between the initial and final tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber +0°°5 Difference between the final and initial pressure of the gas of the chamber +6"™™ 30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0-649 Carbon dioxide 16 Oxygen 7755 Oxygen 19-0 Nitrogen 32°399 Nitrogen 79°4 40°737 100°0 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . : : : 31°53 Weight of carbon dioxide meedieedl : : 39°26 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon Aipeide 25°65 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed ; ; : : 0°81 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. : A 2°48 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal : ; 1:03 Weight of carbon dioxide prediiced: per fone : 2°76 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal. : : ; : 1:15 Experiment No. 3. Jan. 24th. RABBIT. Weight of animal yaa Weight of food O==0 Duration of experiment 75 hrs., day. Difference between the initial and all aorta of the gas of the chamber : 0°:51@: Difference between the initial and final ee of the gas of the chamber. : ; ; : se aa Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment per cent Carbon dioxide 0:448 Carbon dioxide 1:00 Oxygen 8°655 Oxygen 20°10 Nitrogen 34:036 Nitrogen 78:90 43°139 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . ; ; : q 9°219 Weight of carbon dioxide produced ‘ . : 10°706 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 7786 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed Weight of oxygen consumed per hour ; Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal Weight of carbon dioxide pred cued: per hour Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per per kilogramme of animal ; Experiment No, 4. Feb. 3rd. RABBIT. Weight of animal Weight of food Duration of experiment . Difference between the initial sere fred tempera 9 -kil- 6 ()=2: 75 hrs., day. ture of the gas of the chamber ‘ +2°C. Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber Camere. Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment: per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°983 Carbon dioxide 2°3 Oxygen 7244 Oxygen 17°3 Nitrogen 33°71 87 Nitrogen 80°04 42-014 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed 15°00 Weight of carbon dioxide odie é 19°80 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 14:40 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed 0°96 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour ; : 2-00 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal : : 0-70 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per lorie 2-64 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal ; , 1:01 32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Experiment No. 5. Feb. oth. RABBIT. Weight of animal . : : : : : 2S Weight of food, turnips : : : ) : om2 Duration of experiment : ; : . 11 hours, day. Difference between the initial and a tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber : : : +1°C. Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber. : : : : +4™™4 Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment per cent Carbon dioxide 0°886 Carbon dioxide 271 Oxygen 7765 Oxygen 18:7 Nitrogen 32°853 Nitrogen 79°2 41°502 100-0 GRAMMES, Weight of oxygen consumed . 4 , ; : 22-534 Weight of carbon dioxide produced : . : 28°132 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 20°459 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed : : : : 0°907 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. : ‘ 2-048 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal . : : : 0-890 Weight of carbon dioxide Srodneody per hare : 2°557 Weight of earbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal : : : : . fh I Experiment No. 6. Feb. 7th. RABBIT. Weight of animal . : : : : : : yaa Weight of food i : : . - ; : oo Duration of experiment : : 9 hrs. Difference between the initial and analy temper ture of the chamber : : -+-1°C? Difference between the initial nal faa pressure of the gas of the chamber ‘ ‘ : : +3="- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33 Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment: per cent: Carbon dioxide 0-919 Carbon dioxide 2°15 Oxygen 7849 Oxygen 18°37 Nitrogen 33°963 Nitrogen 79°48 42-731 Lit. 100-00 . GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . : : : : 18°526 Weight of carbon dioxide produced ; E 24:010 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 17:470 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . : : : 0-957 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. ; 2°058 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per ale: gramme of animal . : : : 0°823 Weight of carbon dioxide prandeed per oat 2°668 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal. E ‘ ; ; 1:067 Experiment No. 7. Feb. 10th. RABBIT. Weight of animal . : ; : : : ; 7 spay Weight of food, turnips , : : Ox"? Duration of experiment : ‘ . i hours, night. Difference between the initial and anal tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber : 3 : O=€: Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber P : : ; jo Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0825 Carbon dioxide 2-00 Oxygen 7279 Oxygen 17-00 Nitrogen 34956 Nitrogen 81:00 43-058 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . : : : ; 20°53 Weight of carbon dioxide produced E f 24°60 354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 17:90 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . 2 , : : 0°87 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. : : 1°86 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal . : ; : 0°84 Weight of carbon dioxide nroduieeal per ate : : 2°23 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal. ‘ : ‘ 3 101 Experiment No. 8. Feb. 14th. RABBIT. Weight of animal . : : : oe Weight of food, fed "ohne eperiment Duration of experiment 3 , 1:15 hrs., night. Difference between the initial al el tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber : 5 s Wig 8: Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gasin the chamber . : ; 5 ; +11"™ Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°889 Carbon dioxide 2°00 Oxygen 7946 Oxygen 19:00 Nitrogen 32°911 Nitrogen 79°00 41-646 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . ; : : ; 21:58 Weight of carbon dioxide produced : 26°75 Weight of oxygen contained in the chon cde 19°45 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . : : : , 0-90 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. : e 1:86 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of Syaitel ; : : O74 Weight of carbon dioxide nrodneede per howe , : 2°32 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal : : : : ; 0-92 1891.] Experiment No. 9. Feb. 18th. RABBIT. Weight of animal ; Weight of food, turnips . Duration of experiment . : Difference between the initial and tial tempera- NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9) -kil-7 Q-*1-4. 12 hrs., night. ture of the gas of the chamber +4° C. Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber : 0-0 Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent : Carbon dioxide 1:230 Carbon dioxide 3°000 Oxygen 6035 Oxygen 14-000 Nitrogen 34165 Nitrogen 835°000 41:428 100-000 GRAMMES, Weight of oxygen consumed 24396 Weight of carbon dioxide ae hace ‘ 29°310 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 21°316 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed 0873 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour F 2:033 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal 3 0968 Weight of carbon dioxide pratt per Hone : 2°442 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal : : 1-162 Experiment No. 10. March 11th. RABBIT. Weight of animal el Weight of food, turnips . O*4 Duration of experiment . Difference between the initial and oad, eae ture of the gas of the chamber Difference between the initial and final pressure of ’ the gas of the chamber “413 hrs., night. +1°C. oi 36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°693 Carbon dioxide 16 Oxygen 6°672 Oxygen 15°7 Nitrogen 30°076 Nitrogen 82:7 42-441 100-0 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed : 27°21 Weight of carbon dioxide produced 3412 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 24°81 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed 0-91 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour : 2°09 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal ‘ 0:99 Weight of carbon dioxide pr adneede per Rear 2°62 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal 1°24 Experiment No. 11. March 20th. RABBIT. Weight of animal t De Weight of food, turnips . O*4 Duration of experiment . : Difference between the initial acl final deren 13 hrs., night. ture of the gas of the chamber +0°°5 C. Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber O==0 Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent : Carbon dioxide 07558 Carbon dioxide 1:40 Oxygen 6-810 Oxygen 17:00 Nitrogen 32-592 Nitrogen 81-60 39-960 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed 27°939 Weight of carbon dioxide pr gees. 37°208 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 27°242 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . ; ‘ : : 0-971 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. ; . 27141 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal . : ; 3 0°892 Weight of carbon dioxide produce per Hour : ; 2°862 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal ‘ ‘ : ; , 1-192 Experiment No. 12 April 28th. . RABBIT. Weight of animal . : : - : 3 2*"-00 Weight of food, turnips . ; a a : 012 Duration of experiment . : ; ; 9 ee 45 min., day. Difference between the initial and final tempera- ture of gas in the chamber ; : ; +5° C: Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber . : : +3mmi Composition of gas of chamber at the asia: end of the experiment: per cent: Carbon dioxide 1194 7 Carbon dioxide 2°85 Oxygen 7688 Oxygen 18°39 Nitrogen 32°927 Nitrogen 78°76 41:809 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . : ‘ ; ; 17°535 Weight of carbon dioxide produced ‘ 21°878 Weight of oxygen contained in the Gabon dioxide 15°911 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . : : ; : 0°907 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. ; : 1:807 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal. ; : 0°905 Weight of carbon dioxide preduiceds per inbra 3 : 2°254 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal. , : ; ‘ 1°127 38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF Experiment No. 13. May 2nd. RaBpirt. Weight of animal : Weight of food, turnips . Duration of experiment Difference between the initial and final ai (1891. 1*-8 1 «kil. 13 ul as 45 min., night. ture of the gas of the chamber 0° c Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber —10"™ Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent : Carbon dioxide 0:567 Carbon dioxide 1:40 Oxygen T7479 Oxygen 18°58 Nitrogen 32°228 Nitrogen 80°02 40274 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed 27:°228 Weight of carbon dioxide produced 39°332 Weight of oxygen contained in the car ats onde 28°605 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed 1-050 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour 2°326 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal 1-292 Weight of carbon dioxide een, per Nae 3361 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal 1:867 Experiment No. 14. April 1st. MonkEy, CEBUS CAPUCINUS. Weight of animal 2°**"-00 Weight of food, orange OSLO Duration of experiment . 5 hrs., day. Difference between the initial and hal tempers ture of the gas of the chamber : +0°°5 C Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber +2™™ 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39 Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°855 Carbon dioxide 2°10 Oxygen 8-422 Oxygen 19°80 Nitrogen 33117 Nitrogen 78°10 42°394 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed. : : ‘ er 13°47 Weight of carbon dioxide produced ; : ; 167389 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 11-919 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed. : ; : - 0-884 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour : 2-694 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal : : : : 1347 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour . 3277 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal —. ; : . : 1°638 Experiment No. 10. April 3rd. Monkey, CEBUS CAPUCINUS. Weight of animal . : ; . : : : 1°*"-50 Weight of food, sweet potatoes : 3 : O*"158 Duration of experiment . : : 6 hrs. 20 min., day. Difference between the initial and final tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber : : ; sBa (O Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber . : p : . ee: Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0-418 Carbon dioxide 0-98 Oxygen 8-759 Oxygen 20°61 Nitrogen 33°324 Nitrogen 78°41 42°501 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed. . , : ; 1451 Weight of carbon dioxide produced é : : 1875 40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF | [1891. Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 15°62 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed. R , ‘ : 0°95 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. ; 2°27 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per ie gramme of animal. : : : 151 Weight of carbon dioxide creed) per fae 3 : 2°o7 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal. ‘ : ; : 1:93: Experiment No. 16. May 26th. 2 PIGEONS. Weight of animals .. ? : : : ‘ ; O*"'570 Weight of food, corn : : é : : 0*"180 Duration of experiment . ; : ‘ 13 hrs. 15 min., day. Difference between the initial and final tempera- ture of the gas of the chamber ‘ : : +0°°5 C. Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber. : : : : +19-™™-00: Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°630 Carbon dioxide 1:42 Oxygen 9°447 Oxygen 21°37 Nitrogen 34131 Nitrogen 77-21 44-208 100°00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . : ; , : 26°6804 Weight of carbon dioxide produced : ; : 32°1564 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 23°1592 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed . : ; : : 0-8680 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. , 2°0218 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per ale gramme of animal . ; : ; 3°5470 Weight of carbon dioxide peadaeede per hone é : 2°3471 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal : : : 41178 1891.] Experiment No. 17. Oct. 29th. 2 PIGEONS. Weight of animal Weight of food Duration of experiment Difference between the initial and rang ees ture of the gas of the chamber : Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber ; Composition of gas of chamber at the end of the experiment : Carbon dioxide 0-60 Carbon dioxide Oxygen 8°25 Oxygen Nitrogen 33°62 Nitrogen 42°47 Weight of oxygen consumed Weight of carbon dioxide prdanitede Weight of oxygen contained in the earhon dead Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed Weight of oxygen consumed per hour Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal Weight of carbon dioxide sonedueeals per Rote Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal Experiment No. 18. April 7th. TurtTLE, PsrEupEMys MOBILENSIS. Weight of animal : Weight of food, sweet potato Duration of experiment Difference between the initial and eal, eee ture of the gas of the chamber ; : Difference between the initial and final pressure of the gas of the chamber t NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41 0-*2-567 Q-*2-0 ZA hrs: 0°:0 (Vey) Composition per cent: 1-4 19°5 (BE! 1000 GRAMMES. 26°247 29°459 21°424 16347 Q-*: 1 96 hours. Oa: + 19-22-00 42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1891. Composition of gas of chamber at the Composition end of the experiment : per cent: Carbon dioxide 0°366 Carbon dioxide 0°85 Oxygen 9-623 Oxygen 22°41 Nitrogen 32°954 Nitrogen 76°74 42-943 100-00 GRAMMES. Weight of oxygen consumed . ' ; ; : 8612 Weight of carbon dioxide produced 5 : : 11°541 Weight of oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide 8248 Ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide produced, and the weight of the oxygen consumed. ‘ ; : : 0°957 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour. : : 0-088 Weight of oxygen consumed per hour per kilo- gramme of animal. : ; ; 0051 Weight of carbon dioxide pradieed? per Ree é 0-118 Weight of carbon dioxide produced per hour per kilogramme of animal : , : ; 0-065 ReEsuME OF 13 EXPERIMENTS AS REGARDS THE CONSUMPTION OF OXYGEN AND PRopuCcTION OF CARBON DIOXIDE BY RABBITS. O, consumed O, consumed COz2z, produced CO2, produced Resp. Quot per hour. per hour per per hour. per hour per kil. of animal. kil. of animal. Exp. GRAMMES. GRAMMES. GRAMMES, GRAMMES. No: a: 2°28 0-91 2°82 112 0°89 PORT 2°48 1:03 2°76 MALS, 0°81 cas 1-22 0°53 1-42 0°62 0°84 et 2-00 0-70 2°64 LOL 0°96 ORO: 2°04 0°89 2°55 ded 0°90 ane 2°05 0°82 2°66 1:06 0°95 ele 1:86 0°84 2°33 101 0°87 a P 1°86 0-74 2°32 0°92 0:90 i 2°03 0°96 2°44 1:16 0°87 oan): 2°09 0-99 2°62 1:24 O-91 erdete 2°14 0°89 2°86 1-19 Con a ae 1°80 0°90 2°25 12 by 0°90 eal 2°32 129 3°36 1:86 1:05 Total, 26°17 11°49 33°03 14:57 11:82 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45 26°17 11°49 33°03 Average = =e OiL — (2°88 eS i833 13 iB; 14°57 11°82 - ee ===) () 13 13 It will be observed from the above resumé that the rabbit con- sumes upon the average 2°01 of oxygen per hour and 0-8 of oxygen per hour per kilogramme of body weight and produces 2°°°5 of carbon dioxide per hour and 11 of carbon dioxide per hour per kilogramme of body weight, the respiration quotient or the ratio between the weight of the oxygen contained in the carbon dioxide pro- duced and the weight of the oxygen consumed amounting on the aver- age to0°9. In this connection it may be mentioned that the rabbit con- sumes on the average the same amount of oxygen and produces the same amount of carbon dioxide whether the gas breathed, be the atmosphere as under ordinary circumstances, or pure oxygen as in the case of the animal being placed within the chamber of the respiratory apparatus. As the respiratory process in man does not differ from that of the rabbit, at least in its chemical aspects, there is no reason to suppose that any more oxygen would be consumed by man if breathed alone than when breathed as mixed with nitro- gen as obtains in the breathing of ordinary air. Notwithstanding that the experiments with the rabbits were performed at different seasons of the year, at different hours of the day or night, that food was or was not eaten, that in some instances the animals were more lively and active than in others, in a word, that the conditions in general varied considerably, nevertheless, it will be seen that the respiratory quotient varied but little in the different experiments. It may be mentioned that the respiratory quotient as given by Reg- nault & Reiset, Rauber, Colosanti, Richet, Regnard and others dif- fers but little from that obtained by the authors. Attention is also called to the fact of the consumption of oxygen and production of carbon dioxide being increased by the taking of food—example 6 as compared with example 12 offers the only exception. The ani- mal in the former case, however, weighed more than in the latter. Inasmuch as in their next communication the authors propose to give a detailed account of their observations upon the respiration of monkeys as studied by means of the Voit apparatus, attention is simply called to the fact that the respiratory quotient (Exps. 14, 15) differs but little, if at all, from that of the rabbit. With refer- +4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ence to the experiments with the pigeons (Exps. 16, 17) apart from the fact (of little significance) that one experiment was performed in May and the other in October it should be mentioned that in the first instance the pigeons were fed and were much more active than in the second which accounts for the weight of the oxygen consumed and car- bon dioxide produced being so much greater in the former case than in the latter, the respiratory quotient being 0°8. The apparatus made use of by the authors in the investigations just described is not well adapted to the study of respiration as obtained in the lower verte- brata, reptilia, batrachia and invertebrata. Nevertheless, the re- sults of an experiment (Exp. 18) with a turtle (Pseudemys mobil- ensis) are offered as illustrating how slowly oxygen is consumed and carbon dioxide is produced in such animals, the respiratory quo- tient, however, being the same as in the mammalia. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45 NOTES ON A COLLECTION OF SHELLS FROM SOUTHERN MEXICO. BY FRANK C. BAKER. The following notes are based upon collections made by the Expedition which went from the Academy of Natural Sciences un- der the charge of Prof. Angelo Heilprin in the early part of 1890. The geographical positions of the localities visited are as follows: Silam, situated on the northern coast of Yucatan on the Gulf of Mexico; Progreso, on the northern coast of Yucatan about fifty miles west of Silam; Campeche, on the western coast of Yucatan on the Gulf of Campeche; and Vera Cruz, on the southeastern coast of Mexico on the Gulf of Campeche. All of these localities are situ- ated between the 19th and 22nd degrees of north latitude. Most of the specimens collected were beach shells, although some dredging was done at Progreso, and more or less littoral collecting was done at all the localities visited. At Vera Cruz there is a chain of large coral reefs and islands, and upon these reefs in water from four to twenty feet in depth were found living Purpura haemastoma var. Floridana, Conus mus, Coralliophila abbreviata, Sistrum nodulo- sum, Siphonaria alternata, Arca Noe, Arca imbricata and Triton tri- tonis var. nobilis. A serpuloid reef, Punta Gorda, a few miles north of Vera Cruz was found literally paved with living Purpura haemas- toma var. Floridana associated with Siphonaria alternata. Old logs and pieces of timber along the shore were most always found to be covered with Littorina columellaris, L. ziczac and a few specimens of Purpura haemastoma var. Floridana and Siphonaria alternata. Many interesting species were found in the sea-wrack thrown upon the shore. The outer reefs at Vera Cruz, as for example the Isle la Verde, were found to be very prolific in lamellibranchs, the genera Arca and Lucina being well represented. It will be seen by the following list that many species are reported from localities at a greater or lesser distance south than has previously been reported. Many species hitherto reported from Florida Keys we now know extend as far south as Silam, Campeche or Vera Cruz. The collections from Silam were made by Prof. Angelo Heilprin and Mr. J. E. Ives; those from Progreso by Prof. Heilprin, Messrs. J. E. Ives, Witmer Stone and myself; while the shells from Vera Cruz were collected by Prof. Heilprin and myself. The Campeche collection was purchased. 46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The sequence of families and species is uniform with Dr. Dall’s List of the Marine Mollusks of the S. E. coast of the U. S. PELECYPODA. OSTREIDA. OsTREA CRISTATA Born. Vera Cruz; Progreso. OsTREA FRONS Linné. Vera Cruz. ANOMIIDE. ANOMIA SIMPLEX d’Orb. Progreso; Silam. SPONDYLIDZ. PLICATULA RAMOSA Lam. Progreso; Silam. SPONDYLUS coccINEUS Lam. Vera Cruz. SPONDYLUS LONGITUDINALIS Lam. Vera Cruz. PECTENIDA. PECTEN ORNATUS Lam. Vera Cruz; Campeche. PECTEN MEDIUS Lam. Vera Cruz. PECTEN NUCLEUS Born. Vera Cruz. PECTEN DISLOCATUS Say. Vera Cruz; Campeche. erly locality reported. 10 LIMIDZ. Lima scABRA Born. Vera Cruz. AVICULIDA. AVICULA BREVICAUDA Desh. AVICULA ALA-PERDICIS Reeve. Progreso. PERNA EPHIPPIUM Lam. Vera Cruz. Pinna MURICATA Linné. Progreso. MYTILIDA. MyYTILUS HAMATUS Say. Vera Cruz. Mopr1o.ia TuLipa Linné. Vera Cruz; Progreso. ARCIDZ:. Vera Cruz; Progreso. Most south- Arca Noar Linné. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam. Living in feet of water among the coral. ARCA IMBRICATA Brug. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam. ARCA INCONGRUA Say. Vera Cruz; Campeche. Arca FLoripana Conrad. Vera Cruz. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47 Arca DrsHayestt Hanley. Progreso; Silam. Arca ApAmst Shuttl. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam; Cam- peche, living in coral at Vera Cruz. ARCA GRADATA Brod. Vera Cruz. ARCA sp. noy. Vera Cruz. CARDITIDZ. CARDITA FLORIDANA Conrad. Progreso; Silam. Most south- erly locality reported. Given in Dall’s list as from Tampa to Key West. LUCINIDA. LucINA TIGRINA Linné. Vera Cruz; Silam. LucINA IMBRICATULA Adams. Vera Cruz. Luctya JAMAICENSIS Spengler. Vera Cruz; Silam. Luctna ANTILLARUM Reeve. Progreso. Luctya squamosa Lam. Progreso; Silam. Luctna DENTATA Wood. Progreso. LORIPES EDENTULA Linné. Vera Cruz; Silam. CHAMIDA. CHAMA MACROPHYLLA Chem. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam. CHAMA ARCINELLA Linné. Vera Cruz. CARDIIDA. CaRDIUM MAGNUM Born. Vera Cruz. CARDIUM MURICATUM Linné. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam ; Campeche, most southerly locality reported. CARDIUM SERRATUM Linné. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Campeche. CARDIUM IsOcCARDIA Linné. Silam. VENERIDZ. VENUS MERCENARIA Linné. Silam; Progreso. VENUS MERCENARIA Linné var. Morronr Conrad. Vera Cruz. Most southerly locality yet reported. Dall says: “ Hog Island, Va. to Florida Keys.” The species has not before been reported south of the United States. VeENus Listeri Gray. Vera Cruz. VENUS ROSTRATA Sowb. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. VENUS CANCELLATA Linné. Silam; Progreso. DosrnrA Discus Reeve. Vera Cruz. DosINIA ELEGANS Conrad. Progreso. 48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. CYRENIDA. CyRENA CAROLINENSIS Bose. Vera Cruz. CyrENA FLorrpaANna Conrad. Silam; Progreso. No extreme southern range is given by Dr. Dall; it has been reported from Tampa and West Florida. DONACIDA. DoNAX DENTICULATUS Linné. Vera Cruz. DonaAx VARIABILIS Say. Vera Cruz. Donax FossoR Say. Vera Cruz. IPpHIGENIA BRASILIANA Lam. Vera Cruz. PSAMMOBIIDZ. TAGELUS GIBBUs Spengler. Vera Cruz. ASAPHIS DEFLORATA Linné. Vera Cruz. SANGUINOLARIA ROSEA Lam. Vera Cruz. TELLINIDA. TELLINA FAUSTA Solander. Vera Cruz. TELLINA LINEATA Turton. Silam. TELLINA POLITA Say. Progreso. TELLINA RADIATA Linné. Campeche. Macoma consrrictA Brug. Vera Cruz. LUTRICOLA INTERSTRIATA Say. Silam; Vera Cruz. (= Tellina intastriata Say, Tellina gruneri Phil.) SEMELIDA. SEMELE RETICULATA Gmelin. Vera Cruz. SEMELE ORBICULATA Sowb. Vera Cruz. SEMELE VARIEGATA Lam. Vera Cruz. GNATHODONTIDE. GNATHODON ROSTRATA Petit. Vera Cruz. Has not before been reported so far south. MACTRID. Mactra BrasiniaAna Lam. Progreso. LYONSIIDZ. LyonstA BEANA d’Orb. Progreso. PHOLADIDA. PHOLAS CAMPECHIENSIS Gmelin. Vera Cruz. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49 SCAPHOPODA. DENTALIIDA. DENTALIUM SEMISTRIATUM Guilding. Progreso. ‘CCADULUS CAROLINENSIS Bush. Vera Cruz. GASTROPODA. TORNATINIDA. ToRNATINA CANDEI d’Orb. Silam. BULLIDA. Buia srriata Brug. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. HAMINEA SUCCINEA Conrad. Progreso. SIPHONARIIDZ. SIPHONARIA LINEOLATA d’Orb. Vera Cruz. Found living on coral in 10-20 feet of water. SIPHONARIA ALTERNATA Say. Silam. Most southerly locality reported. Quoted by Dall from Bermuda, East and West Florida and Florida Keys. TEREBRIDA. TEREBRA CINEREA Gmelin. Vera Cruz. TEREBRA PROTEXTA Conrad. Vera Cruz. Most southerly lo- eality reported. CONIDA. Conus PROTEUS Hwass. Vera Cruz; Progreso. Conus Mus Hwass. Vera Cruz; Campeche. Living among the coral in Vera Cruz in 20 feet of water. Conus Peart Green. Silam; Progreso. Conus VERRUCOsUS Hwass. Campeche. PLEUROTOMID#. DRILLIA FUSCESCENS Gray. Vera Cruz; Progreso. DRILLIA coccrnATA Reeve. Silam. DRILLIA LEUCOCYMA Dall. Silam. DRILLIA OSTREARUM Stearns. Progreso. Maneaiura acctncra Mont. Vera Cruz. Manainta pricata C. B. Adams. Silam; Progreso, (= plicosa C. B. Ad.” Dall’s List.) Most southerly locality reported. 50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF f1soue CANCELLARIIDA. CANCELLARIA RETICULATA Linné. Vera Cruz. OLIVIDA. OLIVA LITTERATA Lam. Vera Cruz. Most southerly locality reported. Given in Dall’s list as from Hatteras to Key West. OLIVELLA FLORALIA Duclos. Vera Cruz. OLIVELLA VERREAUXI Duclos. Vera Cruz. OLIVELLA NIVEA Gmelin. Silam; Progreso ; Campeche. OLIVELLA MUTICA Say. Progreso. MARGINELLIDA. MARGINELLA LACTEA Kiener. Verz Cruz; Campeche. MARGINELLA LABIATA Val. Silam; Progreso. MARGINELLA APICINA Menke. Silam; Progreso; Campeche. MARGINELLA GuTraTa Dillw. Progreso; Campeche. MARGINELLA FAUNA Sowb. Progreso. MARGINELLA SUCCINEA Conrad. Progreso. (Young.) MARGINELLA AVENA Val. Campeche. MARGINELLA PALLIDA Don. Campeche. TURBINELLIDZ. TURBINELLA SCOLYMUs Gmelin. Progreso. (young.) MITRIDZ. MiITRA GRANULOSA Lam. Vera Cruz. FASCIOLARIIDA. FascroLaRta TULIPA Linné. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. FascIoLARIA DISTANS Lam. Vera Cruz. FULGUR PERVERSA Linné. Silam ; Progreso. Fuicur pyrum Dillw. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. MELONGENA MELONGENA Linné. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. MELONGENA CORONA Gmelin. Silam; Progreso. LATIRUS CINGULIFERUS Lam. Vera Cruz. Latirus OCELLATUS Gmelin. Progreso. BUCCINIDA. PIsANIA Pusro Linné. Vera Cruz. PISANIA TINCTA Conrad. Vera Cruz. ENGINA TURBINELLA Kiener. Vera Cruz. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51 NASSIDZ. NassAa VIBEX Say. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. Nassa acuta Say. Vera Cruz. COLUMBELLIDZ. CoOLUMBELLA MERCATORIA Lam. Vera Cruz; Silam ; Campeche. CoLUMBELLA OBESA Adams. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. _ CoLUuMBELLA NiITIDA Lam. (= nitidula Sowb.) Vera Cruz; Progreso ; Campeche. CoLUMBELLA CRIBRARIA Lam. Vera Cruz; Campeche. COLUMBELLA CATENATA Sowb. Vera Cruz. CoLUMBELLA IDALINA Duclos. Vera Cruz. CoOLUMBELLA AVARA Say. Silam; Progreso. CoLUMBELLA LIMATA Say. Silam. CoLUMBELLA L&VIGATA Linné. Campeche CoLUMBELLA PULCHELLA Kiener. Campeche. MURICIDA. Murex Sauuteanus A. Adams. Progeso. OcINEBRA CELLULOSA Conrad. Vera Cruz. OciNEBRA EROSUS Brod. Vera Cruz. OcCINEBRA ALVEATUS Kiener. Vera Cruz. UrRosaLpiInx FLorrpana Conrad. Progreso. PURPURA PATULA Linné. Vera Cruz. living. PurRPURA H#MASTOMA Linné var. FLorrDANA Conrad. Vera Cruz. On the reefs at low water in great quantities, PuRPURA H2#MASTOMA Linné var. UNDATA Lam. Vera Cruz. PURPURA DELTOIDEA Lam. Vera Cruz. RictinuLa NopuLosa C. B. Adams. Vera Cruz. Living among coral. RicrInuLA PARVA Reeve. Vera Cruz. CoRALLIOPHILA ABBREVIATA Lam. Vera Cruz. (= galea Chem., plicata Wood.) Found in great quantities on the corals Madrepora prolifera Lam., M. palmata Lam. The young shell is known as C! plicata Wood. SCALIDE. ScALA TENUIS Sowb. Vera Cruz. ScaALA VENOSA Sowb. Vera Cruz. ScaLA CLATHRus Linné. Vera Cruz. ScALA GRADATELLA Morch. Vera Cruz. 52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ScaLa Humpureysit Kiener. (—Sayana Dall) Campeche. Most southerly locality reported. JANTHINIDA. JANTHINA FRAGILIS Lam. Vera Cruz. (communis Lam.) EULIMIDA. Evuima JAMAIcEeNsiIs C, B. Adams. Vera Cruz; Silam. PYRAMIDELLID. PYRAMIDELLA ConIcA ©. B. Adams. Vera Cruz. TRITONIIDA. DisroRrsio CANCELLINUS Lam. Vera Cruz. (—Distortrix re- ticulata Link, of Dall’s list.) TRITON 'rRIToONIS Linné, var. NOBILIS Conrad. Vera Cruz. Liv- ing in 20-30 feet of water. TRITON TUBEROSUS Lam. Vera Cruz. TRITON CHLOROSTOMUS Lam. Vera Cruz. TRITON PILEARE Lam. Vera Cruz. RANELLA AFFINIS Brod. Vera Cruz. CASSIDID&. Cassis TEsTICcULUS Linné. Vera Cruz. Cassis suLcOsA Born, var. INFLATA Shaw. Vera Cruz. DOLIIDA. Douium PERprx Linné. Vera Cruz. PYRULA PAPYRATIA Say. Silam; Progreso. CYPRAIDE. CYPR#A EXANTHEMA Linné. Vera Cruz. CyPR#XA CINEREA Gmelin. Vera Cruz. Cypr2%A spurcA Linné. Vera Cruz. TRIVIA suFFUSA Gray. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Campeche. TRIVIA PEDICULUs Linné. Progreso , Campeche. Erato MAUGERIe Gray. Progreso; Vera Cruz. STROMBIDZA. STROMBUS BITUBERCULATUS Lam. Vera Cruz; Silam. SrromMBus puGtiLis Linné. Vera Cruz. SrrombBus Gicas Linné. Progreso. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53 TRIFORIDA. TRIFORIS DECORATUS ©. B. Ad. Vera Cruz. TRIFORIS TURRISTHOM d’Orb. Vera Cruz. CERITHIOPSIDZ. SRILA TEREBRALIS C. B. Adams. Vera Cruz. CERITHIOPSIS SUBULATA Montg. Vera Cruz. CERITHIOPSIS PUNCTATUM Linné. Progreso. CERITHIIDA. Brrrrum vARium Pfr. Silam; Progreso. CERITHIUM EBURNEUM Brug. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. CERITHIUM LITTERATUM Born. Vera Cruz; Progreso. CERITHIUM FERRUGINEUM Say, var. VERSICOLOR C. B. Adams. Vera Cruz; Silam. CrRITHIDEA IostoMaA Pfr. Progreso; Silam. PLANAXID&. PLANAXIS NUCLEUS Wood. Vera Cruz. PLANAXIS LINEATUS DaCosta. Vera Cruz. MODULIDA. Mopvtvus Fioripanus Conrad. Vera Cruz; Silam. Mopvutts LENTICULARIS Chem. Vera Cruz; Silam ; Progreso. CAECID. C.zcum FLortmpanuM Stimp. Silam. CxcuM NiTrpUM Stimp. Silam; Progreso. VERMETID£. VERMICULARIA SPIRATA Philippi, var. RADICULA Stimp. Silam ; Vera Cruz; Progreso. TURRITELLIDA. TURRIYTELLA VIRIDARIA Dall. Vera Cruz. LITTORINID. Lirrorina ziczac Dillw. Vera Cruz. LirroRINA COLUMELLARIS d’Orb. Vera Cruz. LITIOPID A. LiIvriopA MELANURA C. B. Ad. Silam; Vera Cruz. 54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. SOLARIID-. SoLARIUM GRANULATUM Lam. Vera Cruz. ToRINIA CYLINDRICA Gmelin. Vera Cruz. TORINIA DELPHINULOIDES d’Orb. Vera Cruz. TORINIA BISULCATA d’Orb. Vera Cruz. RISSOIDA. Rissomna CHESNELIT Michaud. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. RIssOINA FENESTRATA Schwartz. Vera Cruz. TRUNCATELLIDZ. TRUNCATELLA CARIBZENSIS Sowb. Silam. CALYPTRAIDEA. CRUCIBULUM VERRUCOsUM Reeve. Progreso. CREPIDULA FORNICATA Linné. Vera Cruz; Progreso ; Silam. CREPIDULA ACULEATA Gmelin. Vera Cruz; Silam; Progreso. Found living among coral at Vera Cruz. CREPIDULA PLANA Say. Progreso. XENOPHORIDA. XENOPHORA CONCHYLIOPHORA Born. Vera Cruz. NATICIDA. NATICA CANRENA Lam. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Campeche. Natica LAcTEA Guilding. _ Vera Cruz. NATICA DUPLICATA Say. (Young) Vera Cruz. NatTicA MAMILLARIS Lam. (=—brunnea Link). Vera Cruz. Living in the sand north of the reefs. SIGARETUS PERSPECTIVUS Say. Progreso. ACM AID. AcM#A CoNnFusA Guilding. Vera Cruz. PHASIANELLIDZ. PHASIANELLA TESSELLATA P. & M. Vera Cruz; Silam. TURBINIDA. AsTRALIuM OLFeERs!I Troschel. Vera Cruz. ASTRALIUM LONGISPINUM Lam. Silam. TROCHIDA. CHLOROSTOMA FASCIATUM Born, Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam. CALLIOSTOMA JUJUBINUM. Gmelin. Vera Cruz. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. NERITIDZ. NERITA FULGURANS Gmelin. Vera Cruz. NERITINA RECLIVATA Say. Vera Cruz. Neritrya viripis Linné, Vera Cruz; Progreso. NERITINA VIRGINEA Linné. Silam. FISSURELLIDZ. GLYPHIS ALTERNATA Say. Vera Cruz; Progreso; Silam. FISSURELLA ROSEA Gmel. Vera Cruz. CEPHALOPODA. SPIRULID A. Sprruta Peroni Lam. Vera Cruz. 56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1ser REMARKS ON THE MURICIDZ WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES. OF SHELLS. BY FRANK C. BAKER. Having recently obtained for my collection several rare species belonging to the Muricids, and having studied their characters. carefully, I take this opportunity of commenting upon them. Murex tribulus Lam. Murex carbonnieri Jousseaume, described in Le Naturaliste No. 44, p. 349 and figured in Nouvelles Archives du Museum, 1882, p. 51, plate 4, figures la, 1b, is a color variety of M. tribulus, character- ized by chestnut dots on the spiral lire. I have in my collection a specimen which corresponds in every respect with Jousseaume’s fig- ures. There are on the body-whorl six principal lire, with fine lines between, all punctate with chestnut; the whorls are distinctly shouldered, and the apex is identical with that of tribulus. In the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences there is a suite of tribulus which shows the gradations from the typical form to the variety carbonniert. I do not consider it distinct even as a variety. Murex haustellum Linné var, longicaudus Baker, I propose the above name for a variety of M. haustellum having an exceedingly long canal and short body-whorl. In the variety the canal is two-thirds the length of the entire shell while in the typical haustellum the canal occupies a half of the length; besides this, the variety is much smaller than the typical form being only 52 mm. in length, while a fair sized typical haustellum is 100 mill. or more. I have seen three specimens of this form one of which is in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences and two are in my own collection. They show little or no variation. They are from the Red Sea. Murex tumulosus Sowerby. This curious form has been considered by Mr. Tryon and other authors to be a synonymy of M. cornutus. Mr. Tryon remarks in his Manual of Conchology, vol. 2, p. 98 “Is M. tumulosus a hybrid?” I have recently obtained a specimen of this species and do not hesitate for a moment in considering it a synonym of M. cornutus: Linné. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. dT There are specimens of cornutus in the collection of the Academy which are almost identical with it. The sculpture, number of varices and whorls are identical in both species. Both have a straight canal differing in this respect from M. brandaris which has a more or less crooked canal. I do not consider twmu/osus a hybrid but a young form of cornutus. The species is well figured in Sowerby’s Thes- aurus Conchyliorum, vol. 4, Murex, plate 18, figure 168. It was de- scribed in Proc. Zoél. Society, 1840, p. 144, and first figured in Sowerby’s Conchological Illustrations, Catalogue of Murex, figure 71. The locality, unfortunately, is unknown. Murex brandaris Linne. M. Locard has described, in Ann. Soc. Linn. Lyons, 1885, p. 219, two species of this group under the names trispinosus and brandari- formis. . The first species, trispinosus, will stand as a good variety but noth- ing more. Brandariformis is founded upon specimens destitute of spines and must become a synonym of brandaris, as I have speci- mens which will at once connect it with the parent form. The vari- ety may be described as follows : M. brandaris L. var. trispinosus Locard. Shell club-shaped as in typical brandaris; whorls 5-6, varices nine, three spines to a varix; one on, one above and one below the periphery ; one row of spines on the canal; color yellowish running into chestnut on the canal and spines and dashed with the same color in many places. Alt. 65 mill., diam. 40 mill. Aperture (excluding canal) alt. 25 mill., diam. 15 mill. The principal difference of this variety from the typical M. brand- aris is in the possession of the three rows of spines, and in its dark chestnut color. This variety has also been named trifariospinosa by Chemnitz whose name should have priority over trispinosus Locard. Ocinebra Pilsbryana Baker. Shell small, fusiform, solid, with about six whorls; spire rather acute, suture scarcely impressed ; sculpture of longitudinal ribs and spiral lire; there are nine longitudinal plicz on the last whorl, some- what strong, rounded, raised into four elongate ridges by the stronger spiral liree. Spiral liree twenty-seven in number, strong, scabrous ; aperture elongate oval, about half the length of the entire shell, outer lip rounded, with seven strong spiral lire within; margin 0 58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. slightly crenulate in some specimens and nearly simple in others ; interior of aperture porcelain-white; columella arcuate, smooth with a slight tendency toward purple in some specimens; canal short, open, reflexed; umbilicus none, but there is a furrow in its place, bounded by a fasciole; color cinereous, overlaid by a reddish-brown epidermis. Alt. 17, diam. 10 mill. Aperture (excluding canal) alt. 7, diam. 4 mill. Habitat, Ceylon. This species has features recalling the genera Trophon, Urosalpina and Sistrum, but its right place in, I think, is in Ocinebra. There is no shell known to me with which to compare it. A distinguishing feature is the strong, scabrous spiral liration, and the absence of any interliral lirulee. Ricinula (Sistrum) rugosoplicata Baker, Shell fusiform, rather solid, with about 5-6 whorls; spire acute, nucleus broken, suture scarcely impressed ; there are twelve longi- tudinal costze on the last whorl crossed by about fifteen alternating stronger and weaker spiral lines, which cut the surface of the shell into large, rough knobs or plications ; aperture elongate oval, con- siderably less than half the length of the entire shell; outer lip rounded, with its edge scalloped by the spiral lirze and with nodules within ; columella arcuate, smooth, with three small tubercles near the anterior canal; canal short, open, rather wide, a little deflected to the left; umbilicus none, but there is a little chink in its place ; color of shell black under a cinereous epidermis. Alt. 12, diam. 5 mill. Aperture (excluding canal) alt. 4, diam. 2 mill. Habitat, Turtle Bay, Lower California. This species is separated from Ricinula ferruginea Reeve, its near- est ally, by the nodules of the !atter species being larger and less numerous. The aperture in ferruginea is much larger and more elongate ; the spire is shorter and the canal more open. The longi- tudinal ribs of ferruginea are seven in number while those of rugoso- plicata are twelve in number; the spiral lirze of ferruginea are more numerous and not so coarse as in rugosoplicata. This pretty little shell was found in a collection recently pur- chased by the Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences from Mr. Henry Hemphill. It is wholly distinct from any species of Ricinula or Sistrum yet described. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59 Concholepas Peruvianus Lam. In the Annales de Malacologie, vol. 2, 1884-86, p. 261, M. Mabille has published a paper entitled “Etude Monographique du Genre Concholepas,’ number of supposed new species of this group. * in which he describes, and in some cases figures, a The species described are as follows : Concholepas similis. This species is an elongate variety of C. Peruvianus, about three- quarters as broad as long, and very scabrous on the outer surface. The tooth is but slightly produced. Concholepas decipiens. This shell is a little more rounded than the typical form with the apex nearer the margin. The surface sculpture is not as strong as in similis. Concholepas granosus. Founded upon specimens with a granose texture. I P g Concholepas densistriatus. Founded upon specimens with dense and squamose sculpture. Concholepas rhombicus, splendens, verrucundus, Patagonicus. These names are founded upon variations of form and sculpture, all of which run into the parent form Peruvianus. On page 280 of the same paper M. Mabille characterizes the genus Charonia, the type and only species being Concholepas Kieneri Gay, a tertiary fossil of Chili. The species, Aveneri, was described by Gay in the Historia de Chile, Zoologia, vol. 8, p. 203, and figured in the large folio atlas accompanying the work, Conchy- liologia, No. 3, fig. 4. The figure differs from the typical Concholepas Peruvianus in having the columellar region free from the spreading callus so characteristic of Peruvianus, and in this respect resembling young forms of the latter species. The columella is much more arcuate than in Perwvianus and the general form of the shell is much like a Purpura. I doubt, however, whether the genus will stand, the differences seeming hardly to be of generic importance. It is a fossil form. Coralliophila galea Chemn. Mr. Tryon, Manual of Conchology, vol. 2, p. 207, makes C. plicata Wood the young of galea. I have before me upwards of seventy specimens of this form from well authenticated West Indian 60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (sous localities and Iam of the opinion that p/icata is a good species. For comparison I have taken two specimens of equal size (30 mill. alt.), and placed the descriptions in parallel columns in order to show to better advantage the principal differences of the two species. C. galea Chem, | Shell rounded, largely umbil- | cate, spire short; whorls four, | apex eroded; sutures distinct but not impressed; sculpture of | heavy, scabrous, spiral lines of which there are twenty-five with | sometimes an intervening one ; there are also nine scarcely vis- | ible, longitudinal folds ; aperture ovate ; outer lip crenulate ; in- ner lip arcuate, smooth ; umbili- cus wide, deep; inner lip fifteen lirate within; aperture pinkish | or yellowish within; shell yel- | lowish-white externally. Alt. | 32, diam. 25 mill. Aperture, © 99 om; alt. diam. 10 mill. C. plicata Wood. Shell more or less cone-shaped, umbilicus nearly closed, spire short ; whorls four, apex eroded ; sutures distinct; sculpture of heavy scabrous, spiral lines, of thick there are 18-20, three of whichare much larger and heavier than the rest which cut the edge of the outer lip into four seal- lops; there are ten longitudinal folds; aperture very elongate ; outer lip crenulate and scalloped by the spiral lire; inner lip slightly arcuate, smooth ; umbil- icus scarcely visible; inner lip very slightly lirate within ; aper- ture very deep purple within sometimes shading to greenish ; shell cinereous, sometimes cov- ered with a green coating with- out. ~ Alt: 28) ‘diam. 17 male Aperture, alt. 20, diam. 9 mill. I have collected plicata in large quantities at Vera Cruz, Mexico, from the coral reefs, and have never seen a galea among them, although special search was carried on for them. I have specimens of both species from the following localities: St. Thomas, W. L; Bahamas; St. Croix; Key West, Fla.; Vera Cruz (plicata only) ; Little Cayman, W. I. (collected by C. J. Maynard). This group of shells is one in which great specific variation is likely to occur, on account of their parasitic habit, and great allowance must be made in their determination from this fact; but the species under consid- eration seem to me to be entirely distinct from one another and, although I have examined over seventy specimens, yet I am not able to place them together. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61 Engina Harveyana Baker. Shell turbinate, solid, straw-colored with a white band just below the periphery. Whorls 4 +, (the tip in the specimen is broken oft) rounded, crossed by longitudinal costz and spiral lire; there are seven large, rounded, strongish longitudinal costs which are crossed by ten strong, rounded spiral lire, with a finer line between ; these spiral lines in crossing the cost cut them into large, quadrate nodules ; aperture very elongate, about half the length of the entire shell; outer lip thickened, with seven denticles upon the inside, the three central ones occupying a small callus in the center of the lip; inner lip provided with three faint tubercles near the lower end, and a single large tubercle near the posterior end of the aper- ture; there is a slight callus over the columella; aperture pinkish within; canal short, open; umbilicus none; tubercles lighter than the ground color; the interlinear lines reddish-brown; there is a light band just below the periphery on the last whorl. Alt. 12, diam. 8 mill. Aperture alt. 6, diam. 2 mill. Habitat, West Coast of Africa. This species is separated from Engina corallina Kiener by the outer lip being more thickened and the three central denticles being placed upon a callus instead of directly upon the outer lip as in the first species. The coloration is entirely different from that of corallina being rosy with black lines over the central tubercles, the tips of the tubercles being straw colored and there is a white band below the periphery. There are longitudinal coste crossed by thirteen spiral lines in corallina. The length of corallina is 20 mill. while that of Harveyana is only 12. This species is named in honor of Prof. F. L. Harvey of Orono, Maine from whom the specimens were received. 62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. AN ATTEMPT TO ILLUSTRATE SOME OF THE PRIMARY LAWS OF ME- CHANICAL EVOLUTION. BY JOHN A. RYDER. The object of the present communication is mainly to exhibit a piece of apparatus intended to illustrate, in a concrete form, the operation of certain physical forces in the production of a body which approximates the form of that of certain free-swimming monads. While the necessity for such experiments has been apparent to me for several years, in order to test certain @ priori conclusions arrived at in the contemplation of the morphological data in our possession in respect to the Protozoa, the difficulty in the way of their trial was the contrivance of the proper kind of apparatus. After a number of fruitless experiments, which it is needless to describe, a very simple form of apparatus was found successful. This device is now described and figured. It serves to show some of the apparent conditions under which a heavy fluid, with a certain specific viscosity or cohesiveness, may, when made to fall through another highly viscous fluid medium, so alter the shape of the former, when in large drops, as to assume somewhat the figure of certain living monadiform organisms. Certain 4 priori reasons had long existed in the writer’s mind to suggest these experiments, and, it may be added, the remarkable experimental results obtained by Plateau, Quincke, Roux, Berthold and Biitschli, in allied fields of inquiry, only served to quicken his interest in what had always seemed worth attempting, but which, for want of the proper means, had hitherto eluded the application of direct experimental verification. The problem may be thus stated: It was assumed that living matter is viscous, and exhibits a less prompt capacity to change its form than water, when in the form of drops. The plasmodia of Myxomycetes, and the behavior of various amceboid forms, illustrate this part of our statement. It was further assumed that the pri- mzeval forms of living things were more or less markedly monadi- form, as is shown by the flagellula stage of Protomyra, as well as the male or primordial condition’ of the germs of the great ma- jority of all multicellular types, and the shapes of the lowest exist- ing forms. Water itself is a fluid body with a certain degree of 1 The origin of sex through cumulative integration, etc. Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., XXVIII, 1890, pp. 109-159. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63 viscosity. We have, then, in the motion of the simplest of organ- isms, the apparent condition of a viscous body, propelled by an energy generated within its own substance, acting as a moving force, and driving it through a less viscous fluid—water. The application of energy, as a moving force to a viscous and fluid body moving through water or other fluid, was the difficulty which was confronted from the first. Even with the precautions which have been taken, it may be that in the present experiment serious defects of method may have been overlooked. However, the way in which the initial moving force was obtained was simply to use the gravity of the heavier body to propel it through the viscous medium, and to watch and see what the result would be. It was assumed that the conditions as subsisting between the lowest living matter and its medium, water, could be in a considerable degree approximated, and it was confidently expected that there would be certain definite changes of figure which could be pre- dicted as following from the inter-action of the motion of large drops of a heavy fluid moving through a viscous medium, both being homogeneous. These expectations were realized, so far as is illustrated by the apparatus here described. The expectation was, reasoning from cause to effect, that drops of the heavier fluid, moving under the influence of gravity, at a certain velocity, through a viscous medium, would be drawn out at least into an oval or oblong figure, such as is met with in certain proto- zoa. The actual experiment, however, showed in addition, that if a heavy fluid, such as mereury, was used, and allowed to drop through a very thick, syrupy solution of silicate of soda or soluble glass, enclosed in a test-tube, the drops of mercury, if large enough to fall with sufficient velocity, were not only elongated in the direction in which they fell, but were also drawn out at the upper pole, or that opposite the direction of motion, so that the whole drop rudely simulated the figure of a monad with a single posterior flagellum or tail. While such an artificial form, produced as the conseyuence of the definite interaction of certain forces, such as resistance, cohesion and friction, generated between two substances of known qualities, cannot, of course, fail to be suggestive, the writer does not mean to imply that the problem of the genesis of the figures or shapes of all monadiform organism is thus solved. It is only in the way of a suggestion toward rendering palpable the action of some of the forces of nature, which have had to do with giving a definite form to some of the lowest and most numerous of 64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. living beings, that the experiment was undertaken. If previous experiments of the writer had utterly failed, there was no reason why, by varying the conditions and means used, that some interest- ing results should not be obtained, as the sequel proves. Berthold has conclusively shown that a mass of plasma, such as is found in an ameeba, would, for physical reasons, tend to be elongated in the direction of its own motion, such as is actually observed to be the case. The experiment with the large drop of mercury falling through a thick solution of soluble glass, shows that if the friction and cohesion incident to its motion be the same on all sides, and sufficiently great, that the whole mass, instead of flattening in one direction and elongating in another, as in the case of an amoeba creeping over a fixed substratum, there is a general elongation in the direction of motion, resulting in the production of an elongated or pyriform body with a short but sharply attenu- ated flagellum or tail. The flagellum seems to be largely, though probably not wholly, the result of friction, since at its apex the mercury is continually being pulled off in the form of almost im- palpably fine globules, so that in this way the large drop may be slowly disintegrated into a vast number of minute metallic globules. That the figures of many of the lower or more or less by such forces as those of cohesion and friction with the circumjacent fluid media in which they live, and by surface- tension, ete., there can scarcely be any doubt. In what ways these forces tend to modify organisms can only be determined by the most laborious and difficult methods of observation and study. Such effects cannot be determined by studying the dead organisms, but must be conducted on the living material, with the help of a great array of comparative measurements taken during active move- ment and rest. The experiment here described, and which is represented on a reduced scale of one-half in the accompanying figure, shows a number of interesting facts. song If the drops are below a S243) certain size they are spherical ; ca a’, if somewhat larger they are flattened in the direction of motion; if still larger, the ganisms are affected drops assume the singular mo- nadiform-shape already des- cribed. With these three forms and sizes of drops or metallic 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65 globules there is associated a progressive acceleration of motion due to the gradually increased gravity of the individual drops, and consequently increased friction and cohesion of the larger surface of the larger drops with the viscous medium through which they fall. If the attempt were made to represent the law according to which the three forms of drops were produced, it would be necessary to determine the weight or mass of each of the three sizes of drops or globules of mercury, and their rate of motion in a given interval of time. The factors of friction and cohesion would be dependent upon the increase in the area of the surfaces of the three grades of drops. The viscosity of the medium would be the same for all three sizes. These data are measurable, and could be expressed in mathematical formule. The writer is aware that this experiment does not account for flagella at both ends of a monad, such as many bacterial forms show; nor does it account for the genesis of cilia or pseudopods all over a Protozoan, or for the cilia on an epithelium lining a cavity, or covering a free surface in one of the higher Metazoa. It is presented only with a view to indicate that experiment in the direction of the artificial simulation of some of the lowest living forms was not without much that is suggestive, even though no definite conclusion could be formulated from such an experiment, except the single one, that the nature, and especially the velocity of the motions of the lowest organisms, through their fluid sur- roundings, has probably had a definite or determinate influence in modifying their shapes so as to develop a major axis. Or where, as in some cases, the body of the monad is attached to the side of a long vibratile flagellum, there is an evident tendency to drag out or lengthen the monad’s body in the direction of motion. The re- semblance of the flagellula stage of Protomyxa to our large arti- ficially-produced monadiform drop of mercury moving in a solution of soluble glass is even more striking. Furthermore, as a matter of fact, we find, as in Paramecium, that a slight spiral torsion of the body causes such a form to rotate while moving in a linear direction, and conformably with its major axis or longest diameter. iy There is, in fact, no evidence to disprove that the major axis of all lower forms, as well as the major axes of higher forms, may not have been at first partly or wholly the result of the direct inter- action of their primitive ancestral types with their surroundings. 66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. In this connection, I may mention the planule of Coelenterata, which are elongated in the direction of their own motions, as well as the gastrule of sponges and the lowest vertebrates, which are similarly extended in the direction of their principal motions. That such tendencies of configuration were thus, in the first instance, directly adaptive or directly acquired, there is the greatest prob- ability. Their subsequent transmission through inheritance by un- equal growth along the major and minor axes is equally probabie, in that the unequal growth may have been in the first place un- equally stimulated along these axes by variation of stress along them, due to the motion of the organism itself. For stress or resistance from without, along the longest axis would be less than in the direction of the minor axis, which would constantly tend to be compressed, as the experiments here described testify. There are even facts which support this conclusion in another way. For example, the wild trout has a sharper head and more slender body than the trout reared in ponds and basins under domestication, and the same rule holds in respect of gold-fishes. The correlation of a sharper head and slenderer body is evidently with greater activity and ease of motion, so that the wild form may be regarded as “clipper-built,” or like the figure of the famous yacht “ Puritan,” as compared with an ordinary fair-sailing sloop. These correlations of figure, with proportional powers of motion, are even more marked amongst the families of fishes themselves. The swiftly- swimming sharks, mackerel and herring are the “ clipper-built” fishes of the seas; while the slow Mola, or sun-fish, typifies the living but helpless “hulk” sometimes run down and killed by actual collision with vessels. It also seems to be a universal law of animal motion, that its direction in free forms is in conformity with the major axis or greatest diameter of an organism, or in the direction of least re- sistance. A cross-section somewhere at right angles to the greatest diameter gives the minor axis. This minor axis interposes the least resistance to motion in a fluid medium. It is also true that the waves of undulatory, vermicular, or vibratory motions always conform in direction to the major axis of an organism. In the simplest form studied by the writer, viz., that occurring in the movements of Trypanosoma Balbiani, the intestinal parasite of the oyster, this undulatory motion is propagated alternately from op- posite ends of the fusiform body of the animal. The result is that 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67 the direction of the motions of the creature are reversed as often as the direction of the vibrations or undulations of the body is re- versed, as must result from the well-known laws of wave-motion. The assumption of the undulatory or vibratory method of loco- motion, according to the laws of wave-motion, as in fishes, entails the necessary conformity of the longest or major axis with the di- rection of motion. No other direction of progressive motion fol- lowing from the undulations of an elongated body is conceivable, as seen in the case of Trypanosoma. The direction of the motions of a vast majority of animals is therefore determined according to the physical laws, the operations of which we have just been tracing, while it has been equally well shown in the experiment presented that an energy, generated within the organisms, and dissipated in the form of motion, must always tend to elongate such an organism moving in a fluid, in conformity with the well-known laws of friction and cohesion, to which a soft, viscous, primitive organism must have been exposed during its motions through such a fluid medium. The energy expended in molar or mass-motion was, therefore, partly dissipated at one time in giving a figure to the organism, as follows from known and empirically demonstrable laws of the motion of viscous bodies in fluids. We may, therefore, literally assert, with Lamarck, that organisms have, through their own motions, tended to shape and modify themselves. And it may be added, there is no evidence at present to show that such laws domi- nating similar forces are not active at the present moment, and that mechanical evolution is now in progress. The Lamarckian and Darwinian hypotheses are therefore reconcilable with the doctrine of the conservation of energy—the so-called Neo-Darwinian doc- trine is not, and is therefore false. The first-named hypotheses thus lend themselves to an explanation of the genesis of variations which the latter does not, since its most strongly-expressed tenet is that acquired characters cannot be inherited. (Acquired only as here supposed, viz., through the expenditure of energy.) Another effect of the undulatory motion of living bodies, along their major axes, is, that if they move freely in a dense medium, such as water, they tend to be flattened, especially at the ends, and at right angles to the plane in which the undulatory or wave- motions of the body are propagated. This is seen first of all in monadiform organisms themselves, and their flagella or propelling organs, which are flattened, as is shown by successful cross-sections 68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. of such minute structures. This lateral flattening, due to lateral undulatory motion, is also illustrated by the Hydrophide amongst snakes, in which their marine swimming habits have developed a vertically-flattened tail in a series of types which are ancestrally allied to land forms amongst the Elapide. It is further illustrated in fishes in which the flattening has expressed itself in the develop- ment of vertical fin-folds and fins. In Sagitta, where the undula- tions of the body are in a vertical plane, and not lateral, as in fishes, the fins are flattened horizontally. The further consequences of this process, under the stress of still further modifying conditions, may be traced in the origin of heterocercy in fishes, as may be illustrated by means of a paper model vibrated from side to side in a dish of water. If the lower caudal lobe is widened, as it probably was by energetic sculling strokes of the tail in struggling to get to the surface, there must result an upward flexure of the axis of the tail, resulting in the morphological complication seen to-day in diverse groups of fishes which have no possible genetic connection with each other, as is proved by the structure of the tails of these several forms. Since there cannot be any possible genetic connection between Selachians and Teleostomes, or of the latter with the sturgeons or Chimeroids, the heterocercal conditions of these forms must have arisen inde- pendently, and as a consequence of the same physical causes acting independently and in the same way for each group.’ The fracture of the caudal rays of the Salmonoids and Clupeoids follows con- formably with the laws of the undulations of the tail in a dense medium. Still other consequences of motion in differentiating structure may be traced, such as the correspondence of the number of muscle- plates with the number of vertical rows of scales, as I have lately found in certain Clupeoids. This is also true of the vertebral column and the vertebral centra, whose biconcave bodies in lower types are a marvellous expedient, rendering continuous growth and concomitant functional activity possible. Their form has not the remotest relation to any arrangement for strength to be compared with the trusses and beams of a system of cantilevers, as absurdly 1 On the Morphology and Evolution of the Tails of Osseous Fishes. Proc, Am. Ass. Ady. of Science, XXXITI, 1884, pp. 532, 533, 2 Proofs of the effects of habitual use in the modification of animal organisms Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., XX VI, 1889. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69 suggested by Prof. Bardeleben.! Notwithstanding their bicon- cavity, the vertebree of the salmon show undoubted evidence of conforming to the shape demanded of them in executing the lateral undulatory movements of the body. In the Cetacea, where these undulations are vertical, the conformation of the caudual vertebrze is precisely the reverse of what it is in the salmon. Farther research will undoubtedly disclose farther evidence of the forward displacement of the vertical and paired fins of fishes. This displacement may, with absolute certainty, be traced to the manner in which the vertical fins exercise their functions in certain instances, as in Mola, for example.’ The continuous tension for- wards on the bases of the dorsal and anal fins, acting like propeller- blades from before backwards, has conspired to produce such a result only too plainly evident in a study of the skeleton. But even this result is to be traced to antecedent modes of motion of the whole body, which were undulatory in character, but which now no longer affect the body itself of this singularly-modified fish. We may, therefore, affirm, that habits, and ultimately functions, have been superposed, leading to the superposition of structures. If this method of procedure is philosophical, the whole fabric of mor- phological method and speculation now rife amongst biologists must be re-cast. For my own part, I have no hesitation in declaring that some of the current methods are destined to end in disappoint- ment. The method is overweighted with morphological details, which have nothing but a morphological significance in the eyes of this newer school of biologists. What such methods may lead to is indicated by papers which have appeared within the year on the origin of vertebrates from crabs and scorpions! No hypothesis of the origin of the limbs yet offered is anything but purely morphological, and by so much is one-sided and defective. None of the hypotheses of the evolution of the limbs link the pal- pable facts of structure with the palpable facts of function, and, above all, with the mechanical and physiological laws, in the widest sense, which that function and structure illustrate. As long as they do nothing more, these hypotheses are a mere conning of data to which no significance can or will be attached by those who ask for more than mere anatomy, except as those data help to illustrate 1 Beitriige zur Anatomie der Wirbelsiule, 4to, Jena, 1874. (Die Wirbelsiule als Fachwerk, pp. 20-27.) 2 The Swimming Habits of the Sun-fish, Science VI, 1885, pp. 103-104. 70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. a philosophy of that science whose barest outlines have scarcely more than been indicated. We may truly say, with Roux, that there is an anatomical discipline of the future which has scarcely yet been developed even in outline. Only here and there has any one been bold enough to declare himself. This new science will not grow as fast as morphology. It will require a different sort of mental equipment than is possessed by the majority of morpholo- gists, most of whom seem to be lost in trivial morphological details, or in framing systems of relations and phylogenies based on purely morphological data, and which are more or less happy and valuable as aids in identifying forms. This newer discipline will demand that a structure be turned over and looked at from every conceiv- able standpoint of conditions which have had to do with its genesis. The method is infinitely slow, because it recognizes the fact that structures, functions and conditions are contemporaneous or super- posed; and to unravel the method of the working of the energy of life as manifested to us in living creatures, through this interwoven trinity of factors, is its object. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. fal NOTE ON THE SOFT PARTS AND DENTITION OF STOMATELLA. BY H. A. PILSBRY. In the course of my study of Stomate//a for the Manual of Concho- logy, I was struck by the apparent diversity of the few animals of differ- ent species described by various observers. It therefore seems de- sirable to describe the only species seen by me in the flesh, and to figure the dentition, heretofore unknown. The specimen (No. 60696 of the alcoholic collection of the Acad- emy) is labelled S. Godeffroyi Dkr., Viti Islands. It seems to be the same as S. Mariei Crosse.’ The foot is broad and fleshy, emarginate behind, the sole divided longitudinally by an impressed median furrow. Its upper surface is granulate and tuberculate. a The muzzle is rather broad, E transversely wrinkled, ending in a fiat, oval oral disk, the mouth in the middle. Tentacles stout but tapering. Eyes on short, Fig. 1. stout peduncles outside and a little above the bases of the tentacles. Epipodial ridge commencing in a short tri- angular lobe behind the right eye-peduncle, the lateral edges of the lobe somewhat up- turned, like a short trough. From this the epipodial ridge is rather fleshy and prom- aaa inent along the sides of the foot, and it bears two slender cirri. It terminates posteriorly at the operculigerous lobe. In the specimen before me there is no operculum, and the edges of the lobe are upturned, probably from contraction in alco- hol. There are two minute frontal lobes between the tentacles, not connected across the “ forehead.” Fig. 3. The gill is single, consisting of numerous (about 130) narrow plates, arranged in one series. Anterior third of the plume free. Anus opens on a short papilla. 1 Vide Manual of Conchology, xii, p. 16. 72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (il s9n2 The radula shows a marked resemblance to the same organ in the Trochide. The rhachidian tooth has a broad body, narrowed above, with a distinct, denticulate cusp. The laterals, five on each side, are of rather complicated form, having supporting-wings on their outer edges, or as Troschel would call them, Stiitzlamelle. They gradually change in form from the oblique shape shown by the in- ner one, to the more upright position of the fifth or outer lateral. Fig. 4. Note here that the outer lateral is of the same size and structure as the inner ones, not enlarged or reduced, or modified in form as in so many Rhipidoglossate mollusks. The inner uncinus has a very broad triangular body; the following ones have the body of the tooth narrower, and in the outer uncini it is still more slender. The cusps of the rhachidian and lateral teeth are denticulate on their edges; those of the inner uncini are smooth, but the outer ones have long serrate cusps. Explanation of figures. Figs. 1, 2, three views of animal, the shell removed from the dor- sal and side views, showing the visceral mass (v. m.), the epipodial ridge (e), ete. Fig. 3 shows the mantle slit open to exhibit the gill (g), anal papilla (@) and left tentacle and eye-peduncle. Also showing the back of the foot (f), with operculigerous lobe (0. /.). Fig. 4, dentition. Formula #—5-1—5-2. “J we) 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. JANUARY 13. Dr. Geo. H. Horn in the chair. Twenty-three persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— On the “ Genus Psilorhinus Ritippell.”” By Witmer Stone. “ Description of a specimen of Chirolophus polyactocephalus from Vancouver Island.” By Ashdown H. Green. “ Geological Researchesin Yucatan.” By Prof. Angelo Heilprin. JANUARY 20. Dr. CHARLES SCHAEFFER in the chair. Thirty persons present. A paper entitled “A Review of the Cretaceous Mammalia” by Henry F. Osborn was presented for publication. An hypothesis as to the Nature and Origin of Germ Force-—Dnr. J. Cueston Morris referred to a communication published by him in the Proceedings of the Academy about thirty years ago in which he called attention to the mode of splitting of egg-albumen i in diluted solution kept at a warm temperature, giving rise to a body like crea- tin and a ferment possessing properties allied to pepsin. Accident, unfortunately, and press of other work, prevented the completion of the quantitative analysis. But now, in connection with the views recently propounded by Dr. McLaughlin (Texas State Med. Soe. Trans. 1890) as to the explanation of the phenomena of immunity from, and prevention of, contagious and infectious diseases by the law of interference, these views might be again referred to, as illus- trations of the splitting of organic molecules and their results. Physical forces are now generally regarded as vibrations or un- dulations produced in matter, but to regard vital force as also vibra- tory is a great step in udvance. Its effects are evolution of form, growth, secretion, excretion, reproduction, maintenance of form with change of material ; its conditions, the presence of liquid plasma, heat, ‘light, oxygen, ‘and a germ, itself the result of union of a germ- cell with a sperm cell. W ‘ithout all these, we have no life-phenom- ena with them they always ensue. Matter in becoming part of a living body continues to possess all the vibrations which give its special character ; the plasma, be it earth or organic matter, retains its chemical properties, but these are modified by other vibrations 74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY. OF [1891. resulting from this special force. If the law of interference explains many of the phenomena of infectious and contagious diseases, and also the action of many drugs (as for instance that of opium inhib- iting or modifying nerve- vibration), no less does that of transfer- ence > explain the origin of the germ. If a cord be stretched between two pillars, and a weight suspended half-way between, and then two other weights similarly suspended half-way between it and the pil- lars, so that motions at right angles may be given to them—e. g. north to south to one, east to west to the other—the central we ight will gradually begin to swing and evolve certain figures and curves due to the impulses tr ansferred from the two outer w eights. So the union of the contents of the germ-cell and sperm-cell results in the formation of a germ which “evolves a form like that of its parents, following their evolution, transmitting in turn its form to its succes- sors, or transmuting it into other forms of motion. Thus all the phenomena of life may be explained on the vibratory hypothesis. Nay, death itself is but the transmutation into other forms of the form so evolved, and becomes as necessary a part of tne whole series of evolutions as birth. The permanence of cicatrices is thus explained. Also the appar- ent intelligence with which, from a common plasma, different plants evolve different principles (according to their special vibrations), or different organs take their special nutriment from one common blood, and, as the nerves for instance, give rise to special vibrations consonant with their special functions. In fact we enter thus upon an entirely new field in biology, physi- ology, pathology and therapeutics. Already the results obtained in the study of variola, syphilis, anthrax, rabies, cholera, and as alleged lately in tuberculosis , may be seen to arrange themselves in accordance with the principles thus enunciated, as foreshadowed by Dr. McLaughlin, and by Dr. Dixon in his communication to this Academy. In reply to a question with regard to suspended animation, con- vulsions, ete., Dr. Morris said that he thought these phenomena were fully in accordance with the vibra atory hypothesis and that the latter also offered the only plausible explanation suggested as yet of the well-known periodicity of life phenomena both in health and disease. JANUARY 27. Dr. Geo. H. Horn in the chair. Thirty-two persons present. The death on the 22nd inst. of Charles Lennig, a member, was announced. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. i) Rate of Coral Growth—Pror. Hrtiprin exhibited a specimen of Porites astreoides from the Caletta Reef, harbor of Vera Cruz, Mexico, which gave some interesting data regarding the rate of growth of coral structures. The specimen in question was received through Captain J. Powell, Chief of Construction of Piers of the Mexican Railway, and is said by that gentleman to have been re- moved from an anchor which was cast in the autumn of 1885 and drawn in November, 1890. The extreme period of growth is thus somewhat over five years, but naturally it is impossible to state how soon after the casting of the anchor attachment of the polyp was made. The coral is a mammillated sheet or crust measuring four inches in longest diameter, and somewhat less than three inches on the shorter diameter. The general thickness of the basal mass is not over 4—+ inch, although through involution and secondary crus- tage knobs of considerable prominence have been added to the sur- face. Assuming the basal growth as the index of actual develop- ment then the annual accretion would be (if we allow full five years for the process) scarcely the ‘5 of an inch. Observations recently made on other species of corals have yielded somewhat similar re- sults. The following were elected members :—Albert P. Brown, M. D., Amos Peaslee Brown, Thomas Hewson Bradford, M. D., Stewardson Brown, Edmund E. Reed Jr., George C. Evans and Mary S. Holmes. The following were ordered to be printed :— 76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. NEW SPECIES OF FUNGI FROM VARIOUS LOCALITIES. BY J. B. ELLIS AND BENJAMIN M. EVERHART. Phyllosticta Lycopodis. Ou leaves of Lycopus Canadensis, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, 727. Spots amphigenous, thin, white, mottled with dirty gray, finally deciduous and often confluent, 1-3 mm. diam. with a definite, narrow, black border. Perithecia epiphyllous, sublentic- ular, black, pierced above, 80-100 ». diam. not numerous. Sporules abundant, hyaline, elliptical, with a nucleus in each end, 23-3 x 13 p. Phyllosticta Petasitidis. On leaves of Petasites palmata, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, 838. Spots orbicular, reddish-brown, sometimes with a whitish center, 3-1 cm. diam. concentrically wrinkled, margin sub- indefinite. Sporules oblong-elliptical, hyaline, 5-8 x 23-3 ». Pos- sibly an imperfectly developed form of Ascochyta microspora Traill., but we see no septum in the sporules. Phyllosticta minutissima. On living leaves of Acer glabrum, Hot Creek Basin, Sioux Co., Nebraska, Aug., 1889. H. J. Webber, 21. Spots amphigenous irregular in outline, suborbicular, 4-9 mm. diam. reddish-brown above with a lighter colored shaded border, paler below. Perithecia hypophyllous, minute (75-85 yv.), globose, numerous, subprominent, filled with minute, subelliptical, hyaline sporules about 13-2 y. long and 3 yw. or less broad. Septoria Ptelee. On leaves of Ptelea trifoliata, Racine, Wis., Oct., 1890. (Davis, 9057). Spots amphigenous, scattered, small, 1-3 mm., irregular in shape, nearly black, definite but without any distinct border. Peri- thecia amphigenous, scattered, minute, (100-150 ».), prominent, papillate. Sporules cylindric-vermiform, nucleate, 1-3-septate, nar- rowed toward one end, hyaline, 35-65 x 3-52 yp. Septoria nubilosa HE, & BE. On leaves of Helenium autumnale, Racine, Wis., October, 1890. (Davis, 9056). Differs from S. Helenii E. & E. (J. M. ILI, 87), in the absence of any definite spots, the minute, epiphyllous, prominent 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77 perithecia being collected in orbicular patches 3-1 em. across and darker than the other parts of the leaf. Sporules 25-30 x 13-2 »., nucleate, narrower at one end. Phyllosticta Staphylee Dearness, On living capsules of Staphylea trifolia, London, Canada, Aug., 1890. Dearness, No. 16. Spots at first wine color, becoming brown, mostly limited when young by a carmine-red line. Perithecia scat- tered, 90-145 y». diam., innate, concolorous with the spot at first, at length darker and finally well marked by a ring of raised, light cuticular cells. Sporules oblong-elliptical, hyaline, becoming pale brown, 6-7 x 27-33 p. Phyllosticta Rhei. On leaves of rhubarb (Rheum Rhaponticum) Newfield, N. J., Sept., 1889, and New Brunswick, N. J., Aug., 1890. (Halsted.) Spots large (1 em. or more), reddish-brown, concentrically zoned. Sporules oblong or clavate-oblong or elliptical, 2-3 nucleate, hya- line, 7-12 x 34-43 ». Some of them slightly constricted in the mid- dle but no septum seen. Phyllosticta Parkinsoniz. On living leaves of Parkinsonia aculeata, San Antonio, Texas, Dec., 1889—Jan., 1890. Dr. B. F.G. Egeling, No121. Spotsamphi- genous, orbicular, minute (1 mm.) nearly black, with a slightly raised border, becoming reddish brown. Perithecia innate only slightly prominent, depressed-globose, dark, 80-100 ».diam. Sporules ellip- tical or oblong-elliptical hyaline, 4-6 x 2 yp. Phyllosticta Sophore. On living leaves of Sophora speciosa, San Antonio, Texas, Dec., 1889. Dr. B. F.G. Egeling. Spots amphigenous, small (about 1mm), round, concave on both sides of the leaf, with a narrow raised border, nearly black, becoming reddish-brown, leaf not discolored around them. Perithecia innate, mostly only one on a spot parti- ally erumpent, globose, 100-150 y. filled with a mass of minute (1 —23+ x } w.) sporules. Cornularia ulmicola. On outer dead bark of Elm, London, Canada, Dec., 1889. J. Dearness, 1248. Perithecia clavate-cylindrical, black, 3-1 mm. high and about 74 v. thick below, enlarged above and 100 v. thick but acute at the apex, of fibrous texture, the fibres separating above 78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. into a dense brush-like head. Sporules enclosed in the swollen head, slender fusoid, pale yellowish, multinucleate becoming multiseptate, 70-80 x 3 »., ends attenuated and mostly curved in opposite direc- tions, borne on filiform basidia about 35 y. long. Closely allied to C. hispidula Ell. but ditfers in its smooth stem with swollen head and rather longer and narrower sporules. Sphaeronema sphaeropsoideum. On dead limbs of Fraxinus, London, Canada, Feb., 1889. J. Dearness, 1467. Perithecia scattered, conical, + mm. diam., sunk in the surface of the inner bark and erumpent through the ruptured epidermis, with a subulate slender beak 3-1 mm. long crowned with a whitish globule of ejected sporules which are oblong, hyaline, 12— 20 x 6-8 »., on basidia about as long as the sporules and 23-3 p. thick. Among the basidia are numerous slender threads (sterile basidia) ? like paraphyses overtopping the sporules. Schizothyrella Hippocastani. On bark of dead Aesculus Hippocastanum, London, Canada, March, 1890. J. Dearness, 1571. Perithecia subseriately-erumpent, super- ficial, black, globose-tuberculiform, subconfluent or single, when perfect more or less distinctly quadrisuleate. Sporules fasciculate, 75-80 ». long, separating above into cylindrical, hyaline, truncate joints 8-10 x 13. The lower part may be considered as a basidium and is of a brownish color. Haplosporella seriata E. & E. On bark of Sambucus, London, Canada, May, 1890. Dearness, 1661. Perithecia connate, forming a narrow oblong stroma 2 or more mm. long and 1-2 mm. wide, erumpent through the ruptured epidermis, often more or less continuously confluent in narrow strips for several cm. in length. Sporules brown, continuous, 20-25 x 10—- 192 jam Vermicularia Veratrina. On half dead leaves of Veratrum viride, Wilmington, Del., June, 1890. Commons, 1458. Perithecia irregularly scattered, small (75 vw. diam.), mostly imperfect above, clothed around the sides with black, erect bristles 70-150 x 4-5 ». Sporules fusoid-cylindrical, nucleate, slightly curved at each end, 15-22 x 23-3 ». The leaves are soon blackened and killed. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79 Sphaeropsis ulmicola. On dead elm branches, London, Canada, Apr., 1890. Dearness, 1581 (b). Perithecia scattered, minute ({-} mm.), white inside, covered by the epidermis which is raised into little pustules but mostly not ruptured. Sporules, yellowish-brown, elliptical or obovate, 20-30 x 12-15 ». on stout basidia rather shorter than the sporules. S. ulmi 8. & R. has sporules 60-70 y. long. Diplodia papillosa. On bark of dead Cornus, London, Canada, Feb., 1890. J. Dear- ness. Perithecia scattered, buried in the bark which is raised into minute papillae over them, minute (i-} mm.). Sporules oblong- elliptical, greenish-yellow, 1-septate and slightly constricted, 12-15 x 6-7 ». Apparently the stylosporous stage of Didymella Corni (Sow.), which is found with it. D. mamillana Fr. has larger brown spores. Diplodia Linderae. On dead limbs of Lindera Benzoin, Newfield, N. J. and London, Canada. Perithecia scattered, covered by the epidermis or partially erumpent, small, sporules oblong-elliptical, brown, 1-septate and con- stricted, 10-12 x 3-4 ». Possibly not distinct from D. Harknessii, Cke. Diplodia Dearnessii. On dead decorticated stem of wild currant, London, Canada, Feb., 1890. -Perithecia erumpent-superficial, scattered, minute (3 mm.), subglobose, sporules narrew-elliptical, brown, 1-septate, 8-10 x 33-4 ». Differs from D. ribicola C. & E. (Grev. V., p. 55) in its much smaller sporules. D. ribicola C. & E. takes precedence of D. Ribis Sace. which appears to be the same. Leptostromella elastica. On leaves of Ficus elastica in a green-house at Knoxville, Tenn., Jan., 1890. Prof. F. L. Scribner. Spots large, dull white, darker around the margin with a reddish-purple border. Perithecia epi- phyllous, hysteriiform, -{? mm. in the longer diam. opening by a longitudinal cleft along the middle. Sporules oblong, hyaline, 2-3 nucleate, 12-15 x 4-5 y., on stout, olivaceous basidia 12-15 x 3-4 wv. Probably the spermogonial stage of some Lophodermium. Septoria gummigena. On the hardened gum of cherry trees, Wilmington, Del., Dec. 3, 1889. A. Commons, 1105. Perithecia gregarious, black, subovate, 80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. soon broadly pierced above, about } mm. diam. Sporules filiform, continuous, 30-40 x 1-1} p. Septoria dolichospora. On leaves of Solidago latifolia, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. Dearness, 835. Renders the leaf bullate-rugose with numerous small swellings, convex above and concave below, 1-2 mm. diam. These become white above, generally several contiguous ones becom- ing confluent so as to form a dirty white spot of irregular outline above and of a dark, dirty brown below, the white color spreading finally more or less and appearing also here and there below. Per- ithecia epiphyllous, scattered quite abundantly on the white places, 75-100 ». diam. Sporules 70-110 x 13 y., continuous and not dis- tinctly nucleate, hyaline. Differs from S. solidaginicola, Pk. in the bullate-rugose leaf, more abundant and larger perithecia and much longer sporules. Septoria carnea. On partly dead leaves of Carex, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, 805. Perithecia hypophyllous, flesh colored, collapsed when dry, seriate between the nerves of the leaf and forming elon- gated patches, 1-3 em. long and 2-4 mm. wide. Sporules fusoid, slightly curved, nucleate, acute at the apex, fasciculate, 20-30 x 14 p. hyaline. Septoria Erechtitis. On living leaves of Erechtites hieracifolia, Wilmington, Del., Aug., 1890. Commons, 1536. Spots light-brown, numerous, sub- orbicular or elliptical, or subangular and partly limited by the vein- lets. Perithecia numerous epiphyllous, small, black, erumpent, sub- globose, pierced above. Sporules, 20-30 x 12 »., with several nuclei, nearly straight or rather abruptly bent near the middle. Septoria Canadensis Ell. & Davis. On Solidago Canadensis, Racine, Wis., May, 1886. Spots amphi- genous, suborbicular, 2-3 mm. diam., rusty-brown becoming paler in the center and surrounded by a shaded purplish border. Peri- thecia minute and inconspicuous, amphigenous but mostly epiphyl- lous. Sporules vermiform-cylindrical, 33-45 x 13-2 »., nucleate, becoming faintly about 5-septate. In the fresh specimens the septa do not appear, but finally a faint division of the contents of the spore may be discerned. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81 Septoria albicans. On leaves of Saxifraga Pennsylvanica, Genoa Junction, Wis., May, 1890. Dr. J. J. Davis, 9022. Spots orbicular, chestnut-brown, sub- indefinite, 2-4 mm. diam. slightly depressed above and prominent below. Perithecia very minute, 40-50 . diam. epiphyllous, crowded in the center of the spots. Sporules filiform, 50-75 x 13 v., faintly nucleate, hyaline, nearly straight, oozing out and whitening the upper surface of the spots. S. Saxifraga Pass. agrees with this in the character of the spots but is said to have the sporules 17-30 x 3 ».—much shorter and thicker than in the Wisconsin specimens. Phleospora reticulata. On Lathyrus palustris, London, Canada, Aug., 1890. J. Dear- ness, 156. Spots subquadrate, about 1 mm. diam., mostly marginal, white with a narrow black margin, numerous and confluent in one large, oblong spot 1-2 x + cm., the whole surrounded by a shaded dark margin. The large spot has a checkered or recticulated look on account of the narrow black lines surrounding the smaller component spots. Sporules linear, 100-160 x 33-4 w., attenuated towards the ends, 3-6-septate (or more), often constricted at the septa. Perithecia very imperfectly developed, consisting merely of the more or less blackened cells of the surrounding parenchyma. The sporules are abundant and soon erumpent in short, thick, pale, flesh-colored cirrhi. Stagonospora Petasitidis. On living leaves of Petasites palmata, London, Canada, July, 1890. J. Dearness, 1767. Perithecia epiphyllous, scattered hemis- pherical, black, coarsely cellular, smooth, broadly perforated above, about }mm.diam. Sporules clavate-cylindrical, nucleate, becom- ing 3-4-septate, 55-70 x 5-64 y. hyaline. Stagonospora Cyperi Ell. & Tracy. On culms of Cyperus cylindricus, Starkville, Miss., July, 1890. Tracy, 1559. Perithecia minute, globose, crowded, forming pustu- liform groups 1 mm. or more in diam. beneath the cuticle which be- comes brown above them and finally splits open, exposing the tobacco-brown perithecia. Sporules fusoid, hyaline, 12-16 x 23- 3 y., 2-3-nucleate. 82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Stagonospora Trifolii. On living leaves of Trifolium repens, London, Canada, Aug., 1890. Dearness, 262. On dark brown spots (becoming paler), of consid- erable size and more or less limited by the veinlets of the leaf. Peri- thecia innate, subprominent above, pale. Sporules cylindrical, 2— 4-nucleate, 12—20 x 3-4 »., hyaline. Coryneum Paspali. On dead culms of Paspalum platycaule, St. Martinsville, La., Dec., 1859. Langlois, 2239. Acervuli scattered, erumpent, black, 3 mm. diam. Spores oblong cylindrical, brown, 6-9-septate, 50-60 x 10— 12 »., on short basidia. Gleosporium Carye Pll. & Dearness, On leaves of Carya alba, London, Canada, Sept., 1890. Dear- ness, 319. Spots suborbicular, reddish-brown above, darker below, 1-2 cm. in diam. or by confluence more, subindefinitely margined. Aceryuli hypophyllous, numerous, small, 75-150 y. superficial, brown. Spores allantoid, hyaline, continuous, 7-10 x 13-2 yp. Gleosporium Celtidis. On leaves of Celtis occidentalis, London, Canada, Sept., 1890. J. Dearness. Spots mostly marginal, more or less continuous along the edge of the leaf, sometimes occupying and killing half the upper part of the leaf and eventually the entire leaf, the dead areas turn- ing dirty brown and being definitely limited by a darker, narrow border, beyond which the leaf often turns yellowish. Acervuli numerous, about 200 v.diam. Spores fusoid-oblong or ovate-oblong, continuous, 10-12 x 4-5 y., hyaline, mostly erumpent below in small orange-colored heaps. Gleosporium lunatum. On large (1-3 em.) orbicular dead spots on living leaves of Opuntia, with Sphaerella Opuntiae E. & E., San Antonio, Texas, Jan., 1889. Dr. B. F. Egeling. Acervuli erumpent, flesh color, numerous. Spores lunate-fusoid, 12-20 x 2-3 y., mostly a little thicker at one end. Differs from G. Opuntiae E. & E. in its maculi- colous growth and lunate spores. Gleosporium saccharinum. On leaves of Acer saccharinum, Racine, Wis., June, 1889. Dr. J. J. Davis, 1189. Killing the margin and upper part of the leaves which become brown and dry and are finally entirely destroyed. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83 Acervuli minute, abundant not readily seen. Spores oblong-fusoid, 6-7 x 14-3 p., hyaline, continuous. Gleosporium Canadense. J. M. V., p. 153. Dr. Davis sends from Wisconsin a variety of this on leaves of Quercus alba having the spots larger (1 em. and over), of a brighter color and sometimes confluent over a large part ofthe leaf. The spores are about the same as in the Canada spec- imens. Gleosporium ovalisporum. On leaves of Prunus serotinas, London, Canada, May, 1890. Dearness, 1714. Arcervuli minnte, thickly scattered over large dead areas of the leaf which becomes of an ashy-brown, erumpent on both surfaces of the leaf. Spores ovate or lemon-shaped with a slight apiculus at one end, 6-10 x 5-7 ». Affects the leaves in the same way as G. aridum, E. & H. Cylindrosporium Ziziae. On living leaves of Fizia cordata. Racine, Wis., June, 1890. Davis, 9016. Spots amphigenous, subangular, mostly subelongated, small, 1-14 x 2-3 mm., blackish, limited by the veinlets. Acer- vuli numerous, crowded, small, dark. Spores cylindrical-vermiform, 40-60 x 5-6 p., nucleate, becoming 3—6-septate, slightly curved, erumpent in white cirrhi more abundantly on the lower surface of the leaf. . Cylindrosporium Dearnessii. On leaves of Curpinus Americana, London, Canada, June, 1890. Dearness, 1727. Spots reddish-brown, orbicular, 2-3 mm. diam., the margin a little darker. Acervuli few, crowded in the center of the spots, 100-120 ». diam. Spores cylindrical, granular, becoming 3-or more-septate, often curved into a semicircle, 35-40 x 23-3 v., erumpent on both sides of the leaf but especially above, forming a loose, white flocculent mass. Cylindrosporium Cicute. On living leaves of Cicuta maculata, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, 567. Spots dirty brown, amphigenous 1-2 mm. diam. suborbicular, partly limited by the veinlets. Acervuli minute, 1n- nate, 70-80 », diam., scarcely visible. Conidia 20-30 x 12 y. (ex- ceptionally 35 . long), nucleate, nearly straight, thicker at one end, greenish-hyaline, erumpent mostly on the upper side of the leaf in $4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. minute, white cirrhi. This is quite distinct from Septoria Sii, Desm. which has distinct perithecia and longer sporules. Cylindrosporium Ceanothi. On leaves of Ceanothus thyrsiflorus, Santa Cruz Mts. near Fulton, Cala., Aug., 1888. Prof. LL.M. Underwood. Amphigenous. Acer- vuli large, on small (1-2 mm.), blackish-brown spots which are thickly scattered over the leaves and more or less confluent, paler beneath. Spores vermiform, more or less curved, 1-3-septate, 35-45 x 4 v., issuing in compact flesh-colored cirrhi. Marsonia nigricans. On leaves of Salix, London, Canada, Sept., 1890. Dearness, 308. Spots amphigenous, nearly black above, becoming more or less whitish, reddish-brown below, indefinitely limited and more or less confluent or sometimes definitely limited, especially above, and mar- gined by a narrow, yellow shaded border. Spots, when not con- fluent, about 3 em.diam. Acervuli 100-125 v. diam., dark-colored, not numerous. Spores clavate-ovate, curved, acute below, with a single septum near the lower end, 14-16 x 6 y., erumpent on the lower surface of the leaf. M. Populi is epiphyllous and has larger spores. Marsonia apicalis. On living leaves of Salix lucida, Racine, Wis., July, 1890. Davis, 9012. Occupying the apex of the leaf which soon becomes brown, dry and dead. Acervuli, minute, numerous. Spores oblong or oblong-cylindrical, hyaline, 1-septate, 12-20 x 5-6 v., one end often a dittle narrower, erumpent mostly on the lower surface of the leaf in minute white heaps. Ramularia Canadensis On living leaves of Carex conoidea, London, Canada, Aug., 1890. Dearness, No. 22. Spots black, elliptical, 1-2 mm. long or by con- fluence 3-1 em. becoming white in the center. Hyphae subulate, hyaline, continuous, 30-40 x 38-4 v., arising from the white center of the spots and bearing at their tips oblong 1-septate, nucleate, 2—3- concatenate, hyaline conidia, 15-22 x 5-6 p. This can hardly be referred to Septocylindrium on account of its well developed fertile hyphae (basidia). It bears considerable resemblance to Septocylindrium caricinum Sacc., but differs in its subulate basidia and broader, 1-septate conidia. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. (0 2) Oo Ramularia stolonifera. On leaves of Cornus stolonifera, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, 707. Hypophyllous on small, pale-reddish, subindefinite spots which are rather more distinct above. Hyphae subfasciculate, hyaline, simple or sparingly branched, 20-40 x 3-4 v., continuous, obtuse and denticulate above. Conidia cylindrical, obtusely pointed, catenulate (2-3), 10-80 x 2-3 y. R. angustissima Sace. (on Cornus sanguinea) is said to have the hyphae 10-40 x 1-13 »., and conidia 10-12 x 1-14». Ours may be only a more robust form. Ramularia arnicalis. On Arnica cordifolia, Rimini, Montana, June, 1889. Rev. F. D. Kelsey, No. 88. Spots amphigenous, 3-4 mm. diam. suborbicular or partly limited by the veinlets, dark dirty-brown above, with a lighter, subindefinite, yellowish border, dull white below. Hyphae hypophyllous, subfasciculate, 12-20 x 23-3 »., slightly toothed above. Conidia subcylindrical, 15-20 x 3 »., nucleate, acute at the ends and the upper end mostly slightly curved. Ramularia repens. On leaves of Aralia racemosa, London, Canada, Sept., 1889. J. Dearness, Nos. 876 and 877. Hypophyllous. Hyphae subfas- ciculate 12-20 x 3 v., subdenticulate above, arising from creeping, branched sterile threads. Conidia cylindrical, nucleate and granular 15-22 x 3-4 ., some of them uniseptateand constricted, subcatenulate in series of 2-3, the upper one sometimes bearing 2-5 conidia stand- ing in a digitate manner on the apex. The fungus forms small cinereous white patches 2-4 mm. diam. either indefinitely limited or partly bounded by the veinlets. Ramularia Dioscoreae. On leaves of Dioscorea villosa, Racine, Wis., Aug., 1889. Dr. J. J. Davis, No. 189. Hypophyllous in small, whitish patches, thickly scattered over the entire surface of the leaf which is faintly mottled with yellow above. Fertile hyphae erect 25-35 x 4 ». mostly toothed above. Conidia oblong-cylindrical, obtuse, 1-septate, 15— 25 x 33-44 ». The hairs of the leaf are surrounded by the fungus which gives them a whitish incrusted appearance. This is very different from Cercospora Dioscoreae E. & M. 86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Ramularia lethalis. On leaves of Acer rubrum, London, Canada, June, 1890. J. Dearness, 1730. Spots irregular, subconfluent, 3-6 mm. across, black-brown, extending over and killing the leaves. Hyphae hy- pophyllous, slender, 12-15 x 27, Conidia elliptical to oblong, 5— 12 x 24-34 »., the longer ones 1-septate, the shorter ones contin- uous. Peronospora Impatientis. On leaves of Impatiens fulva, Wilmington, Del., Apr., 1889. A. Commons, 1373. Forming small, loose tufts becoming more or less confluent, at length in an almost continuous thin white coat on the lower surface of the leaves. Conidial hyphae bare for 200-800 vy. below and 8-10». thick and continuous, above this sending out about 3 alternate branches nearly at a right angle, each of these branches generally trifidly divided, each division bearing at its ex- tremity about 3 straight spreading spicules bearing the globose 12— 14 y. or elliptical 15-17 x 12-14 ». conidia. Oospores not seen. Titea Clarkei. Parasitic on Dichaena strumosa, on Quercus ilicifolia, Vineland, N. J., Apr., 1888. Miss C. H. Clarke. Forming punctiform or elongated (3-1 mm.), white appressed tufts of closely aggregated, hyaline, quadrilocular conidia which are made up of two vertical cells the upper one of which is globose or slightly elliptical, 7-9 yp. diam. and the lower one subovate and smaller but bearing on each of the two opposite sides a slightly curved or nearly straight spread- ing arm 40-45 ». long with two constrictions near the base where it is about 4 ». thick, and gradually attenuated above to a slender bristle-like tip. Occasionally there are three of these arms. The conidia are borne on pedicels 15-25 x 3 ». 4-5 times constricted and arising from a cellular stratum. This appears referable to Saccardo’s genus Tita, from the single described species of which it differs in the constricted arms and pedicel which give it a very ornate appearance. The species is dedicated to its discoverer Miss C. H. Clarke whose name is already familiar to the students of mycology. Rhinotrichum muricatum. On decaying bark, Adirondack Mts., 1887. Dr. Geo. A. Rex. Appears like a thin clay-colored or grayish tomentose coating on the matrix, effused and continuous for several cm. Prostrate 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87 hyphae brown, sparingly septate, branched, sending up an abun- dance of erect straight roughened branches 100-125 ». long and 10— 12 ». thick, and mostly attenuated gradually above, bearing on all sides the subelliptical, ferruginous-brown conidia which are often a little bulging on one side and are about 7x 3y. The erect fertile branches appear as if coated with coarse sand. Zygodesmus tuberculosus. On decaying roots in swampy woods, Newfield, N. J., Oct., 1889. Hyphae, hyaline, about 19 ». diam. repeatedly branched above, septate, branches erect, terminal divisions obtuse, 10-12 y». diam. with 2-4 sporophores 12-16 x 3 »., bearing the oblong hyaline 15— 20 x 5-6 p. conidia. The hyphae are collected in small (2-1 mm.) tubercular tufts closely crowded or subconfluent forming a dull white nearly continuous stratum resembling a tubercular Corticium. Zygodesmus limoniisporus. On rotten maple, London, Canada, Oct., 1889. Dearness, 957. Forms a thin drab-yellow stratum on the wood. Hyphae coarse (6-8 ». diam.) subhyaline septate, the extremities much branched and assurgent, forming the thick (20-25 x 10 ».) basidia which are somewhat swollen and obtuse above with 4 stout spicules bearing the lemon-shaped, yellowish-hyaline briefly pedicellate conidia, 7-9 xeay (0 Coniosporium subgranulosum. On decorticated poplar, Sand Coulee, Cascade Co., Montana., Oct., 1889. EF. W. Anderson, 646. Forming small black, gregarious, pulvinate sori composed of slightly adherent subglobose, granular- roughened, brown conidia 4-5 ». diam. Occasionally two conidia are connate so as to appear I-septate. Approaches Torula. Fusicladium Angelice. On living leaves of Angelica atropurpurea, Racine, Wis., Sept., 1890. Davis, 9035. Hyphae hypophyllous, continous, brown, sub- undulate, 40-50 x 5-6 v., toothed above, seated on a sphaeriaeform, sclerotoid base, finally deciduous leaving the black sclerotoid base exposed and resembling the perithecia of a Sphaerella. Conidia terminal, clavate 1-septate, hyaline, 30-40 x 8-10 ». Clasterisporium dothideoides. On dead twigs and stems of Shepherdia argentea and Artemisia cana. Valley of the Teton in Northern Montana, July, 1889. F. 88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. W. Anderson 540 and 554. Bursting through cracks in the bark in small (+ mm.) compact, black tufts which bear some resemblance to an erumpent Dothidea. Conidia ovate-oblong or oblong-cylin- drical 3-septate, yellow-brown, mostly a little curved, 25-40 x 12- 15 v., rounded at the ends and borne on hyaline, simple or imper- fectly branched basidia (fertile hyphze) 20-30 x 5-7 p. Cercospora Kalmie. On living leaves of Kalmia latifolia, Newfield, N.J., Jan. 1, 1890. Spots amphigenous orbicular, dark brown, about 2 em. diam. or by confluence much larger, with a narrow yellowish (not raised) border, concentrically wrinkled. Tufts of hyphae epiphyllous sphaeriae- form, scattered, black, consisting of a tubercular base about 100 yp. diam. from which arise in a dense, spreading fascicle the smoky hya- line, closely undulate, continuous or faintly septate, 70-80 x 33-4 y. hyphae, slightly toothed above and bearing the obclavate, hyaline, faintly 5-d-septate, slightly curved conidia. This is quite different from C. sparsa Cke. which is hypophyllous and not on any definite spots. Cercospora pachyspora. On leaves of Alisma Plantago and Peltandra Virginica, Wilming- ton, Del., Oct., 1889. A. Commons, 1013, 1014. Spots amphige- nous, large (1-2 em.), cinereous, often elongated or marginal, limi- ted by a narrow purplish border. Hyphae in dense tufts, nearly hyaline, continuous, undulate, entire or sparingly toothed above, 60-75 x 4-5 »., lead colored. Conidia oblong, 3-septate, 35-50 x 8-10 yv., or elongated, obclavate, 5-7 v., septate, 60-80 x 8-10 y. This is very distinct from C. Alismatis Ell. & Holw. or C. Callae or C. Nymphaeacea C. & E., though all these have the lead colored hyphae. Cercospora caespitosa. On living leaves of Eustachys petraeaand Chloris Swartziana, Ocean Springs, Miss., Sept., 1889. Prof. S. M. Tracy, No. 1215. Mostly hypophyllous, forming scattered, brownish-black tufts }—} mm. diam. — and much resembling the minute sori of some Puccinia. Hyphae densely tufted, deep brown, 3—5-septate, closely undulate and genic- ulate above, 70-100 x 4 ». Conidia cylindrical-fusoid, slightly curved, hyaline 20-35 x 3-32 ». C. striaeformis Winter, to which this must be closely allied, grows in elongated tufts and has the conidia more slender. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. &9 Cercospora Davisii. On leaves of Melilotus alba, Racine, Wis., July, 1889. Dr. J. J. Davis, 1089. Spots amphigenous, dark brown, suborbicular, }—3 em. diam., margin subindefinite. Hyphae amphigenous, cespitose, pale brown, geniculate or shouldered and crooked, more or less sep- tate, 40-50 x 5. Conidia very variable, oblong-cylindrical to obclavate, 20-80 x 4-5 ». multinucleate, becoming 5—6—or more sep- tate, hyaline. Different from C. Meliloti Ouds. as decided by Oude- mans himself to whom we have sent specimens. Cercospora Houstonie. On the lower leaves of Houstonia cerulea, Wilmington, Del., April, 1890. Commons, 1371. Hyphae 20-30 x 3-4 »., continu- ous, brownish, scarcely toothed, subundulate, rising from a minute tubercular base and forming minute, scattered tufts on the upper surface of the leaves. Conidia subhyaline, lanceolate, 50-40 x 5 p. granular and nucleolate, becoming 1—3—septate. Cercospora Osmorrhize. On Osmorrhiza longistylis, Newark, Del., May, 1890. Commons, 1416. Racine, Wis. Davis 9031. Spots amphigenous, grayish- black, 2-3 mm. diam. situated on dead areas of the leaf, indefinitely limited. Hyphae loosely fasciculate, 60-70 x 3 ». sparingly septate, subolivaceous, shouldered and toothed above, few in a fascicle. Con- idia slender multiseptate, hyaline, 80-120 x 3-4 p. Cercospora Acnide. On Aenida cannabina, Wilmington, Del., Sept., 1889. A. Commons, 1011. Spots amphigenous, suborbicular, 1-5 mm. diam. dirty white, margin dark. Hyphae amphigenous, brownish, contin- uous, geniculate and more or less toothed above, 55-50 x 35-43 yp. Conidia obclavate, hyaline, 5—5-septate, 60-75 x 3-34 y. Cercospora Negundinis. On leaves of Negundo aceroides, Lincoln, Nebraska, Aug., 1889. Roscoe Pound, No. 37. Spots amphigenous 1—3 em. diam., rusty brown, lighter in the center, subindefinite, mottled with small white spots or specks. Hyphae epiphyllous, tufted on a tubercular base, straight, continuous, nearly hyaline, obtuse and slightly toothed _above, 25-30 x 5-7 ». Conidia obclavate 2—4-septate, hyaline, 90- 110 x 5-6 ». Quite different (according to spec. from de Thumen) from C. acerina Hartig. ‘ 90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Cercospora Senecionis. On leaves of Senecio aureus, Wilmington, Del., Aug., 1889. A Commons, No. 978. Spots amphigenous, suborbicular, 1-3 mm. diam. subconfluent, rusty brown at first and surrounded by a dark purplish discoloration, then grayish-white. Hyphae fasciculate, scattered, erect, brown, 3—4-septate, subgeniculate above, 100-150 x 4—5 ». Conidiasubcylindrical, multiseptate, hyaline, not constricted, 90-120 x 5-6». This is different from C. Jacquiniana Thum. of which we have specimens from Dr. Winter. Cercospora infuscans. On fading leaves of Rhus venenata, Wilmington, Del., Oct., 1890. Commons, 1621. Spots at first brownish and limited by the vein- lets of the leaf, becoming confluent and black, occupying and kill- ing the affected part which becomes dead and brittle. Hyphe hypophyllous, fasciculate, erect, slightly bulbous at base and some- what toothed above, septate, dark, 70-85 x 4. Conidia clavate or oblong-clavate, tinged with olive or sooty-black but transparent, 30-60 x 4-5 ., 3-6-septate and often constricted at the septa. Ac- companied by numerous small, sterile perithecia, apparently some young Sphaerella. Cercospora Comandrae Ell. & Dearness. On leaves of Comandra umbellata, London, Canada, Aug., 1890. Dearness, 294. Spots small (1-2 mm.), round, reddish-brown, defi- nite. Hyphae short, 12-20 x 3-33 »., simple, entire, straight, ob- tuse, tufted on a small tubercular base. Conidia slender, obclavate, 70-80 x 5-3} ., nucleate (and faintly septate)? nearly. straight. Cercospora Mikaniae. On leaves of Mikania scandens, Mississippi. Tracy, 1567. Hypo- phyllous. Hyphae 100-120 x 4 »., septate,tbrown, subequal, fas- ciculate, more or less bent, sparingly toothed above, tufts effused form- ing indefinite olive-brown patches and more or less confluent over the entire lower surface of the leaf, but not on any definite spots. Conidia oblong-clavate, 3-6-septate, olivaceous, 40-85 x 5-6 y. Cercospora Halstedii. On living leaves of Carya tomentosa, Cold Spring, N. Y., July, 1890. Dr. B. D. Halsted. Hypophyllous. Effused, forming inde- terminate, olive-black patches 2-4 mm. diam. but without any defi- nite spots. Hyphae erect, brown, sparinglyjseptate, 100-150 x 5— 7 »., Closely undulate or erisped and torulose’above. Conidia ob- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91 clavate, brown, 65-80 x 5-7 »., about 3-septate and sometimes con- stricted at the septa, the broad triseptate part occupying about one- half the length. Cercospora Medicaginis. On Medicago denticulata, College Station, Texas, May, 1890. H. 8. Jennings, 146. Spots rusty-browa becoming dirty-brown, sub- orbicular and subindefinite, 3-5 mm. diam. Hyphae amphigenous but more abundant above, nearly hyaline at first, then yellow-brown, continuous geniculate above, 35-45 x 4-5 ». Conidia fusoid-cylin- drical, hyaline, 3-6-septate, 40-60 x 3». The tufts of hyphae are effused, forming a short rusty-brown coating on the spots. Cercospora lathyrina. On living leaves of Lathyrus latifolius (cult.), Newfield, N. J., Aug. 1890. Spots rusty-brown, becoming paler in the center, sub- epiphyllous, rather indefinitely limited, 2-5 mm. diam. Hyphae epiphyllous, cespitose, brownish, crisped or narrowly undulate above, sparingly septate, 75-100 x 4 ». Conidia slender, hyaline, very faintly 1—5-septate, 80-110 x 3 p. The leaves are irregularly blotched with dirty flesh-color below. Allied to C. canescens EK. & M., but more slender throughout. Cercosporella pyrina. On leaves of Pyrus coronaria Racine, Wis., Aug., 1890. Davis, 9033. Hypophyllous, effused, without any definite spots, at first in small, irregularly shaped patches, finally spreading more or less continuously over the entire lower surface of the leaf which then becomes more or less discolored, reddish-brown especially above. Fertile hyphae effused, short, 12-25 x 5 v., hyaline. Conidia ob- long, fusoid-oblong or vermiform, hyaline, 3—6-septate, ends obtuse. Fusicladiam effusum Winter var. Carpineum E. & E. On living leaves of Carpinus Americana, London, Canada, Oct., 1889. Dearness, 812. Differs from the typical form in its mostly epiphyllous growth, darker color and rather smaller, paler conidia. Clasterisporium cornigerum. ; On bark of dead Carpinus, London, Canada, May, 1890. Dear- ness, 1692. Sterile hyphae creeping, septate, sending up multi- septate fertile branches 70-100 x 8-10 v., enlarged above into the oblong-clavate, 5—-7-septate, brown conidia 70-100 x 12-15 p. at first, rounded above, then truncate, the terminal cell germinating 92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. laterally. C. herculeum Ell.in N. A. F. 542, has the spores only 3-4 —septate. The Canada species forms flattened tufts 1-2 mm. diam., around which the fungus is more or less extensively eftused. Dendryphium muricatum. On decaying wood of Prunus Virginiana, Sand Coulee, Montana, May, 1889. F. W. Anderson, No. 492. Effused, black. Hyphae erect, with short, alternate or subopposite branches bearing the 30 —40 x 6-7 »., 5—d-septate muriculate-roughened conidia in series of 4-8. Dendryphium pachysporum. Parasitic on some light colored Peniophora on rotten wood, St. Martinsville, La., July, 1889. Langlois, 1810. Hyphae subfasci- culate, septate below, moniliform-jointed above, with one or two short, jointed branches, both the branches and the main hyphae bear- ing at their extremities one large (25-40 x 15-20 ».) subopaque 2-3 septate conidium, the septa being darker than the body of the coni- dia. The lower, septate base of the hyphae about 100 x 6 »., the upper moniliform part also of about the same length, the joints be- ing 10-15 x 6-7 ». olivaceous (lighter than the conidia), continuous or uniseptate. Septonema griseo-fulvum. On dead decorticated twigs of Populus tremuloides, Sand Coulee, Cascade Co., Montana, Oct., 1889. F. W. Anderson, 630. Forms a yellowish-drab-colored stratum, tolerably compact, extending for two or more cm. and more or less completely enveloping the limb. Hyphae interwoven, branched, hyaline at first, septate, finally sepa- rating at the alternate septa into yellowish-brown, 1-septate coni- dia 6-) x 25-3 ». mostly constricted at the septum. Sporidesmium tabacinum. On decaying wood of Populus tremuloides, Sand Coulee, Mon- tana, May, 1889. Anderson, 503. Effused, forming a pulverulent tobacco-brown stratum on the surface of the wood. Conidia glo- bose or oblong, 25-35 y, diam. or 25-45 x 20-30 ». made up of glo- bose cells about 6-7 ». diam. Sterile hyphae inconspicuous. Coni- dia mostly with a short pedicel. Macrosporium Podophylili. On old Aecidium Podophylli Schw., Starkville, Miss., Apr., 1889. Prof. S. M. Tracy, 1202. Mostly hypophyllous, effused, thin, the sterile, creeping, pale brownish or subhyaline hyphae sending up 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93 short (30-40 x 4-5 ».), continuous or faintly septate, erect subhya- line, obtuse branches with clavate, yellow-brown, 4—5-septate, muri- form, 30-50 x 10-L2 »., conidia prolonged below into a distinct pedicel. Helicosporium diplosporum. On dead stems of Smilax, St. Martinsville, La., Jan., 1889. Lang- lois, No. 1700 (p. p.). Black, effused, velutinous, thin, composed of septate branching brown sterile hyphae from which arise the erect closely septate, subcylindrical, nearly opaque, 55-40 x 5-6 y., fertile hyphae bearing at their tips the solitary brown conidia composed of two series of parallel connate cells curved so as to form a circular disk 20-22 ». diam., with a notch below, the apex of the double chain of cells not quite touching its base. Helicoma velutinum Ell. in Torr. Bull. has the hyphae about the same, but the conidia are smaller and composed of a single series of brown cells. Fusarium volutella. On dead twigs of Vitis bipinnata, St. Martinsville, La., Oct., 1888. Langlois, No. 1505. Hyphae hyaline, simple or sparingly branched, continuous or sparingly septate, 100 ». long or over and 4-5 vp. thick, erect, forming brush-like tufts, rising through cracks in the bark from some buried Cytispora? The hyphae are tuberculose- spiculose above, bearing attached to these tooth-like projections, the falcate, hyaline, 50-70 x 4-5 y., 1-septate conidia. The habit and general appearance is that of Volutella. Epidochium olivaceum. On dead limbs of Fraxinus, London, Canada, June, 1890. Dear- ness, 1290. Sporodochia solitary or cespitose, tuberculiform, sub- hemispherical 3—} mm. diam., dark olive, carnose, erumpent finally discoid or subcollapsed. Basidia simple, stout, 20-50 x 3-4 y., con- tinuous, greenish-granular, becoming hyaline, subequal. Conidia subfaleate, obtuse; greenish-hyaline, granular, continuous, 25-35 x D-7 py. . Exosporium sociatum. Associated with Rhytisma acerinwn on leaves of Acer rubrum. Bayou Chene, La., Oct., 1888. Langlois, 1557. | Sporodochia am- phigenous surrounding the stroma of the Rhytisma and on the side of the leaf opposite to it, erumpent, minute, finally subpulverulent from the abundant conidia which are dark-brown, oblong, 3—-septate, straight or slightly curved, ends mostly subacute, 12-15 x 4-5 y., on sporophores of about the same length as the conidia. 94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ON THE GENUS PSILORHINUS Ruppell. BY WITMER STONE. While engaged in cataloguing the Corvidae in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, I found several inter- esting specimens of Psilorhinus, some of which did not seem to agree exactly with any of the described species, while others seemed to cast doubt upon the validity of P. cyanogenys of Sharpe. This led to a more minute study of the genus which was made possible by the kindness of Mr. Robert Ridgway, curator of birds in the U.S. National Museum, who has loaned me the entire series of Psi/orhinus contained in that institution. There have been four species of Psi/orhinus described by authors : P. morio (Wagl.). (Pica morio Wagl. Isis 1829, p. 751). P. Mexicanus Riipp. Mus. Senckenb. 1837, p. 189. The type of the genus. P. cyanogenys Sharpe. Cat. Birds in Brit. Mus. in, p. 140, 1877. P. vociferus (Cabot). (Corvus vociferus Cabot. Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. IV, p. 464, 1844). This last was referred as a synonym of Corvus corax by G. R. Gray in his Hand List and this error has been followed by many other authors. How the mistake originated it is hard to see, as the description is perfectly clear. The discovery of Cabot’s type in the Academy’s collection led me to the correct identification of the spe- cies and I afterwards noticed that Mr. Ridgway had also discovered the true character of “ Corvus vociferus’ (Manual of N. A. Birds, p. 361, foot note). These four species fall naturally into two groups, P. morio having the tail entirely brown while the others have all the feathers but the central pair broadly tipped with white. After a careful study of the series of P. Mexicanus and cyanogenys now before me, I have come to the conclusion that the two are not specifically distinct. The character upon which Sharpe based his P. eyanogenys consisted in the presence of a bluish-gray patch on the side of the head. The great variation both in the extent and intensity of this patch in the specimens in the Academy’s collection led me to doubt its value asa specific character especially as I found the same gray patch con- spicuously present in some specimens of P. morio, while in others 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95 there was more or less tendency to a lighter coloration on the malar region ; in fact, in nearly all the specimens of this genus that I have seen the feathers of the malar region have a different luster from those of the side of the head; so that this character is, to say the least, very variable. From the material at hand it is impossible to make the presence of the strongly marked malar patch correspond with any geographical range or with any variation in age or plum- age, and it must, therefore, be considered merely as an individual variation. As regards P. vociferus, although the presence of the gray malar patch will not serve to keep it separate any more than in the case of P. cyanogenys, nevertheless it possesses other characters which may prove of specific or subspecific value, by which it may be distin- guished from all the specimens of P. Mexicanus seen by me. I refer to the size and shape of the bill and the coloration of the tail. In ail the Central American specimens the bill is nearly uni- form in shape though varying somewhat in absolute dimensions, while in the type of P. vociferus (from Yucatan) it is shorter, and deeper in proportion to its length. A specimen of “ P. cyanogenys.” however, from Mirador, has a bill of nearly the same shape though much larger. In regard to the tail, the white tips in P. vociferus are much broader than in P. Mexicanus, measuring on the outer feathers fully two inches while in only one other specimen do they reach as much as an inch and a half and average only an inch and a quarter. Moreover, in P. vociferus there is a subterminal white band on the central tail feathers which are uniform brown, in all the other spec- imens this band is somewhat obscured in the middle of the feathers though the quill is distinctly white where it crosses. In consideration of these differences and the lack of other speci- mens from Yucatan, I think we are hardly justified in uniting P. vociferus with P. Mexicanus. A more complete series of specimens may show these characters to be merely individual, as in the case of the gray malar patch, and then we can unite all birds with white tips to the rectrices under P. Mexicanus. There is still another point in connection with the birds of this group, namely the coloration of the under surface. One of the Costa Rica specimens shows a sharp line of division between the brown of the neck and breast and the white of the under parts, while in other specimens the colors shade gradually into one another. 96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. This same difference occurs in specimens of P. morio. The extent of the dark color also varies considerably in different specimens, two birds from Nicaragua being much darker below than any others in the series. As regards P. morio the series of eleven specimens show consider- able individual variation of nearly the same character as occurs in P. Mexicanus but nothing, I think, which can be considered of specific value. As mentioned above one specimen (No. 3093, Phila. Acad. Coll.) shows a distinct blue-gray malar patch and spot above and behind the eye. Some have the black throat and breast separated from the lighter under surface by a sharp line while in others the colors are blended, and the throat is sometimes but little darker than the rest of the under surface. The color of the under surface also shows great variation. It is generally light grayish-brown but in one specimen (Nat. Mus. Col. No. 4115) from San Diego, Mexico, it is nearly white and in another (Nat. Mus. Coll. No. 42139) from Orizaba, suffused with rufous especially on the under tail coverts. The wings in this spec- imen are also reddish-brown. To sum up my observations on the genus, it must, I think, be considered as a group in which great individual variation occurs, variation which may eventually produce several well marked forms. At present, however, I think we can recognize but two species P. morio (Wagl.) extending from Tehuantepec north to the Rio Grande valley and P. Mexicanus Riipp. from southern Mexico to Costa Rica with the possibility of another distinct species or race in the penin- sula of Yucatan. ‘The gray malar patch must be regarded as a var- iable character occurring in individuals of each species. Below I give the measurements (in inches) of some of the speci- mens especially referred to above: Depth of bill Length of through nostril. culmen. Wing. Type of P. voctferus, Yucatan, No. 3096, Acad. Coll. “D6 1:33 «7-30 “ P. cyanogenys,”’ Mirador, Mex. No. 23917, Nat. Mus. Coll. -68 1-09 Sessa) P. Mexicanus, No. 3)94, Acad. Coll. ° ‘62 L:61 sa F. morio with gray cheek, No. 3093, Acad. Coll. “62 154 825 P. morio, Orizaba, Mex., No. 42139, Nat. Mus. Coll. “64 1:00) 25 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97 DESCRIPTION OF NEW SPECIES OF ANCTUS AND OLIVA. "BY JOHN FORD. Anctus Pilsbryi Ford. Fig. 1. ; Shell rimately umbilicated, the axis imperforate ; ovate-conical, spire acute, apex black; whorls 7, slightly convex, the last some- what contracted near the base. Aperture extremely nar- row, oblong; lip flatly reflected, the central half of its length provided with a flange extending towards the in- ner or columellar lip, from which proceeds a correspond- ing convexity, thus giving to the aperture a form much like the traditional key-hole. Color grayish-white, painted Fig.r. longitudinally with brownish and black lines. Length of shell 23, diameter 93 mill. Width between flanges 1, width of flange on outer lip 2 mill. Color of lip white; aperture slightly shaded within. Habitat, Brazil. Anctus angiostoma Wagner (capueira Spix), Fig. 2, and A. Pilsbry: are the only living species of the genus known, and both are in color pattern and general form very much alike. In the for- mer species, however, the apex is not black and shining as in the latter nor are the apertures at all alike save in general outline. Indeed, that of A. Pilsbryi is absolutely distinct from any other known to the writer. This alone would justify Fig.2. its specific separation. The figures were drawn from photographs of the shells and may thererore be accepted as correct. The species has been named in honor of my friend Mr. Henry A. Pilsbry, Conservator of the Conchological department of the Acad- emy and present Editor of the ‘“* Manual of Conchology.” Oliva cryptospira Ford. Figs. 3, 4. Shell cylindrical, slightly enlarged near either end, producing an obese appearance. Salmon-colored, with a few dashes of white accompanied by faint zigzag brownish lines showing through the enamel, the latter being somewhat thickened and more orange in color on the basal fasciole. Spire short, with sutures entirely con- cealed by a heavy callus. Edge of lip and interior of aperture white. Length of type specimen 2} inches. Greatest diameter 1 inch. Habitat, Moluccas. 98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. This shell is probably well known to veteran collectors, since it has been posing for many years as a veritable QO. irisans Lamarck, from which species, however, it is in fact distinct. No figure was given with Lamarck’s description of O. irisans, : but a figure probably intended for the same shell appears in Reeve’s “ Conchologia Iconica,” Vol. 6, Pl. 6, fig. 8a, where it is classed with typical O. irisans Lam. That this figure does not agree with Lamarck’s description in any essential feature is quite apparent. It seems, however, to have been accepted by my late friend, Mr. Tryon, as a representative O. irisans, since it was copied for the “ Manual” without remark; although several specimens exhibiting characters similar to those shown in the figure—but which belong to O. eryptospira only—were at the time in the Academy’s collec- tion. Whether these specimens were accident- : ally overlooked, or the distinctions noted deemed rice too trifling for special designation, is a question that cannot now be answered. Judging from Mr. Tryon’s well-known habits of study and care- fulness, it is but fair to presume that the shells were not seen by him. In consequence of this uncertainty, the responsibility of correcting the error (if error it be), is accepted rather reluc- Tae tantly although in the firm belief that the change will benefit the student, as well as, in some slight degree, the cause of Science, also. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99 BASANITE FROM CRAWFORD COUNTY, INDIANA. BY E. GOLDSMITH. During a recent visit to the Wyandotte Cave, southern Indiana, I observed in one of the larger chambers, two sharply defined hori- zontal black veins in one of the vertical walls of light colored car- boniferous limestone. The lower vein measured about one and a quarter inch in thickness, and, about fourteen inches above it, was the second vein of three inches in thickness. From a distance, by the dim light of a stearine candle, the veins appeared like coal ; the touch, however, revealed a hard rock of a silicious nature, which the guide said was called chert. Examination revealed an amorphous, very fine-grained rock hav- ing a smooth conchoidal fracture ; the irregular edges are sharp and hard, so much so that they scratch glass, its hardness being equal to quartz; its luster is subresinous on a fresh fracture, becoming dull on exposure ; the color is smoky-gray in mass, less so when thin- ning down; it is opaque except on thin edges where it is subtrans- lucent; it furnishes no streak ; the rock is not splintery ; it gives sparks with a steel. If heated suddenly it will decrepitate ; a gen- tle heat, gradually increased, causes the smoky hue to disappear, the specimen hecoming grayish-white. It is known that such rocks con- tain carbon, and the one under consideration contains also some water as was seen when it is heated in a tube closed at the end. Analysis, gave the following result: Silica : , : : 3 s ‘ . 93°66 per cent. Tron and alumina . : : : ; » --3:10per cent. Water. : : : : 3 bs ies percent: Carbon ; ; , Fluorine and sodium not determined ; Chlorine hardly a trace. Sp. gr.=2°605. From its general character I believe this so called Chert to be the touchstone of the assayers, otherwise called Lydian (28 per cent. stone or Basanite.’ A thin section appears when magnified with a low power as regular successive layers, or striae, differing, however, from those of erystals. These striae indicate the probable existence of great pressure, since it seems to have once been colloidal silica. The distances between 100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. these layers are approximately 0:023 millimeter. The layers when magnified 220 times present a series of irregular waves in which the ridges seem to be indicated by granules of oxide of iron and particles ofamorphous carbon. Intermingled are found inclusions of isometric ess lias > 1 et RR 1, fans reps dha ONE, a2 S > WITH! Rane ~ me Sr SRline > ek >r>b >> 3 If Le AY Ge a. “ forms: cubes, dodecahedrons and also indications of a few octa- hedrons, some perfectly black but the greater number transparent and colorless. The opaque black microlites seem to be magnetite and the transparent ones probably carbon. Some of these latter contain specks of amorphous carbon as inclusions. The section in balsam gave at some points a strong reflection by surface illumination. The forms, however, were not well defined. Another section was etched with HF. The etching showed under the lens some cubical erystals with sharp edges and solid angles and a large number of hollows, quadrangular and hexangular in shape, from which the microlites had probably been removed by the washing, sufficient indications being left for the recognition of those interesting small bodies. The thin section from which Fig. 1 was drawn was sub- jected to a gradually increasing heat on a small platinum dish over the Bunsen burner until the object was red-hot. The residue was subjected to this heat for three hours when the blow-pipe flame 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 101 was directed upon it to bring the heat to greater intensity. The result was that the section became nearly white. It was then reim- bedded in balsam to determine the change which had taken place. Viewed under ordinary light with a microscope, nearly all the transparent crystals had disappeared, that is to say, the forms were black, and with the proper management of the light it became evi- dent that hollow spaces now occurred where formerly transparent erystals existed. The matrices were lined more or less with a very fine black powder which was, to all appearances, charcoal. This darkening was invariably produced wherever the microlites had but one facet before the heating. Where the silica surrounded the crys- tal it appeared as if the heat and air had no access and, in conse- quence, they were not affected, though such cases were but few in number. Some of the hollow spaces were seen by oblique light to be lined with red oxide of iron. These were the locations of the oxi- dized magnetite where the red powder was left intact. The hollow angular spaces may also be recognized by allowing the light to pass through the polarizer without the analyzer. Under this treatment, especially when the spaces stand squarely to the section, the burnt- out angular matrices are well defined. The character of these microlites was determined by the applica- tion of intense heat. A_ silicate would not be affected in like manner. It may not be amiss to note the fact that larger carbon erystals have been observed which hold inclusions of amorphous car- bon similar to those noticed in the section of basanite referred to. Some spherical white masses formed by the heating of the section were probably due to a volatile matter which is known to form part of the composition of basanite; they resemble those frequently observed on heating minerals containing fluorine. The acid affects the material of the plate etched with hydrofluoric acid very irregularly, and, since the rock seems to be a mixture of chal- cedony and amorphous silica, a peculiar reaction occurs with poiarized- light. While the chalcedony indicated phenomena of interference, the amorphous silica permitted the polarized light to pass. This is especially the case when Klein’s quartz plate is interposed. The amorphous silica then appears green, when the Nicols are crossed, and the chalcedony orange-colored. On turning the analyzer 90° the colors are reversed. The hydrofluoric acid seems to affect the amor- phous silica more than the chalcedony, as the latter projected irregu- larly over the etched surface. These projecting particles when prop- 102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. erly manipulated reflect the light in a singular way. The reflec- tion of the ray is such as to form a tail from the shining surface / of the particles, comet-like, the end of the tail having Mk sometimes a whirling motion with colored fringes. TD Oceasionally, when a group of those particles is under Fig. 2. focus, Fig. 2, the motions proceed in different directions producing a peculiarly lively effect. On the introduction of a Ber- trand lens, a rosette, Fig. 3, was pro- duced widely differing from the comet- like reflection. This rosette represents a. circular form having a cone whose base has about the diameter of half the whole figure and its height slightly greater. From the foot of the cone issue delicate filamentous rays of great regularity and so brilliant that it is difficult to represent it in black and When the comet-like tail is not ob- served, a hollow cone is seen under = the Bertrand lens, having but few rays Fig. 4. on its base. Both phenomena are new to me in connection with micro-mineralogy. In optics the caustic plane has precisely such an appear- ance and in its revolution gives, nec- essarily, a hollow cone. From this we may infer that the comet-like tails de- scribed above are probably continuous in their whirling motion, even when they are not in a correct position to allow this to be seen under the micro- scope. It may be assumed that the black hexagonal plates which remain dark between the crossed Nicols may be truly hexagonal crystals, and the dark- ness is due to the position of the axis ; but, since they are not affected by the pre convergent polarized rays, the form . cannot belong to that system. Neither do any of the transparent crystals respond toa like treatment. Sev- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103 eral dozen illustrations of both phenomena were examined with the same result. That the dark forms are magnetite is rendered highly probable by the production of iron oxide by heating. On the other hand, the small transparent microlites may not be carbon, because on attempting to isolate them by hydrofluoric acid the resulting forms obtained were not distinct enough to be recognized as such, as one should expect, being granules instead of well defined crystals. On heating to redness they burned away leaving but a trace of what seems to be silica. The isolation of the supposed crystals of carbon would be proof of their identity ; the result, however, being unsatisfactory, the subject is an open question for further inquiry. Had the isolated por- tion been amorphous carbon, dark-colored fragments would have been seen, but such was not the case, on the contrary the rounded and elon- gated forms seem to refract light strongly. It may be that the exceed- ingly small crystals could not stand the treatment without losing their sharp edges and solid angles, thus becoming unrecognizable. The fact that the burnt-out matrices were lined with amorphous carbon after burning, points in that direction, since it is well known that the dia- mond when strongly heated in a vessel will lose its transparency and will either take the form of graphite or charcoal. It may be as- sumed that the transparent crystals area salt with an organic acid, thus explaining the amorphous carbon after the incineration. In this case, however, the material with which the assumed organic acid was combined would remain in the matrices besides the amorphous carbon, but nothing was seen except the black powder. — Further- more, hydrofluoric acid would affect such a salt with comparative ease and leave no carbon in the residue as stated above. I call the crystallized part of the basanite, chalcedony and not quartz because of certain indications of its fibrous structure in the circular form, showing a dark brush-like cross between the crossed Nicols, which meet in the center. If the section is rotated the cross does not change its position; but, if the analyzer is turned to 45° the brushes move about 223° and appear of an indigo-blue color. If the Nicols are parallel, the brushes follow but 45° in each quad- rant and appear blue; turning the analyzer 45° more the brushes move along to about 673° and assume the indigo-blue tint again ; finally, when the moving of the analyzer is completed in the second quadrant, the dark, brush-like cross reappears. When, therefore, the analyzer had been revolved 180°, the brush-like cross followed only 90°. As stated above the dark cross met in the center; but, 104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. on turning the analyzer when the brushes became colored, a circu- lar space was produced in the center having a yellow color which did not change to any other. Since no circular rings occurred and the central part of the con- centric and fibrous structure of this part of the plate did not change in color when rotated, it is evident that this variety of quartz, called chalcedony, behaves ina widely different manner from quartz proper. I have not found this peculiar optical behavior described and think it to be of sufflcient interest to put on record. EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES. Figure 1 represents a thin section of Basanite magnified 220 times showing the transparent crystals of carbon and the dark opaque magnetite. Figure 2 shows a group of strongly reflecting points as seen by sur- face illumination. Figure 3 the rosette produced therefrom by introducing the Betrand lens. Figure 4 a contour of figure 3 cut vertically. Figure 5 indicates the cone produced from reflecting points having no comet-like tails. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105 DESCRIPTION OF A SPECIMEN OF CHIROLOPHIS POLYACTOCEPHALUS FROM VANCOUVER ISLAND. BY ASHDOWN H. GREEN. A specimen of this rare blenny, Chirolophis polyactocephalus, taken at Alert Bay on the North East Coast of Vancouver Island in November, 1890. I give herewith a detailed description : Body elongate, compressed. Eyes approximate; no lateral line. Scales deeply imbedded, appearing like pits, 186 in length, 54 from back to belly. Branchial rays 5. Gill membrane continuous, free from isthmus. Skin on top of head and neck loose ; numerous der- mal flaps and cirri. Large superciliary cirrus with three main branches. Numerous mucous pores on snout. Mouth and lips fleshy ; a single row of delicately fine comb-like teeth on upper and lower jaw, closely set. Two patches of fine teeth on upper part of gullet. No teeth on vomer or palatines. Dorsal LXILII, fleshy, the sharp points of spines projecting slightly beyond the membranes. The 8 anterior spines stronger and more blunt than the remainder, covered with loose skin, and having numerous dermal flaps, some extending beyond the spines. Dorsal not connected with the caudal. Anal rays 46, soft and fleshy, the rays folding over one another, free for about half their length. The first ray shorter than the others, the last connected. Anal not connected with caudal fin. Ventral rays 3, jugular, fleshy, no spine. Pectoral rays 14, broad, rays broadly branched, fleshy towards base. Caudal rays 14, rounded, rays fleshy and broadly branched. Coloration: two conspicuous black wavy lines behind opercle, and in front of pectorals. Numerous light colored blotches, on body, dorsal and anal, round or oval, about the size of peas or small beans. Said to be highly colored, scarlet spots, purple body, re- sembling Hexagrammus superciliosus when fresh. The specimen is now in the Provincial Museum, Victoria, British Columbia. This fish has not previously been taken south of Alaska. A good figure has been given by Dr. T. H. Bean in Nelson’s “ Report on Natural History Collections in Alaska,” plate XV, but no descrip- tion, except the fragmentary account of a Kamtschatkan specimen given by Pallas, has ever been published. 8 106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. PALAEOSYOPS AND ALLIED GENERA. BY CHARLES EARLE. The present preliminary notice is the result of an investigation of the Palaeosyops material contained in the Princeton collection. This material was collected by the various Princeton exploring parties, and is from the middle Eocene; partly from the Bridger, and partly from the Washakie division of this epoch. The genus Palaeosyops was established by Leidy.’ Since then Marsh, Cope, Scott and Osborn have made contributions to the same and allied genera. They have all felt the want of abundant material in their descriptions, and in most cases the original types described by them have never been compared, and thus one finds the confusion in the nomenclature a great obstacle. Another difficulty has been, to co-ordinate various portions of skulls and scattered teeth with each other and with the limb-bones. I have been greatly assisted by a part of an individual of Palaeosyops paludosus in the Princeton Collection, associated with a portion of the skull, and the bones of a posterior limb, nearly complete. Dur- ing the course of this investigation I have been enabled to study the original types in the National Museum, in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and in the Yale College Museum.’ I am also indebted to Prof. Cope for allowing me to examine his collection ; so that I am now in a position to bring together the work of the several authors, and to give, as well as the present known material will allow, a preliminary descriptive analysis of the forms above referred to. NOMENCLATURE. Cope, in his Tertiary Vertebrata, has shown the relation of the nomenclature of Palaeosyops and Limnohyus proposed by Marsh and Leidy, and there is no question as to Leidy’s priority. Leidy described the genus Palueosyops three months before Marsh published his preliminary notice, in which he describes his Palaeosyops laticeps. Cope did not attempt to determine the original types of Leidy from which the genus and species, Palueosyops paludosus, was first indicated. Afterstudying Leidy’s original specimens, now inthe 1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1870, p. 118. 2] wish to express my thanks to Prof. G. Brown Goode, Prof. Angelo Heil- prin, and Prof. O. C. Marsh for these privileges. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107 National Museum, which he described,’ and which later he figured.’ I.am convinced that they belong to the large species of Palaeosyops, namely that which Leidy subsequently named P. major. Second: that the smaller forms later referred by Leidy to P. paludosus were quite distinct from his types of this species. Therefore, as the original specimens were called P. paludosus and as they were identical with a form which he later called P. major, the latter name is a synonym and must drop out. As Leidy’s name P. major, was very convenient in designating the relative size of the two species, we propose to call the smaller form Palaeosyops minor—the P. paludosus, according to the later use of Leidy, and others. I may also add that Cope’s P. /aevidens is a different form from this smaller species of Leidy, so that Cope’s specific name cannot ° be used. Cope’ accepts Marsh’s statement that the original specimens fig- ured by Leidy belong to Limnohyus; this is, I think, an error as the teeth are much larger, and correspond in every respect with Leidy’s P. major. Marsh’s statement that the teeth of his P. lati ceps have the same general structure as Leidy’s smaller species— namely his P. paludosus, is also incorrect. I have examined both types, and I shall show later that the two forms are quite distinet— one approaching the Telmatotherium form of molar, the other type being more like the typical molar found in P. paludosus. Marsh’s type of his genus Tel/matotherium‘ agrees in all particulars with the type of Scott and Osborn’s Leurocephalus, so that the latter genus must become asynonym of Telmatotherium. Scott and Osborn’s species T. (L.) cultridens, I retain as a good species, and it has very interesting characters which place it rather lower in the scale than the 7. validus of Marsh. The skull figured by Scott and Osborn in their report for 1877 as P. paludosus, should be referred to Marsh’s genus Limnohyops. Its general form is very different from Palaeo- syops, as will be shown later. After carefully considering the mat- ter of uniting the various genera into one, I am of the opinion that 1 Op. cit., p. 113. 2 U.S. Geol. Survey of the Ter., Vol. I, 1873, Plate V, fig. 5, and pl. XXIII, fizs. 3-6. 3 Tertiary Vertebrata, p. 698. 4 Am. Jour. Science and Arts, vol. 1V, pub. July 22nd, 1872. 5 E. M. Museum Bulletin. No. 1, Report Princeton Scientific Expedition Sept. 7th, 1878. 108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Telmatotherium may be retained, and that Limnohyus, or as it is now called, Limnohyops, should not haye a generic value equal to that of Telmatotherium. 7 The type specimen of the genus Limnohyops is very closely re- lated to that of Palaeosyops in the teeth structure, and we have good reasons for supposing that the presence of the hypocone on the last superior molar is a transition character, which is not available for generic definition. ‘The presence of a rudimentary hypocone on the last superior molar of Pa/aeosyops paludosus is not an uncom- mon occurrence. The premaxillary regions of Limnohyops and Palaeosyops are identical although the skull contours are very dif- ferent. The generic reference of Leidy’s smaller species of Palaeo- - syops, our P. minor, is uncertain, very little being known of the skull or of the limb bones. The characters of the molars (see his figs., Pl. IV, figs. 83-6) are closely similar to those of Telmatotherium, they have the square form observed in that genus. We may now give a brief diagnosis of the more important char- acters of the different genera and species, and also add an analyt- ical table for comparison :— I. Last superior molar with only one internal cone. A. External lobes of superior premolars separated PALAEOSYOPS. a. size, large. Inferior molars stout and broad, post. tubercle a cone P. paludosus. Inferior molars high and long, post. tubercle a cone P. vaillidens. b. size, medium. Superior premolar II with one external lobe P. laevidens. Superior premolar II with two external lobes P. minor. c. size, small. Superior premolar IV with a protoconule P. borealis. B. External lobes of superior premolars straight. TELMATOTHERIUM. a. sup. premolar II with rudimentary internal lobe T. cultridens. b. sup. premolar II with internal lobe T. validus. II. Last superior molar with two internal cones LIMNOHYOPS. a. size, large. Hypocone of last upper molar one half size of protocone L. laticeps. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109 b. size, small. Hypocone of last upper molar about equal to protocone L. fontinalis. Incertae sedis. Symphysis of lower jaw extremely long and narrow P. hyognathus. Distal extremity of nasals expanded P. megarhinus. PALAEOSYOPS Leidy (—Zimnohyus Marsh). P. paludosus Leidy, type species—type specimen in National Museum. (Synonyms P. major Leidy). 1. P. minor, Earle, sp. nov. Type specimen—specimen referred to P. paludosus by Leidy in Museum of Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 2. P. laticeps, Marsh. Type, skull, ete., in Yale College Museum. The following diagnosis may define Palaeosyops : Last superior molar usually with one internal cone. Intermediate tubercles well developed. Crowns of molars not prominent. External cuspsof superior premolars separated. Second superior premolar witha well defined internal lobe. The form of the superior molar in this genus is very characteristic, and differs quite radically from that of Telmatothertwm. The trans- yerse diameter of the tooth is greater than the antero-posterior. The external V’s are round and shallow. The anterior buttress Is widely prolonged. The median buttress is not constricted off; there is generally no external cingulum. The crowns of the teeth are low, and the intermediate conules are strongly developed. Marsh has Second superior molar of 1. Palacosyops paludosus Leidy.' 2. Limnohyops laticeps Marsh. 3. Pat acosyops minor Sp. nov. and 4. Telmatotherium cultridens S. & O. % natural size. pa.—paracone, me.—metacone, pr.—protocone, hy.—hypocone, pl.—protoconule, ml.—=metaconule. 110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. pointed out the difference between the premaxillary regions of Palaeosyops and Telmatotherium. In the former genus the premaxil- laries are short and depressed, their symphysis is very short and round, their anterior aspect is convex. The zygomatic arch in Palaeosyops is strong and decurved, and the form of the head is more like that of the Tapir than in the other genera. 1. Palaeosyops paludosus (Leidy.) Syn. (P. major Leidy) (Limnohyus robustus Marsh.) Protoconules of superior true molars large, and always present, external cingulum absent. Transverse diameter of first superior molar greater than that of last premolar, posterior tu- bercle of last inferior molar cone-like, and me- dian in posterior. This is the largest species of the genus. It was, as we have seen, first described as P. pa/udosus, and later, from more abundant mate- rial, was designated as P. major. The teeth of P. paludosus are very large, being wide and rather short, the external V’s are characteristic of the species, being shal- low, with very prominent anterior buttresses on the true molars, their median buttress is not constricted off, but is rounded and open internally. The intermediate conules of P. paludosus are very strongly developed, the external lobes of the superior molars are entirely without a cingulum, their anterior cingula are present, and. the internal cingula incomplete. The last three premolars have well developed internal cones, with generally incomplete internal cingula, the external lobes of the last premolar are equal, and the premolars are not provided with the prominent cingula seen in Tel- matotherium. The inferior molars are short and broad, with low crowns. The last inferior molar is a very characteristic tooth in the species: it is very short and heavy, its posterior tubercle is much smaller than the anterior portions of the tooth, is placed median in relation to the external lobes, and is not provided with the strong lateral crests and median valley seen in Te/matotherium. The skull in P. paludosus is broad and massive, its posterior portion is quite like that of the Tapir, the frontal region being higher than the occipital, but differing very much from that of the Tapir in the nasals, which were short and broad, and reached so far forward as to overhang the premaxillary symphysis. From the structure of the facial region, I conclude that this species was provided, if at all, 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. a with a very rudimentary proboscis. The malar insertion is grad- ual and not abrupt as seen in other species of the family. The audi- tory processes were distinct, the post glenoid being long and rather stout; the internal glenoid process is wanting in this species, and the paroccipitals were provided with a terminal styloid process. The symphysis of the lower jaw is rather short, the posterior third of the lower border of jaw strongly inflected, with the angle of the same turned outwards. 2. Palaeosyops laevidens Cope.! (not P. paludosus Leidy.) Second superior premolar with only one exter- nal lobe, external lobes of true molars without eingula. Crowns of molars low. This species was described by Prof. Cope from the characters of the second premolar as above defined. Prof. Cope himself was not certain that his species was distinct from Leidy’s form, but I have examined both of the types and find them quite different. Cope’s P. laevidens has the molar form of a typical Palaeosyops, and not the square shaped tooth of Telmatotherium, which the smaller species of Leidy so closely resembles. 3. Palaeosyops borealis Cope. Molars of asquare form with traces of trans- verse ridges, intermediate conules small, last superior premolar with well marked protoconule, size very small. This, I believe, is the only species of Palaeosyops from the Wind River Eocene, it is very much smaller than the other forms, being perhaps about one-half the size of P. paludosus. 4. Palaeosyops vallidens Cope. * Molars long and narrow with high crowns, pos- terior tubercle of last molar a cone, inferior border lower jaw straight and not inflected. The lower jaw figured by Cope* will form the type of this species. Prof. Cope also figured a series of upper molars under the name of this species. He speaks of this series and the lower jaw not being 1 Annual report U. S. Geol. Survey Terr. 1872 (1873) p. 591. 2 American Naturalist, 1880, p. 746. 3 Palaeontological Bulletin No. 7, p. 1, Aug. 22nd, 1872. 4 Tertiary Vertebrata, Pl. 52, fig. 3. 112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. found together, and concludes that they probably belong to differ- ent species. I agree with him in this view, and consider that the superior molars should be referred to Marsh’s form of Te/matothe- rium validus, as they have all the general characters of that spe- cies, and differ from 7. cultridens in having a well defined internal lobe to the second superior premolar. The last molar in the jaw above referred to is interesting, as it shows in some respects transition characters between Palaeosyops and Telmatotherium. 5. Palaeosyops minor, sp. nov. Second superior premolar with two external lobes, external lobes of last superior premolar equal. Intermediate conules of true molars re- duced, a strong external cingulum present. P. minor embraces specimens which Leidy erroneously described as P. paludosus, tigs. 3-6, Plate IV of Leidy’s report for 1873. The material relating to this species is very scarce, being mostly represented by scattered teeth, and- one complete series of upper molars in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. There is also in the collection, a lower jaw with teeth nearly complete, which Leidy referred to this species. Leidy figures a series of upper molars with a portion of the facial region attached. This specimen I have not been able to see. I believe it is in a private collection. The following molar characters will be seen to be closely similar to those in Telmatotherium. The molars in P. minor have their axes about equal, thus produc- ing a square tooth as is found in Telmatotherium. The external V’s are broad and angular, their median buttresses are deeply con- stricted off, the anterior buttress being not widely prolonged as in the largest form. The teeth have rather high crowns and the exter- nal face is provided with a well marked cingulum. The intermedi- ate conules in this species are not strongly marked. The transverse diameter of the last premolar is about equal to that of the first true molar; all the premolars have incomplete internal cingula, the inter- nal lobes of the premolars are more pointed than in P. paludosus, and are apt to be concave toward the external side. I have examined two series of upper molars of this species’ and in both eases the second superior premolar was provided with two well 1 Leidy figures (op. cit. pl. IV, figs. 8-4) a series of superior molars of this species, in which the second premolar has only one external lobe ? 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115 defined external lobes, so that Cope’s P. laevidens does not come within the definition of this species; then again the form of the mo- lars, the presence of strong cingula, etc., differ very much from those in Cope’s species. I am able to add nothing to the skull characters, as the material that I have examined contained no skulls Fig 2. Internal and ventral view of the premaxillary region 1 and 3, Pa/aeosyops pal- udosus Leidy. 2 and 4, Telmatotherium cultridens S. & O. referable to this species, and, in fact, I may add here that this is not the common species of Palaeosyops, the species P. paludosus, above described, being the most common form. LIMNOHYOPS Marsh (embraces Palaueosyops as employed by Marsh, Limnohyus as em- ployed by Leidy and others). Molars with low crowns, rounded external lobes, well developed intermediate tubercles, well marked, transverse crests may be present on su- perior molars, the last upper molar with two in- ternal cones. 114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 1. Limnohyops laticeps Marsh. (Syn. Palaeosyops laticeps Marsh, and Limnohyus laticeps Leidy). Protocone of last superior molar twice the height of hypocone. Paracone of last superior premolar much larger than metacone. This species has been placed under several genera, Marsh having _overlooked Leidy’s earlier description. It has now been placed in the genus Limnohyops.’ The teeth characters of Limnohyops are very different from those of Leidy’s smaller species of Palaeo- syops. I differ from Prof. Marsh in supposing that Leidy’s original type belonged to Limnohyus. I have shown above the true position of the original specimens. We are fortunate in having in the Princeton collection a skull of this genus, with the occipital region complete. There are also a few teeth in the collection, which I refer to this genus. *The dentition of this species is closely allied to P. paludosus. The teeth have low crowns without external ecingula, the external V’s are shal- low, and round, and have the general characters of the above species, the intermediate conules in the species are well developed. One character found in this species quite different from that in P. paludosus is that well defined transverse ridges are developed, connect- ing the internal cones with the external lobes of the molars. These ridges are small, but plainly to be seen. The hypocone of the last upper molar is much smaller than the protocone. The presence of the hypocone on the last molar (as already spoken of’) I consider as transitional, arising from a condition found in P. paludosus, where this cone is often rudimentary. The transverse diameters of premolar 4 and molar 1 are nearly equal, differing in this respect from those in P. paludosus. The skull contour of L. laticeps is very different from that of P. paludosus. The occipital region is higher than the frontal, resembling in this respect the Rhinoceros. The sagittal and lambdoidal crests are extremely heavy, and widely overhang the supra-occipital region. The nasals are more slender and longer than in P. paludosus. The premaxillaries resemble those found in P. paludosus, being short and depressed with a very short symphysis. The malar insertion is abrupt with the middle portion of the arch rounded, the infra-orbital foramen is exposed. ‘The zygomatic arch is wide spreading and heavy. The post glenoid process is rather long and curved forward. Aninternal glenoid process is present in 1 Am. Journ. Science, June, 1890, page 525. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 115 this species. The post-tympanic process is broad and separated from the glenoid. The occipital region is low, broad and deeply concave superiorly. The carpus in JZ. daticeps is very characteristic, being much lighter than P. paludosus, with the facets and axis of the same arranged differently. LL. laticeps was probably about the same height as P. paludosus, but was a more agile and slender form. 2. Limnohyops fontinalis Cope. Internal cones of last superior molar. nearly equal. First upper molar much smaller than sec- ond, size small. This is a strongly marked species, being about one-half the size of L. laticeps. The form of the skull in ZL. fontinalis closely resem- bles that in L. laticeps, although more depressed than in that spe- cies. The malar insertion is similar to the above form with an ex- posed infra-orbital foramen. We consider Cope’s ZL. diaconus not a good species. TELMATOTHERIUM Marsh. (Syn. Leurocephalus 8. & O.) Incisors with strong basal ridges. Canines compressed with sharp cutting ridges. Molars resembling Palaeosyops, but with higher and more pointed crowns, the intermediate tubercles may be nearly wanting in this genus, external lobes of premolars nearly straight with no me- dian buttresses. Hypocone of last superior molar very much reduced. The two species of this genus, namely J. validus and T. cultri- dens, have their molar characters nearly identical, the specific dif- ferences being in their intermediate tubercles and in the form of the second superior premolar. Cope’s species P. vallidens (at least the upper molars which he referred to that species) should be placed under 7. validus Marsh. The teeth in the genus Telmatotherium are easily distinguished from those of Pulaeosyops, they have a square form, with high crowns and prominent cusps, the external V’s are broad and angu- lar, the anterior buttress is not prolonged, and the median one is large and widely constricted off, the external face of the teeth are provided with a prominent cingulum, outer face of premolars straight, 1 Palaeontological Bulletin No. 11, p. 1, Jan. 31st, 1878. 116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. and the second superior premolar may have a rudimentary or well defined internal cone. The premaxillaries are high and compressed, with an elongated median suture. They are very different from those of Palaeosyops, in which their form: is short and depressed. The zygomatic arch in Telmatotherium is straighter and lighter than in Palaeosyops. The following characters may define the two species of this genus: 1. Telmatotherium validus Marsh. Second superior premolar with a well developed internal lobe, last upper molar without rudimen- tary hypocone. The intermediate tubercles in this species are more developed than in T. cultridens, the first molar has a protoconule, the second has this tubercle also present, the third molar with both intermediate tubercles. The last two upper premolars have their internal cingula incomplete. 2. Telmatotherium cultridens 8. & 0. (Leurocephalus cultridens §, & 0.). Second superior premolar with rudimentary in- ternal lobe, last superior molar with a rudimen- tary hypocone. The intermediate tubercles in this species are very much reduced, the protoconules of the first upper molar only being present. The internal basal cingulum of the last two upper premolars is complete. The two species above defined may be merely well marked varieties, but the material relating to them is not abundant, and we may leave them for the present as above given. I shall leave for my final paper the treatment of the relationship ‘between the genera and species in this family, and I will merely add that it includes two well marked forms of teeth: namely that of Palaeosyops, with low crowns and large intermediate tubercles, and that of Telmatotheriwm with very high crowns and reduced tubercles. It is the latter form of molar which I believe has led up directly to Diplacodon and not Palaeosyops, as generally stated, the latter genus having been the ancestor of Telmatotheriwm. Incertae sedis. Palaeosyops hyognathus §. & 0. } Types.—Lower jaw No. 10,273 in Princeton Museum. Symphysis extremely long and shallow, canines 1 The Mammalia of the Uinta Formation, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. N. S. Vol. 16, Aug. 1889, p. 513. — 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117 small and semiprocumbent. A long diastema anterior and posterior to premolar 1. Palaeosyops megarhinus Harle. 1 Type.—Skull No. 10,008 in Princeton Museum. No diastema in superior dental series, canines very small and wide spreading, superior true molars without external cingulum, distal extrem- itv of nasal expanded. ea American Naturalist, Jan., 1891, p. 45. . 118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. FEBRUARY 3. Dr. GEoRGE H. Horn in the chair. Forty-eight persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “On the External Characters of a Foetal Reindeer and other notes.” By R. W. Shufeldt. “Crustacea from the northern coast of Yucatan, the harbor of Vera Cruz, the west coast of Florida and the Bermuda Islands.” By J. E. Ives. FreBRuAkyY 10. Dr. GrorcE H. Horn in the chair. Twenty-seven persons present. A paper entitled, “On some recent Japanese Brachiopoda with description of a species believed to be new,” by W. H. Dall and H. A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication. Effect of environment in the modification of the bill and tail of birds.—Dr. Spencer Trorrer exhibited specimens of several of the common Finches of eastern North America, belonging to the venus Ammodramus. He stated that this genus, as now recognized by American Ornithologists, includes three types of birds formerly considered as representing distinet genera: —Ammodramus, Passer- culus and Coturniculus. These birds undoubtedly belong to one genus and show very clearly the effect produced by environment in modifying the bill and tail and producing subgenera of birds ori- ginally coming from one stock. The species of ‘the Passerculus and Coturniculus groups are inhabitants of the uplands and_ subsist mainly upon seeds which they pick up from the ground. All these birds have the short thick bill which ch: aracterizes so many of the Finch tribe. The true Ammodrami, however, as exemplified by the Sharp-tailed and Seaside Finches inhabit fie salt marshes of the coast and subsist on the small crustacea and worms. In obtaining these animals they are compelled to probe in the soft mud in which they live and this necessity, acting through numerous generations, has produced the longer and more slender bill which characterizes these birds. The habit of clinging to the long slender reeds of the marshes and the effort to retain their perch when the reeds are swayed about by the wind has tended to produce stronger and larger feet in the true Ammodrami and to develope stiff “pointed 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119 tail feathers in contrast to the soft rounded tail feathers of the Sav- annah Sparrow and other nearly related upland Finches. The speaker also stated that in the Bobolink, another inhabitant of reedy marshes, and in the Woodpeckers and Creepers which cling to the perpendicular trunks of trees, this modification of the tail was very clearly shown. In the case of the Nuthatch, however, which has similar habits to the W oodpecker and Creeper, the tail feathers remain soft and rounded. Mr. Witmer Stone had called the speaker’s attention to this fact and had further suggested that the failure to develop stiff-pointed tail feathers in the case of the Nuthatch was probably due to the bird’s habit of traveling down the tree trunks instead of up, with the head directed towards the ground. Being thus unable to utilize the tail as a means of support, there has been no opportunity for environment to act in modifying its structure. The Sandstones of Chester Valley, Pennsylvania. —The following communication was read from Mr. Toro. D. Ranp:— I desire to announce to the Academy the finding of a rock with all the characteristics of Potsdam sandstone, on the south side of the limestone of the Chester Valley. The existence of a sandstone, supposed to be the Potsdam, on the south as well as on the north side of the valley was noted by Prof. Rogers, but no full description of it was given and his observations have been doubted. The See- ond Geological Survey failed to find it, indeed laid stress on its absence. The sandstone south of King of Prussia was described by the late Prof. Lewis and myself, but nothing was observed to deter- mine its age. ’ The construction by the Pennsylvania Railroad of a branch from near Downingtown to Trenton has afforded a better opportunity of examining the rocks of this region than any heretofore had. This branch, known as the Trenton Cutotf Railroad, leaves the main line at Glen Loch 25°3 miles northwest of Philadelphia and goes in a nearly straight line, varying little from N. 70° E. At Glen Loch it is in the hydromiea, thence passes into limestone (No 2), with usually much soil overlying; the dip being steep to southeast. Nearly north of Paoli Station the railroad curves slightly toward the south, crosses the road running north from Paoli Station, and then enters a considerable cut. This cut is Ina very sandy slate, or slaty sandstone, and in this is one stratum which has the rhom- boidal jointings, the micaceous partings and the minute tourma- lines, so characteristic of the Potsdam in this part of Pennsylvania. The road running north from Paoli Station through hydromic “a schist, crosses, near the north foot of the South Valley Hill, a prom- inent outcrop of the hydromica schist, here almost roofing slate, dip- ing 90° to 70°, S. 35° E.; about an eichth of a mile north of this, traces of the s sands stone may be seen where the road bed has been lowered to permit the branch railroad to p:ss over it. The cut 120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. mentioned is about an eighth of a mile east of this. The sandstone dips about S. 10° E., 30°. Study of this region forced me to believe in the correctness of Mr. Hall’s conclusion that the hydromica of the South Valley Hill overlies the limestone, and further, that the sandstone and lime- stone of Cream Valley are the Potsdam and limestone of the Ches- ter Valley rising on the southeasterly leg of the synelinal which in- cludes the hydromica. But if this sandstone north of Paoli is Pots- dam, occurring as it does between the limestone and the hydromica, this theory is untenable and the theory of Prof. Rogers and of Dr. Frazer that the hydromica is older than the Potsdam must be cor- rect. It is my wish to study this further but I desire to record the observation at once while the exposure is favorable for study, that others may have the opportunity to examine it. FEBRuARY 17. The President, Dr. Lrerpy, in the chair. A paper entitled, “ Notes on some little-known American fossil Tortoises,” by Dr. G. Baur, was presented for publication. On the Age of the Peace Creek Beds, Florida.—The following communication from Mr. Wa. H. Datu was read by the Presi- dent :— “Tam just back from Florida and have been exploring Peace Creek where the fossil bones are found and have determined the stratigraphical relation of the beds they come out of. I thought you would like to know about it. They are under Marine Pliocene beds corresponding to part of the Caloosahatchie beds and overlie or are mixed with older Pliocene phosphatized rock which has many of the Caloosahatchie shells in it but which on the whole seems rather older. The bones then,—that is those from Peace Creek, which are all derived from one original stratum not over two feet thick,—are older Pliocene beyond any question. I found actually in the bed mastodon, manatee, horse. gly ptodon and big turtle with others I did not recognize. I did not try to collect mace as my visit was hurried. I saw also beautiful Pliocene rock from Wakulla Co., with bones actually in it, as well as finely preserved casts of Pliocene shells. I think the big Elephas columbi is older than the forms above mentioned, at all events sections of its tusks are found right on top of the Miocene near Bartow and their state of fossiliza- tion is much more complete than in the case of the bones from the clay or Peace Creek beds.” On a probable new species of Bipalium.—Dr. BENJAMIN SHARP called attention to a large land Planarian, which had been given to 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121 him by Dr. Emily Hunt, who had obtained it from a green-house at Lansdowne, Pa. The land Planarians, according to most authorities, are carnivo- rous and nocturnal. ‘The reproduction of Planarians by division or fission had been known since the publication of Dalyell’s valua- ble researches in 1814,' but as far as the speaker was informed, it had never been observed in land Planarians. In the specimen in his possession, a portion of the posterior end of the animal became detached at two different times. These pieces are still living and active, one being ten days and the other two weeks old. The mouth in the land Planarians, as is the case with most of the forms, is situated near the middle of the body and opening on its under surface. One species of Bipalium, named by Schmarda? Sphirocephalus dendrophilus, presents a remarkable form of nerve system widely differing in complexity and arrangement from that of any other known Planarian. In the expanded or lobed anterior portion of the body (the so-called head) is situated a nerve ring closely resembling the cesophageal ring of the higher worms, and from this pass posteriorly two nerve-trunks joined by commissures or ganglia (?), strongly suggesting the segmented arrangement of the nerve system of the Annelids. This form of nerve system suggests two very interesting questions: Are the land Planarians progressing toward a segmented type, or are they degenerations from such a type? The fact ‘that the complete esophageal ring does not surround the cesophagus and that the mouth is situated some distance posterior to it, would lead to the supposition that the present mouth is not the primitive one and that the cesophageal ring indicates where that primitive mouth once ex- isted. The speaker was inclined to believe that this form of nerve system indicated rather a degeneration from a higher type than an evolution toward a more complex one. He inclined to believe that the specimen under consideration re- presents a new species of the genus Bipalium. When in the ex- tended condition it measured nine and a half inches; before the loss of its posterior end it was probably ten or eleven inches in length. In breadth, in its extended condition, it measured one- seventh of an inch; in thickness about one-tenth of an inch. The expanded head was roughly semicircular, measuring one-fourth of an inch across and one-fifth of an inch in length, i.e. from what might be called the neck to the anterior margin. As far as discoy- erable by means of a hand-lens no eye-spots or ocelli could be de- tected, but these may exist and if so, will be revealed by sections when examined under a higher power. 1 J. G. Dalveil. Observations on some interesting Phenomena in Animal Physiology, exhibited by several species of Planariae. Edinburgh, 1814. 2 L. K.Schmardi. Neue wirbellose Thiere, beobachtet und gesammelt auf einer Reise um die Erde. Band I. Neue Turbellarien, Rotorien und Anneliden. Erste Haelfte. Leipzig, 1861. Pages 36 and 37, Plate VIII, fig. 83. 9 122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The tail is rounded and not pointed, as in most of the species of this genus; the body in the extended condition, does not taper but holds the same breadth and thickness from the neck to the end of the tail. The ground color of the animal is grayish-yellow, which is traversed by five longitudinal black bands, the central one being the broadest and those at each side of this quite faint. The exter- nal bands are marginal from the neck some distance backward, whence they run inside the margin to the tail where they join. The two pairs of lateral bands coalesce at the region of the neck and none of the bands are extended into the expanded head which differs from the rest of the animal in being of a grayish color. Stimpson’s! species, B. virgatwm trom Loo Choo, seems to be most nearly related to this supposed new species. The colors, however, differ, the median band passes into the head and the margins of the head and neck are thickly set with ocelli. This species is small, measuring only two inches in length. The name BreaALItUM MANUBRIATUM was proposed for the new species of which an anatomical description and figures will pro- bably be published at a later date. Note on the Boring Sponge of the Oyster —Pror. Letpy remarked that in a recent letter received from Mr. H. J. Carter, of England, the able authority on the Porifera, he had directed his attention to a catalogue of sponges collected by Mr. Willcox on the coast of Florida published in our Proceedings, 1884, p. 202, in which he in- dicates the usual massive, solid form of Raphyrus Griffiths, Bk., as the boring sponge of the oyster Cliona celata, and further points out a branched tubular variety, the same as that described later by Prof. Leidy as Cliona phalica, under the name of * ramotubulata.” In a recent “ Report on the Porifera,” by R. Hanitsch, of Liver- pool, received from the author, he agrees with the speaker and Mr. Carter, that the boring sponge of the oyster, both of our shores and those of Europe, and the massive forms, represented by the Raphyrus Grifithsii of Bowerbank, all belong to the one species, the Cliona celata of Grant. FEBRUARY 24. Dr. DanteL G. Brinton in the chair. Twenty-five persons present. A yaper entitled, “ Echinoderms and Arthropods from Japan,” by J. E. Ives, was presented for publication. 1 W. Stimpson. Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum quae in: Expeditione ad Oceanum Pacificum Septentrionalem a Republica Federate missa, Johanne Rodgers duce, observavit et descripsit W. Stimpson. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1857, p. 30. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125 The death of William Massey, a member, February 16th, was announced. The following were elected members:—Wm. 8. Stewart M. D., Henry T. Coates, Richard D. Barclay, Wm. C. Carrick and Samuel N. Rhoads. The following were ordered to be printed :— 124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. A REVIEW OF THE CRETACEOUS MAMMALIA|! BY HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN. In July, 1889, I received a copy of the “ Discovery of the Creta- ceous Mammalia’”’ by Professor O. C. Marsh, and shortly after- wards wrote to the author calling attention to all the points in which it appeared to me he was mistaken and suggested that he should revise the paper himself. This was a year and a half ago. In the meantime the paper has been widely distributed and its facts have been accepted without question by many who have no special knowledge of the Mesozoic mammals and with considerable hesitation and criticism by those who have. I refer especially to the notices by Lydekker,® Lemoine,‘ Cope’ and Dames.° It seems, therefore, that it is now best to care- fully review, in a manner which cannot be misunderstood either by the author or by others, what appears to me to be one of the most remarkable contributions to palzeontology ever published. Criti- cism can, of course, be based only upon the published diagnoses, descriptions and figures in comparison with our present general knowledge of these early mammals. Other evidence is promised by the author and I venture to predict that it will confirm the greater part of the conclusions reached in this review. First as to extent and general character: the conspectus of the author impresses us that this fauna is not only highly varied but contains forms which are mostly new to science. Four orders are believed to be represented, the Allotheria, Pantotheria, Marsupialia and Insectivora. The author finds six families among the Allothe- ria alone, four of which are new; five new families in all. Sixteen new genera and twenty-seven new species are described. All of the types are isolated teeth, excepting those of Camptomus. With the exception of Halodon, Cimolomys and Dipriodon, only one tooth of 1 Presented to the Society of Morphologists, Boston, Dec. 30th, 1290; to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Tuesday, Jan. 20th, 1891. 2 «The Discovery of the Cretaceous Mammalia.” O.C. Marsh, American Journal of Science, Parts I. and II., July and August, 1889. 3 Manual of Paleontology, Vol. II, p. 1268. * Academy of Sciences, Paris, March 3d, 1890. 5 American Naturalist, June, 1889, p. 490. 8 Neues Jahrb. f. Geol, Min. u. Pal. 1890, p. 141-3. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125 each species is described, 7. e. from different parts of the jaws, and we are given to understand that the associated teeth, found with each. will be described in the Memoir now in preparation by the writer under the auspices of the United States Geological Survey. Before this varied faunal table is generally adopted into palzeon- tological literature, let us examine the author’s types and diagnoses, keeping in mind the present state of knowledge. Previous litera- ture has apparently not been consulted by the author except in the matter of nomenclature. The result is that some well-known prin- ciples which govern the extremely complex and confusing dentition of the Multituberculates are left out of consideration entirely, as well as some of the main characters of the dentition of the Mesozoic mammals in general, and some characters which enable us to dis- tinguish between the teeth of mammals and those of reptiles and fishes. As regards the Multituberculates (Allotheria), it is now well known that their teeth show the following characters : 1, The rows of tubercles in the true molars of one jaw fit into the longitudinal grooves of the molars of the other jaw. 2. In some families there are three rows of tubercles and two grooves in the up- per molars and two rows with one groove in the lower molars (Pla- giaulacidae) ; in other families there are conversely two rows above and three below. 3. In every known species, the last molar is in- variably simpler than the penultimate molar both as to length of crown and number of tubercles. 4. That the premolars are of two types: a. trenchant, 6. tubercular. When tubercular they can be distinguished from the molars by the absence of grooves, or closure of the grooves by tubercles. 5. The primary function of the inci- sors is to pierce the food, the secondary function is to facilitate the backward motion of the jaws as in the rodents. As regards the ordinal terms, Allotheria and Pantotheria, they have not as yet been defined’ or adopted. The former is equivalent to Multituberculata which has been defined and is now in general use.” A. MULTITUBERCULATE Forms, (ALLOTHERIA.) 1. Cimolomys gracilis, (Pl. II, figs. 1-4), described as an upper molar ; first referred to Tritylodontidae (Owen), subsequently to new 1 See Osborn, ‘* Mesozoic Mammalia,” p. 257. 2 See the works of Lydekker, Lemoine, Déderlein, Trouessart, Schlosser, Os- born and others. 126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. family Cimolomidae.—Comparing this type with the upper molar of Neoplagiaulax,! Lemoine, we find it is a first upper molar of one of the Plagiaulacidae, Gill. 2. Cimolomys bellus, (no figure), the type is referred to a distinct species of Cimolomys——The description and measurements indicate that it isa second upper molar of C. gracilis. 3. Cimolomys digona, (Pl. VII, figs. 1-4), the type is described as an upper molar of a third species of this genus, referred to the Cimolomidae.—It is an upper molar of one of the Plagiaulacidae. A premolar, (Pl. VII, figs. 13-16), is rightly described as an up- per premolar and correctly associated with this genus, (compare fig. 19, Lemoine’). 4. Cimolodon nitidus, (Pl. II, figs. 5-8). The type is described asan upper molar representing a new genus and family, the Cimolodontidae—Comparing it with the lower molars of Ptilodus,’ Cope, it is evident that the type isa first lower molar of one of the Plagiaulacidae. 5. Nanomys minutus, (Pl. I, figs. 9-12), the type is described as a last upper molar of the left side and referred to the Cimolodontidae—A comparison with Ptilodus shows that it is a last lower molar of the right side, belonging to one of the Plagiaulacidae.* 6. Halodon sculptus, (Pl. ILI, figs. 11-13). The type is a fourth lower premolar right#y referred to one of the Plagiaulacidae. A superior incisor, (PI. III, figs. 1-5) is referred to this species. —It apparently belongs to a much larger form. 7. Halodon serratus, (Pl. IL, figs. 14— 17). The type is a fourth lower premo- lar, a smaller species rightly referred to one of the Plagiaulacidae. A superior incisor, (Pl. III, figs. 14— Fig. 1. =. 5 : é Ptah Sas nee 17) is referred to this species.—It appar- premolars of a, 4. sculptus; ently belongs to a larger form. 6, H. serratus; c, H. formo- a e Sat fe Lou kaart Wallet It is a well known fact that the upper specimens. molars of the Plagiaulacidae have three 1 « Ftude sur le Neoplagiaulax de la Faune Eocéne inférieure etc.’ Bull. d. 1. Soc. Géol. de France, Feb. 12, 1883, p. 259. Pl. VI, fig. 17. 2 (Op. cits, Pl Vi, figs 19e: 3 This type (C. #i¢idus) has four internal and seven external tubercles; while Ptilodus troversartianus has four internal and six external tubercles. 4 «The Tertiary Marsupialia,’”” Cope, Am. Nat., July, 1884, p. 694. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1 24F/ rows of tubercles while the lower molars have but two, and that the cusps of the lower rows fit into the valleys of the upper teeth. This is beautifully demonstrated in the author’s own figures as here re- produced and rearranged in figure 2 ;—a is the type of Cimolomys gracilis, which fits Bee ce, the type of Cimolodon nitidus; while 4, the type of Nanonvys min- utus would probably be found to coincide simi- larly with the type of Cimolomys bellus, unfor- tunately not figured by the author. This gives us the characters of the Fig. 2. Ubper and lower Malas of Cimolomys. (Cimolomidae), a, Cimolomys gracilis. (Cimo- | re lodontidae), 4, Cimolodon nitidus c, Nanomys bly anew genus ( Cino- minutus. After Marsh. All type specimens, lomys) of the Plagiaula- cidae, intermediate between Plagiaulax with three well developed premolars, and Ptilodus with one large and one extremely small pre- molar. This genus cannot at present be defined, because so far as we can compare the molars and premolars, they closely resemble in size and development the corresponding teeth of Ptilodus. The pre- molars of this genus are, of course, found in the species of Halodon. The premolar referred to H. serratus agrees best in size with the molars of C. gracilis. The accompanying restoration of the upper and lower jaws of Cimolomys gracilis shows the various relationships of this animal as given in the above diagnoses by the author : molars of what was possi- AR LI -—~ Cimolomys gracilis Qk) ue ; Cimolomidae. “™~ Cimolomys bellus ( aie, Nanomys minutus \ Plagiaulacidae ~ Halodon = ; Cimolodontidae. x | serratus ----------' 7 ----- Cimolodon aitiduss i Fig. 3 Upper and lower molars and afevialas of 2? Cimolomys, in position. These relationships will probably be increased, rather than dimin- ished by future discoveries.’ As it is, an upper and lower jaw referred to three families, five genera and five speciestis without pre- cedent. ay 5ee Allacodon lentus which belongs either to this genus or to Meniscosssus. 128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 189i: 8. Dipriodon robustus, (Pl. U, figs. 18-15). The type is proba- bly correctly described as a last upper molar of the left side ; it is referred to a new family the Dipriodontidae. 9. Dipriodon lunatus, (Pl. I, figs. 16-18). The type is rightly described as a first or second upper molar—Keeping in mind the larger size and greater complexity of the more anterior molars, there is no ground for referring it to a new species. 10. Tripriodon coelatus, (Pl. II, figs. 19-21). The type is de- seribed asa first upper molar and is referred to a new fam- ily the Tripriodontidac —It resembles in the arrangement of its denticles the lower molars of Stereognathus, and, as shown be- low, isa last lower molar belonging to the genus Meniscoés- sus, Cope. 11. Selenacodon fragilis, (Pl. II, figs. 22-24). The type is de- scribed as an upper molar distinguished by crescentoid tuber- cles from the foregoing —It is an anterior lower molar belonging to the genus Men- iscoéssus, Cope. 12. Selenacodon brevis, (P1. VII, figs. 9-12). Fig. 3a. The type is described as an upper tooth Meniscoéssus conguts- 4 yarently from the left side—As the accom- tus, Cope. Type. An é é ; E inferior molar x z. panying figures show, it agrees in every detail, except the degree of wear, with the type of Meniscoéssus conquistus, Cope; it isa lower molar, probably the last. Fig. 4. Upper and lower molars of Meniscoéssus. (Dipriodontidae) a, Dipricdon robusius, crown view and end view; d, D. Junatus, crown view and end view. (Jripriodontidae), 6, Zriprdodon coelatus, crown view and end view; c, Selenacodon fragilis, crown view and end view ; e, S. brevis. After Marsh. All type specimens excepting c. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129 The lower incisor (Pl. VIII, figs. 1-3) is probably correctly re- ferred. 13. Tripriodon caperatus (PI. II, figs. 18-20). The type is cor- rectly described as a lower incisor. No ground is assigned for re- ferring it to a new species. Similar incisors of smaller size (PI. ITI, figs. 21-22; Pl. VIII, figs. 1-3) are referred respectively to Tripri- odon coelatus and Selenacodon brevis. This collection of molars demonstrates that Meniscoéssus, like Stereognathus, belongs to a family in which the tubercles are cre- scentoid and arranged in two rows in the upper molars and three rows inthe lower molars. Thisis admirably shown in theauthor’s own figures as rearranged in figure 4. a, The type of Dipriodon robus- tus is seen to fit upon b, the type of Tripriodon coelatus. d, and e, belong to older individuals but the worn cusps and valleys coincide ; they are respectively the author’s types of Dipriodon lunatus, and a molar referred to Sel- enacodon fragilis as it agrees exactly with the type except in point of wear, The lower incisor, type of Tripriodon cap- eratus, corresponds in size with these mo- lars, the two smaller in- cisors, referred to T. coe- latus and Selenacodon brevis, have the same Paka es shape and grooved a, * Upper incisor of Halodon sculptus;” 6b, . 7 «‘ Lower incisor of 7ripriodon caperatus,” type; c, sides. (1) When these “Upper incisor of Halodon serratus ;’ d, “Lower incisors are placed side ineisor of Selenacodon brevis.” Afver Marsh. . . . = by side as in figure 5 with the upper incisors referred by the author to Halodon sculptus and Halodon serratus we observe that the longitudinal and trans- verse diameters of the crowns and fangs coincide exactly in meas- urement, rendering it highly probable that they belong to the same species. (2) The question is, do these teeth belong to Halodon or Meniscoéssus ? We observe that the lower incisor associated with 130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Halodon formosus (Pl. VIII, figs. 32-385), has the enamel confined to a band as in Ptilodus and Neoplagiaulax. Itissmooth. It is, there- fore, probable that all these striated, completely enamelled incisors belong to Meniscoéssus. (3) When moreover it is seen that these incisors are Fig. sa. far too large to be associated with the premo- Bask eee “; larsof H. seulptus and H. serratus, we have Dipriodon robustus. further grounds for associating them with Men- iscoéssus with which they agree in size. The tooth assigned by the author as the upper incisor of Dipriodon robustus apparently be- longs to a reptile. It is unlike any incisor hitherto found with the Multituberculata. Dipriodontidae. Plagiaulacidae. a PP 8 eee Dipriodon Junatus. Halodon seulptus ---- CoS) Dipriodon robustus. Tripriodon caperatus ~---\\ NIN Cat INTIND S Tripriodon coelatus. _ — Ts pa ry Tripriodontidae. \\ ee Selenacodon fragilis. r--- Tripriodontidae, Fig. 6. Upper and lower molars of Menzscoéssus in position. (Association of incisors with molars conjectural.) The accompanying restoration is based upon the foregoing consid- erations and shows that according to the author the relationships of Meniscoéssus are as varied as those of its contemporary, Cimolomys, including three families, four genera and seven species. 14. Allacodon lentus and A. pumilus (Pl. VIII, figs. 22-26-31). The types are described as upper molars of a genus related to Allodon and Bolodon and referred to the Allodontidae.—It is a uni- versal characteristic of the molars of the Multituberculata that, as the grooves are adapted to fore and aft wear, the tubercles are arranged on the sides; in the type of Al/acodon a tubercle stops the valley ; these types are unadapted to fore and aft wear, they are, therefore, probably premolars and belong either with Meniscoéssus or Cim- olomys, or possibly with some other genus, the molars of which are not represented in this collection. Upper premolars of this type are seen in Chirox, Cope; Bolodon, Owen; and Ctenacodon, Marsh. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131 15. Oracodon anceps, (Pl. VIL, figs. 13-16). This type is rightly described as a premolar, but no grounds are given for considering that it belongs to a dis- tinct genus and species. 16. Camptomus amplus, (Pl. V, figs. 1-2). Fig. 7. sas ‘ : J : Allacodon lentus. The type is a scapula with which are associated After Marsh. Types. other bones, caleaneum, astragalus, interclavicle. No grounds are assigned for separating these remains from genera founded upon the teeth.—The astragalus bears the same proportion to the molar-teeth of Meniscoéssus that we observe in Polymustodon ; it is also apparently perforated. The affinities of these forms to the Monotremata have been observed by Cope; the coraco-scapular facet, - therefore, strengthens the supposition that some of these bones at least, belong to Meniscoéssus. In any case they cannot be considered as good types. This completes the Multituberculate forms. B. TrRiTruBERCULATE FORMS. 17. Dryolestes tenax, (no figure). The type is a lower jaw with a mylohyoid groove, in which the number and character of the teeth “cannot be determined.” The author’s reference is provisional. 18. Didelphops (Didelphodon) vorax, (Pl. IV, figs. 1-3). The type is an upper molar, distinguished from Didelphys by interme- diate tubercles.—This character does not separate it from the large number of trituberculates with similar molars; the genus is, therefore, undefined at present. The other species D. ferox and D. comptus are also undefinable. 19. Pediomys elegans, (PI. IV, figs. 23-25). The type is an upper molar.—It is not distinguished generically from Didelphodon. 20. Cimolestes curtus and incisus, (PI. IV, figs. 8-18). The types are lower molars.—Like Didelphodon, these forms cannot be defined, they are tuberculo-sectorial. It is evident that we have here remains of two distinct and prob- ably new genera which may be accepted without definition. OC. INCERTAE SEDIS. 21. Stagodon nitor, (Pl. VI, figs. 22-25). The itypes are a few teeth with single fangs, referred to a new family the Stagodontidae. —They do not resemble the teeth of any known mammal although described as having two fangs, which are, however, not shown in the figures. The premolar associated is distinctly mammalian. 132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 22. Platacodon nanus, (Pl. VIII, figs. 4-12). The types are com- pared to the molars of Chrysochloris—They do not bear the most remote resemblance to the molars of Chrysochloris or any Shia eaten eee nitor. After eee Loto Be Marsh. ‘Types. Prof. Dames considers 6, Plataccdon nanus. After Marsh. Types. that they belong to the Cyprinoid fishes. The above types do not resemble in the most remote degree the molars in either the multituberculate or trituberculate series—the only two mammalian series hitherto represented in all the discov- eries of Mesozvic or Eocene times. Nor have they, as figured, any of the characteristics which we expect to find in mammalian teeth? They should, therefore, be considered either as reptilian or icthyop- sidan; we cannot agree with the author that they are “evidently mammalian.” The above analysis may be summarized under the following heads, we find that the author has: 1. Separated parts which evidently be- long together, vide, various teeth of Cimolomys and Meniscoéssus; 2. United parts which apparently or certainly do not belong together, vide, the large upper incisors with Cimolomys, the reptilian or fish molar of Stagodon with a mammalian premolar, the reptilian tooth as an upper incisor of Dipriodon; 3. Associated or identified repti- lian or icthyopsidan teeth as mammalian, vide, Platacodon, Stagodon and incisor of D. robustus. The large Cretaceous fauna described by the writer is therefore seen to be principally composed of synonyms. We must eliminate : 1. The terms preoccupied by other authors. 2. The terms founded upon different parts of the same animals and thus largely preoccupied by the author himself. 3. The terms founded upon imperfect or indefinite types. 4. The terms founded upon reptilian or icthyopsidan teeth. 1 This author reaches conclusions very similar to mine in regard to this paper. Neues Jahr. Min. Geol., 1890, pp. 141-143. 2 See H. G. Seeley, “On the Nature and Limits of Reptilian Character in Mammalian Teeth.” Proc. Roy. Soc., April 4, 1888, p. 129. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133 A. ALLOTHERIA. 1. Cimolomidae. Cimolomys gracilis ue bellus digona 2. Cimolodontidae. Cimolodon nitidus Nanomys minutus. 3. Plagiaulacidae. Halodon sculptus . serratus formosus «“ “ee } ) 4. Dipriodontidue. ) Dipriodon robustus 5 lunatus 5. Tripriodontidae Tripriodon coelatus i caperatus Selenacodon fragilis ce brevis oe pumilus ? Camptomus amplus ? Oracodon anceps ? B. PANTOTHERIA. ? 7. Dryolestidae. ? Dryolestes tenax C. MARSUPIALIA. Didelphops vorax & ferox comptus Cimolestes incisus : curtus D. INSECTIVORA. Pediomys elegans “ E. INCERTAE SEDIS. 8. Stagodontidae. Stagodon nitor Platacodon nanus | | 6. Allodontidae. Allacodon lentus ss SY —-— + -- —_ ee = A.§MuLTITUBERCULATA, Cope. == 1. Plagiaulacidae Gill. Cimolomys, Marsh, two or three species. = ?2. Stereognathidae, fam. nov. Meiiscoéssus, Cope, two spe- cles. Probably preoccupied. Indefinite types or preoccupied. Indefinite type. B. Order indeterminate—Creodonta, Insectivora or Marsupialia. —— Didelphops, Marsh, two species. — Cimolestes, Marsh, ? species. Not defined. Founded upon Reptilian or Ic- thyopsidan teeth. 134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. This reduces the Cretaceous mammals described in these two papers to one well determined order or sub-order, two well deter- mined families and four or five genera, one of which can now be well defined (Meniscoéssus) while the remainder are probably dis- tinct genera which we may be able to define by the acquisition of more material (Cimolomys, Didelphops and Cimolestes). There is no question that the majority of the remaining generic names are synonyms although it is quite possible that some of the types de- scribed, such as Oracodon and Pediomys may be found to represent distinct or new genera. It may be said that this analysis has almost entirely eliminated the work of the author. This unfortunately is what is necessary if we would render this contribution of any permanent value in palae- ontology. We are then left with a series of teeth which represent rare skill on the part of the collector and are figured with remark- able accuracy by the draughtsman. A few points of interest upon the collection as a whole may be mentioned. The Multituberculata. The preponderance of teeth belonging to members of this order would appear to indicate that it flourished during this period. Cimolomys represents a connecting form between Plagiaulax, upper Jurassic, with three premolars and Ptilodus of the lowest Eocene withtwo. Thesmallestspecies, C. formosus, apparently hasas many groovesupon the fourth premolaras we observe in Ptilodus, and the first lower molar has even more tubercles than we find in the corresponding tooth of the lower Eocene genus. These grooves and tubercles mark the stages of development, and it would appear that Cimolomys is not far removed from Ptilodus ; this relation can only be determined by the discovery of additional teeth, we may find that Cimolomys has a large third premolar. Another interesting fact is that Meniscoéssus does not belong with the Plagiaulacidae, as has been generally supposed hitherto,’ but should apparently be placed with Stereognathus (with which its re- semblance in molar structure has always been recognized) in a dis- tinct family, the Stereognathidae, distinguished by the presence of two rows of tubercles in the upper molars and three in the lower, of erescentoid pattern. The more numerous tubercles in Meniscoéssus would accord well with its more recent character. - Cope, Osborn, Lydekker. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. B35) There are thus apparently only two families of the multitubercu- lates represented here unless as the author has suggested, A//acodon belongs to the Bolodontidae. We have yet to find the successors of the Tritylodontidue and predecessors of Polymastodon and Chirox of the lower Eocene.’ As for the trituberculate forms there are evidently two distinct genera which probably belong to different families. The types of Didelphops and Cimolestes closely resemble molars found respec- tively among the Mesodonta, the Creodonta, Insectivora and Mar- supialia. Their systematic position is, therefore, very uncertain from this evidence. They mark, however, a very great advance upon the Jurassic forms in tooth evolution. We find in Didelphops, the earliest low-crowned tritubercular molar which has been ob- tained, with one or two intermediate tubercles, while the lower mo- lar is the earliest quinquetubercular tooth known. The Cimolestes molar is tuberculo-sectorial and presents a less marked advance upon jurassic tooth types, but has nevertheless a broad talon, with both the entoconid and hypoconid developed, whereas all jurassic forms present the hypoconid only. The bones of the appendicular skeleton present a number of very interesting points, some of which the author mentions; these are, the coracoid facet upon the scapula; the interclavicular. We note also the flat astragalus, without aneck, apparently perforated by an astragalar foramen, and with a broad cuboidal facet as well as the navicular facet. The caleaneum has a narrow sustentaculum. We look forward with great interest to Part III of this series of papers, as the collection is a most valuable and interesting one, and the above review is not intended in any way to depreciate the impor- tance of an increased knowledge of the Cretaceous mammals. 1 The nearest resemblance to Folymastodon is that observed in the striated lower incisors here copied in figure 5. This genus will undoubtedly be found represented in these beds. 2 The observation rests solely upon the figure. All astragali of the lower Eocene display this foramen. 136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN YUCATAN. BY PROF. ANGELO HEILPRIN. The observations recorded in the following pages were made in the early spring of 1890 in the course of the explorations by the Expedition organized under the auspices of the Academy of Nat- ural Sciences. The points of investigation are included between Progreso on the northern coast, the cave-region of Calcehtok (in the first range of hills) ov the southwest, Labna on the south, Tun- kas (on the Valladolid road) on the east, and the Port of Qilam (Silam). So far as I know, no critical examination of the geologi- eal features of any portion of this region, or indeed, of any part of Yucatan, had been made prior to our visit. Unfortunately, want of time did not permit us to penetrate beyond the range of moun- tains (Sierra de Yucatan) above referred to, but from information received from various sources and from the general lay of the land, T am led to believe that much or most of the region beyond pos- sesses the same general geognostic features as those which charac- terize the country traversed by us. Of the few travelers who have succeeded in penetrating into the deep interior of Yucatan, there is scarcely one who has given even as much as a hint of the geology of the country ; but more sur- prising yet, even the geography of the region is unknown. The traveler has but to consult the latest maps of the peninsula, official and unofficial, to see how varied a course might be picked out be- tween almost any two points that are somewhat removed from one another. A direct course of 40-50 miles may differ, according to the maps used, by fully 10 or 20 degrees of the compass ; mountain chains may have to be crossed or not, just as it suits the convenience of the traveler in his choice. Lakes appear in one chart, and they are replaced by water-courses in another; or both are entirely wanting in a third. Towns and roads appear where, in reality, there is but a wilderness, with possibly a traversing mule or deer path. Even the principal range of hills, that which runs in a N. W.—S. E. line from beyond Ticul in the direction of Peto, and culminates in an elevation of approximately 900 feet,’ is wholly 1 Determined barometrically by Mr. Edward H. Thompson, U.S. Consul at Merida; the position of this most elevated point is not far from Xul, a few leagues southeast of Labna. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137 omitted from some maps, while it is deflected at a right angle on other maps; again, the chain frequently appears supplemented or replaced by aS. W.—N. E. chain terminating at, or passing, Val- ladolid. It is difficult to account for these geographical aberrations. The map accompanying Stephens’ work (1843) is in a general way accurate—much more so than most recent maps—and the position of the principal mountain mass is given in its nearly true points. That remarkably accurate observer also omits the non-existent rivers and lakes, making exception, however, in favor of the actually existing lake (southeast of Peto) of Chichenkanab. Our scanty knowledge of the interior of Yucatan is doubtless due in principal part to the difficulty (or assumed difficulty) of pene- trating into the region of the revolted Mayas. It is currently be- lieved that no white man, except at extreme risk to his life, can penetrate into the interior either from the west or from the north ; but the experience of Censul Thompson, as proved by his travels, shows that good judgment and a knowledge of the Maya language may effectually protect a non-Mexican from the dangers of assault which are certainly intended to be directed solely against the Mex- icans and their supporters—in other words, against those to whom the revolted Indians decline to recognize allegiance. The so-called “wild” Indians of the interior are, in fact, identical with the Mayas of the north, and in their behavior to strangers, except to Mexicans, they are as peacefully inclined as are their (supposed) more highly civilized brethren of the north. Hence, it is not difficult to enter their country from the side of the British possessions, 7. e., from Balize. It is from that side that Dr. Gaumer, the well-known col- lector of birds (now a resident of Izamal), and his wife penetrated. First after Stephens to make an extended tour through Yucatan was Captain Lindesay Brine, R. N., who, in the early part of 1870 (January 30th to April 8th) traversed the region from Guatemala to Sisal. A brief account of this journey, entitled “On the Ruined Cities of Central America,” is published in the Journal of the Royal Geographical Society for 1872 (vol. XLII). No geological facts are given in this paper, but there is a suggestive reference to the conservative or preservative character of the climate, which may have some bearing upon the determination of age of the prehistoric ruins. It has been urged, and seemingly with much force, by those who uphold the comparatively recent construction of these buildings, that the sharp arétes or cornices which still ornament the exterior 10 138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. walls cannot be of great antiquity, since continued exposure to at- mospheric influences would in a comparatively brief period turn rounded edges and corners. In examining the walls of Uxmal I was especially struck with the knife-edges which mark long courses of marble, as straight and clean as though they had been laid in our own generation. I was immediately impressed with this cir- cumstance as strong evidence tending against great antiquity. But in the light of what Captain Brine says, I am not sure that this evi- dence of itself carries much weight. Thus, it is asserted by this traveler, that he “found the names of Stephens, and Catherwood, and Pawling, which were written apparently with a bit of charred wood on the inner surface of the entrance archway [at Palenque], as fresh as when first done in 1840”°—+. e., thirty years previous. This is certainly a most extraordinary instance of resistance to at- mospheric influences. Of the very few references touching the physiography of Yucatan, the most important are contained in a paper by Dr. Arthur Schott on the coast formation of the north, published in Petermann’s Mittheilungen for 1866." In this paper the author discusses the nature of the long sea-dam (sand and shell dune) which skirts the coast for a length of some 170 miles, and of the brackish water-strip or lagoon which it encloses. The double formation is attributed to the antagonistic effects of the sea and of the subterranean (or sub- marine) outflows (of fresh water) from the land; the sea-dam is normally broken at but two or three points throughout its course, the breaks occurring in positions—as opposite the estuary of the so- called Rio Lagartos—where the terrestrial waters emerge with suf- ficient force, or have accumulated in sufficient volume, to overcome the oceanic pressure from the outside. Dr. Schott incidentally refers to the condition of the interior “cenotes” or sinks, whose univer- sality throughout the region is recognized, and remarks that inas- much as the level of the water in these is approximately that of the sea (varying two or three inches toward the close of the rainy sea- son), the depth of the cenotes must in itself be an index of the ele- vation of the land surrounding them (the elevation increasing as we recede from the sea). Thus, it is held that in, and immediately about, the capital city, Merida, the cenotes have a depth of from 26-28 feet ; at some little distance south of the city, 50 feet; half 1 Die Kiistenbildung des nérdlichen Yukatan. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159 way between Merida and the north coast, 12-15 feet, and at Pro- ereso, on the coast, 0. I determined the depth of the cenotes about Merida and found it to be approximately as stated by Schott. But it is beyond ques- tion that the water-level in the cenotes generally, except possibly in the case of a few that are not very distantly removed from the sea, has no connection with the level of the sea. This is shown by the condition of the aguadas, or larger basins, where the level of the water is far from constant, and varies within very broad limits. The same condition is illustrated by some of the deeper caves, such as Bolonchen, for example, in which frequently no water of accumula- tion is met with until a level seemingly considerably below that of the sea is reached.’ In any consideration of the geognostic features of Yucatan, three distinct regions of the country must be recognized: the lowland plains, the mountains (perhaps more properly designated hills), and the submerged plateau which gradually shelves into the Gulf and is known as the Yucatan Bank. ‘The last, in whatever way it be considered, is, it appears to me, geologically a part of the continent- al area. The lowland plains, lying north of the Sierra de Yucatan, rise gradually as we proceed inland from the coast-border at the rate, perhaps, of a foot or a foot and a half per mile, which is, of course, considerably less than the pitch of the sea-floor immediately north or west of the peninsula. But in this feeble rise of the land we have no positive indication that it is the normal of elevation, as denuda- tion has doubtless done something to level the country since its emergence from the sea. But from such stratigraphical correlation as we found possible to make, it would seem that the leveling has been insignificant, and perhaps noi sufficient to materially alter an 1 Stephens gives the depth to which he descended in the cave of Bolonchen as approximately 450 feet (‘‘ Incidents of Travel in Yucatan,”’ II, p. 152, 1843). Unfortunately, there are no data at hand for determining the elevation of Bolon- chen itself, but inasmuch as the town lies considerably to the south of the Sierra, on the north-and-south line of Ticul, and as the absolute elevation of the Sierra itself is here only about 450 feet, as we determined by means of a very sensitive aneroid barometer, the position cannot be more than 100-200 feet above the sea, ifitis that much. The elevation of Ticul, which lies at the north foot of the Sierra, is, as I am informed by Sefior Antonio Fejardo (a long-time resident of the town), approximately 90 feet. Probably the elevation of Bolonchen does not differ greatly from that of this town. It would thus seem that there has been here considerable subsidence since the formation of the cave. 140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. original relief. At the present time the absence of running streams would naturally largely check surface degradation, but, on the other hand, an equivalent in part would be obtained from the sinking of the floor over the numerous limestone caverns with which the coun- try abounds. At Merida, some 23 miles from the north coast, the general elevation is about 28-30 feet above the sea, at Ticul about 80-90 feet, and at a point on the Merida-Sotuta railroad, one-half mile east of Tekanto, 42 feet.’ A line drawn from Progreso to the erest of the hills immediately south of Ticul would give a gradient approximately equal to that of a line of similar length projected northward from Progreso over the submerged plateau. The rock formation over the greater part of the plains is that of a gray or white shell limestone, highly indurated or sub-erystalline in local areas, but rarely to the extent of obliterating its fossilifer- ous character. Secondary depositions of calcite, in the form of veins, crystals and nodular masses, are abundant. Where less com- pact the rock may be said to be a mass of loosely-united shells, a condition that is best shown in the superficial layers. Good sections of the rock are seep only in the walls of the aguadas and cenotes and in a number of railway cuts which traverse it both in a N.—S. and E.—W. line; the rock surface is, however, visible over a very large part of its extent, being but scantly covered with soil and sup- porting only an indifferent vegetation. Its decomposition has lib- erated large quantities of red earth, similar to that which is found in our own northern region (terra rossa) and on coral islands (e. g., the Bermudas, Bahamas), and which is seemingly a residual product representing impurities of one form or another which were intro- duced into the limestone at the time of its formation. The great quantity of this impurity, which constitutes much or most of the soil of the country, taken in conjunction with the circumstance that the limestone is of shallow-water formation, suggests the notion that this iron-impurity is a product of the volcanic discharges which for a long period of time visited the region, and must have contributed a vast amount of oxydizable material to that which was slowly accumulating through the agency of organic forces in the Gulf basin. The surface of the limestone is eaten out into irregular knolls and hollows, which become more pronounced as we move inland from the northern coast. 1 As determined by railroad levelings conducted by Colonel John W. Glenn. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141 The paleontological evidence of the fossils contained in the lime- stone is to the effect that the latter belongs to two periods of geolo- gical time, the Pliocene and the Post-Pliocene, but stratigraphically it is not easy to draw a line of demarkation between the two forma- tions. It, indeed, appears as though the Post-Pliocene, except in the coastal area, were present only in patches, having been removed through atmospheric decay and denudation. It is in most places easily distinguished by the large numbers of Venus cancellata which fill the rock, making a true Venus cancellata bed, such as I observed capping the Pliocene beds on the Caloosahatchie, Florida, just below Fort Thompson. The beds occupy similar positions and hold equivalent relations to the construction of the land, and may, there- fore, be considered as counterparts of an identical formation. At Fort Thompson the Venus bed is found at an elevation of some 24 feet above the sea, a few feet less, perhaps, than the level which the same bed holds in the exposed walls of the cenotes at Merida. At the railroad station of San Ignacio, about half way between Merida and Progreso, the same bed has fallen to a level of about 14 feet ; it is there crowded with the shells of its distinctive fossil, one of the most abundant of the Gulf Mollusca. We found the same fossil equally abundant on the roadway between Kansakhab and Dilam, at points 12-15 miles or less from the coast; and not unlikely this whole northern slope between the coast and some fifteen miles in- land is a Post-Pliocene surface. The low exposures, however, do not make this absolutely clear, nor do they permit us to say just how much further the same deposits extend. Post-Pliocene cap- pings continue at least as far as Merida, and not improbably outcrops will be found much further in the interior. But as has _be- fore been remarked, the close connection existing between the Post- Pliocene and Pliocene deposits does not permit a sharp differentia- tion of the two series. At first glance, indeed, I assumed that the whole northern plain was a recent formation, but a closer examina- tion of the fossil remains leaves no doubt that the major formation is the Pliocene, which is here and there covered or obscured by more recent deposits. My examination of the Pliocene area was made at several points in and about Merida, in numerous cuttings along the line of the Merida-Kalkini Railroad, on the line of the railroad connect- ing the capital city with Ticul, all along the traverse between Merida and Tunkas—some twenty miles E. 8. E. of Izamal—and 142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. at various points between Tekanto and Milam. The ruck-formation over all this area is largely uniform, and shows frequent recurrence of the same fossils; there is no question, therefore, of its identity throughout. I enjoyed special advantages for studying fresh mate- rial in the cutting which was being made at the time of our visit eastward of Tekanto, in the railroad section connecting this town with Izamal.’ The following is a list of the fossi!s that I have thus far been able to identify from the rocks of this formation; the species preceded by an asterisk are non-living or Pliocene forms, the remainder live in the adjacent seas. From the R. R. cutting (Camp Glenn) one and a half miles east of Tekanto: Pecten nucleus. | Venus mercenaria. Pecten n. sp. Venus cancellata. Anomia simplex ? (*A. Ruffini?) | Marginella apicina ? Plicatula filamentosa. *Turritella perattenuata. Dueina reticulata. * Turritella apicalis. Arca Adamsi. Bulla striata. From a rock outcrop west of Izamal : *Amussium Mortoni. From the cenotes near Merida: ** Pecten 0. sp. Venus Listert. Pecten nucleus (dislocatus). | Venus cancellata. Cardium isocardia. | From a railroad cutting about half-way between Merida and Ticul : Pecten nucleus. Cardium magnum ? Pecten sp. indet. Cardium muricatun ? Pinna sp. indet. Venus mercenaria. Lucina Jamaicensis. | Murex Salleanus ? Lucina edentula. From a digging in the city of Merida: * Ostrea meridionalis. *Amussium Morton. Anomia simplex. | Plicatula filamentosa. Pecten nucleus. Arca Deshayesit. 1 The writer is under great obligation to Colonel John W. Glenn, Engineer of this section of the Merida-Sotuta Railway, and to Mrs. Glenn for many facili- ties afforded the exploring party toward the prosecution of their work, and for the comforts of a railroad “‘ camp”’ during a period of nearly two weeks. > 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143 *Arca sp. indet.—Very close to A. incongrua and A. scalarina (from the Pliocene of Florida), but differing in the greater width of the ribs and in the absence of the intercostal line. The specimens are in the form of impressions and do not per- mit of characterization. Arca rhombea. * Pectunculus sp. indet—Seemingly different from any of the liv- ing species. Inecina tigrina. Artemis discus. *Lucina disciformis. Macomu contracta. LIncina Pennsylvanica. Tellina sp.? Cardium serratum. *Fulgur rapum. Cardium muricatum. Dolium perdix. Cardium isocardia ? Oliva literata. Chama arcinella. Cyprea sp. indet. Venus mercenaria. Pyrula reticularis. Venus Mortoni. Siliquaria sp. indet. Fulgur rapum, Turritella perattenuata, T. apicalis, Ostrea meri- dionalis and Lucina disciformis are forms which I have previously described from the Pliocene deposits (the “ Floridian”) of the Ca- loosahatchie. Amussium Mortoni, also found in the Caloosahatchie deposits, is a well-known fossil of the Carolinian Miocene, and rep- resents the recent A. (Pleuronectes) Japonica (from which it differs mainly in the disposition of the interior ribs). Besides the species above enumerated, the rocks in nearly all cases—at least, when they are largely fossiliferous—contain almost numberless impressions of a Venus, so far as I know, not now living, whose nearest analogue appears to be Venus cribraria of Conrad, a Miocene species of the Atlantic border of the United States. The exact position in the Pliocene series which these Yucatan rocks hold cannot, perhaps, be stated, but they with little doubt, correspond at least in part with the series occurring in Florida which I have designated the “Floridian.” It is true that the number of extinct species of the mollusks is seemingly less in the Yucatan rock than in that of Florida, but it should be said that in addition to the forms above enumerated, there are a considerable number, occurring mainly in the condition of unrecognizable casts, which may largely represent extinct species. The number of corals 1 + Explorations on the West Coast of Floridaand in the Okeechobee Wilder- ness.’—Trans. Wagner Free Institute of Science, vol. 1, Phila., 1887. 144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. found associated with the mollasean remains was exceedingly lim- ited ; indeed, it was only after long search that I detected their ex- istence at all. I picked out a good-sized clump of Porites from a cutting on the Merida—Ticul railroad, and found a few simple corals elsewhere. They represent only a sporadic growth, and I could nowhere determine any evidences of reef-structure. THe Mountain REGION. The rock-formation of the Sierra de Yucatan differs in many par- ticulars from that of the basal plain. The surface rock, forming the crest and the slopes on either side—presumably an anticlinal structure—is a fairly compact red or reddish limestone, which seems to rest at nearly all places, as we had occasion to observe in the raves of Caleehtok and Loltun, on a semi-crystalline white or gray marble or on an exceedingly fine grained cream limestone, some- what resembling in texture true lithographic stone. A brecciated limestone, containing fragments of the last mentioned rock, occurs at intervals along the base of the hills, and we also found it among the rocks used in the construction of the buildings (now ruins) of Labna. Iam not absolutely certain as to the age or even as to the general nature of the red-rock. The brecciated masses are almost undoubtedly of marine origin, and they give evidence of the en- croaches of the sea after the underlying rock had not only been formed but been converted into its present semi-crystalline condi- tion. In other words, the present range of hills probably by that time already existed. It is, however, less clear that the red or reddish rock which extends away from the base of the hills, but forms their slopes, is of marine origin. Its universality would seem to indicate that it was of this nature, but at many places where I examined it, on and off the crests of the hills, it bore suspicious marks.of being a disintegration product, which had subsequently undergone cementation. |The only fossil that I found in it, on any surface exposure, was a Helix (probably identical with a species now living in the same region), which was obtained from near the summit of the pass between Ticul and Santa Elena, at an absolute elevation of perhaps 300 feet. It occurred in a thoroughly hard rock, but this circumstance is in itself no proof of actual antiquity, since in a purely calcareous region such as this one, rock cementa- tion is a rapid process, as we had occasion to observe in the terres- trial (fossiliferous) limestone now forming near a quarry about two 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145 miles south of Ticul. In the red rock which in the cave of Calceh- tok overlies the gray limestone I found the impression of a single gasteropod, which I should unhesitatingly refer to a terrestrial form, and to a genus of Pupidae close to Macroceramus, if indeed, it is not Macroceramus itself. I could find no vestiges of marine mollusks, but yet they may well occur in other parts of the rock, and it would, perhaps, not be safe to conclude that the entire red-rock is of ter- restrial origin, or that it represents a single type of formation. No doubt attaches to the heavily-bedded gray and white limestones and marbles which are so well exhibited in some of the deeper caves, such as that of Caleehtok, for example. The mouth of this cave, according to a rough approximation, is some 200 feet above the sea. Ata depth of some 50 feet the red limestone appears in a solid mass, and beneath it we reach the crystalline limestones, which are disposed in layers of 10-15 feet thickness. Fossils are not abundant in this rock, and Col. Glenn, who had explored this cave on a previous occasion, was of the opinion that no fossils were to be found in it. After considerable search, however, we discovered a few in an indifferent state of preservation, and still later some whose characters were sufficiently defined to permit us to determine their relationship. Among these are a Pecten, with little doubt Pecten nucleus, the cast of a large Murginella, apparently the living Mar- ginella labiata, a Potamides or Cerithidea, the impression of the apex of a large Oliva (of the type of Oliva literata), and a single impression of Venus cancellata. While the above forms are barely sufficient to determine the exact age of the formation in which they occur, whether Pliocene or Miocene, I am inclined to believe that it is rather the former, the mountain-rock—semi-erystalline or highly compact, and but scantily fossiliferous—being a compressional alter- ation of the much less compact and highly fossiliferous rock of the basal plains. But whether Pliocene or Miocene, I think it can be all but positively assumed that it is not older than Miocene, although it has been asserted that it represented the Oligocene or Vicksburg- ian period. 1Mr. H. A. Pilsbry, Conservator of the Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences, has kindly directed my attention to this relationship. 2 The height of the pass leading to the cave we determined barometrically to be about 250 feet above the hacienda of Sefior Escalante (situated at the north oot of the mountains), which is itself elevated some 60 feet. The total height of the pass is thus somewhat above 3()0 feet. 3 Alexander Agassiz—“ Three Cruises of the Blake,” 1, p. 69. 146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The cave itself is a magnificent specimen of subterranean archi- tecture and in several of its features far surpasses the Luray Cavy- erns. The broad entering arch, a feature which we found repeated in the scarcely less imposing cave of Loltun, in the mountains south- east of Ticul (or the hacienda of Tabi), is in striking contrast to the contracted passage which leads into the famous cavern of Virginia. Huge stalactites hang from heights of 50-70 feet or more, or unite with stalagmites to form continuous columns of giant proportions. Many of these measure as much as six or eight feet in diameter, and some of them considerably more. In the cave of Loltun we measured one which was thirty-six feet in circumference about five feet above its base, and I am certain that there are others that are still larger, both here and in the cave of Calcehtok. The chambers, especially in the last named, are imposing in their dimensions, and communi- cate with one another by the usual clefts and narrows. There is little moisture in either of the caves; most of the chambers are thor- oughly dry, and they have accumulated extensive deposits of disin- tegrated rock material. In the short time at our command we could not explore the caves to their furthest limits, but we saw enough to convince us that their extent was quite considerable. We descended in the cave of Calcehtok to a depth of approximately 170 feet, or to within about 30 feet of the level of the sea ; unfortunately a shortage of illuminating material, and the disinclination of the Mayas to proceed further, prevented us from prosecuting our search to the end that we should have desired. The red rock which we found superimposed upon the gray limestones in the cave of Cal- cehtok reappears in the cave of Loltun, where, however, we failed to find the underlying older stratum. This was probably due in part to the stalagmitic crust with which much of the surface was covered, and to the circumstance that this cave is much less deep— at least in the part traversed by us—than the cave of Calcehtok. We found among the ruins of Labna that much of the stone that was used by the ancient Mayas in the construction of their habita- tions was the semi-crystalline limestone, and not the surface rock | that is found in the region. The builders had manifestly brought their rock from some distance, but from what special locality I could not determine. This preference for a particular building stone is also seen in a number of small ruins traversed by the railroad about two miles north of Ticul. The material there used is also a very com- pact gray limestone, but it differs from the limestone of the cave in 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147 being highly fossiliferous, and in lacking the suberystalline struc- ture of the latter. The fossils are unfortunately in too imperfect a condition to be satisfactorily determined, but they are in part crowded with an orbicular Foraminifer, or rather, its impressions, which measure about a third of an inch in diameter. From the form of the impressions, I should say that the Foraminifer is a Patellina (Cyclolina). Whence this rock was obtained I know not, but it certainly differs from the field rock which appears a short distance from the ruins. The heights determined by us on the Sierra are the following: the summit of the pass leading over from the hacienda of Sefior Escalante (near Calcehtok) 250 feet, or 310 feet, approximately, above the level of the sea; the summit of the pass leading over from Ticul to Tabi, 300 feet above Ticul, or 390 feet approximate absolute elevation ; summit of the pass leading over from the hacienda of San Juan to Uxmal, 160 feet above the plain. At all of these points the hills rise fully 50 to 75 feet, or more, above the highest point reached by us; accordingly, the hills immediately south of Ticul cannot be much less than 500 feet in elevation. But as has already been said, the range further to the southeast attains 900 feet. The range it- self is composite in structure, having two or three parallel lines of elevation which include longitudinal valleys. THE YUCATAN BANK. Little positive can at the present time be said regarding the struc- ture of the Yucatan Bank. It is well known that Alexander Avas- siz, who is almost the only authority that has critically touched the history of the Gulf basin, considers it, in common with the similar formation lying to the west of the peninsula of Florida, to have been formed through a process of slow organic accretion—the accumula- tion, through an undefined period of time, of animal debris upon an early fold (or bank) of the earth’s crust—in which the force of ele- vation has practically played no part.’ I have in another place discussed the probability of this view, and have stated that I could find no satisfactory evidence in support of it—on the contrary, al- most the only positive data that we possess in the premises argues 1 Three Cruises of the Blake, chapter III, Yol. 1, on ‘“* The Florida Reefs; ”’ “ Coral Reefs of the Ilawaiian Islands,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, XVII, April, 1889 ; and elsewhere. 148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. directly against it.'!| Apart from the non-evidence we have in the matter of giant limestone banks being built up from deep water in a comparatively brief period of geological time, the position of the Pliocene and Post-Pliocene deposits in both Florida and Yucatan shows that there has been a comparatively recent uplift, and for any- thing that I know to the contrary, this uplift may have been quite modern, and might, indeed, be progressing to-day. But again, the evidence is all but conclusive that there has been recent subsi- dence ;? and, indeed, so far as I ean see, it is impossible to say whether the last movement was one of elevation or of subsidence.’ The difticulties attending the solution of this question will be appreciated by all geologists. The complexities that are involved in the problem of the con- struction of the Gulf basin are also a part of the history of the ad- joining basin of the Caribbean Sea. In their united physiognomy the most distinctive feature is constituted by the deep channels of water which delimit the banks that have been briefly referred to and which are known to geographers as the Straits of Florida and Bemini and the Yucatan Passage. The depth of water in the former, whose width is some 50 miles, is between 2200 and 3000 feet ; in the latter, with a width of 80-90 miles, it reaches 1000 fathoms. If we assume the greatest depth of the Yucatan Passage to be at about its middle, and that there is more or less of a regular slope of the bot- tom leading from either side to this point, the average gradient of the bed would be approximately 1 in 35, or about 150 feet to the mile. Much the same profile would be presented, under a like as- sumption, by the Straits of Florida. This slope, while it is steep, is not yet so steep that it can in any way be designated precipitous. In fact, an equal deviation from the horizontal in the ceiling of an ordinary room would scarcely offend the eye. If the Yucatan Pas- sage were drained of its water, it would present the appearance of a whe The Bermuda Islands: oe A Contribution to the Physical History and Zool- ogy of the Somers Archipelago,” 1889, pp. 59-61, 73. 2 As I have stated in my Report on Florida explorations (* Explorations on the West Coast of Florida and in the Okeechobee Wilderness,” Trans. Wagner Free Institute of Science, p. 15, Phila., 1887), and as Shaler has also found in the course of his own investigations (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, XVI, p. 148, 1890.) 3 Only relative movement is here implied ; the interesting problem of oceanic transgression and retrocession, which has been so forcibly argued by Suess and others, is not considered in this place. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149 vast flat in which the eye would barely be able to detect a hollow. Allowing that the deeper water is met with long in advance of the center of the channel, or for a slope of double intensity, the cut would be only in the form of a gently undulating valley, with noth- ing in it to remind one of a ravine or gorge. I make this compari- son because I believe it will serve to a proper understanding of the conditions under which these special physiographic features may have been brought into existence. The gradual slope—for such it can really be cailed—of the chan- nel seems to dispose of the necessity of invoking (although by no means disproving the condition) the assistance (in the construc- tion of the channel) of either faulting or fracture. At the same time I believe it equally disposes of the notion that the channel has been primarily formed through the scour of the Gulf Stream, as has been maintained by Alexander Agassiz; at least I see no grounds for believing that it has been so formed, and the fact that the pitch of the floor-bed is much less than it is (between the 500 and the 1000 fathom contours) along much of the adjacent continental borders where no currental scour of any magnitude is known argues against the supposition. The undulation that is pres- ent, and concavities of which form the two channels under considera- tion, is no greater than that which ordinarily exists over any broad plain or mesa surface of the continental areas. That the Gulf Stream may now be to a certain extent deepening these channels is possible, but this is hardly likely to be the case. Even if it be held, as the observations of the “ Blake” seem to make clear, that “ the bottom of the Gulf Stream along the Blake Plateau is swept clean of slime and ooze, and is nearly barren of animal hfe,” * this fact does not necessarily argue in favor of scour, since Just in the path of the most rapid current of this stream, in the Straits of Florida, where the flow is from four to five miles an hour, the researches of Pourtalés, A. Agassiz and Murray have revealed the presence of vasts deposits of ooze. Itis further a suspicious cir- cumstance, seeing that we have no evidence of the much greater antiquity of one channel over the other, that the Yucatan Pas- sage, in which the flow is barely more than a fourth of a mile Je: ashe en slope a: the nets bed is not as regular as = mae as- sumed in the above proposition, but for all practical purposes, I believe, the com- parison will hold. 2 «Three Cruises of the Blake,” I, p. 259. 150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. hour, should have a depth double that of the Florida Straits, in which the rate of flow, as has already been seen, is four miles an hour, and more. The stream with a relative velocity of 16 has excavated a channel with but half the depth of that excavated by a stream whose velocity is only 1. Of course, modifying cirecum- stances may to a considerable extent lessen the disproportion of action, but not sufficiently to lend any probability to the theory of Gulf scour. It is now, I believe, a widely recognized fact that the peninsula of Florida has in quite recent geological times, even so late as the newer Tertiary or Post-Pliocene, been united with the greater An- tilles (or at least with Cuba) and the Bahamas into one more or less continuous land-area ; the evidence, at any rate, for this suppo- sition is of such a nature that it cannot readily be explained away.’ And I believe it scarcely less probable that this connection was con- tinued quite to the peninsula of Yucatan, although the separation there may have begun at a slightly earlier period. But it will be asked, if the separating channels have not been formed either through dislocation (fracture) or the wear of the Gulf Stream, in what manner has the existing disruption been brought about? I think that the theory of subsidence offers the easiest and the most plausible solution to the problem. But the theory, to be worthy of confidence, must have some facts to support it, and it behooves us to inquire if any such exist. As toa limited subsidence within a very recent geological period (Post-Pliocene)—sufficient, probably, to ac- count (if this were necessary) for the positions of the several atoll- like reefs which have been cited by the opponents of the Darwinian theory of reef-structures:in evidence against subsidence’*—there is ample testimony. With regard to the region of the Floridian pen- insula, I have stated some of the facts in the Report before referred to, and Prof. Shaler has since the time of my explorations obtained new data supporting the conclusion I had arrived at.* On the Yu- 1 DeCastro, Bolet. Com. Geol. Esp. VIII, pp. 857-72, 1881; Dana, ‘“ Origin of Coral Reefs and Islands,” Am. Journ. Science, 3rd Ser., vol. XXX, 1885; Suess, Antlitz der Erde; Heilprin, ‘The Bermuda Islands,” pp. 227-28. 2 J fail to see in what way the Alacran Reef, on the Yucatan Bank, is a true atoll. 3 The Topography of Florida—Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, vol. XVI, 1890. Heilprin “The Corals and Coral Reefs of the Western Waters of the Gulf of Mexico,” Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1890, p. 314. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151 catan side the evidence is, I believe, equally conclusive. The deep hole of Bolonchen, to which reference has already been made, ean reasonably be explained, if the measurements of Stephens are at all to be relied upon, only on the assumption of subsidence. The condition of some of the other caves seems also to argue in the same direction. On the north shore the solid limestone at many places abuts directly against the Gulf waters, or is even carried into them, as I had occasion to observe near the Port of Milam, in scat- tered ledges and boulders. I was also informed that in the course of construction of the long pier at Progreso, masses of rock, similar to that which is found inland, were met with at various points off from the coast. Of course, the same conditions might be presented by arising surface the moment we admit that a consolidated lime- stone—except such as coral and oyster reefs, etc., which are col- onial accumulations or out-growths—may be formed in extenso be- neath the water of the sea. JI am not aware that a structure of this kind has as yet been definitely proved to exist. It is true that A. Agassiz asserts that he not infrequently obtained, by means of the trawl or dredge, “large fragments of the modern limestone now in process of formation,”' but I do not precisely see how this limestone, “ consisting of the dead carcasses” of species now living in the Gulf, would be differentiated from a limestone which had been placed in the same position through subsidence. But granting the full value of the evidence favoring subsidence, the amount of subsidence itself is not sufficient to account for the existence of the deep water between Florida and Cuba, and still less for that between Cuba and Yucatan. Prof. J. W. Spencer, in a recent and very suggestive paper on “ High Continental Ele- vation preceding the Pleistocene Period,” has brought together a number of facts, drawn largely from the condition of the (supposed) ancient estuaries of several of the American rivers, which, in the opinion of the author, go far toward indicating a very consider- able subsidence along the American coast, and it is well to in- quire into the relation which this (assumed) subsidence may hold to the problem under consideration. The deep submarine channels (or what are taken for them) of the Mississippi, Delaware, Hudson and St. Lawrence Rivers, which cut into the 90-500 fathom curves, are taken in part as evidence of this submergence ; on the Pacific side we 1 «Three Cruises of the Blake,” 1, p. 62. 2 Bulletin Geol. Soc. America, 1, p. 65, e¢ seg. 152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF frsere have the testimony of the deep submarine valleys which Prof. David- son has described from the coast of California,’ and the fjords and friths of Washington and British Columbia.* While it may not be admitted that all of the above deep cuts are really old channels, geologists are more generally agreed that the one which has been so minutely traced by Lindenkohl south of Long Island is the true channel of the Hudson River,*® which terminates at about one hun- dred miles southeast of the present coast line, at a depth of 2800 feet beneath the level of the sea (or 2200 feet beneath the surface of the plain or plateau into which the trough is cut). It is wholly improb- able that this channel could have been formed in the manner in which some geologists have attempted to explain the so-called cajion which continues westward the course of the Congo,* or that it is to- day being cut in the way that Hornlimann found the rivers Rhine and Rhone cutting into the sublacustrine deposits of lakes Constance and Geneva respectively... But if not thus formed, I do not see that we are necessarily driven to consider subsidence as the only possible explanation of the occurrence ; indeed, there are certain difficulties in the way of the emergence-subsidence theory, especially those re- lating to time, which to me seem almost insurmountable. Prof. Dana suggests as the most likely time for the emergence of the land, which permitted of the cutting of the deep sea-ward channel, the close of the Jura-Trias period (followed by the subsidence which allowed ingress of the Cretaceous waters); Upham, on the other hand, would prefer some portion of the late Tertiary or Post-Plio- cene.° 1 Bull. Calif. Acad. Sciences, II, pp. 265-68 ; see also paper by Prof. LeConte “The Flora of the Coast Islands of California in Relation to Recent Changes of Physical Geography’—Bull. Calif. Acad. Sciences, II, pp. 515-20. 2 G. M. Dawson: ‘ Note on some of the more Recent Changes in Level of of the Coast of British Columbia and Adjacent Regions’”—Canadian Naturalist, new ser., VIII, pp. 241-250). 3 Dana, Am. Journ. Science, Dec., 1890. 4 Buchanan, Scottish Geographical Magazine, III, p. 222, 1887. 5 F. A. Forel. Comptes Rendus, CI, pp. 725-28, 1885. Forel assumes that the deep cutting in the case of the European rivers just mentioned is largely (or almost wholly) due to the fact that the waters of the rivers are considerably heavier than those of the lakes, and thus sink to the bottom, scouring there the surface 5 but this condition does not hold with the streams discharging into the sea, except in so far as the added weight of sediment will conduce toward sinkage. 6 American Geologist, September, 1890. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153 It appears to me improbable that a channel dating back to the Lower Cretaceous period could have remained open to the pres- ent time; that a million, or possibly millions of years, should not have effaced the contours of a river cut in a region of heavy oceanic sedimentation is to me incredible. And the more improbable is the condition made, when we see how smoothly the subcontinental plateau has been worn or filled in on either side of the assumed channel. Perhaps less objection can be urged against the view of recent emergence (and subsequent subsidence) which is held by Mr. Upham ; the nature of the proposition is, in itself, such that it can- not readily be met by the facts of geology. Mr. Upham bases his proposition upon the concurrent testimony of facts presented by the eastern, southern, western and northern waters,’ and from these he argues that there has been a simultaneous elevation of the entire continent, and not merely one confined to a section of the northern regions. During this period of high elevation, which is made inci- dent to the formation of the ice of the Great Ice Age, the cutting of the deep river-channels was effected. But it is almost incon- ceivable that such a general continental uplift could have taken place without materially disturbing the courses of the principal rivers ; the barest tilting of the land would almost certainly have changed the course of such a low-plain river as the Mississippi, but the river discharges to-day almost in a line with the excavation which is supposed to represent its former mouth in the Gulf. The same holds true with the Hudson and the Lindenkohl channel. But again, the same difficulty, only intensified, confronts us if we assume localized or regional uplift; and, further, in the event of such uplift, we should look toa much greater deformation of the coast-line than now actually shows itself. Prof. Dana has called attention to one very serious objection to the theory of recent erosion in the form (in depth) of the Lindenkohl channel; the uneroded or even surface of the plateau into which this channel is sunk seems to be to one equally grave. It must be admitted that many of the difficulties in the case dis- appear if, instead of an actual rise or emergence of the land, we as- sume an equivalent recession of the oceanic waters ; indeed, the sta- bility of river-courses appears to me a strong argument against the see-saw movements of which continental masses are supposed to par- take, and one decidedly in favor of the view of oceanic transgres- 1 Those principally which have been recited by Prof. Spencer. 11 154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. sions and recessions which has been so ably formulated by Prof. Suess and the new school of German geologists. But the removal of a difficulty is not a proof of a proposition ; and I do not know that there are any facts to indicate that there has been a comparatively recent recession of the oceanic waters, beyond the continental bound- aries, toan extent of 3000 feet (vertical). On the contrary, the regular succession of the Tertiary deposits along the eastern and southern borders of the United States, completing the series near the extremity of the Floridian peninsula, and the regular gradation of the animal forms which are contained in this series, seem to me to point to an opposite conclusion. But even if we admit all that the advocates of river-erosion claim for these submarine channels, I think it still remains an open ques- tion if all the phenomena are referable to a single cause. Similar- ity of physiographic feature is no necessary indication of equiva- lency in the time of formation or equivalency in method. The deep cut of the ancient Mississippi (or what is referred to as such by Spencer and Upham) occurs at about the 500 fathom curve, whereas that of the so-called Hudson River Channel marks the 80-100 fathom line. On the theory of river-erosion the formation of the Mississippi cut, if we once admit subsidence, need not have necessitated an elevation of the land of more than 1200 hundred feet—perhaps not that much—as against the 2200 required by the Hudson Channel. That the Mississippi cut was not formed at or about the close of the Jurassic period is practically proven by the coincident position of the present mouth of the river; it is all but inconceivable that a stream should find its way to an ancient mouth after 600 miles of its lower course (as is shown in the Cretaceous Mississippi embayment) had been obliterated by the encroaches of the sea. The objections to its having been formed at a recent period of great elevation have already been stated ; the remarkable even- ness of the Florida Plateau argues strongly against any recent up- heaval of some 5—4000 feet. I believe that the occurrences presented near the mouth of the Mississippi have little or nothing in common with those of the Hudson ; they constitute a part of the physics of the Gulf of Mexico as distinguished from those of the North Atlantic. Suess’ and See- bach’ have forcibly sketched the relations of the West Indian Is- 1 Antlitz der Erde, I, p. 698, e¢ seg. 2 Central Amerika und der interoceanische Canal, 1873. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155 lands and of the mountain chain or chains which traverse the lar- ger Antilles; the parallel drawn by the former between the Car- ribbean Basin and that of the Western Mediterranean,’ apart from other evidence, leaves little doubt in my mind that it partakes largely of the structure of the latter—i. e., it is a sunken area of the earth’s crust, which has carried with it fragments of a once continuous or nearly continuous system of mountain elevations. Parts of this mountain system can still be seen in the chain of heights (reaching an elevation of 9,000 feet, or more,) which traverses Porto Rico, the islands of Hayti, Jamaica and southeastern Cuba, pointing to continuations in Honduras and Guatemala. The similarity of the rock-formations in these different islands (with those of St. Barthol- omew, Antigua, etc.) points to a community of origin, if not neces- sarily to continuity, but we have, it appears to me, abundant evi- dence of continuity—extending as far as Florida on one side and to Central America and South America on the other—in the relationship of the existing molluscan fauna of these islands, as has been shown by Bland,’ and in that of the extinct mammalian faunas, for the elaboration of which we are indebted to the labors of DeCastro, Cope, Pomel and Leidy.* The conformation of the sea-bottom, as the soundings of the “ Blake” have made known to us, also indicates this connection. It is probable that the disruption or subsidence, or series of subsidences, which resulted in the existing condition of region did not set in until the close of the Miocene or beginning of the Pliocene period—perhaps not until still later—as the distribu- tion of the extinct mammalian fauna shows. What the area of this subsidence may have been it is not easy to determine, but it with little doubt included the whole of the region of the Ba- hamas, and probably much more to the north. From considera- tions other than those that have been stated, Alexander Agassiz has arrived at the conclusion of a vast change of level in the sub- continental plateau lying east of the southeastern coast-line of the United States, for he inclines to the belief that this coast-line, opposite to what is known asthe Blake Plateau, at one time extended seaward approximately to what is now the position of the 500-fathom line. 1 Op. cit., 1, p. 708. . 2 Annals Lyceum Nat. Hist. New York, VII, pp. 335-61; X, pp. 311-24. 3 DeCastro, Joc. cit.; Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1868, p. 313; Smithsonian Contributions, 1883 (1878) ; Leidy, ‘‘ Mammalian Fauna of Dakota and Nebraska,’’ 1869. 156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. To quote the language of this distinguished investigator: “In other words, the old continental line extended at least two hundred and fifty to three hundred miles farther to the eastward, forming a huge plateau, the hundred-fathom line of which was found where the six-hundred-fathom line now runs, and stretched as far south as to include the Bahamas and Cuba in this great submarine plateau.”! It is true that Agassiz recognizes in the lowering of the Blake Pla- teau—which he considers to be a special formation organically built up from the deep, and added to “the outer edge of the former con- tinental plateau’”’—no evidence of subsidence, but merely the wear- ing action or scour of the Gulf Stream, whose operations began at about the close of the Cretaceous period. But I can see no facts which support this double conclusion ; on the contrary there are many—some of which have already been stated, and others which can be drawn from the physiography of the region lying to the south and southeast—which distinctly oppose it... The character of the Cretaceous deposits pretty clearly indicates that at the time of their formation they were bounded by a deep sea, and that the Blake Plateau could not have been built up until a time much later. The fact that off the coasts of North and South Carolina “small rocky banks slightly raised above the general level of the sea-bottom” oc- eur which seemingly represent “the continuation of the Tertiary beds found inland along the adjoining shores,” and that the Gulf Stream for much of its course in this region sweeps over a bottom of “hard limestone’* also argues in favor of a late subsidence. Suess with more justice, it seems to me, argues that the base of 1 « Three Cruises of the Blake,” I, p. 136. 2 Loc. cit. 3 I am not absolutely certain as regards Agassiz’s explanation of Gulf Stream wear. While on pp. 137 and 188 the course of the stream is very definitely traced, from the close of the Cretaceous period, in a northeasterly direction across what is now the peninsula of Florida (or through the Straits of Florida) and the Blake Plateau, we find on page 113 that a similar stream, at about the same time (or even later ?), may have swept ‘“‘round the north end of the Bahamas across Florida, which did not then exist, across the Gulf of Mexico, and into the Pacific over the Isthmus of Tehuantepec.” 4A. Agassiz. Op. cit. p. 277. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES Of PHILADELPHIA. 157 the Bahamas is a Miocene rock,' and for anything we now know to to the contrary, the reef-structures may be imposed upon a Pliocene formation. While perhaps we have no positive knowledge in the premises, I think it more than probable, following Suess,’ that the Gulf of Mex- ico represents a subsiding basin similar to the Caribbean Sea, and here again a parallel can be established with the eastern basin of the Mediterranean. The close approximation of the 500, 1000 and 1500 fathom lines eff the western borders of the Florida and Yuca- tan plateaus seemingly points to such subsidence, and it suggests, as, indeed, Suess has already intimated, that the breakage actually took place through the Florida-Yucatan Plateau. That the Mexican waters already existed as far back as the Cretaceous period is abund- antly proved by the Cretaceous deposits which extend throughout the Gulf area, but it would seem that the great depth which the basin now has was acquired at a comparatively recent geological period, much of it probably at a time when many of the larger Mam- malia which now inhabit the land-surface had already been intro- duced, and long after the Mississippi discharged near to (or in ad- vance® of ) its present mouth. Perhaps the absence over the greater part of the Gulf area of the newer Tertiary deposits which occur elsewhere along the southern United States may be explained on the assumption of disappearance through subsidence ; at any rate, their non-existence is a suggestive fact. To what extent the assumed subsidence of the Gulf basin may have been connected with volcanic phenomena, or have been in- duced through sedimental accumulation, as Prof. Shaler suggests,‘ cannot, with our present knowledge, be determined ; probably both forces have acted toward a common result. Just as we look upon the Gulf and Caribbean basins as subsided areas, 80 may we regard the Yucatan and Florida Passages, and to 1 Antlitz der Erde, II, p. 161. On the island of Antigua the rock containing Orbitordes dips beneath the sea. Since the above was written, it has been shown that the Oligocene deposits (containing Oréitordes) of southeastern Florida extend down to a depth of at least 1200 feet; the data were obtained from a boring made at Lake Worth, east of Lake Okeechobee (Darton, in Am. Journ. Science, Feb. 1891). 2 Antlitz der Erde, I, p. 365; II, p. 159. $ The position of the supposed ancient channel. * The Topography of Florida, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoology, XVI. 158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. approximately the same period of time can we assign their forma- tion. That actual movements have taken place in the region under consideration at a quite recent period is proved by the uplift of the Yucatan mountains,’ which, as has already been stated, belong with little doubt to the Pliocene period. 1 Prof. Shaler has suggested that possibly the Florida plateau has been in part squeezed up through the downfall of the Gulf basin. With a subsiding area on either side of it (repeated again in the case of the Yucatan plateau) this does not appear improbable, and perhaps the gentle axial fold of the peninsula is evi- dence of this compressional uplift. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159 Marcu 3. Dr. Gro. H. Horn in the chair. Twenty-two persons present. Marcsa 10. The President, Dr. Lerpy, in the chair. Twenty-six persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— Fossil Faunas of Central Iowa. By Charles R. Keyes. Notice of some Entozoa. By Joseph Leidy, M. D. On the Young of Baculites compressus Say—Mr. Amos P. Brown described the young of Baculites compressus Say, recently discovered by him in some cretaceous marl from the vicinity of Deadwood, South Dakota. Associated with them in the same material were several species of Baculites, Scaphites and Inoceramus. The young Baculites were of the form shown in figures 1 and 2 and varied in length from 1 to 3 cm., with a diameter of 0°4 to 2mm. Other larger fragments with the spiral end broken off were found from 15 to 6 cm. in diameter. An examination of the form of the septa and suture lines showed the forms to belong to the Ammonitidae, and by the examination of an extensive series it was possible to determine the genus and species. 160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The shell originates in a spiral of two to two and one-half turns, ranging in breadth from 0°8 to 1 mm., thence it extends in a straight line, tangent to the spiral, figure 1, or sometimes slightly reflexed, figure 2. The straight portion of the shell rapidly increases in diameter from (38 to 0-40 mm. at the spiral to about 1°5 to 2 mm. at 2 cm. length. Many shells were covered by the nacreous shell substance, some being preserved entire, figure 2, while in others the shell had been dissolved away leaving the suture lines exposed as in figure 1. On breaking away the pearly exterior of forms like figure 2 it was found that the last chamber occupied about one-half the length of the shell. The shell of the outer spires somewhat envelops the inner so that from the outside view the exact form of the spiral cannot be measured, it was found, however, to closely approximate the mathematical curve known as the hyperbolic spiral. That the spiral origin of this shell was not smaller than that of allied genera was demonstrated by grinding cross sections of the shell of Seaphites Conradi Morton; the first two turns of its spiral being 1 mm. in breadth. The siphon i in Baculites is eccentric and was found to lie near the outer margin of the spiral, being easily seen in the fractured spirals. The species was determined from an examination of the form of the sutures which may be traced from the simple form of that of ficure 1, through forms of gradually increasing complexity shown in pomeese 3, 4, 5, and 6, fhe latter being the typic: al suture of the adult of Baculites compressus Say. In figure 5, an individual of 6 mm. diameter, the suture of the adult form is already well out- lined, the specific distinction, the two deep sinuses on the right hand, being well marked. The speaker further stated that he had been unable in the lit- erature of the subject to find any reference to this spiral termina- tion of Baculites, and believed the observation to be new. That this spiral termination has not been formerly observed was not strange in view of its small size and fragile character, it being probably broken off long before the shell had attained adult size ; and it would only be preserved when as in the present instance the shells were preserved in their immature condition. This observa- tion tends to prove that Baculites originated from a coiled form, and is not as supposed by some palaeontologists the original form of the Ammonitidae, but is rather to be looked upon as an uncoiled form developed from originally coiled parents. Marcu 17. Mr. Caarves Morris in the chair. Twenty-six persons present. A paper entitled “ Catalogue of the Corvidae, Paradiseidae and Oriolidae in the Collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,” by Witmer Stone, was presented for publication. - 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161 Marcu 24. Dr. D. G. Brinton in the chair. Twenty persons present. The death of 8. S. Rathvon, a member, was announced. The following communication was read :— REPORT OF EXPERIMENTS NOW BEING PURSUED IN THE BACTERIO- LOGICAL LABORATORY OF THE ACADEMY. BY SAMUEL G. DIXON, M. D. Experiments show that the twenty-fifth and the second growths of the tubercle bacillus will multiply with great rapidity when Blanied on a nutrient medium made up of :— Extract of Beef . : : : : . 25.2 Aq: Dist: ; : : : : : ; 700.ce Dry peptone . : ; ; : : : $.g Agar-agar : : : : : : : 15.g Chlor. Soda. : ; ‘ : ; 5.g Dist. Water ded) : : : - : 300.ce Glycerine i : ; : 100.00 The turbidity is “geo by the Son mixing of the whites of two hens eggs. If four distinct needle tracks are made with these bacilli length- wise in a half-inch tube containing this medium, the entire surface will be covered with a thin layer of tuberculous growth within five weeks. The bacilli from the twenty-fifth culture present a variety of forms, some club-shaped, others branched, while many would appear to grow toa great length, certainly measuring in some in- stances three times that of the average tubercle bacillus described by the authorities on this organism. To obtain the toxic substance of bacilli, they may be floated in a liquid medium. By this method we can filter out the toxic sub- stance without submitting the medium to heat. With some of the toxic agents generated by aerobic micro-organisms, this method will prove of vital importance, as heat destroys many of the ptomaines. The tuberculous poison is most readily and cheaply obtained from tuberculous lungs of cows and the viscera of other animals. Before giving a resume of the simple method of obtaining the toxic agent from the lungs, I wish to thank Dr. Francis Bridge, State Veterinary Inspector, for his kindness in furnishing the Laboratory with tuberculous material. It is owing to his courteous attention 162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. that I have never wanted for tuberculous lungs of cows since 1889. He has supplied the numerous demands at the shortest possible notice, and has insisted upon contributing his time and trouble for the benefit of science. The tuberculous mass is first placed in a mortar and then finely chopped up with a pair of shears. Then it is thoroughly mashed with a pestle, and treated with water, or better still with water and glycerine, for twelve hours at a low temperature. It has been my habit, however, to expose it to a temperature of 40° C. for twelve hours longer; after which the substance is poured into a Chamber- lain-Pasteur filtering tube, which it is permitted to slowly pass through without pressure. Its effect on tuberculous animals would seem to be about as repre- sented by the following reaction :— Tuberculous Cow. Before inoculation temperature 101° F. 3 ce. of filtrate was subcutaneously injected at 10 a.m. At 5 p. m. temperature was 102°; at 10 p. m. 103°; at 12 p. m. 1035°; at 10 a: m. LOLS: Guinea Pigs.' No. 38-A. At 11a. m. the temperature was 1015°; at 1 p.m. 101°; at 3 p.m. 101°. At 2.20 p. m. 1-20 ce. of tubercu- lous agent from lung was subcutaneously injected. At 5.45 the temperature was 1014°; at 7 p.m. 102°; at 11 p.m. 1015°; at 1.30 a.m. 1012°; at 8 a.m. 101 8°; at 12.30 p.m. 100%°; at 3 p- m. 101°. No. 4-A. - At 11.a.m.1013°; at 1 p. m. 101$°; at 3 pm. 10iae At this time 1-10 ec. toxic agent from lung of a cow subcutane- ously injected. At 5.45 p.m. temperature 102%°; at 7 p. m. 1035°; at 11 p. m. 1022°: at 1.30 p. m. 101%°; at 8 a. m. 1013°; at 12.30 p.m. 1023"; at 3 p.m. 1013°. In addition to my last report of investigations I have to refer to the treatment of tuberculosis by subcutaneous injections of dilute sulphuric acid and formic acid. Under each of these methods the animals would appear to be doing better than the check guinea pigs not so treated, yet sufficient time has not elapsed for me to make any post-mortems to determine the processes going on in the vis- cera. The points of inoculation, however, have healed beautifully and the animals would appear to be doing well. The experiments towards the securing of immunity are still being conducted and the 1 Temperature in the Guinea pig is not constant; and therefore not as reliable for experimentation as either the cow or dog. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163 results certainly show that the animal organism can be cultivated to resist inoculations of the tubercle bacillus to a greater or less degree, as is shown by a copy of the record book in a few of the cases under treatment. Rabbit D-100. Jan. 10th, 1891. Inoculated with a mass of twenty-fifth artificial cultivation of bovine tubercle bacillus. Feb. 16th, 1891. Inoculated again from the same tube as in January. Feb. 28th, 1891. Inoculated with a mass of second artificial cul- tivation of bovine tubercle bacilli. At this time the animal presents a healthy appearance and the points of inoculation have healed up. Rabbit D-101. Showed the same result as rabbit D-100 Without going into further detail, [ will simply state that a num- ber of guinea pigs have given like results; whereas the animals in- oculated with a mass of the second cultivation of bovine tubercle bacilli, not having been previously inoculated with the attenuated virus, sickened with tuberculosis and in some instances died. The last experiments confirm the fact that the tubercle bacillus does lose its virulence to a certain degree by cultivating it con- tinuously on an artificial medium. Dog C-1. Eight weeks old, weight 13 lbs. Was inoculated with second artificial culture of bovine tubercle bacillus and died within ten days, of toxeemia. Dog C-2. Same age and weight as C-1. Under the same treat- ment, also sickened with tuberculosis. Dog C-3. Same age and weight as C-1. Was at the same time inoculated with twenty-fifth artificial culture of bovine tubercle bacillus. While the others sickened with tuberculosis, this one shows no outward manifestation of the malady. In one of my recent communications, I referred to the fact that I had been injecting predigested fat plus antiseptics into the intestinal tract of animals suffering from tuberculosis with some success and also that I was subcutaneously introducing some of the bile salts. The results from the bile salts have not been at all constant; while the subcutaneous injection of glycerine into the tuberculous animals, which I recently referred to in a Medical Journal of this city, has apparently given a result which will stimulate work in this direction. Two dogs eight weeks old had respectively a mass of the second cultivation of bovine tubercle bacilli subcutaneously introduced. 164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. In seven days one was dead apparently from the toxic eftect of the product of the bacilli. The day that this dog died, the other presented a line of symptoms indicating toxzemia toa very marked degree. The animal was hardly able to stand and I had every reason to believe it was fast losing its vitality. One-half ce. of pure glycerine, well diluted, was subcutaneously introduced. Ina short time the animal showed physical improve- ment and in twelve hours it was restored to apparently a good con- dition. It would seem that ‘the glycerine enabled the viscera to get rid of the toxic agent that otherwise would have passed into the general circulation. Marca 383i. Mr. CHARLES Morris in the chair. A paper entitled “On Paramelaconite and the associated Miner- als,” by Geo. A. Koenig was presented for publication. The deaths of Wistar Morris, a member, and P. W. Sheafer, a correspondent, were announced. George S. Morris, Lieut. R. E. Peary, U. S. N., William D. Robinson, M. D. and Edgar Strayer, M. D. were elected members. The following were ordered to be printed :— 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165 ON SOME RECENT JAPANESE BRACHIOPODA, WITH A DESCRIPTION OF A SPECIES BELIEVED TO BE NEW. BY W. H. DALL AND H. A. PILSBRY. The collection of Brachiopoda described in the following pages was made by Mr. Frederick Stearns of Detroit, Michigan, when travelling in Japan during the years 1889-90. The specimens were dredged in depths not exceeding thirty fathoms, at localities along the eastern coast southward from Tokyo to Kii Channel and in the Inland Sea as far south as Jojo-sima. The specimens are in the collections of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and of Mr. Stearns. Genus TEREBRATULA Auct. Terebratula (Davidsoni var?) Stearnsii, Dall and Pilsbry, Plate IV, figs. 1-3. Shell large, waxen white or yellowish, smooth except for lines of growth, somewhat wedge-shaped, laterally compressed behind, wider in front, valves moderately inflated, larger or neural valve subtri- angular in outline, deep, the sides flattened, straight, diverging, the front margin evenly rounded; viewed laterally the profile of the line (the hemal valve being downward) between the two valves rises slightly to a weak flexure in front of the hinge plate and then descends forming a long curve, rising to a more marked flexure al- most an angle, where the sides meet the front margin ; between the two anterior angles the anterior margin of the neural valve is mod- erately convex downward while the hemal valve, subangulate at the corners, is correspondingly excavated between them; the mid- dle portion of the neural valve is slightly flattened as in Eudesia Raphaelis, the beak is prominent, high and inflated, the foramen large, circular and (in the specimen) much worn, the lower part pro- jects curving downward to a point, but does not touch the hemal valve when the shell is closed ; deltidial area narrow, with no mesial groove, bordered by a sharp angle and concavely excavated. The hzemal or smaller valve is less flattened and shallower than the other, the apex is entirely concealed under the curved beak of the opposite valve ; internally the cardinal process is rounded, the hinge short and rather weak, unsupported by any buttresses; there is no mesial septum in either valve; the partial sinuses are barely distin- guishable, there seems to have been five in the neural and four in 166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. heemal valve, narrow, slender, extending straight forward and be- ginning to dichotomize only near the front margin. The loop re- sembies somewhat that of 7. depressa Lam , and is especially nota- ble fur the breadth of the lamina and the keeled mesial ridge of the anterior transverse portion; this part is usually more rounded- over in Terebratula. Long. of neural valve 48°5; max. lat. of the same 33:0; max. diameter of shell 28-0 mm. Habitat, eastern coast of Japan, Province of Kii. This shell recalls some varieties of 7. depressa Lamarck from the Greensand of Britain. As thespecimen is unique, it was not thought best to separate the valves to study the loop but sufficient could be seen from the natural opening to determine that the species belongs rather to the J. vitrea type than to that of JT. sphenoidea. From both and from any other species known, it differs in the prominence and narrowness of the mesial bend or fold in the transverse anterior part of the loop. There is no species known from Japan or the Pacific which could be identified with this one unless it be the Terebratula Davidsoni A. Adams, which is treated by Dr. Davidson in his last publication (Trans. Linn. Soce., Zoology, 2nd Ser. part 1, p. 9, Pl. 1, figs. 14-16, 1886) under the head of Liothyris vitrea var? Davidsoni but which ean hardly be regarded as varietally connected with T. vitrea. T. Davidsoni is only known from two small specimens dredged in 55 fathoms at Satanomosaki, Japan, by A. Adams. Dr. Davidson says “I am not certain that this small species is really a variety of T. vitrea, * ** * they much resemble the typical var. minor. One of the specimens bore some resemblance to young examples of Liothy- ris uva from the Gulf of Tehuantepec; but differs from it, accord- ing to A. Adams, in its more solid structure and globose form and in the foramen being smaller and entire” (op. cit. p. 10). From the figures and observations which have been published, it would seem highly probable that 7. Davidsoni is an adult shell measuring about 18°0 mm. in length while the young of 7. Stearnsti, as indi- cated by the lines of growth, is a more circular shell in outline and less evenly globose. The specimen figured shows no indication of compression or distortion and the. wedge-like outline of the adult seems normal. If this conclusion is correct and this peculiarity be constant, the species will be well characterized by it. We are of the opinion that the species is distinct from 7. Davidsoni, but leave the 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167 question open until more material shall be available. We have ‘dedicated the new species to Mr. Stearns from whom it was received. With regard to its relations to T. wea, it may be observed that spec- imens of 7. uva in the National Museum from Guayaquil, have an entire foramen, as figured by Dr. Davidson, as does the original type specimen, so that the implication of A. Adams is not sustained by the facts. But 7. wva is readily distinguished from any other species by the fact that it is finely obsoletely radiated all over, with rather sparse radii, situated much asin 7. subquadrata Jeffreys, but less sharp and wider. To a casual inspection the shell appears ssmooth, but a careful examination reveals the sculpture. TT. Stearn- sii is destitute of such radii. The relative size of the foramen in Terebratula, of course, is a character of no importance. Its mar- gins are always eroded and its size depends entirely on the amount of friction to which it has been subjected during life. Specimens of L. vitrea from still, deep water, which were attached only to very small branches of decorticated Gorgonians, have an extremely min- ute foramen; while specimens from more agitated waters, attached to rock or coral surfaces, have quite a large pedicle and foramen. Genus TEREBRATULINA Orbigny. Terebratulina Crossei Davidson. Terebratulina Cros:et Davidson, Journ. de Conchyl. XXX, p. 106, pl. VII, fig. 1, 1882; Trans. Linn. Soe. 2, Zool, IV, p. 33, pl. ITI, figs. 4-6, 1886. Two specimens of this fine species were included in the series sent by Mr. Stearns. They were attached to a large fragment of a sili- cious sponge. Habitat, “ Inland sea,” south of Province Kii. Genus TEREBRATELLA Orbigny. Owing to the peculiar development through which the loop passes before reaching the adult condition it is quite certain that Eudesia (or Waldheimia of most authors) belongs in the subfamily contain- ing Terebratella and Megerlia rather than that to which Terebra- tula proper and Terebratulina, may be reterred. Terebratella Gouldii Dall. Plate IV, figs, 4-5. Magasella Gould Dali, P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 307, pl. XXXI, fig. 1la-c. Davidson, op. cit., p. 96, pl. XVII, figs. 20-22, 1887. (Magasella Stage.) Shell waxen white, more or less stained with extraneous dark brown or black matter, large, thin; evenly radiately sculptured with uniform equal delicate costz separated by very distinct but not very deep interspaces of about equal width; the costz begin to 168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. dichotomize about the middle of the shell and maintain a remark- - ably uniform size over the whole surface but do not crenulate the adult margin; there are about 13 costz to a centimeter of width; valves wider behind the middle, hzemal valve with a very faint con- cave medial flexure or concavity (possibly due to an injury in youth) marked on the anterior margin by an obscure wave at each side and, on the neural or larger valve, by an analogous eminence or reverse flexure; the anterior margin otherwise is rather evenly rounded; heemal valve flattish, in the type specimen with some indentations near the beak which show that its growth was cramped when young by projections of the stone to which it was attached or some other agency ; beak of the heemal valve not prominent; cardinal process obscure, concave medially; cardinal margin extensive nearly straight ; neural valve more convex, beak not very prominent, con- considerably eroded; lateral areas flattened, foramen incomplete, the grooves marking off the pseudo-deltidia on each side very oblique obscure and close to the edge of the hiatus; interior with the pallial sinuses large, one on each side and arborescent but obscure on account of the condition of the specimen; neural valve with a short obscure thickened septal line mesially ; heemal valve with a well- elevated, subtriangular, rather short septum to which the lower por- tion of the loop is attached on each side by a slender process ; loop very slender throughout, the transverse processes situated very near the crura which are rather strong; the anterior part of the loop reaching within a centimeter of the anterior margin before recurying, the recurved portion very narrow and delicate; the hinge is later- ally well extended but feeble. Max. lat. 42-0; long. of neural valve 37:0; diameter of shell 20°0 mm. Habitat, eastern coast of Japan, between Yeddo and Oshima. It is now well understood, through the researches of Mr. Herman Friele and subsequently of Dr. Davidson and others, that the stages of development having their permanent representatives in the genera Magasella, Terebratella and Waldheimia are successively exhibited in the development of the last mentioned, while Terebratella stops short with the second stage. Consequently, when a small species of Magasella is discovered, it may be taken for granted that a large species of one of the three above mentioned genera exists in the vicinity, and it is impossible to say which, unless the series is traced. Usually the large adult form has been found first, and, when two names have been applied to the stages, that of the Magasella, or 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169 smallest stage, is generally the one which falls into synonymy. Many of the latter were named and properly discriminated before the connection between them was understood, though the remark- able parallel between them was pointed out in detail in these Pro- ceedings in 1873. One such case was that of two Magaselle de- scribed by Mr. Dall and the late Dr. Davidson, respectively, in the paper on Japanese brachiopods published by the latter in 1871. Mr. Dall has since been able, by the examination of a graded series, to trace the adult of Magasella Adamsi Davidson to Eudesia Grayi Davidson. The M. Adamsi differed from the M. Gouldii Dall in its coarser radii, in having its mesial flexure in the opposite direc- tion and by its less transverse form. The long sought for adult of M. Adamsi is at last supplied by the present species, which in spite of the difference in size, differs from the adult Eudesia Grayi in much the same'way. The character of the sculpture and the direc- tion of the flexure being quite the same, as well as the transverse form, there can be no reasonable doubt that the two are thus gene- tically connected. The direction of the flexure, which at best is very feeble in the normal adult EZ. Grayi, may change in growth or become asymmetrical, so that the slight concavity is in the smaller valve, but this is not the case in the Magasella stage, and in fact is only evident in the variety transversa Davidson. The transverse processes of the present specimen are represented only by small remnants attached to the loop near the crura and to the shortseptum. Still the size of the specimen is so large that this deficiency is probably to be attributed to accident or injury, rather than an indication that 7. Gouldii progresses to the Eudesia stage and is, in its final adult form, a Eudesia. The transverse form of the shell favors the opinion that it does not develop beyond the Terebratella stage, the dimensions of the specimen also point toward its being adult, since no instance is known of a subordinate stage of any brachiopod reaching more than one quarter this size before the transformation of the loop becomes complete. This fine and remarkable species is distinctively characterized by its fine and uniform sculpture. It most resembles 7. cruenta, of New Zealand, which is bright red, a much coarser and heavier shell, with a complete foramen and much more prominent beak. They cannot be confounded by any one who carefully inspects them. The nearest Japanese resemblance is offered by Eudesia Grayt 12 170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. which is even coarser than ZT. erwenta so that there seems no reason, even in the absence of the loop, why they should not readily be distinguished. The following stages are now known in Pacific brachiopods, an 5 fo} asterisk indicating the adult stage :— MAGASELLA. TEREBRATELLA. EUDESIA. M. Aleutica Dall, = T. frontalis Midd.* M. Adamsi Dav., = T. = E. Grayi Dav.* M. levis Dall, = T. pulvinata Gld., — E. venosa Sol.* M. Gouldii Dall, == T. Gouldii Dall* M. = T. Coreanica Reeve,* M. radiata Dall, —= ?T. transversa Sby.* M. Patagonica Gld. = T. dorsata Gmel* M. = (Megerlia) Jeffreysi Dall = (Laqueus) Cali- fornicus* Koch. Subgenus LAQUEUS Dall. Terebratella (Laqueus) Blanfordi Dunker. Terebratula Blanfordi Dkr., Ind. Moll, Mar. Jap., p. 251, pl. XIV, figs. 4-6, 1882. Terebratella Blanfordi Davidson, op. cit., p. 83, pl. XV, figs. 9-12, 1887. Two specimens of this fine species are included in the lot sent. They show that this species instead of being a typical Terebratella is a Laqueus and the one of all the species of this North Pacific group which shows the peculiarly complicated loop in its finest development and strength. These also show that, in life, the pallial sinuses are red in color, broad and branched, somewhat as in Eudesia venosa, a fact which has not hitherto been noticed. The specimens are from the eastern coast. Laqueus rubellus G. Bb. Sowerby. Terebratula rubella Sowh., Proc, Zool. Soc. Lond. 1846, p, 94. Laqueus rubellus Davidson, op. cit., p. 113, pl. XIX, figs. 1-5. Numerous specimens of this beautiful species were collected along the coast at and near Joja Shima. Some of them are quite as brilliantly striped as the figures in Sowerby’s Thesaurus, which Davidson seems to think exaggerated. Genus EUDESIA King. Waltheimia King, Perm. Foss., p. 81, 1850; not of Brullé, Hist. Nat. Ins. Hymenopt. IV, p. 665, Nov., 1846; (Hymenoptera.) Eudesia King, Perm. Foss., p. 144, 1850; Dall, Index Names of Brach. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. VIII, p. 28, 1877. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171 Eudesia Raphaelis Dall. Waldheimia Raphaelis Dall, Am. Journ, Conch, VI, p. 3, pl, VII, figs. a-d, 1870. Davidson, op. cit., p. 58, pl. XI, figs. 11-13, 1887. Japanese coast near Yeddo, Pumpelly. Sagami Bay, 100-200 fathoms, Déderlein. A single specimen somewhat smaller and more wedge-shaped than the original type, and with stronger folds, was included in the lot sent. This shows the deep brown color to be a constant character and confirms the opinion of the writers and the late Dr. Davidson as to the validity of this species, which had been referred to E. septigera by Dr. Jeffreys. 172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. NOTES ON SOME RECENT BRACHIOPODS. BY WM. H. DALL. Terebratella transversa Sowerby. Plate IV, figs. 8, 9. T. transversa Sowerby, P. Z.S. 1846, p. 94. Dall, Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1873, p. 185. Davidson, Linn, Soc. Trans. iv, p. 78, 1887 (partly). T. caurina Gould, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. IIT, p. 347, 1850. Habitat, the Oregonian province, including the southern part of Alaska and thence southward to San Pedro, California, low water to 100 fathoms. I include this species because it is to some extent mixed up with the history of Hudesia Grayi and the present seems a good time to clear up the confusion. Eudesia (or Waldheimia) Grayi is a well characterized Japanese species somewhat resembling the rounder sculptured forms of 7. transversa but with a different loop and hardly any mesial flexure. It had been erroneously reported from Catalina Island, California and an examination of the specimens so named showed that they belong to the genus Yerebratella and I named them accordingly Terebratella occidentalis. The Californian shell is quite rare and, fifteen years afterwards, having found that T. transversa is occasion- ally marked with crimson, I began to suspect that my occidentalis was merely a brighter colored, more sharply sculptured southern race of transversa. The types of occidentalis being inaccessible, I had no means of deciding in regard to this suspicion which was com- municated to the late Dr. Thos. Davidson with the result that cer- tain varieties of transversa were (as it now appears wrongly) identi- fied and figured as my occidentalis. In the last publication of Dr. Davidson (Trans. Linn. Soc. 2, Zool. IV, pl. 16) figs. 14 and 14a represent a variety of T. transversa but not T. occidentalis as tnere supposed. Figure 13 is a reproduction of my original, rather ob- scure figure of occidentalis. The reception of a fine specimen of oe- cidentalis collected by the U. 8. Fish Com. Str. Albatross and an opportunity of inspecting my original types now in the museum of the State University at Berkeley, California, has shown that the two forms are perfectly distinct and T. occidentalis is therefore to be reinstated in its independence. T. transversa has two principal varieties, a nearly smooth and somewhat rounded form, which might retain in a varietal sense the 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173 original name, since it has been so applied by Davidson (op. cit. pl, 16); while the other is still more transverse, strongly sculptured, and for which Davidson has retained Gould’s name of caurina. The latter form is more commonly found near shore and even just below low water of extreme spring tides. In deep, quieter water it grows to a much larger size and is smoother ; in one collected by Prof. O. B. Johnson of Seattle, State of Washington, in the deep water off Port Orchard, Puget Sound, the neural valve measures 50 mm. high and 58 mm. wide, while the two closed valves have a diameter of 31:0 mm. ‘This places the species among the largest living brachiopods and certainly the largest living Terebratella as far as known. In specimens from south of San Francisco the livid pink of the north- ern form is frequently replaced by a vivid crimson. Terebratella occidentalis Dall. Plate IV, figs. 6, 7. Terebratella occidentalis Dall, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., IV, p. 182, pl. 1, fig. 7, 1871. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1873, p. 184, Terebratella transversa Davidson, in part, not of Sowerby. Monterey and Santa Barbara Islands, California, Dall, Cooper, ete. A fine specimen dredged off San Clemente Island, California, by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, shows that this spe- cies is distinguished from 7. transversa Sowerby and all others by the fact that its strong mesial fold is convex in the smaller or he- mal valve instead of concave; in the smaller number and more angular character of its radiating ribs; and from northern 7’ trans- versa in being pure white, painted with crimson, instead of gray or orange ferruginous; though in the matter of color the southern specimens of transversa are like occidentalis. Eudesia (venosa Sol. var. ?) lenticularis Deshayes. Waldheimia lenticularis (Desh., 1839), Davidson, op. cit. p. 52, pl. IX, figs. 2-13, 1886. Terebratula pulvinata Gould, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., ITT, p. 047, 1850. Terebratella pulvinata Carpenter, Dall, e¢. a/., Davidson, op. cit. p. 90, pl. XVI, fig, 15, 1887. Habitat, New Zealand, Hutton, Dr. Kershner, U. 8. N.; Pata- gonia, U.S. Expedition under Wilkes, also U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, at Stations 2778 and 2779 in Magellan Strait at a depth of 60-80 fathoms. Not “Puget Sound” as originally stated by Gould, from erroneous labels of the Wilkes Expedition. Lf. lenticularis is not well distinguished from varieties of E. venosa and is, probably, in its typical form a local race, representing for New Zealand the Patagonian venosa. Strictly intermediate speci- 174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. mens are in the U.S. National Museum from the Straits of Magel- lan. I showed a good many years ago that the Puget Sound local- ity was an error and that Gould’s specimen almost certainly came from Orange Harbor, Patagonia. The figures given by Davidson from New Zealand specimens of the stages through which Eudesia lenticularis passes, before assuming its normal adult loop, show con- clusively that Gould’s Terebratula pulvinata is the Terebratella stage of the adolescent Eudesia lenticularis or the E. venosa from which the former is doubtfully distinct. Dr. Davidson has suggested that it might be a smooth Terebra- tella dorsata (op. cit. p. 91) but his first supposition that it was an immature Hudesia venosa was much nearer the mark. It has noth- ing of the aspect or texture of 7. dorsata, and, had the specimens actually been examined by him, I think he would never have en- tertained that idea. A second specimen agreeing with Gould’s type was found attached to an E. venosa collected at Orange Harbor. Genus MEGERLIA King. Megerlia monstruosa Scacchi. Terebratula monstruosa Scacchi, Ossery. Zool. 2, p. 8, 1833. Morrisia gigantea Yeshayes, Moll. Isle Bourbon, p. 37, pl. 32, figs. 9-10, 1863. Megerlia truncata Linné, var. monstruosa Davidson, op. cit. p. 108, pl. XIX, figs. 21-22a, 1887. Megerlia disparilis Dall (name only) U. S. Nat. Mus, Bull. No. 37, p. 28, No. 8, 1889, Habitat, Mediterranean, 15-229 fms. also the Atlantic in deep. water ; Isle of Bourbon, near Mauritius, Maillard; Barbados, on dead coral from 100 fathoms, U. 8. Fish Commission. The young shell referred to, which was obtained at Barbados. some years ago, presents some characters which greater age would have obscured; the foramen, as in Platidia, occupies normally part of both valves, and its margins, slightly prolonged do not show any evidence of distortion, erosion or disease. The larger or neural valve is covered with spongy tubercles arranged approximately on the incremental lines but more or less irregular. The smaller or neural valve is much smoother, and at this age marked only with incremental lines. Neither valve shows any radiating ribs such as are so strongly marked on the beaks of the average MW. truncata. It is well known to dredgers how abundant M. truncata is where it oc- curs living at all. A moderately large cobble, overgrown with coral or corallines will sometimes afford forty or fifty specimens. Now there seems no reason to doubt the assigned habitat of Maillard’s 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. T(E specimen, and that from Barbados is beyond dispute. Consequently we have (if we persist in regarding M. monstruosa as a monstrous form of M. truncata) the anomaly of a monstrous variety ofa brachio- pod being found in widely separated parts of the world unaccom- panied by the normal form. This I do not believe. For some time I have regarded the M. monstruosa as probably a distinct species. Dr. Davidson also had strong suspicions of its distinctness ; refused to consider it as a mere monstrosity, but, with characteristic caution, placed it in his last work as a “variety” of M. truncata. I regard the discovery of this Megerlia in the West Indies as conclusive evidence of its specific independence of M. truncata beside being an interesting addition to the fauna of the Americas. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. Terebratula Stearnsti Dall and Pilsbry ; 48°5. Terebratula Stearnsii, front view ; 33:0. Terebratula Stearnsii, side view; 48°5. Terebratella Gouldii Dall; 42:0. Terebratella Gouldii, side view ; 37:0. Terebratella occidentalis Dall, view of rather aged specimen ; 31:0. Terebratelia occidentalis, same specimen from in front; 31:0. Terebratella transversa Sowerby, young specimen of same size as the preceding for comparison of sculpture and flexure; 36°65. 9. The same, front view ; 36°5. The numerals indicate the actual length in millimeters of the longest diameter of the figure referred to, measured on the speci- men figured when placed in the position represented. a 176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. CRUSTACEA FROM THE NORTHERN COAST OF YUCATAN, THE HARBOR OF VERA CRUZ, THE WEST COAST OF FLORIDA AND THE BERMUDA ISLANDS. BY J. E. IVES. The Crustacea treated of in this paper were collected fdr the greater part on the northern coast of Yucatan and in the harbor of Vera Cruz, during the early months of 1890 by the Expedition in charge of Professor Angelo Heilprin, sent by the Academy of Nat- ural Sciences of Philadelphia to investigate the Natural History of Yucatan and Mexico. The writer, who was a member of the Expedi- tion, is indebted to Professor Heilprin for the opportunity of work- ing up this portion of the collection. The paper also includes a list of the Crustacea collected upon the west coast of Florida in the spring of 1886 by Professor Heilprin and Mr. Joseph Willcox under the auspices of the Wagner Free Institute of Science of Philadelphia,' and the description of a new Isopod, collected by the Academy’s Expedition to the Bermuda’ Islands in 1888. It is remarkable that the shores of Yucatan and Mexico, portions of the American Continent among the first to be discovered by Europeans, should be among the last to have their zoology investi- gated. Nothing whatever, with one or two isolated exceptions, has been known hitherto of the fauna of the shores of Yucatan, and very little of that of the eastern coast of Mexico. The material collected by the Expedition has added considerably to the knowledge of this region. The carcinological results may be briefly summarized as follows. Five new species and one new variety are described and figured: a species described by Say from the coast of New Jersey and two described by Dana from Rio Janeiro, and not referred to since their original description, have been redescribed and one of them figured : other little known and unfigured species have been figured; and some interesting conclusions have been arrived at in regard to the synonymy of some of the species, and the geographical distribution of the crustacea of the Caribbean region. 1 See Professor Heilprin’s Report ‘* Explorations on the west coast of Florida and in the Okeechobee Wilderness,” Trans. Wagner Free Institute of Science, vol. 1, 1887. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77 In reference to the character of the coasts upon which the speci- mens were collected in Yucatan and Mexico, the following para- graphs are quoted from the author’s report upon the Echinoderms collected by the Expedition." “ The northern coast of Yucatan possesses a sandy beach largely made up of shell fragments. The water, off the coast, is very shal- low, the 10 fathom line being 20 miles from the shore, and the 100 fathom line about 150 miles. Three miles off the shore, in the neigh- borhood of Progreso, the bottom is of a sandy character, although a few small corals were brought up in the dredge. Along the shore to the westward of Progreso isasmall Serpuloid reef. Large quantities of sea-weed and sponges are thrown upon the beach and lie de- composing in the sun. These and numerous water-worn specimens of Orbicella annularis and a large Escharine species of Bryozoan, with some specimens of Xiphogorgia anceps, indicate the exist- ence of a region rich in animal and vegetable life not very far from the shore.” The harbor of Vera Cruz is an area of luxuriant coral growth, madrepores and brain corals being especially abundant. The specimens from the west coast of Florida were collected in the shallow waters of that region from Cedar Keys to the Caloosahat- chie River. The shore line consists of sandy or shelly beaches and mud flats. The 10 and 100 fathom lines are about the same dis- tance frem the coast as in the case of northern Yucatan. While engaged in working upon the Brachyura discussed in the following pages, the author came to the conclusion that it would be advantageous to carcinologists to have a special term for the four pos- terior pairs of appendages of crabs, now known as the “ ambulatory legs.” The term cruriped,’ a word of similar construction to cheli- ped, has therefore been introduced. It was found that confusion often arose in the use of the term legs, it being used indiscrim- inately either for the four posterior pairs of appendages alone, or for all five pairs. The term “ambulatory leg’ used by Mr. Miers and others is cumbersome, and may be well replaced by cruriped. In the following pages, therefore, the term chelipeds is used for the anterior pair of appendages of Brachyura, cruripeds for the four posterior pairs of appendages and /Jegs when speaking of all five pairs. 1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1890, pp. 317, 318. 2 Crur leg, ped foot. 178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The species enumerated and described below are arranged under the localities in which they were collected. The systematic portion of the paper is followed by some considerations in regard to their geographical distribution and a chronological list of the general literature of the higher crustacea of the West Indian region which. it is believed will be of use to future students of these shores. YUCATAN. DECAPODA. Pericera trispinosa. Pisa trispinosa, Latreille, Encyclopédie t. x, p. 142. Pericera trispinosa, A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Mis. Sci. Mex. p. 52, pl. 15, fig. 2. A single specimen, dredged in shallow water off Progreso. The postero-lateral spines are much broader than in Guerin’s' figure of this species. The specimen closely resembles the figure given by A. Milne-Edwards. Specimens in the collection of this Academy from Cuba and the Tortugas closely resemble the specimen collected. The living crab was of a bright scarlet color. Microphrys bicornutus. Pisa bicornutus, Latreille, Encyclopédie. t. x, p. 141. Microphys bicornutus, A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex. p. 61, pl. xiv, figs. 2-4. A young individual, dredged in 20 ft. of water off Progreso. Libinia dubia. Milne-Edwards, Hist. nat. Crust. Vol. I, p. 300, pl. xiv ézs., fig. 2. A dead specimen collected upon the beach at the Port of Silam. Panopeus Herbstii. Milne-Edwards, Hist nat. Crust. t. I, p. 403. A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex. p. 308, pl. LVII, fig, 2. Two young males from the Port of Silam. Pilumnus aculeatus. Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila (1) Vol. I, p. 449. A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex. p. 282, pl. L, fig. 1. Three specimens dredged in 20 feet of water off Progreso. Menippe mercenaria. Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1) Vol. I, p. 448. A young specimen from the Port of Silam. 1 Tconographie du Régne animal de G. Cuvier, Crust. pl. 8, fig. 3. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179 Eucratopsis crassimanus. Dana, U: S. Explor. Exped. Vol. XIII, Crust. p. 311, pl. 19, fig. 2a-d. S. I. Smith Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. II, p. 35. A female of this interesting species was obtained at the Port of Silam. Professor Dana described the species from a specimen ob- tained by the Wilkes Exploring Expedition, probably at Rio Jan- eiro. It has not since been recorded from any locality and its re- discovery upon the coast of Yucatan is of much interest. A broad distribution is thus indicated. Ocypoda arenaria. Ocypode arenarius Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1), Vol. I, p. 69. Ocypoda rhombea Dana, U. S. Explor. Exped. Crust. p. 322, pl. XIX, fig. 8. A dried specimen collected upon the beach at Progreso. Gelasimus speciosus, n. sp. PI. V, figs. 6 and 7. Four fiddler-crabs were collected at the Port of Silam which apparently represent an undescribed species. They consist of three males and one female, and agree well in their character. The species may be described as follows. Rostrum broad between the orbits. Male abdomen seven-jointed. Carapace smooth, moderately elevated ; posterior edge, between the posterior pair of cruripeds, three-fifths of the length of the anterior edge; antero-posterior diameter about two-thirds of the length of the anterior edge. Margin of the meros of the larger cheliped minutely denticulate, inner flat surface smooth, outer convex surtace with scattered transverse rows of minute tubercles. Carpus, inner surface smooth, outer surface minutely tubercled. Manus long and slender. In a specimen fifteen mm. wide between the antero- lateral angels of the carapace, the manus is thirty-one mm. long to the tip of the dactylus, and nine mm. wide across the broadest por- tion of the palm. The length of the palm is rather less than two- fifths, and its breadth rather less than three-tenths, of the entire length of the hand. The fingers are long and slender, the pollex is perfectly straight, and the dactylus is narrow at its base between the superior and prehensile borders, rather longer than the pollex, little arcuate and gently curved toward the tip. Palm minutely granulated on the outer surface, on the inner surface with a row of tubercles running upwards and backwards from the lower margin to the carpal groove, and continued upwards and forwards from the carpal groove towards the upper margin. Proximal portion of 180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. the palm behind this groove minutely granulated, distal portion smooth. Pollex and dactylus smooth, with three rows of minute tubercles upon their prehensile margins, tubercles of the outer and inner rows very minute and closely approximated, those of the middle row slightly larger, of irregular size and not closely approx- imated, the five at the base of the dactylus being most prominent and increasing in size from the base outwards; one or more tuber- cles nearly as prominent as these latter, in each of the fingers near their middle. The inner row of the tubercles upon the pollex continued upwards and slightly backwards upon the palm nearly to its upper margin. A slight ridge of tubercles in front of it at the base of the dactylus. The ridge forming the upper border of the carpal groove minutely denticulated and its anterior end not con- tinued downwards and forwards upon the palm. This form is closely allied to Gelasimus vocator as characterized by Professor Kingsley.’ It differs from it principally in the length and shape of the larger cheliped. In Gelasimus speciosus, the larger cheliped is about twice the length of that of Gelasimus vocator. The fingers are longer and more slender, the dactylus is less arcuate, the granulation upon the outer surface of the palm is finer and the ridge forming the upper border of the carpal groove is not con- tinued forwards and downwards upon the palm but is terminated by a slight groove separating it from the upward and forward extension of the tubercular ridge of the lower portion of the inner surface of the palm. The sides of the carapace are also rounded and less angular than in Gelasimus vocator. Inthe long and slender character of the fingers it approximates Gelasimus stenodactylus, but is distinguished from this species by the fact that the fourth, fifth and sixth segments are distinct from each other and not anchy- losed into one piece. The following species have been described since the monograph of the genus by Professor Kingsley.” G. Thomsoni, Kirk. Trans. New Zealand Inst. vol. XIII, p. 236, 1880, Well- ington. New Zealand. G. Huttoni, Filhol, Mission de l’'IleCampbell, Rec. Vénus, III, pt. 2, (Crustacea). G. Cimatodus, Rochebrune, Bull. Soc. Philomat., Paris; (7) t. VII, p. 171, 1882-1883, Senegambia. 1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1880, p. 147, pl. X, fig. 20. 2 Loc ut. pp. 1385-155. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181 Pachygrapsus gracilis. De Saussure, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Genéve, t. XIV, p. 443, pl. IT, figs. 15 and W5as ice A male collected at the Port of Silam. Sesarma cinerea. Grapsus cinereus, Bosc. Hist. Nat. Crust. vol. I, p. 258, pl. V, fig. 1; Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., (1) vol. I, p. 442; (non Gvapsus cinereus, op. cit. p- 99.) Two males and two females, collected at the Port of Silam. Hippa emerita. Cancer emeritus, \.., Syst. Nat., ed. 12, p. 1055, (pars). fippa emerita, Miers, Jour. Linn Soc., vol. XIV, p. 328, pl. V, fig. 9. flippa analoga, Stimpson, Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. VI, p. 485; Miers, op. cit., p 324, pl. 5, fig. 10. Hippa talpoidea, Vexrill, Report of U.S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, 1871 and 1872, p. 548, pl. IT, fig. 5. Numerous specimens of this widely distributed species were obtained at Progreso and the Port of Silam. It is used by the fishermen as bait, and large numbers are dug from the sand. Specimens of Hippa are in the collection of the Academy from the eastern and western coasts of the Americas; from California, Guatemala, Panama, and Chili, and from Massachusetts, New Jer- sey, Florida, Brazil and La Plata. A careful examination of the abundant material leads me to the conclusion that the forms on the Pacific and Atlantic sides of the continent represent but a single species. ‘The supposed distinctive characters enumerated by Stimp-. son and Miers, such as the shape, width and rugosity of the cara- pace, the shape of the frontal lobes, of the antennal spines, of the lobe of the third joint of the outer maxillipeds, and of the last abdominal segment, do not appear to be constant. Variation in these characters exists in forms from both the Pacific and Atlan- tic waters, and I have not found it possible to fix upon any charac- ter by which to distinguish the forms from the two areas. All] the characters mentioned above are more or less variable, in the speci- mens from either side. The carapace may be broader or narrower, more or less rugose, the shape of the frontal lobes, and of tbe lobe of the third joint of the outer maxillipeds, varies, and the antennal spines vary in their length and may be directed slightly inwards or outwards. The specimens from any one locality, however resem- ble each other, and the tendency towards variation expresses itself in local varieties. The specimens from the west coast appear > 4 »* 182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. to be usually more rugose than those from the east coast, but it is by no means a constant character. No good typical figure of this species exists. That given by Professor Verrill is the best, but the carapace is usually narrower at its anterior extremity than is shown in his figure. The figure given by H. Milne-Edwards in the “ Régne Animal”? under the name of Hippa emerita, Fabr.,is much narrower than any specimen of this species which I have seen, and its general aspect excites a suspicion that it represents a specimen of Hippa asiatica,’ and not of Hippa emerita. Clibanarius formosus, n. sp. Plate V, figs. 1 and 2. Three hermit crabs were collected upon the beach at the Port of Silam which apparently belong to an undescribed species of the prolific genus Clibanarius. For them I propose the foregoing name. The species may be characterized as follows :— Carapace with the anterior margin angular; possessing a small acute median tooth; about four-fifths as broad as long. Eye peduncles slender, about as long as the anterior margin of the cara- pace, their basal scales small with three or four teeth on the anterior margin. External antenne with the last joint of the peduncle nearly three times as long as the penultimate and with the basal scale of moderate size; its acute extremity reaching the distal edge of the penultimate joint. Chelipeds small, of equal size; manus oblong- oval, covered with numerous tubercles from which arise tufts of short hairs; meros joint with a small black-tipped spine at its antero- dorsal extremity. Cruripeds somewhat compressed ; tarsus of the first and second pairs slightly longer than the penultimate joint ; with several longitudinal series of small pits into which are inserted tufts of short hairs. Color in alcohol a dull orange, the cruripeds with four broad longitudinal stripes of reddish-brown upon the tarsal and penultimate joints; the stripes situated upon the dorsal lateral and ventral surfaces respectively. The preceding or fourth joint with two broad stripes upon its outer surface, and one upon its dorsal surface. Length of the carapace, 25 mm. In general characters this species resembles very closely the common form of the southern coast of the Eastern United States, 1 Crustacés, pl. 42, fig. 2. 2 H. Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. ii, page 209. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183 Clibanarius vittatus Bose,’ but differs from it in its smaller chelipeds, and in its color pattern. The external antenne are also apparently about one-fifth shorter than in C. vittatus. The following species of Clibanarius may be added to those enu- merated by Stimpson in his Prodromus.’ The greater number have been described since the publication of his list. They are arranged in chronological order and without regard to the question of syn- onymy. : C. tubularis L., Syst, Nat., Ed. 12, 1767, p. 1050; Risso, Crust. de Nice, p. 56, 1816. Mediterranean. fe C. misanthrops Risso, Hist. nat de |’Eur. mér., t. V, p. 40, 1826; Roux, Crust. de la Medit. pl. 14, fig. 1. Mediterranean C. ornatus Roux, Crust. de la Medit., 1830, pl. 48. Marseilles. C. strigimanus White, Proc Zool. Soc. 1847, p. 122. Van Dieman’s Land. C. Cubensis de Saussure, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Genéve, Vol. XIV, p. 455, 1857. Cuba. C. turgidus Stimpson, Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist. 1857, p. 484, pl. XXI, fig. 1. Puget Sound. C. carnifex Heller, Sitzungsb. Akad. Wissensch. Wien Vol. XLIV, pt. I, p. 259, 1861. Red Sea. C. signatus Heller, id, p. 252. Red Sea. C. Roux? Heller, Crust. siid]. Europa, Wien, 1863, p. 279. Gibralter. C. barbatus Heller, Reise der Oesterreichischen Fregatte Novara, Crust. p. 90, Taf VII, fig. 5. 1868. Auckland. C. infraspinatus Hilgendorf. Crustaceen von Ost Afrika, 1869, p. 97. C. cayennensis Miers, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1877, p. 657. Cayenne. C. carnescens Miers, id, p. 658. Cayenne. C. spectosus Miers, loc. cit. Brazil. C. Lordi Miers, loc. cit. Vancouver Island, B. C, C. Mediterraneus Kossmann, Archiv. fiir Naturg., vol. XLIV, p. 257, 1878. Mediterrai ean. C. eurysternus Hilgendorf, M. B. Akad. Wissensch. Berlin, 1878, p. 822, pl. III, figs. 9 and 10. Mozambique. C. Padarensis De Man, Journ. Linn. Soc. Vol. XXII, p. 242, Pl. XVI, fig. 1. King Island, Mergui Archipelago. C. arethusa De Man, id. p. 252, King Island, Mergui Archipelago. Alpheus heterochelis. Alpheus heterochelis, Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., (1) Vol. I, p. 243, Alpheus lutarius, de Saussure, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Geneve, t. XIV, p. 461, Pl. ILI, fig. 24. A male and female, obtained at the Port of Silam. Palemonella Yucatanica, n.sp. PI. V, fig. 8. A small female prawn with eggs attached was dredged in twenty feet of water off Progreso. It is allied to Palemonella tenuipes of Dana (1852, p. 582, pl. 38, fig. 3) and appears to be an unde- scribed species. I have named it Palemonella Yucatanica. It may be characterized as follows. 1 Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés, Vol. I, p. 327, Vol. II, pl. XII. 2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 225. 184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Rostrum straight, from its origin to its apex about as long as the carapace, projects beyond the anterior edge of the carapace about as far as two-thirds of the length of the basal scale of the outer antennee, arises about midway between the anterior and posterior edges of the dorsal surface of the carapace, its origin marked by a tooth, between this and the apical tooth of the rostrum there are six other teeth equally spaced, the posterior one being directly above the base of the outer antenna, two teeth on the under surface near the apex. Peduncle of inner antenne as long as the basal scale of the outer antennz. Antennal tooth directly above the base of the outer antenna; hepatic tooth in a line drawn midway between the first and second teeth of the rostrum, counting from its base, and a little below the antennal tooth. Second pair of pereiopods with meros about as long as from the posterior edge of the dorsal surface of the carapace to the basal tooth of the rostrum ; its distal end not spined, carpus about as long as the meros, its distal end with a very minute spine, manus about as long as from the second tooth of the rostrum to its apex; fingers about half the length of the hand. It may be distinguished from Palemonella tenuipes by the shorter hand of the second pair of pereiopods, not longer than from the first tooth of the rostrum to its apex; by the lack of spines upon the distal end of the meros and the presence of only a rudi- mentary spine upon the distal end of the carpus; also by the posi- tion of the first tooth of the rostrum, midway between the anterior and posterior edges of the dorsal surface of the carapace, the greater length of the peduncle of the inner antennz and the basal scale of the first antennz, which are as long as the manus, and the less anterior position of the hapatic tooth which is one-quarter to one-third of the length of the carapace removed from the anterior edge. STOMATOPODA. Squilla prasinolineata. ; Squilla prasinolineata Dana, Crust. U. S. Explor. Exped. p. 630, Pl. XLI, fig. " Squilla Dufresnii (Leach) Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), Vol. V, p. 18, PI. II, figs. 8 and 9. A small female squilla, about 23 inches in length, was collected at the Port of Silam. It agrees well with Dana’s description of Squilla prasinolineata. It also resembles the figure of Squil/a Du- fresnii, given by Mr. Miers in his Monograph of the Squillide, and I am therefore led to regard this latter species as a synonym of 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185 Squilla prasinolineata. The squilla in the collection of the British Museum, described and figured by Mr. Miers under the name of Squilla Dufresnii, had had the name attached to it in manuscript by Leach but had never been previously described. White in his “ List of the specimens of Crustacea in the collection of the British Museum,” 1847, p. 83, recorded Leach’s manuscript name but gave no description. Dana published his description of S. prasinolineata in 1852, and if as I have assumed, these two species are synony- mous, then Dana’s name must be used, as no description was attached to the publication of Leach’s name in 1847. The speci- men in the collection of the British Museum which Mr. Miers doubtfully refers to Squilla prasinolineata, appears to me in all prob- ability not to belong to it. He says that the median carinules of the exposed thoracic and first to sixth post-abdominal segments are obsolete, whereas Dana says only “in part obsolete.” Dana says that the lateral margins of the three exposed segments of the thorax are entire, whereas the figure given by Mr. Miers shows that the two posterior segments have a small anterior lobe. Mr. Miers also says that the median longitudinal carina of the carapace is indistinctly furcate only in its anterior portion, whereas Dana states that it is not distinctly furcate near the front, but towards the posterior mar- gin opens for a short distance. Mr. Miers also states that in his specimen the terminal post-abdominal segment is proportionally narrower and more elongated than in Squilla Dufresnii, but I fail to see any difference in this respect between Mr. Miers’ figure of this latter species and Dana’s figure of Squilla prasinolineata. Mr. Miers’ figure shows that the specimen he is describing has a well developed lateral process to the first exposed thoracic segment, whereas the specimen collected in Yucatan only has a small insig- nificant lateral process such as is shown in his figure of the thoracic segments of Squilla Dufresnii. Dana’s species was described from Rio Janeiro. Squilla Dufresnii of Miers has no locality. The spe- cies has not since been recorded from any new locality and the find- ing of it on the coast of Yucatan is therefore very interesting. ISOPODA. Ligia Baudiana. PI. VI, fig. 2. Milne-Edwards, Hist. nat. crust., t. [II, p. 155. Three small specimens of this species were collected at the Port of Silam. It was originally described by Milne-Edwards from San Juan d’Ulloa, the fortress of the harbor of Vera Cruz. Mr. E. J. 13 186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1891. Miers (1877) has described specimens from Cayenne, and also states that there are specimens of it in the British Museum from Rio Janeiro. De Saussure has also recorded it from Cuba. The small slender appendage of the inner ramus of the uropoda that Mr. Miers speaks of I did not find in the Yucatan specimens, but as he suggests they may have been lost. The specimen figured has been enlarged two diameters. Cirolana mayana, n.sp. PI. VI, figs. 3-10, Three small specimens of a Cirolana were obtained at the Port of Silam which do not correspond to any described species. They are distinguished from all other species by the form of the antennz, and represent a new species which may be characterized as follows. Body narrow, about three and one-third times as long as broad, with the sides nearly straight and parallel, smooth and polished with few punctations. Head sub-hexagonal, about one and three quarter times as broad as long, antennul rather longer than the breadth of the head, anten- nz as long as from the interior margin of the head to the posterior margin of the third thoracic segment; sigmoid in shape, at its origin bending backwards, then bending forwards and then backwards ; segments of the flagellum forming the anterior concavity armed anteriorly each with two bundles of numerous bristles one on the upper and other on the lower edge, thus forming a brush shaped structure. First thoracic segment nearly twice as long on the median line ag the second; second, third and fourth segments equal ; fifth and sixth segments rather longer and seventh segment half the length of the sixth. The epimera of the fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh segments are produced posteriorly into an angle, and those of the second and third segments are subquadrate, all have an impressed line running antero-inferiorly. ry ~ Spines and bristles upon the legs are not numerous. A small portion of the first abdominal segment exposed. The lateral angles of the abdominal segments acute not rounded. The telson about two-thirds as long as broad, minutely crenulate on its posterior border, with very short spines inserted in the notches. The largest of the three specimens from which this description has been drawn is about 9 mm. in length. — In the smaller spec- imens the series of bristles upon the antennz are not so well devel- oped. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187 The most characteristic features of this species are the brush-like arrangement of bristles upon the antennze and the crenulate posterior border of the telson. é As no list of the species of this genus has been published since the “ Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés” I append the following list of ee described to the present day :— C. (ELurydice) pulchra Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. XI, p. 370, 1815; Milne- Edwards. Hist. Nat. Crust., t. Tk p- 288. England. C. cranchis Leach, Dict. Sci. Nat. t. XII, p. 347; Bate and Westwood, Brit. Sess. Crust., p. 296, with figure. England. C. (Nelocira) Swainsonti Leach, loc. cit.; Milne-Edwards, Régne Animal, pl. 67, fig. 4. Sicily. C hirtipes Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. t. III, p. 236, pl. 31, fig. 25, 1840; Régne Animal, pl. 67, fig. 6. Cape of Good Hope. _C elongata Milne-Edwards, loc. cit. Mouth of Ganges. C. sculpta Milne-Edwards, op. cit. p. 287. Malabar. ’ C. Rossit White, List of the Specimens of Crustacea in the Collection of the British Museum, 1847, p. 106. No description given. He refers to the Zoology of the Erebus and Terror, t. 5, fig. 9, but I have been unable to find this figure among the monographs of this expedition. Auckland Islands. C. borealis owe Ofversight, Kong]. Vetensk. Akad. Férhandl, arg. 8, 1851, No.1, p. 23. Norway. C. armata Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped. vol. XIII, pl. II, Crust., p. 771, pl. 51, fig. 5, 1852. Rio Janeiro. _ C. latistylis Dana, op. cit., p. 772, pl. 51, fig. 6. Borneo. C. (Lurydice) ortentatis Vana, op. cii., p. 778, Pl. 51, = 7. Sooloo Sea. - C. multidigitata. Aega multidigitata Dana, op. cit., p. 768, Pl. 51, fig. 3. Eernce: C. polita Stimp-~ on, Marine Invert. Grand Menan. Smithsn. Contrib., vol. VI, p. 41, 1853. Grand Menan. _C. concharum >timpson, loc. cit. Charleston, S. C. C. Sole Hesse, Ann. Sci. Nat. (5) t. V, p. 259, 1866. Brittany. C. Rate Hesse, op. cit. p. 260. Brittany. ' €. molvé Hesse, op. cit. p. 261. - Brittany. C. elongata Hesse, op. cit. p. 262. Brittany. ’ C. merlangi Hesse, op. cit. p. 264. Brittany. C. spinipes Bate and Westwood, Brit. Sess. Crust. p. 299 with figure, [867 ; Harger, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. XI, p. 91, pl. I, fig. 2, pl. Il, fig. 1. Eng- land and North America. C. rugicauda Heller, Reise der Fregatte Novara, vol. II, pt. 3, p. 142, t. XII, fig, 18, 1868. St. Paul. C truncata Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), vol. II, p. 421, pl. 28, figs. 12, 13, 1868. Shetland Isles. _C. Rosst Miers, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) vol. XVII, p. 218, 1876; Cat. Crust. New Zealand, p. 109, pl. ITI, fig. 8. New Zealand and Auckland Islands. - C Arabica Kossmann, Reise in die Kiistengebiete des Rothen Meeres, p. 114, t. VIII, figs. 7-12, t. IX, figs. 1-4. Red Sea. CG microphthalma Hoek. Niederland. Arch. Zool., suppl. I, Lief. 3, taf. II, figs. 13-17, 1882. © Arctic Sea. C. lata aswell, Proc. Linn. Soc.. New South Wales, vol. VI, p: 192, pl.. IV; ehe 1882. Port Stephens, N.S. W. C. lata var. integra Miers, Zool. Coll. H. M.S.“ Alert,’ p. 304, 1884. . Albany Island. C. longicornis Studer, Abh. Akad. Berlin, 1882, II, p.. 28, pe? Il, fig. 15. Table Bay; South Africa. Ped 188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. C. levis Studer, Abh. Akad. Berlin, 1883, p. 21. pl. II, fig. 8. Queensland. C. impressa Harger, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. XI, p. 98, pl. I, fig. 8, pl. II, fig. 8, 1883-1885. North Atlantic. C. Schiodtei Miers, Zool. Coll. H. M. S. ‘ Alert,’ p. 802, pl. XX XIII, fig. A, 1884. Arafura Sea, Torres Straits. C. tenuistylis Miers, op. cit. p. 3038, pl. XX XIII, fig. B. Prince of Wales Channel. C. Cookit Filhol, Mission de l’Ile Campbell, Recueil de Mémoires relatifs 4 Yobservation de Passage de Vénus sur le Soleil. Paris, p. 455. Campbell Island. Cymodocea caudata. Nesa caudata Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1), vol. I, p. 482. A single specimen of this interesting species was collected in twenty feet of water, off Progreso. The species does not appear to have been recorded from any locality since its original description by Say, from Egg Harbor, New Jersey. On plate III (figs. 11- 14), will be found dorsal and lateral views, a view of the fourth leg on the right side, and of the male sexual organs. The species has been well described by Say. The male genital organs upon the middle of the ventral surface of the seventh thoracic segment consist of two spine-like appendages, with a broad groove upon the pos- terior surface. This form does not come properly within the genus Neesa, either as defined by Leach,’ Milne-Edwards,’ or Gersteecker.’ I have placed it provisionally under Cymodocea, believing with Mr. Bed- dard (1886, p. 145) that the genera Dynamene, Nesa and Cilicea probably represent variations of form of this type, sexual or other- wise, of no primary importance. M. Hesse* has worked out the sexual dimorphism of several related species inhabiting the coasts of France. The figure given on pl. VI, (figs. 11-14) was drawn from a male specimen from the Ber- muda Islands collected by the Academy’s Expedition to that locality in 1888 under the charge of Professor Angelo Heilprin. Six spec- imens all males were collected. There appears to be a tendency in the four spines within the sinus of the posterior abdominal segment to become double. The three tubercles upon the first exposed ab- dominal segment may also be double. The largest specimen from Bermuda is 10 mm. in length. Associated with these were six specimens of a related form, in which the exterior uropoda are short and lamellate. I supposed at 1Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles, t. XII, p. 341. ?Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés, t. III, p. 216. *Bronn’s Thier-Reichs, Bd. V, p. 223. 4 Ann. Sci. Nat. (5), t. XVII, p. 1-35, Pls. 1-3. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189 first that these were the females of Cymodocea caudata, but further examination showed the presence of well developed male appendages in one of the specimens, and I am therefore compelled to regard them as a distinet species, which I have described as Cymodocea Bermudensis (see p. 194). CIRRIPEDIA. Chelonobia testudinaria. Lepas testudinaria Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. X., p. 668. Chelonobia testudinaria Darwin, Monograph of the Cirripedia, p. 392, p!. 14, figs. la—ld, fig. 5; pl. 15, fig. 1. A single specimen was collected at Progreso. Large numbers of the Green turtle (Chelonia mydas) are taken at this locality, and this species of barnacle is probably found upon them. XIPHOSURA. Limulus polyphemus,. Monoculus polyphemus Linn. Syst. Nat. Ed. X, p. 634. Polyphemus occidentalis DeKay, Natural History of New York, Crust., p. 55, pl. XI, figs. 50, 51. The King Crab is very abundant upon the beach at the Port of Silam. It has already been recorded from Laguna de Terminos, at the southern extremity of the Gulf of Mexico, by Professor H. Milne-Edwards (1880 (1), foot note, p.4). Professor Benjamin Sharp informs me that it breeds in the harbor of Nantucket, and to Pro- fessor Kingsley I am indebted for the information that it breeds in great abundance at Cape Ann, Massachusetts. The species is thus seen to have a very extensive north and south range. VERA CRUZ. DECAPODA. Mithraculus sculptus. Maia sculpta Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. sans Vert., t. V, p. 242. Mithraculus sculptus A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex., p. 105, pl. Oe fig. 2. Four specimens of this species were collected at Vera Cruz. Three of them in which the carapace is less than 10 mm. broad, have no teeth either upon the pollex or dactylus. The fourth spec- imen, in which the carapace is about 20 mm. broad, has teeth of the ordinary type upon both fingers. 190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Liomera longimana. A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. (1) t. I, p. 221, pl. XII, figs. 7, 7a, 7b. A young specimen apparently of this species was found in a cay- ity of a coral, Madrepora palmata, collected at Vera Cruz. Neptunus Sayi. Lupa Sayi Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc. 1850, p. 178. Neptunus Sayi A. Milne-Edwards, Arch. Mus. (1) t. X, p. 317. There are three young specimens of this species in the collection of the Academy labelled Vera Cruz. One of them was donated by ‘Dr. T. B. Wilson. The other two do not bear the name of the donor. Neptunus cribrarius. Portunus cribrarius Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans, Vert. t. V, p. 259. Lupa cribraria Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust. t. I, p. 452, pl. XVII, fig. 1. A female was obtained at Vera Cruz. Ocypoda arenaria. EOC. Clk: Several specimens were collected at Vera Cruz. Grapsus grapsus. Cancer grapsus L., Syst. Nat., ed. X, pl. 30. Grapsus pictus A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Régne Animal, Cuvier, pl. 22." A male was obtained at Vera Cruz. I have used the specific name given to this species by Linneeus, in 1758, and not the designation of maculatus applied to it by Catesby' in 1743. Most authors have used Catesby’s name, but as this antedates the tenth edition of the Systema Nature, it should be abandoned in favor of Linneus’ name. Lamarck’ in 1801 erected a new genus for the reception of this species with an allied form, and gave to the new genus, the name of the Linnean species. This he renamed Grapsus pictus. I am of opinion, however, that Linneus’ specific name should not be abandoned, on account of its use generically, and I therefore retain it.’ Peneus Brasiliensis, var. Aztecus, n. var. A number of shrimps were obtained at Vera Cruz, which belong to this species, but differ from the typical form in the very long flagellum of the outer antenne. The flagellum is from seven to ten 1 Nat. Hist. of the Carolinas, vol. II, p. 36, pl. XXXVI, fig. 1. 2 Systeme des Animaux sans Vertébres, p. 150. 3 Report of Committee on Zoological Nomenclature, Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1877, pp. 50, 51, LX VIII. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191 times the length of the carapace, from its anterior to its posterior edge, not including the rostrum. On account of the remarkable length of the flagella they appear to me to constitute a new variety which I have named Aztecus. The species itself closely resembles Peneus canaliculatus of Oli- ver (see Spence Bate, 1888, p. 248, pl. XX XII) which inhabits the Indo-Pacific region. It may be distinguished from it by the pres- ence of a spine upon the second and third joints of the first pairs of pereiopods instead of one upon the second joint only, and by the presence of two teeth instead of one upon the ventral surface of the rostrum. I have examined Latreille’s original description,’ but have iden- tified the specimens collected by means of Milne-Edwards’ character- ization of the species in the Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés, t. I, p- 414. Mr. Spence Bate? has also discussed this species. WEST COAST OF FLORIDA. DECAPODA. Libinia dubia. Loe. ctt. Five specimens collected in Anclote Bay. Two of these are young individuals, in which the median row of spines of the carapace and the rostral spines are relatively much more developed than in the adult. Panopeus Texanus. Panopeus Texanus Stimpson, Ann Lyc. Nat. Hist., New York; vol. VII, p. 5d. A. Milne-Edwards, Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex., p. 312, pl. LVIII, fig. 4. Numerous specimens collected at Point Pinellas, Tampa Bay, and in Auclote Bay. They differ slightly from the figure given by M. Milne-Edwards. The postero-lateral border of the carapace is rather shorter, and the antero-lateral spines are less closely approximated. Panopeus Herbstii. Loc. cit. _ A single specimen, dredged in 9-12 feet of water, off Manatee River, Tampa Bay, probably belongs to this species. It differs, however, from the typical form in the broad leaf-shaped character of the antero-lateral teeth of the carapace. (See Pl. V, fig. 7.) 1 Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat. t. XXV, p. 175. 2Ann.. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) vol. VIII, p. 175. 192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Menippe mercenaria. Loc. crt. Specimens were obtained at Anclote Bay, Sarasota Bay and in 9-12 feet of water off the Manatee River, Tampa Bay. Achelous spinimanus. Portunus spinimanus Latreille, Encycl. Méth.,t. X, p. 188, Achelous spinimanus A. Milne-Edwards, Arch. Mus., t. X, p. 841, pl. XXXII. Specimens were obtained off the Manatee River, Tampa Bay, at Sarasota Bay and at Boca Noga, Little Gasparilla Inlet. They exhibit a considerable amount of variation, specimens agree- ing in all other characters, differ in the shape of the abdominal seg- ments, the number of spines upon the anterior border of the arm or the size of the posterior antero-lateral spine. Gelasimus pugilator. Ocypoda pugilator Bosc, Hist. Nat. Crust., t. I, p. 250. Gelasimus pugilater H. Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat. (8), t. XVIII, p. 149, pl. IV, fig. 14. G-Lisimus vocans Dekay, Nat. Hist. of New York, Crust., p. 14, pl. VI, fig. 9. Numerous specimens obtained at Perico Island, Sarasota Bay. Calappa flammea. Cancer flammea Herbst, Krabben und Krebse, vol. II, p. 161, pl. XI., fig. 2. Calappa flammea Miers, ‘- Challenger” Brachyura,, p. 284, pl. XXIII, fig. 1. A male was collected in Little Gasparilla Inlet. The specimen resembles Herbst’s figure, but lacks the clearly marked reticulations of the dorsal surface of the carapace, which is very faintly mottled with reddish brown. Persephona punctata. Cancer punctatus L., Syst. Nat. ed. XII, p. 1045. Persephona punctata Miers, ‘‘ Challenger”’ Brachyura, p. 312, pl. XXV, fig. 5. Two males were obtained, one from 9-12 feet of water off Manatee River, and the other in Sarasota Bay. Polyonyx macrocheles. Porcellana macrocheles Gibbes, Proc. Am. Assoc., vol. III, p. 191; Proc. Elliott Soc. Chaileston, S. C., vol. I, p. 6, pl. I, fig. 5. Polvonyx macrocheles Faxon, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. V, p. 256, pl. III, fig. 11. A male and female were obtained in 9-12 ft. of water off Manatee River. As Professor Kingsley (1879, p. 408) has already pointed out, the carapace is much broader in the female than in the male. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193 Clibenarius vittatus. Pagurus vittatus Bosc, Hist. Nat. Crust. t, I, p. 8327; t. II, pl. 12, fig. 1. A number of specimens obtained at Little Gasparilla Inlet. This species has only been figured by Bose, and as his represen- tation of it is very unsatisfactory, I have refigured it. (Pl. V, figs. 3 and 4). The outline drawing represents one of the medium- sized specimens collected at Little Gasparilla Inlet. The right anterior cruriped has been given in detail to show the color markings and the tufts of hair. In alcohol, the carapace is yellow- ish with a reddish tinge; the dorsal surface of the chelipeds red- dish-brown mottled with yellow, ventral surface yellowish ; the tar- sal and penultimate joints of the cruripeds reddish-brown with eight narrow longitudinal yellow bands. Two of these bands are upon the dorsal surface, two upon the ventral and two upon each of the lateral surfaces. The two dorsal bands are closer together than the others. The ventral surface of the cruripeds is much lighter than the dorsal and lateral surfaces. Eupagurus pollicaris. Pagurus pollicaris Say, Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (i), vol. I, p 162. De Kay, Natural History of New York, Crust., p. 19, pl. VIII, fig. 21. Three specimens, one male and two females, collected in 9-12 feet of water, off Manatee River, in Tampa Bay. Eupagurus annulipes. Stimpson, Ann, Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vol. VII, p. 243. A single specimen of this small species collected at Anclote Bay. The species so far as Iam aware has not been recorded since it was first described by Dr. Stimpson, from Beaufort Harbor, N. C. Hippolyte Wurdemanni. Gibbes, Proc. Amer. Assoc., vol. 3, 1840, p. 197. Three specimens obtained at Point Pinellas, Tampa Bay. This species has not been recorded since it was originally described by Professor Gibbes from Key West and Charleston Harbor. Pro- fessor Gibbes’ description is very good. The carpus of the second pereiopod is multiarticulate; synaphipods and psalistomata are absent ; the flagellum of external antenna is about four times as long as the carapace, measuring from the tip of the rostrum to its pos- terior edge; the longer flagellum of the internal antenna is about three and a half times as long as the carapace, and the shorter flagellum is about three times as long. 194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. As the species has not yet been figured, I have figured one of the specimens collected. (PI. VI, fig. 1). It isenlarged two diameters. Palemontes exilipes. Stimpson, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vol. X, p. 130. S. I. Smith, U. S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, Rept. of Commissioner for 1872 and 1878, p. 640, pl. I, fig. 1. Specimens of this fresh water species were collected in the Caloosahatchie River, in the canal connecting Lake Hikpochee and Lake Okeechobee, and in Lake Okeechobee. Penzus Brasiliensis. Latreille, Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat.,.t. X XV, p. 256. Spence Bate, Ann. May. Nat. Hist. (5) vol. VIII, p. 175. Specimens collected at Anclote Bay; Sand Key, Clearwater Bay and at Boca Noga, Little Gasparilla Inlet. BERMUDA. Cymodocea Bermudensis, n. sp. Pl. VI, figs. 15, 16. Six small specimens were found associated with specimens of Cymodocea caudata, from the Bermuda Islands, which appears to be a new species. This species may be characterized as follows. Head short, about twice as broad as long. First segment of the thorax longer than any of the following, about as long as the head, three times as broad as long; the remaining thoracic segments about equal in length, half as long as the first thoracic segment. Two abdominal segments exposed to view; first segment about twice as long as the preceding thoracic segment, its posterior border nearly straight; terminal segment large, about one third of the length of the whole body; subtriangular in shape; posterior angle truncated ; elevated in the center and descending steeply to its lat- eral and posterior margins; three tubercles arranged transversely upon its elevated portion. Uropoda, short, lamellate, inner and posterior borders straight, outer border slightly convex. Anterior and posterior antenne of about equal length. Peduncles of anterior antennz three-jointed, with first joint stout compressed, second very short compressed, the third long and slender; flagellum multiarticulate. Peduncle of second antennze, four-jointed, first joint slender, very short, second joint longer, third and fourth joints longer, of about equal length, slender, flagellum multiartic- ulate. Legs terminating in a well-developed claw with a smaller 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195 claw at its base, similar to that of Cymodocea caudata. (See Pl. VI, figs. 15, 16.) THe longest specimen 6 mm, in length. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION. In the chronological list at the end of this paper will be found the titles of all important monographs dealing with the higher crusta- cean fauna of the West Indian region. As this list represents a summary of our knowledge of the region, I will merely mention here briefly the most important contributions to the subject. In 1817, THomas Say, who might aptly be termed the Father of American Invertebrate Zoology, published in the first volume of the Journal of this Academy a series of papers entitled, “ An Ac- count of the Crustacea of the United States.” These papers con- tain descriptions of a number of new species principally from the Southern coasts of the Eastern United States. The species are nearly all characteristic forms of Florida or the West Indies, and his papers may therefore be regarded as the first contribution to our knowledge of this fauna. In 1850, GrBBks, in a paper on the car- cinological collections of the United States, described a number of new forms, the greater part of them being from the same region as those described by Mr. Say. In 1852, Dawa published his his- torical monograph on the Crustacea collected by the United States Exploring Expedition, in which the species collected at Rio Janeiro are enumerated, and many new ones from that locality described. In 1858, H. pr Saussure described a number of new species from the coast of Mexico and the West Indies, and in the following year Dr. Strmpson published the first of three papers, continued in the years 1860 and 1871, in the Annals of the Lyceum of Natural His- tory, of New York, in which he described many new species from the region opened up by Say and Gibbes. M. A. Scuram, in 1876, published a manuscript by Dr. Isis Desbonne, enumerating the Crustacea of Guadeloupe, and describing some new species. In the following year HELLER, in his report upon the Crustacea, collected by the Novara Expedition, gave a list of species obtained at Rio Janeiro, with descriptions of some new species. In 1869, Professor S. I. Smira published a notice of the Crustacea collected by Pro- fessor C. F. Hartt, on the Coast of Brazil, 1867, which contains a list of species collected and descriptions of new species, and also a list of all the species of Crustacea known upon that coast at that 196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. date. In the same year Dr. Ep. V. Martens published a descrip- tion of some fresh and brackish water Crustacea from Southern Bra- zil, collected by Dr. Reintz-Hensel. In 1870, Dr. Srrmpson pub- lished his preliminary report upon the Crustacea, dredged in the Straits of Florida by L. F. de Pourtalés, of the United States Coast Survey. In 1872 appeared a paper by Dr. Ep. V. Marrens on the Crustacea of Cuba. Five years later, Mr. E. J. Mrers described several new species from Cayenne, and in 1879, Professor K1rncs- LEY published his list of Decapod Crustacea, found at Fort Macon, N.C. Inthe same year he also published a paper upon a collec- tion of Crustacea from Virginia, North Carolina and Florida. During the years 1875-1880 appeared the report of Prof. A MILNE-Epwakps upon the Crustacea collected by the Mission Scientifique au Mexique. Professor Milne-Edwards originally in- tended to make his report a complete monograph of the Carcino- logical fauna of both sides of Central America, but owing to the destruction of nearly the entire collection of the Commission during the bombardent of Paris, he was unable to do this. The report although imperfect as a complete monograph is an excellent work. The greater part of the Brachyurous Crustacea of these waters are described, and illustrated by very fine figures. In 1881, Prof. MinNr-Epwarps published his Preliminary report upon the decapod Crustacea dredged in the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea by the United States coast survey steamer “ Blake” during the years 1877, 1878 and 1879. In this report many interest- ing deep sea types are described. In 1887, Prof. C. L. Herrick published an extensive paper entitled ‘Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf of Mexico and the South.” The subject of the paper is a collection of Crustacea made in Mobile Bay. A number of new and little known species are described and figured. The paper on account of its comprehensive- ness and numerous illustrations, should be a very valuable addi- tion to the literature of the subject. I am sorry to state, however, that although I have had occasion to make very little use of it, my slight acquaintance with it, has not left a very favorable impression upon my mind. In the figure of Palemonetes vulgaris, Pl. V, fig. 7, there has been drawn one thoracic leg too many, six legs instead of five, and in the figure of Penwus setiferus on the same plate, fig. 6, there are three instead of two teeth upon the frontal and hepatic regions. In the latter case the third tooth that has 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197 been drawn does not exist in any member of the genus. As the species figured is a common one, there can be no doubt that the figure is intended to represent this species, but if it were correct, the existence of a third spine would probably be sufficient to make a new genus of it. _ In addition to the papers that have been enumerated, should be mentioned the several monographs on the different groups of Crus- tacea collected by the Challenger Expedition, including species from the Bermudas, St. Thomas, and Bahia. It will be apparent from the preceding resumé of the literature of the Crustacea of the West Indian region that although much is known of the subject, our knowledge is as yet by no means complete Much remains to be learned of the Crustacean fauna of the Eastern coast of South America. Several collections of Crustacea have been made at Rio Janeiro, but we do not know with certainty how far south of this point the Caribbean Crustacea extend. North of Rio Janeiro Professor Hartt collected at the Abrolhos Reefs, and at a few points on the East coast of Brazil. Of the fauna of the Northeastern coast of Brazil, and of the Northern coast of South America and the Eastern coast of Central America we have only very scattered knowledge. Even of the Gulf of Mexico itself our information is very limited. Northward from Florida to Cape Hatteras the coast is much better known. From Cape Hatteras to New Jersey is still nearly a terra incognita. The only contribution to our knowledge of this latter portion of the coast is a scanty list of Crustacea collected by Mr. P. R. Uhler in Chesapeake Bay. Of the Crustacea of the West Indian Islands much remains to be known. We have a fair knowledge of the fauna of Cuba and Guadeloupe, and a very limited knowledge of that of Hayti, St. Thomas and St. Martin. The Crustacea of the Bermuda Islands are known from the Academy’s Expedition to these Islands in 1888. Dr. Isis Desbonne has described many species peculiar to Guade- loupe and we may reasonably look for species peculiar to some of the other unstudied West Indian Islands. The lists of Crustacea collected in various regions are usually of much less value than they might be, from the fact that they do not give any particulars in regard to the specimens collected. It should always be stated in such lists whether the specimens occur in abun- dance or are rare. In some cases also, young specimens are found 198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. during the summer which have developed from larve brought to these shores by warm currents, and which perish during the winter. Such species certainly cannot be regarded as normally inhabiting these shores. This occurs on the coasts of Southern New Jersey, where during the summer numerous specimens of Ocypoda arenaria both in the Megalops stage and in the very young adult stage can be collected on the beach. No large adult specimens are found. Neptunus cribrarius is also occasionally obtained on the coast, but this species on account of the rarity of its occurrence, can only be regarded as an occasional visitor and not as an inhabitant. It is probably brought north by the warm currents from the south. Mr.) 8. I. Smith has treated of this subject, and records the occurrence of young specimens of five southern species of Decapods upon the shores of Long Island and of Vineyard Sound. | Besides these he records two southern species brought in on whalers, and three pela- gic species characteristic of the Gulf stream, which have been. stranded upon the Northern coasts. These facts should therefore be carefully considered and when an area of distribution is defined for a given species it should only include those localities in which the species is constantly found in greater or less abundance. Mr. S. I. Smith, in the Crustacea of the Atlantic Coast of North Amer- ica north of Cape Cod, has exemplified this method and his paper is consequently of great value. Besides entering carefully into the range of the species, he has also given the depth of .water which they inhabit. The following list represents the species collected by the Acad- emy’s Expedition to Mexico, together with their general distri- bution :— YUCATAN. ericera bispinosa. West Indies, Yucatan; Bahia. Microphrys bicornutus. Florida to Desterro, West Indies. Libinia dubia. Cape ‘Cod to Yucatan, West Indies, West Coast of Africa. Panopeus Herbsti. » Carolina, Florida, Yucatan, Aspinwall, Bahamas. Pilumnus aculeatus. Fort Macon to Yucatan, Guadeloupe. ; Menippe mercenaria. Beaufort, N. C., to Florida, Yucatan, Bahamas. LEucratopsts crassimanus. Rio Jane: £6, Yucatan. Ocypoda arenaria. Fort Macon to Rio Janeiro, West Indies. Gelasimus speciosus. Yucatan. i Pachygrapsus gracilis. Florida, Yucatan, West Indies. ‘ Sesarma cinerea... Virginia to Florida, Y ucatan; West Indies. Fiippa emerita. Massachuset ts to LaPlata, West Indies, California to Chili. Clhbanarius TORUS: Yucatan. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199 Alpheus heterochelis. Fort Macon to Abrolhos Reefs (Brazil), West Indies, Panama and Nicaragua. Palemonella Yucatanica. Yucatan. Squilla prasinolineata. Yucatan, Rio Janeiro. Ligia Baudiniana. Yucatan, Vera Cruz, Cuba, Cayenne, Rio Janeiro. Cirolana Mayana. Yucatan. Cymodocea caudata. Egg Harbor, New Jersey (visitor ?), Bermuda, Yucatan. Chelonobia testudinaria. Circumtropical. Limulus polyphemus. Massachusetts to Gulf of Mexico. VERA CRUZ. Mithraculus sculptus. West Indies, Vera Cruz, Fernando Noronha. Neptunus Sayt. Gulf Stream. Neptunus cribrarius. Ft. Macon to Vera Cruz, Guadeloupe, Rio Janeiro, Liomera longimana. West Indies, Vera Cruz. Ocypoda arenaria. Fort Macon to Rio Janeiro, West Indies. Grapsus grapsus, Circumtropical. West Indies to Pernambuco. Peneus Brasthensis, var. Aztecus. Vera Cruz. Peneus Brasiliensis, New Jersey to Bahia, West Indies, Nicaragua, Whydah (W. Africa). FLORIDA. Libinia dubia. Cape Cod to Yucatan, West Indies, West Coast of Africa. Panopeus Texanus. Cape Cod to Florida and Texas, Panopeus Fler bstit, Carolina, Florida, Aspinwall, Bahamas. Menippe mercenaria. Beaufort, North Carolina to Florida, Yucatan, Cuba, Balamas. Achelous spinimanus. South Carolina, Florida, Brazil, Martinique, Chili. CGelasimus pugilator. Cape Cod to Florida. Calappa flammea. North Carolina to Florida, West Indies. Persephona punctata, Beaufort, North Carolina, Florida, Guadeloupe, Cuba. Polyonyx macrochelks. Beaufort, North Carolina to Florida. Chéanarius vittatus. Florida, West Indies, Brazil. Eupagurus pollicaris. Massachusetts to Florida. Lupagurus annulipes. Beaufort, N. C., Florida. Hippolyte Wurdemanni. Charleston Harbor, Key West, Fla. Pale monetes exilipes. (Fresh Water.) Florida, South Carolina, Lake. Erie, Lake Michigan. Peneus Brastliensis. New Jersey to Bahia, West Indies, Nicaragua, Whydah (W. Africa). The comparative ranges of these species may be graphically illus- trated by the following table. The horizontal line opposite the name of a species represents its longitudinal distribution along the Eastern coast of the American continent. Where species have been recorded as occurring at distant points, such as Yucatan and Rio Janeiro, these localities have been connected by a line passing through the intervening regions, although the species may not as yet have been recorded from these regions, as it is probable in all the eases in which this has been done that the species occur there. 200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF YUCATAN. Pericera trispinosa Microphrys bicornutus Libinia dubia Panopeus Herbstii Pilumnus aculeatus Menippe mercenaria Euciatopsis crassimanus Ocypoda arenaria Gelasimus speciosus Pachygrapsus gracilis Sesarma cinerea Hippa emerita Clibanarius formosus Alpheus heterochelis Paleemonella Yucatanica Squilla prasinolineata Ligia Baudiniana Cirolana Mayana Cymodocea caudata Chelonobia testudinaria Limulus polyphemus VERA CRUZ. Mithraculus sculptus Neptunus Sayi Neptunus cribrarius Lioméra longimana Ocypoda arenaria Grapsus grapsus Penzus Brasiliensis FLORIDA. Libinia dubia Panopeus Texanus Panopeus Herbstii Menippe mercenaria Achelous spinimanus Gelasimus pugilator Calappa flammea Persephone punctata Polyonyx macrocheles Clibanarius vittatus Eupagurus pollicaris Eupagurus annulipes Hippolyte Wurdemanni Palazemonetes exilipes Penzus Brasiliensis Cape Cod. | Cape Hatteras. Florida. West Indies. Yucatan Aspinwall, [1891. 2 ea: H : & arr KS) S og Q em A Circumtropical. Gulf Shean Circumtropical. Fresh Water. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201 The preceding table suggests the division of the Caribbean pro- vince into two sub-provinces, which may be termed respectively the Carribbean and the Brazilian. The Caribbean, extending southwards from Cape Hatteras to Central America, including the West Indian Islands, and the Brazilian extending from Central America to Rio Janeiro. A consideration of what is known of the distribution of the Crustacea of the entire Caribbean province has also led me to adopt this view. By far the greater number of the species enumerated by Rathbun from Brazil are peculiar to that coast and the same can be said of the species enumerated by Kingsley from the Carolinian and Floridian shores. The fauna of the latter region is undoubtedly very closely related to the West Indian proper, of which indeed it may be regarded as a part. Professor Dana, as early as the year 1852, in his monograph of the Crustacea collected by the United States Exploring Expedition, discussed the question of the geographical distribution of the Crust- acea in a way that has laid all future marine zoologists under a debt of gratitude to him. He showed very clearly the important part that the temperature of the water plays in the distribution of marine littoral species. The chart of the world prepared by hin, showing the isocrymes or lines of greatest cold, affords the key to many a perplexing problem. He divides the region which I have termed the Caribbean into four Provinces, the Caribbean, including the West Indian Islands, the Eastern coast of Central America and the Northern and Northeastern coast of South America, from the region of the Mississippi River to beyond Bahia; the Floridian Province, including Key West and the Southern extremity of Florida, together with the Bermudas; the Brazilian Province, in- cluding Rio Janeiro, and extending north nearly to Bahia; and the Carolinian Province, including Northern Florida, Georgia and the Carolinas as far north as Cape Hatteras. It appears to me, how- ever, that these four provinces should be merged into a single pro- vince, the Caribbean, which may be subdivided into two sub- provinces, the Caribbean and Brazilian, as outlined above. It is, I think, impossible to separate the Carolinian, Floridian and Caribbean provinces of Dana. Our knowledge of the species in- habiting these regions has increased greatly since the publication of his work, and the range of the species is known to be greater than he supposed. The extension of the Floridian fauna northwards to Cape Hatteras is probably owing to the fact that the shores of Fior- 14 202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ida, Georgia and the Carolinas, as far north as Cape Hatteras are bathed by an overflow of the warm waters of the Gulf Stream. The Arctic Labrador current coming from the North, along the Eastern coast of the United States, according to Commander Bartlett * does not extend south of Cape Hatteras, but at that point goes under the Gulf Stream eastwards. North of Cape Hatteras the Gulf Stream is deflected northeastwards, and is more or less separated from the coast by the cold Labrador current. On the Northern coast of Yucatan, as evidenced by the collection of the Mexican Expedition, the Brazilian and Caribbean sub- provinces to a certain extent overlap. There appears therefore to be two centres of distribution in the Caribbean region, a Floridian and a Brazilian, giving rise to the two provinces which overlap in Central America. Professor Dana in his classical work enumerates eight species common to the warm waters of both sides of the American Continent, and Professor Kingsley in his paper upon the genus A/pheus, men- tions 15 additional species. Professor Dana also pointed out the fact that the genera of the east and west coasts are largely characteristic of the region embraced by these two coasts, and that a large propor- tion are common to both shores. He distinguished the region re- presented by these coasts as the Occidental Kingdom. He was un- able, however, to account for this relationship of the eastern and western coasts, as at that time there did not appear to be any evidence of the recent submersion of any part of Central America. It is now well known, however, that during the Tertiary period a connection must have existed between the waters of the Atlantic and the Pacific. This connection will explain the existence of species common to both shores. The Cretaceous rocks of Mexico, and the Tertiary deposits of Yucatan discovered by the Academy’s Mexican Expedition’ together with the recognized Cretaceous and Tertiary deposits of northern South America,’ further point to a time when there was a free intermingling of the waters of the Atlantic and of the Pacific. The close relationship of the two faunas, as evidenced by the large proportion of genera common to the eastern and 1 Report of the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, 1882, p. 37. 2 See Professor Heilprin’s report in the Proceedings of the Academy for 1890, pp. 445-469. 3 See Dr. Hermann Karsten “ Géologie de l’ancienne Colombie, Bolivarienne, Vénézuela, Nouvelle-Grenade at Ecuador”’ Berlin, 1886. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203 western shores of the continent, and their general similarity, is thus explained. ‘The separation of North and South America also prob- ably explains the well marked division of the continental portion of the West Indian region into a Brazilian and Caribbean sub-province. The peculiar distribution of Limulus polyphemus is worthy of note. It breeds north of Cape Cod and extends at Jeast as far south as Yucatan. It apparently does not extend as far south as Bahia, but it may be found to occur on the South American coast between that point and Yucatan. So far as is yet known it is characteristic of the Eastern coast of North America. The presence of closely related species in the Moluccas and on the coast of Japan, suggests, as pointed out by Prof. H. Milne-Edwards,’ a former connection of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. This may have been that even of the Cretaceous, as the genus appears to have undergone little modi- fication since an early geological period. The presence of members of this genus in the Triassic, Jurassic, Cretaceous and Oligocene beds of Europe and Syria, render it also possible that both the American and Asiatic species may have had as their original center of distribution the Mesozoic and Cenozoic seas of Europe, the one migrating westwards and the other eastwards, and that neither spe- cies has been derived from the other, but both from a common European ancestor. The author having previously been engaged in working up the Echinoderms collected by the Academy’s Expedition to Mexico,” a comparison of the distribution of the Echinoderms and Crustacea on the two sides of the continent, in the tropical and sub-tropical regions, naturally suggests itself to the mind. Among the Echino- derms no species are known, with absolute certainty, to be common to both coasts; if there are any, they are undoubtedly very few in number, while in the Crustacea, as stated above, there are supposed to be twenty-three species common to the two areas. Professor Verrill,’ however, has pointed out that notwithstanding the absence of identical species of Echinoderms, there is a very close relation between the faunas of the two coasts. A large proportion of the genera are represented on both sides. The fauna of the Pacific coast is also very distinct from the Indo-Pacific fauna. The absence of identical species of Echinoderms upon both coasts and their presence "1 Crust. Miss. Sci. Mex , p. 4. 2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1890, pp. 317-340. 3 Trans. Conn. Acad. vol. I, pp. 339-351. 204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. in the Crustacea may be explained upon the supposition that the comparatively recent connection of the oceans which allowed the pas- sage of some of the Crustacea from one coast to the other, was not of sufficient magnitude, or did not extend through a period of time long enough to allow the less active Echinoderms to migrate, or their larvze to be carried, from one region into the other. The general similarity, on the other hand, of the Echinoderms inhabiting both shores, points to an earlier period, as in the Crustacea, when there was uninterrupted communication between the two areas. The present distinct specific, and to a certain extent generic, character of the two faunas point to a subsequent complete separation of the two regions. This again must have been partially obliterated, allowing a slight interming- ling of the active forms of the two areas. As stated above, from the geological researches conducted by the Mexican Expedition, and other explorations in Central and South America, it is now known that Mexico and more or less of Central and northérn South America were submerged during the Cretaceous period, and it is probable that there existed during this period a tropical and sub-tropical American littoral fauna, undifferentiated into Eastern and Western regions. During the succeeding Tertiary period Central America were elevated, forming a complete barrier between the two oceans, during this period the differentiation of the two faunas took place. Ata still later period there was probably a partial subsidence of Central America, allowing the passage of a few forms of the one region into the other. Literature of the stalk and sesstle-eyed Crustacea of the West Indian region. 1817 Thomas Say. An account of the Crustacea of the United States. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1) vol. I. 1836 Thomas Bell. Some account of the Crustacea of the coasts of South America, with descriptions of new genera and species; founded principally onthe collections obtained by Mr. Cuming and Mr. Miller. Trans. Zool. Soc., vol. 2, p. 39. Includes three crabs from the coast of Brazil. Ar. Fr. Aug. Weigmann. Beschre.bung einiger neuen Crustaceen des Berliners Museums aus Mexico und Brasilien. Arch. f. Naturg., Bd. I, pp. 145-161. One species of Atya and four of Palaemon. 1850 Lewis R. Gibbes. On the Carcinological collections of the United States and an enumeration of species contained in them, with notes on the most remark- able, and descriptions of new species. Includes Decapoda and Stomatopoda. 1852 J. D. Dana. Crustacea. U. S. Exploring Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U. S. N., vol. XIII. Includes species collected at Rio Janeiro, 1857 M. F. E. Guérin-Méneville. Animaux articulés, a pied articulés in La Sagra’s Histoire physique, politique et naturelle de L’Ile de Cuba. Paris. Crust., pp. XITI-LX VIII. 1858 H. de Saussure. Mémoire sur divers Crustacés nouveaux des Antilles et du Mexique. Meém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Genéve, vol. XIV, p. 419. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205 1859 William Stimpson. Notes on North American Crustacea, No. I. Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of New York, vol. 2, pp. 49-93, pl. 1. Brachyura and Anomura. 1860 William Stimpson. Notes on North American Crustacea, in the Museum of the Smithsonian Institution, No. II, op. cit. pp. 176-246, pls. II. and V. Brachyura and Anomura. 1867 M. A. Schramm. D’apres un manuscrit du docteur Desbonne. Crustacés de la Guadeloupe, Ire partie, Brachyures, Basse-Terre. 1858 Camil Heller. Crustaceen. Reise der Oesterreichischen Fregatte Nov- ara, Zoologische Theil, Bd. II, abth. III, No.1. Includes Crustacea collected at Rio Janeiro. 1869 Sidney I. Smith. Notes on new or little known species of American Cancroid Crustacea, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. XII, pp. 274-289. Includes species of the genera Xantho and Panopeus from the Caribbean region, Sidney I. Smith. Notice of the Crustacea collected by Prof. C. F. Hartt on the coast of Brazil in 1867. Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. II, pp. 1-41. Ed. y. Martens. Siidbrasilische Siiss- und Brackwasser Crustaceen nach den Sammlungen des Dr. Reinh. Hensel. Arch. f. Naturg., Jahgr. 85, pp. 1-37, Taf. Tand II. | Includes species of the genera Boscia, Trichodactylus, Sylviocarcinus, Dilocarcinus, Gecarcinus, Cardisoma, Pelocarcinus, Uca, Helice, Sesarma, Gelasi- mus, Aiglea, Astacus, Atya, Paleemon, Bithynis, Cryphiops. M. Schramm. Catalogues des Coquilles et des Crustacés de Ja Guade- loupe envoyés a l’Exposition Universelle de 1867 par l’Administration de la Co- lonie. Collections caillet de I. Desbonne. Basse-Terre. 1870 William Stimpson. Preliminary Report upon the Crustacea dredged in the Gulf Stream in the Straits of Florida by L. F. Pourtalés, Assistant U. S. Coast Survey, part 1, Brachyura, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. 11, p. 109. Sidney I. Smith. Notes on American Crustacea, No. 1, Ocypodoidea. Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. IT, pp. 113-176. 1871 William Stimpson. Notes on the North American Crustacea in the Mu- seum of the Smithsonian Institution, No. III, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., New York, vol. x, pp. 92-136. Decapoda. 1872 Ed. v. Martens. Ueber Cubanische Crustaceen nach den Sammlungen Dr. J. Grundlach’s, Arch. f. Naturg., Jahrg. 38, p. 77. Decapoda and Stomatopoda. T. Hale Streets. Notes of some Crustacea from the Island of St. Martin, W. I. collected by Dr. Van Rygersma, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., pp. 131-134. Species collected : Pericera cornuta, Gelasimus affinis, Calappa gallioides, Dromia lator, Petrolisthes nodosus, P. jugosus and Palemon Jamaicensts. 1877 E. J. Miers. On a collection of Crustacea, Decapoda and Isopoda, chiefly from South America with descriptions of new genera and species, Proc. Zool. Soc., pp. 653-679. 1878 J. S. King NO oR wh 1 2 3 ig. 4. 5 6 ff NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207 EXPLANATION OF PLATE V. Clibanarius formosus, natural size. Dorsal surface of the right hand. Clibanarius vittatus, natural size. Dorsal surface of the right hand. Gelasimus speciosus, natural size. Inner surface of the hand. Panopeus Herbstii. Dorsal surface of the carapace, showing the leaf-like antero-lateral teeth. Palemonella Yucatanica, enlarged two diameters. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Hippolyte Wurdemanni. Enlarged two diameters. Tigia Baudiniana. Enlarged two diameters. Cirolana Mayana. Enlarged three diameters. Right side, enlarged three diameters. Dorsal view of right anterior antenna much enlarged. Anterior view of same. Last abdominal segment with appendages much enlarged. 8, 9,10. First, fourth and seventh legs of the right side. . 11. Cymodocea caudata, view of left side enlarged three diameters. . 12. Dorsal view, enlarged three diameters. . 13. Seventh thoracic segment, with the male appendages, much enlarged. . 14. Fourth leg of the right side, much enlarged. 15. Cymodocea Bermudensis, enlarged three diameters. . 16. Left side, enlarged three diameters. 208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ‘ APRIL 7. Mr. THEODORE D. Ranp in the chair. Fifty-three persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— Mexican Grasses: An enumeration of the Grasses collected by Mr. C. G. Pringle in Mexico in 1890. By F. Lamson Scribner. Mineral Localities of Philadelphia and Vicinity. By Theodore D. Rand, William W. Jefferis and J. T. M. Cardeza, M. D. APRIL 14, The President, Dr. Josep Lerpy, in the chair. Twenty-five persons present. A paper entitled “ Note on Mesozoic Mammalia,” by O. C. Marsh, was presented for publication. The deaths of Mr. Aubrey H. Smith, member, on the 14th and Mr. A. Sydney Biddle, member, on the 9th inst. were announced. APRIL 21. Mr. CHarues Morris in the chair. Twenty-four persons present. The death of Mr. P. W. Sheafer, a member, March 26, was announced. Pedomorphism.—Dr. Harrison ALLEN spoke of the disposition occasionally exhibited in adult mammals, for the proportions of differ- ent parts of the body to remain as they were in the immature individ- uals. He claimed for this peculiarity that it is not due to arrest of growth but to the fact that certain parts preserve the peculiarities of the young; thus, for example, among the bats, the so-called species V. lucifugus exhibits a number of characteristics which are found in the immature animal and which are the same in kind as those that exist in an individual which in every other respect answers to the description of the adult. In young bats, the foot and thumb are apt to be large as compared with the same parts in the adult, at the same time that the auricle and tragus are correspondingly small and the snout high, blunt and nearly naked. The parts often so remain. Dr. Allen proposed for this peculiarity the term pedomorphism. “ JV. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209 lucifugus”’ becomes a pedomorphice variety of V. subulatus. It might be expected that pedomorphiec varieties closely resemble each other when the same disposition is exhibited in closely allied species. It is almost impossible to distinguish the pedomorphic variety of V. subulatus from that of V. nitidus ; or, to express it differently, the “ V. lucifugus” from the range of V. subulatus is an almost identical form with the “ V. lucifugus” from the range of V. nitidus. Some species exhibit the disposition to retain pedomorphie variation to a greater degree than others, and it is held to be probably true that the existence of this disposition to so remarkable a degree in the North American species of Vespertilio accounts for the great confusion which has existed in this genus—Writers imply by their language that there is but one kind of variation, namely, the geo- graphical. It is an advantage to recognize two kinds, namely, the pedomorphic and the geographical. APRIL 28. Dr. Grorce H. Horn in the chair. Twenty-four persons present. The following were elected members: John Arschagonni, M. D., Robert P. Morton, Witmer Stone and Edwin Corlies Atkinson. Charler Otis Whitman of Worcester, was elected a correspondent. The following were ordered to be printed :— 210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ECHINODERMS AND ARTHROPODS FROM JAPAN. BY J. E. IVES. The marine invertebrates enumerated and described in the follow- ing pages were collected by Mr. Frederick Stearns, of Detroit, Mich- igan, during nearly a year’s residence in Japan. He was assisted by an intelligent Japanese, who visited at intervals the entire south- eastern coast from Tokyo by Sagama and Saruga, along Kii, Awa and Toza, and the north shore of the Inland Sea as far west as Bingo, in communicaticn with the fishermen, who dredge for fish and molluscs in water sometimes as deep as thirty fathoms. The southeastern coast of Japan is washed by the warm waters of the Kuro Schiwo, the continuation of the north equatorial current of the Pacific. The fauna of this coast is essentially Indo-Pacific, although it possesses many species both of echinoderms and crusta- ceans peculiar to it.' There does not appear to be any evidence of a recent connection of the southern portion of Japan with the main- land, and the Indo-Pacific species found there must have been carried thither by the Kuro Schiwo, probably in the larval condition. The forms that are peculiar may be regarded as Indo-Pacific types differentiated by the special character of these shores. The knowledge of the echinoderm and crustacean faunas of these coasts has been largely derived from the collections made by Ph. Fr. von Siebold. The star-fishes collected by him were described by Miiller and Troschel in the System der Asteriden, to whose descrip- tions additional information was furnished by Dr. Von Martens in 1865.2. The crustacea were monographed by De Haan in the “ Fauna Japonica,” and this beautiful work even at this day leaves little to be desired by the systematist. To the knowledge of the latter group, additions were made by Stimpson * in 1857, 1858 and 1 For a discussion of the limitations of the Japanese region see Professor Dana in his monograph of the Crustacea of the U. S. Exploring Expedition; Prof. A. Agassiz in the Revision of the Echini and Dr. Paul Fischer, in the Manuel de Conchyliogie. 2 Arch. f. Naturg., Jahrg. 31, pp. 345-360. 3 Prodromus descriptionis animalium invertebratorum quz in expeditione ad oceanum Pacificum septentrionalem a Republica federata missa Cadwaladaro Ring- gold et Johanne Rodgers ducibus, observavit et descripsit. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Pts. I-III, 1857; Pts. IV-VII, 1858; Pt. VIII, 1860. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211 1860, and by Miers' in 1879. Dr. Ludwig Déderlein? has made the most important addition to the department of Echinoids, recording in 1885 forty-seven species of sea urchins collected by himself in Japan, of which twenty were new. The most important con- tribution to the Pyenogonoids of Japan was made in 1890 by Dr. A. Ortman,’ who described the specimens collected by Dr. Déderlein. Three new species, collected by Dr. Hilgendorffin Japan had already been described by R. Bohm ‘ in 1879. The Challenger Expedition collected on the southeast coast of Japan. Its various monographs contain contributions to the fauna of this coast. The entire collection made by Mr. Stearns was not forwarded to me, only duplicates being sent where more than one specimen was collected. I am, therefore, unable to give any particulars as to the abundance or scarcity of the forms obtained, except in the cases where only one specimen was found, when that fact is stated. I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to Mr. Stearns, for his liberality in making possible the publication of the plates accom- panying this paper. In the following pages the species of echinoderms and crustacea collected by Mr. Stearns are enumerated, a new Ophurian, a new crab, and a new and interesting Pycnogonoid are described, and several species of star-fishes hitherto unfigured, have been figured. ASTEROIDEA. Astropecten armatus. Miiller und Troschel, System der Asteriden, p. 71. Astropecten Japonicus. Pl. VII, figs. 5-9. Miiller and Troschel, op. cit., p. 205. Only a single specimen collected by Mr. Stearns. Astropecten scoparius. Pl. VIII, figs. 1-4, Miiller and Troschel, op. cit., p. 71. Luidia quinaria. PI. IX, figs. 5-9, Von Martens, Archiv f. Naturg. 1865, p. 352. Sladen, Challenger Asteroidea, p. 253. * On a collection of Crustacea made by Capt. H. St. John, R. N. in the Corean and Japanese Seas. Pt. I, Podophthalmia, with an appendix by Capt. H. C. St John, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1879, pp. 18-61, Pls. I-III. *Seeigel von Japan und den Lius Riu Inseln, Arch. f. Naturg., Jahrg. II, pp. 73-112, and Die Japanische Seeigel.1, Familien Cidaride und Salenide, Stuttgart, 1887. 3 Zool. Jahrbb. Bd. 5, pp. 157-167. *S. B. Gesellsch. Naturf. Freunde zu Berlin, 1879, pp. 53-60. 212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Asterina pectinifera. PI. X, figs, 1-4. Miiller and Troschel, op. cit , p. 40. Von Martens, op. cit., p. 352. Nine specimens of this species were sent by Mr. Stearns, indicating that it is found in abundance. It agrees in general characters with Asterina miniata, but differs from that species in the more heap-like arrangement of the spinelets of the paxille, in the absence of a well marked series of paxillse along the middle line of the dorsal surface of each arm, and in the color. Nardoa semiregularis var. Japonica. PI. VII, figs. 1-4. Von Martens, op. cit., p. 351. Cribrella sanguinolenta. Pl. IX, figs. 1-4. O. F. Miiller, Zool. Dan. Prodr., p. 234. Sladen, op. cit., p. 542. Asterias Amurensis. PI. VIII, figs. 5-8. Liitken, Vidensk. Meddel. Kjébenhaven, 1871, p. 296. Sladen, op. cit., p. 575. This species is closely related to Asterias versicolor of Sladen. Future investigation may prove them to be identical. Asterias torquata. Sladen, op. cit., p. 570, Pl. CII, figs. 1-4. Only a single specimen was collected by Mr. Stearns. OPHIUROIDEA. Pectinura Stearnsii, n.sp. Pl. XI, figs. 1-5, Disk covered beneath the granulation with small coarse scales ; granulation fine and close; radial shields large, irregularly oval, somewhat acute at both ends, nearly twice as long asbroad. Mouth shields large, sub-triangular ; supplementary plate semi-circular, less than one-fourth the size of the mouth shields. Side mouth shields small, smaller than the supplementary plates. Fourteen mouth papille to each angle; the two outer papille very broad, sub- quadrate, as broad as three of the others. At the apex ofthe mouth angle are two papille half as broad as the outer-most mouth papille, projecting into the mouth angle one on either side with their bases resting upon the side mouth shields.’ Five rounded teeth. Length of the arms from the edge of the disk to the tip, rather more than four times the diameter of the disk. | Upper arm plates entire; lower arm plates quadrate with the angles truncated with slight indentation of the aboral edge; half as broad again as long. Pores 1 Unfortunately, through an oversight, the number and shape of the mouth papillee, are not clearly shown in the accompanying figure of this species. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215 between the first and second under arm plates. Two tentacle scales, the inner one longer than the outer, with a round end, the outer broader than the inner one, shorter and truncated, overlapping the base of the lowest side arm spine; side arm plates occupying two- thirds of the height of the arm, near the base of the arm, with eleven short flattened arm spines, the lowest arm spine the longest, the rest subequal about one-half the length the side arm plate. Dorsal surface of the disk in dried specimen dirty brown, mottled with darker and lighter brown. Radial shields chocolate brown. Dorsal surface of the arms greenish-gray irregularly banded with dark brown and spotted with lighter. Ventral surface of the disk brownish around the edges and reddish spotted with lighter towards the center. Ventral surface of the arms grayish towards the extremities and reddish spotted with lighter in the neighborhood of the disk. In the specimen described, diameter of the disk 30 mm., length of an arm from the edge of the disk to the tip, 105 mm. This species is allied to Pectinwra marmorata’ from the Philippines, but may be distinguished from it by its much smaller supplementary mouth shields, its higher side arm plates, its shorter and flatter arm spines, and its truncated, not rounded, outer tentacle scale. A single specimen has been presented to the Academy by Mr. Stearns. Ophioplocus imbricatus. Pl. XI, figs, 6-10. Miiller and Troschel, op. cit., p. 938. Lyman, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. VIII, p. 76; Illus. Cat., p. 69, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. 1; Challenger Ophiurcidea, p. 20, Pl. XX XVII, figs. 10-12. Three specimens. The largest with a disk 28 mm. in diameter, one-third of the length of an arm, and the smallest with a disk 15 mm. in diameter, one-fourth of the length of an arm. Genital slits, as observed by Mr. Lyman’ on specimens from Japan and Java in the Leyden Museum, extending to the mouth shields, thus reach- ing for more than half the distance from the aboral edge of the mouth shields to the edge of the disk. The specimens collected by Mr. Stearns also differ from the typical form of Ophioplocus imbricatus in the presence of a number of small supplementary arm plates between, or on the edges of the larger plates. 1 Lyman, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. 3, pp. 222, 228, Pl. V, figs. 1-7. 2 Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol., VIII, p. 228. 214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ECHINOIDEA. Goniocidaris biserialis. Stephanocidaris biserialis, Déderlein, Archiv f. Naturg. Jahrg. 51, p. 80. Goniocidaris bisertalis, Déderlein, “ Die Japanische Seeigel,’”’ Theil. I, pp. 10- 13, Taf. V, Taf. VIII, fig. 8a-h. A single test of this interesting species was collected by Mr. Stearns. The coronal, genital and ocular plates are moderately thick. Diadema setosum. Gray, 1825, Ann. Phil., p. 4 (from Rumph.). A. Agassiz, Rev. Echin., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol., III, p. 274, Pls. IVa, etc. Strongylocentrotus depressus. A, Agassiz, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p.440; Rev. Echin., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. III, p. 440. A single specimen collected. Strongylocentrotus tuberculatus. Lamarck, Anim. sans Vert., p. 50. A. Agassiz, Rev. Echin., p. 449, Pl. V b, figs. 4-5, Pl. XXXVI, fig. 4. Temnopleurus Reynaudi. Agassiz, C. R., Ann, Sci. Nat., VI, p. 360. A. Agassiz, Rev. Echin., p. 461, Pl. VIII, figs. 22-24, Pl. VIII a, figs. 6, 7. Temnopleurus toreumaticus. Leske, Additamenta ad. Klein, p. 91. A. Agassiz, Rev. Echin. pp. 463, 464, Pl. VIITa, figs. 4-5. Toreumatica Hardwickii, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1855, p. 39; A. Agassiz, op. cit., pp. 460, 461, Pls. VIII, VIIIa, XXV, XXXVI. In the series of six specimens presented to the Academy by Mr. Stearns, three are forms connecting Temnopleurus torewmatica and Temnopleurus Hardwickii as defined by Professor Alexander Agassiz in the Revision of the Echini, and I am, therefore, compelled to regard the latter species as asynonym of the former. One specimen having rather deep pits, has the ocular and genital plates covered with prominent tubercles, and other specimens show the passage from the deep rectangular pits to the bevelled grooves of the ambulacral and interambulacral regions. Toxopneustes pileolus. Lam., Anim. sans Vert., p. 45. Alex. Agassiz, Rev. Echin., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. III, p. 497, Pls. VIIIb, etc. A single specimen obtained. Echinanthus testudinarius. Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1851, p. 35; Cat. Echin. Brit. Mus., p. 6, Pl. 1, fig. 1. A. Agassiz, op. cit., p. 514. Laganum decagonalis. Lesson, Blainville, Dict. Sci. Nat. Scut., p. 229. A. Agassiz, op. cit., p. 520, Pls. XIIIe, XXXVII. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. PANS In the specimens presented to the Academy by Mr. Stearns the connecting walls do not ramify, and as there can be no doubt that these specimens belong to this species, the distinction between the genera Peronella and Laganum, as defined by Professor Alexander Agassiz, does not hold good. Echinarachnius mirabilis. Barnard, A. Agassiz, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1863, p. 359. A. Agassiz, Rev. Echin., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. III, p. 526, Pls. XIII a, XX XVII. Schizaster Japonicus. A. Agassiz, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, Vol. XIV, p. 212; Challenger Echinoidea, p. 202, Pls. XXXVI, XLIII, XLV. CRUSTACEA. Pugettia incisa. Pisa (Halmius) incisa, De Haan, Fauna Japonica, Crust., p. 98, Pl. XXIV, fig. Spells G: Pugettia incisa, Miers, Challenger Brachyura, p. 40. Chlorinoides longispinus. Maja (Chorinus) longispina, De Haan, op. cit., p. 94, Tab. XXIII, fig. 2, Maja (Chorinus) aculeata.) Chlorinoides longispinus, Miers, Challenger Brachyura, p. 53. Schizophrys aspera. Mithrax aspera, Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., Vol. I, p. 320. Schizophrys aspera, A. Milne-Edwards, Nouy. Arch., Vol. VIII, p. 281, figs. 1-1f. Lambrus validus. Parthenope (Lambrus) validus, De Haan, op. cit., p.90, Tab. X XI, fig. 1, Tab. XXII, figs. 1-3. Atergatis floridus. Cancer floridus, L., Syst. Nat., ed. XII, p. 1044. Atergatis floridus, Dana, Crust. U. S. Explor. Exped., p. 159, Pl. VII, fig. 4. A single specimen was collected. Goniosoma Japonicum. Goniosoma sexdentata, De Haan, op. cit., 41, Pl. XII, fig. 1. Goniosoma Japonicum, A. Milne-Edwards, Arch. Mus., t. X, p. 3872. Gontosoma acutum, A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch.., t. ve p. 150, Pl. VII, figs. 8-10. The specimen given to the Academy by Mr. Stearns is inter- mediate in character between G. Japonicum and G. acutum, and I have, therefore, given the latter species as a synonym of the former. The posterior antero-lateral tooth on the right side is produced as in Milne-Edwards’ figure of G. acutum, but on the left side it is not produced and is not longer than the preceding tooth. The carapace is rather less extended at the sides than in the figure of this species, and rather more so than in the figure of G. Japonicum. The antero- 216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. lateral teeth are rather less prominent than in G. acutum and rather more so than in G. Japonicum. The outline of the postero-lateral borders of the carapace is also intermediate in character. Three other specimens from Japan in the Museum of this Academy show the passage of the one form into the other. Macrophthalmus dilatatus. Ocypoda (Macrophthalmus) dilatata, De Haan, op. cit., p. 55, Tab. XV, fig. 3. Brachynotus (Heterograpsus) penicillatus. De Haan, op. cit., pp. 32, 60, Tab. XI, fig. 5. Helice tridens. De Haan, op. cit., p. 57, Tab. XI, fig. 2; Tab. XV, fig. 6. Sesarma affinis. Grapsus (Pachysoma) affinis, De Haan, op. cit., p. 66, Tab. XVIII, fig. 5. Eriocheir Japonica. Grapsus (Eriocheir) Japonicus, De Haan, op. cit., p. 39, Tab. XVII. Philyra pisum. De Haan, op. cit., p. 181, Tab. XX XIII, fig. 7. Arcania undecimspinosa. De Haan, op. cit., p. 1385, Tab. XX XIII, fig. 8. Leucosia unidentata. De Haan, op. cit., p. 183, Tab. XX XIII, fig. 8. Leucosia longifrons. De Haan, op. cit., p. 182, Tab. XX XIII, fig. 4. It is very probable that this and the preceding form represent merely two varieties of the same species. Dorippe Japonica. Von Siebold, Spicilegia, Fauna Japonica, p. 14. De Haan, op, cit., p. 122, Pl. XXXI, fig. 1 (Dorippe callida). Cryptodromia Stearnsii, n. sp. Pl. XII, figs, 1-3. Carapace sub-pentagonal in outline, the angle of the pentagon directed forwards being occupied by the rostral teeth as broad as long; upper surface very convex, smooth, minutely punctate, with a few minute scattered tubercles, cervical groove well defined. An ill-defined groove bounded on either side by a slight elevation leads to the depression between the lateral rostral teeth. Median rostral tooth small, triangular, depressed ; lateral rostral teeth well devel- oped, rounded triangular, their inner borders depressed, supra-orbital tooth very small. The posterior border of the orbit forming a slight prominence. Three small antero-latera! teeth, the third or most posterior placed at the junction of the lateral and the antero-lateral edges of the carapace; the second placed on a level with the third, at about two-thirds of the distance from the posterior border of the 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Pally orbit to the third, and the first placed rather higher upon the carapace than the other two, at about one-third of the distance from the posterior border of the orbit to the third tooth. Lateral border divided by a groove which commences at about one-third of the dis- tance from the third antero-lateral tooth to the posterior border of the carapace. Behind the groove at its commencement is a small tooth. This groove is continued backwards and inwards across the branchial area and ends by passing forwards into the groove separat- ing the branchial and cardiac regions. The subhepatic area is small and has four small teeth, two of them placed one behind the other beneath the eye, along the inner border of the area; a third placed behind these two; and a fourth placed half way between the last mentioned and the second antero-lateral tooth on the edge of the carapace. Two large tubercles upon the distal edge of the outer surface of the carpus of the cheliped, a smaller one behind these two, and a still smaller one above this one. Two tubercles upon the distal end of the upper surface of the manus, the outer tubercle the larger of the two, and a minute tubercle situated at the proximal end of a row _of three minute tubercles along the inner edge of the upper surface. The carpal joints of the two anterior pairs of cruripeds (ambulatory legs) end in two tubercles, the propodal joints in one. In the spec- imen examined only the first pair of the last two pairs of cruripeds are entire, and they possess but a single claw each. The entire specimen under examination is covered with apparently a pilose pubescence. The species closely resembles Cryptodromia Japonica but may be readily distinguished from it by the presence of three antero-lateral teeth instead of two. The genus Cryptodromia was established by Stimpson in 1858,’ and the following species, have been referred to it :-— C. nodipes, Dromia nodipes em) Milne-Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., t. II, p- 177, 1887; Guerin, Icon., Pl. 14, fig. 1. C fallax, Dromia fallax (uanateigs Milne-Edw ards, op. cit.,p. 176; Mauritius. C. lateralis, Dromia lateralis, Gray, Zool. Miscell., p. 40; Haswell, Cat. Austral. Crust., p 139. Reeteata, New Zealand and Japan. C. coronata, Stimps., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1858, p. 239. Bonin Islands. C. tuberculata, Stimps., op. cit., p. 239. Gaspar Straits, Island of Kikaisima and Bay of Kagosima. 1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 225. 15 218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. C. tumida, Stimps., op. cit., p. 240. Bay of Fou-kow, Island of Ousima. C. canaliculata, Stimps. loc. cit. Gaspar Straits, Loo-choo Islands, Kikaisima Island. C. tomentosa, Dromia tomentosa, Heller, S. B. Akad. Wiss. Wein, Bd. XLIV, Abth. I, p. 241, 1861. Dromia (Cryplodromia) tomentosa Hilgendorf, M. B. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1878, p. 813. Taf. II, figs. 3-5. Red Sea; Ibo Island, Mozambique. C. pentagonalis, Dromia (Cryptodromia) pentagonalis, Hilgendorf, op. cit., p. 814, Taf. IT, figs. 1, 2. Ibo Island. Mozambique. C. Japonica, Henderson, ** Challenger’? Anomura, p. 6, PI. I, fig. 2. Off Yokoska, Japan. C. nodulifera, Henderson, op. cit., p. 8, Pl. I, fig. 3. Off the Australian coast. C. zncisa, Henderson, op. cit., p. 10, Pl. I, fig. 4. Off Twofold Bay, Australia. Mr. Miers' records a young specimen from the Corean and Japanese Seas of doubtful species, and Dr. de Man? records another young specimen of doubtful species from the Mergui Archipelago. Lyreidus tridentatus. De Haan, op. cit., p. 140, Tab. XXXV, fig. 6. Eupagurus constans. Sumpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 248. Henderson, Challenger Anomura, p. 67, Pl. VI, fig. 8. A single specimen collected. PANTOPODA. An interesting Pyenogonoid collected by Mr. Stearns apparently represents a new species. In describing it I have followed in a general way the nomenclature of parts adopted by Dr. Hoek in his monograph of the Pyenogonoids collected by the Challenger Expedi- tion. I differ from him slightly, however, in terming the whole of the trunk, from its junction with the proboscis to the commencement of the abdomen, the cephalothorax, instead of confining that term to the first segment of the trunk. This appears to me to be a more correct use of the term, as when the cephalon and thorax are united, the cephalon ceases any longer to be the cephalon pure and simple, and the thorax, in the same way, any longer the thorax pure and simple. The whole then becomes the cephalothorax, and any part of it is a part of the cephalothorax. The following is a description of the species. :— 1 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1879, p. 44. 4 Jour. Linn. Soc., Vol. XXII, p. 211, 1888. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219 Ascorhynchus Japonicus, n. sp. PI. XII, figs, 4-10. Body strong, slender; its surface very minutely tuberculated ; tubercles themselves, when highly magnified, seem to be multi- tuberculate ; proboscis one-third of the total length of the body ; abdomen one-half of the length of the proboscis ; three strong spines placed on the dorsal posterior margin of the first three cephalo- thoracic segments. Proboscis stout, pyriform, triangular in trans- verse section ; sides of the proboscis not longitudinally furrowed, divided by constriction into an anterior and a posterior portion, the anterior portion nearly twice as long as the posterior portion, the whole resembling an unopened rose-bud ; truncated at its extrem- ity. Mouth Jarge, triangular. Length of the first cephalo-thoracie segment about two-fifths of that of the whole cephalo-thorax. Anterior portion rectangular, bearing at the angles the mandibles. No azygous knob between the mandibles. Palpi inserted at about one-quarter of the distance be- tween its anterior and posterior extremities, a slight elevation be- tween the palpi. Slightly narrowed immediately behind the inser- tion of the palpi. Large, conical, oculiferous tubercle situated be- . tween the lateral processes of the ovigerous legs at rather more than half the distance from its anterior to its posterior border, possess- ing four distinct eyes of moderate size ; the two anterior eyes rather larger than the two posterior; pigment of a light reddish color. A rather smaller tubercle is found upon its dorsal posterior border. Lateral processes for the insertion of the ovigerous legs, short, not longer than the width of that portion of the segment directly in front of them; those for the insertion of the true legs long, three times as long as those last mentioned. Second and third cephalothoracic segments about as long as their lateral processes which are rather longer than those of the first segment ; each segment possessing a prominent tubercle upon its postero-dorsal margin. Fourth cephalo-thoracic segment of about the same length as the third. Abdomen long and narrow, slightly swollen at the extremity. Mandibles three jointed, chelate, claws very small, slight. First joint the longest : second joint rather more than half as long as the first joint. Palpi incomplete in the specimen, only eight joints being present, but apparently of very nearly the same form asin Ascorhynchus gla- 220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ber Hoek.' First two joints extremely small; the third the longest, half as long as the proboscis; the fourth short, the fifth nearly four times as long as the fourth; the sixth short, slightly shorter than the fourth; the seventh about twice as long as the sixth ; the eight slightly longer than the seventh. The ovigerous legs have the fourth joint the longest, as long as the anterior portion of the proboscis; the fifth rather shorter; the sixth about one-half the length of the fifth ; the seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth slightly decreasing in length from the sixth; the terminal claw minute ; the first joint very small; the second and third about one-third of the length of the fourth. The denticulated spines placed in several rows of different sizes. The fourth, fifth and sixth joints armed with bristles most numerous at the distal extremities of the fifth and sixth joints. The legs in the specimen collected are all imperfect but correspond in general shape to those of A. glaber, as shown in Dr. Hoek’s figure. Of the first pair, the first, second and third joints are present ; of the second, the first, second, third and fourth; of the third and fourth, the first, second, third, fourth and fifth. The joints of the first pair of legs are slightly shorter than those of the second pair, and the joints of second pair, are slightly shorter of those of the third and fourth pairs. Of the third pair, the first joint is nearly as long as the lateral process; the second nearly twice as long as the first joint, the third rather shorter than the first; the fourth joint about half as long again as the proboscis, and the fifth joint rather shorter than the fourth. The legs are hairless. The fourth and fifth joints where present are furnished with a row of minute tubercles upon the dorsal surface, such as is found in Ascorhynchus glaber. The specimen collected isa male, the fourth joint of the legs being slender, the genital pores minute, and the ovigerous legs well devel- oped. The genital pores are situated on the ventral extremity of the second joint of the two posterior pairs of legs. Color of the dried specimen, a light yellowish brown. Length of the proboscis, 12°5 mm. Length of the trunk, 185 mm. Length of the abdomen, 6-0 mm. Length of the whole body, 37-0 mm. 1 «Challenger’ Pycnogonida, pp. 58-55, Pl. VI, figs. 5-9; Pl. XV, fig. 16. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. DA This is a very fine species, much larger than any other species of the genus yet known. The only other species which approach it in size are Ascorhynchus glaber and Ascorhynchus orthorhynchus. It is nearly half as long again as Ascorhynchus glaber, the larger of these two species. It is closely allied to the latter species, but differs from it in the following well-marked characters :— 1. The proboscis is divided into two portions, is truncated and not longitudinally furrowed while in A. glaber it is divided into three portions, is sharply pointed and each of its three sides is longitu- dinally furrowed. 2. The oculiferous tubercle bears four distinct eyes, whereas in A. glaber it is entirely destitute of eyes. 3. The surface of the whole body is covered with a very minute granulation, whereas in A. glaber it is entirely smooth, with the exception of the dorsal cephalo-thoracic spines. It will be seen from the above description that this is a species of great interest. The form to which it is closely related, A. glaber, was dredged in the Southern Ocean, between the Cape of Good Hope and Kerguelen Island in 1575 fathoms. The species from Japan was obtained in shallow water. The presence of eyes in A. Japonicus and the simple character of the proboscis, divided into two portions instead of into three, causes the question as to whether this species does not represent the ancestral type of A. glaber, which may have become adapted to deep water and migrated southwards. Dr. Hoek in his monograph of the Pycnogonida collected by the Challenger Expedition, gives a list of the species then known. The following species of Ascorhynchus have been described since, all from Japan. :— A. cryptopygius, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrbb. Bd. 5, p. 159, Taf. XXIV, fig. 2, 1890. A. clabroides, Ortmann, op. cit., p. 160, Taf. XXIV, figs. 8a, 3b. A. bicornis, Ortmann, op. cit., p. 162. Of the nine species now known, five are peculiar to Japan. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Prats VII. Fig. 1. Nardoa semiregularis var. Japonica, dorsal surface, natural size. Fig. 2. Ventral surface, natural size. Fig. 5. Portion of the dorsal surface of an arm, enlarged. Fig. 4. Portion of the ventral surface enlarged. ho * joke bale bo bo — Za aeat ee oq dg 09° 0g 08 og gg 03 09 09 99 08 9 9 . he da 03° 0 02" 03 da" 08 a8 = Soo 2) fe EM . 99 bo “I o> Ol co Or wm OO bo 6S a ee COS ae i oo to Sa PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF okey Astropecten Japonicus, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of the dorsal surface of an arm, enlarged. Portion of the ventral surface, enlarged. Portion of the side of an arm near its base, enlarged. _Puate VIII. Astropecten scoparius, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of ventral surface, of an arm, enlarged. Portion of dorsal surface enlarged. Asterias Amurensis, dorsal surtace, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of the dersal surface of an arm, enlarged. Portion of ventral surface, enlarged. PuatTE IX. Cribrella sanguinolenta, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of dorsal surface of an arm, enlarged. Portion of ventral surface, enlarged. Luidia quinaria, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of dorsal surface of an arm, enlarged. Portion of the side of an arm near the base, enlarged. Portion of the ventral surface of an arm, enlarged. PLATE X. Asterina pectinifera. Dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of dorsal surface, enlarged. Portion of ventral surface, enlarged. PLATE XI. Pectinura Stearnsii. Dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of the dorsal surface of an arm near the base, en- larged. Portion of ventral surface of an arm near the base, en- larged. = ee gs 08 on Fig. 9. Fig. 10. hey _ ce Jie) Sd Se Solaire NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223 Portion of the side of an arm near the base, enlarged. Ophivplocus imbricatus. Dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Portion of the dorsal surface of the disk and an arm, en- larged. Portion of the ventral surface of the disk and an arm, enlarged. Portion of the side of an arm near the base, enlarged. Prate XI. Cryptodromia Stearnsii, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Left side of the carapace, natural size. Ascorhynchus Japonicus, dorsal surface, natural size. Ventral surface, natural size. Right side of the trunk with anterior appendages, without the legs, natural size. Oculiferous tubercle, viewed from the right side, enlarged. Oculiferous tubercle, viewed from above, enlarged, a anterior margin, } posterior margin. Fifth joint of the fourth leg on the right side, enlarged. Mandibles, viewed from above, enlarged. 224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ON THE EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF FETAL REINDEER, AND OTHER NOTES. BY R. W. SHUFELDT, M. D. Mr. Lucien M. Turner, on the 20th of May, 1884, collected at Fort Chimo, Ungava District, Hudson’s Bay, two specimens of fcetal Reindeer, or Woodland Caribou (Rangifer tarandus caribou, Kerr), one being a male and the other a female. They were taken from slain does, “one from each, and within eighteen days of delivery,” and at once consigned to strong alcohol, the tank containing them being sent to the Smithsonian Institution at Washington. Early in February, 1886, Professor Baird sent them to the writer, then residing at Fort Wingate, New Mexico, for anatomical descrip- tion; owing to the fact, however, that my investigations upon the osteology of arctic birds then engaged every moment of my available time, they were not examined until nearly the middle of June of the same year. Although they had been in spirit two years, they were found to be in excellent condition, and I at once made the drawing of the head of the male, which illustrates the present paper. As will be seen further on, the male fawn of this pair is somewhat larger than the female, with which it differs in several minor details other than those pertaining to the organs of sex. The male subject I found to possess a very full coat of soft fine hair which completely covered its body, extending up to the lips and snout, and well inside of the external ears. In the median line in front, from below the jaw to the root of the neck, this hair is so long as to form a conspicuous beard, becoming longer as we proceed towards the last-named locality, where it is the best developed. About the muzzle, this hair is of a dark blackish-brown color, which shades off as we advance towards the forehead, and again becomes darker around the eye. The ears are completely covered with a coat of soft fur of a light brownish-clay color, darkest at their bases, and shading off toward their tips. The remainder of the hair of the head is of a fawn-brown, which color extends down on the neck, but as we come on to the body this changes to a dark chocolate-brown above, and a clay- colored brown on the lower parts and abdomen. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225 The limbs are of about the same shade as the back, and the tail, which is well developed, is dark above and lighter beneath. No pure white occurs upon either of the specimens. Left lateral view of the head of foetal Reindeer (R. tarandus caribou). A much reduced copy made by the author from his life-size colored figure. Unfortunately, the eyes were found to be nearly destroyed for any purpose, and it was not only impossible to tell the color of the irides, but the long keeping had rendered them useless for anatomical description. All of the hoofs were found to be fairly well developed, except at their antero-internal tips, where the horn-substance had been of such a delicate and elementary character as to have become quite shrunken and wrinkled by the action of the alcohol. These remarks apply equally well to the condition of the hoofs of the posterior rudimentary digits, of which, as usual, there are two at the back of each foot. Hither external nostril is an aperture of considerable size, and viewed from above it is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the body, while seen upon lateral aspect it is oblique with its posterior com- missure the higher. 226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Eyelashes are well pronounced on the eyelids, especially on the superior ones, being best developed on the middle of the lid, and becoming shorter as we proceed in the direction of either canthus. A portion of the umbilical cord remains attached to either one of the specimens, but the placentz were not sent with them. The theca of the penis is attached to the abdomen to within 4°4 centimetres of the umbilical cord, beyond which it is pendant, and in this young specimen was found to completely ensheathe the organ which it contains. This theca is very well covered with rather long hair of a bright clay color. At this age the testicles have not as yet descended and in the subject now under consideration, the scrotal sack is small and shrunken. All of the hoofs are of a clear horn color. Caton found the “tarsal gland large ” in the adult of this species, and says of it, that “on the Woodland Caribou, the tuft of hairs over the tarsal gland also has its characteristics, which enable one who has studied it to readily recognize it, though it is more variable in size and shape than on the moose.” “The hairs composing the tuft occupy a descending position. From the upper end the tuft commences té rise up gradually, and so continues to the lower end, where the elevation is greatest. The length of this tuft is two inches, while the breadth is one inch and three lines. The middle of this tuft is a yellowish-white, for a horizontal extent of two inches, and a vertical extent of one inch and three lines. The greatest diameter of the white portion is near the lower border of the tuft. Below the white portion the tuft shades down to the olive-brown of the rest of the leg. It occupies the internal cavity of the hook posterior to the central part. It is not quite so large in proportion to the size of the animal as on most of the other species, neither is it much below them in relative size. It is not so exactly alike on each individual of this species as it is on the smaller species.” ' 1CATON, JOHN DEAN: The Antelope and Deer of America, New York, 1877, pp. 253-54. Mr. Caton in comparing the above condition of these glands with the European Reindeer found that they correspond in all essential particulars. In this connection I would like to say that at the time my dissections were made upon these fawns, my library and my facilities for consulting books were limited. Mivart’s “Cat;” the works of Owen, Flower, Oldfield Thomas, Chauveau, Huxley, and a number of others were, however, in my field library. Doctor John Dean Caton was at that time in Monterey, California, and I wrote him for a copy of his excellent volume upon “The Antelope and Deer of America,” just cited ; and it is my desire to express to him here my grateful thanks for his having telegraphed to his son at his home in Chicago, with the effect of placing a gift of the volume very promptly in my hands for use. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227 This description answers very well indeed, for both the position and appearance of this tarsal gland and its tuft in the foetus. Here, however, the gland is quite rudimentary and the tuft is proportion- ately smaller. The color of the hair seems to agree with Mr. Caton’s description, also,—but so diminutive are these glands in this young subject, that little can be learned about them from the exterior, and a study of their internal structure falls within the domain of the histologist rather than that of the anatomist. I have failed to dis- cover any metatarsal glands or inter-digital ones in this subject. The authority just quoted found them in the hind feet only, and if they are present in the fcetus in my hands, they are exceedingly rudimentary. Mr. Caton calls attention, too, in the adult, to a white band sur- rounding the top of each hoof ;—this is likewise absent in my spec- imens. The adults of this Caribou make considerable use of their accessory hoofs, and these are “subject to muscular control ;” sucha condition seems to be foreshadowed in the fcetus, especially in the feet of the anterior limbs, where the accessory hoofs are large and situated low down. Previous to cutting down upon this specimen, (b) I made careful drawings of the tarsus and foot of the anterior and posterior limbs, together with the form of the tail; and these are here reproduced as drawings illustrating this paper. Passing next to the consideration of the female specimen we find that beyond the sexual differences as pertaining to the organs of reproduction, and being rather smaller in size, it presents us with no special departures in its general appear- ance, either as regards color or form, from the male just described. Perhaps the coat of the female may be a shade lighter, and the hair down the median line of the throat beneath is not quite so con- spicuously long. The vulva and external genitals have advanced to a point of development that we might expect in a ruminant of this tender age, and offers nothing for special remark. It is fairly well covered by the tail. Most fcetal mammals at this age show a pre-natal emaciation, which, in these specimens, has been enhanced by the action of the alcohol upon their delicate tissues and muscles. I did not think it necessary at the time to weigh either of these specimens, for the reason, that they were saturated by the alcohol, and that other changes must have taken place in them, which would render such data of but little or no use. 228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Such strictures, however, do not apply to careful measurements of external parts. Of these I have quite fully availed myself, and they are presented in the subjoined table. Fig 2-A. Tuner aspect of the right tarsus, metatarsus and foot of the anterior limb of a foetal Reindeer (#. tarandus caribou). B. Corresponding aspect and parts of the hinder limb; same specimen. The tarsal gland is here seen covered by its lighter colored tuft of hair. C. Superior aspect of the tail of the same specimen. The under side of the tail in this foetus is of a light brownish fawn color, while above, it is rather of a chestnutshade. It is white on the lower side in the adult. Figures all drawn by the author from the subjects, and much reduced. Measurements of fatal specimens of R. tarandus caribou (Alco- holics, eighteen days prior to birth):— MALE. FEMALE. Cs. Cs. Total length including tail, 71.00 70.00 Girth immediately behind the arms, BYDNOXOY BRNO) Length of head, 17.00 16.8 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229 Length of nostril, 2.00) 2.00 Between the eyes, 9.5 92 Height of ear, 8.00 7.8 From anterior canthus of eye to tip of nose, 8.5 8.3 Between the ears, 5.00 5.00 Girth of middle of neck, 16.00 15.3 Length of tail, 8.2 7.2 All the measurements were taken previous to making any of the dissections. Other thiugs being proportionately equal it will be observed that “girth of neck” and “length of tail” constitute the greatest differences. Myouocicat Nores. A complete dissection of the muscular system of these fawns was not made by me for the reason, or rather reasons, that my labors at the time were cut short by the operation of certain laws or customs to which I was subservient, and over which I had no personal control, and, which, at the same time, were hostile to the prosecution of researches in anatomy. In the meantime, and at a later period, this material passed out of my hands, as more general work engaged me, and [ returned it to the Museum. The description of such - muscles as I was enabled to work out, however, is fully worthy of record as so many facts for the guidance of laborers in the same fields in the future. Moreover, reindeer are being rapidly exter- minated, and any notes upon their morphology are sure to be of value in time to come. Dermal System of Muscles—In this fcetal specimen the group of cutaneous muscles, whose function it is to act upon and agitate the skin covering certain areas of the body, are as yet but feebly developed. We can make out, however, without difficulty the following :— The platysma myoides is quite conspicuously developed, being carried on the skin over the sides of the face as far forwards as the nasal region where, no doubt, it assists in the twitching movements of the skin about the nose. In the mid-anterior region of the neck it becomes quite thick, especially in the line of integument which supports upon its outer aspect the elongated hair there found in this animal. Its fibres become very pale as they spread out over the dorsal aspect of the neck, and the entire muscle is lost and fades away as we pass to the region of the shoulders and upper thoracic area. 230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The panniculus carnosus, or that great muscular envelope the function of which is to act upon the integuments of the entire trunk, is here but moderately displayed. I dare say, though, that in the adult reindeer this interesting muscle will be found fully as well developed as it has been described by several anatomists of the horse, and by others in the Felide. In this fcetus it is best marked where it is intimately attached to the lateral integuments of the thorax and abdomen, and over the abdomen itself. In the median line from a short distance in front of the umbilicus to a point well upon the sternum, it arises from a thin fascia more or less intimately connected with the skin by its outer surface, and to the external oblique by its inner. Posterior to this, the fibres are in the skin, and radiate from the periphery of a circle surround- ing, but lying without, the umbilicus. The posterior border of the muscle is thick and extends toward the thigh, while for the rest, the fibres spread out, closely connected with the skin, over the sides of the lower thoracic region and the abdomen, and the lateral aspects of the thigh. It does not seem to meet, in this young subject, the fellow of the opposite side along the dorsum. But from its rounded carneous margin, the fibres appear to merge into a del- icate fascia, which extends over this region and down the sides of the thigh. In the integuments overlying the sacral area, however, the carneous fibres appear again, and can be faintly traced as far as the root of the tail. Chauveau in describing the panniculus carnosus of the horse, says: “This muscle has, besides, a very remarkable insertion into the humerus, which was noticed by G. Cuvier in his ‘ Lecons d’ Anatomie comparée,’ and which appears to have been omitted, at least so far as Solipeds are concerned, in every treatise on veterinary anatomy. The following is what we have often observed in this respect: On reaching the posterior border of the ulnar mass of muscles, the panniculus divides into two superposed layers; one, superficial, is carried to the muscles of the anterior member; the other, deep, soon terminates by an aponeurosis which is united to the great pectoral muscle, and is bordered at its upper margin by a nacreous aponeurotic band, which penetrates between the thors and the muscles of the arm to be fixed to the smail trochanter.” 1 CHAUVEAU, A. The Comparative Anat. of the Domesticated Animals, 2nd Ed. 1884, N. Y.; trans. and ed. by G. Fleming, p. 187. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231 A very similar arrangement I find to exist in this foetal reindeer, but its seems to me that the dermal system can only claim that layer which is here confined to the skin, and which by its fascial extensions it has the power of twitching over the anterior and upper part of the chest and on the fore-limb. Intimately connected with this, and with the great pectoral over which it lies, is, to be sure, another layer that here seems to be entitled to rank with the more important muscles of the front of the chest. It arises from the fascia over the median line of the sternum, and is closely connected with the skin above, which covers it. We find its inser- tion, however, not upon the small trochanter, but upon the shaft of the humerus, at the interno-anterior aspect of the summit of its distal third, above the internal condyle. Before arriving at the point of insertion, the fibres of the muscle converge to form a flattened fasciculus, which passes down between the muscles of the arm. Un- doubtedly by its contraction this muscle can, in connection with the true dermal layer alluded to above, and with whieh it is associated, act upon the skin of these parts, but I am strongly inclined to believe that it represents one of the pectoral muscles as they have been described in the cat. Mivart in his anatomy of this animal, divides the pectoralis into five portions, and of the insertion of the second portion he says, “ It is inserted into the outer side of the deltoid ridge of the humerus, and extends down (between the biceps and brachialis anticus) to the summit of the lowest third of the humerus.” In this reindeer the outer margin of this muscle for its proximal two-thirds is attached to the fascia dividing the muscles at the inner side of the brachium. It is very evident that in the adult this muscle will act power- fully both on the humerus and the anterior chest walls, while, when the animal stands at rest, the action of its more superficial fibres can be made to agitate the integuments of the parts. Be this as it may, I will not enter upon a second description of the muscle here, though I think strictly speaking it should be regarded as an auxiliary pectoral, and not as one of the dermal system proper. Of Certain Muscles of the Head—Considering the tender age of the subject before us, the musculature of the ear, eye, mouth, and face is very well developed. 1 MivarT ST. GEORGE, F. R. S. The Cat, New York, 1881, page 145. This work I find to be an exceedingly useful one to those engaged upon dissections of the Mammalia, 232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The myrtiformis muscle seems to be unsually large, and of an irregular quadrilateral form. It arises from the side of the nostril, and being firmly connected with the skin, its fibres descend down- ward and backward to be lost in the dense tissues of the upper lip. The orbicularis oris is, as a sphincter of the mouth or lips, a very feebly developed muscle here, and great care is required, to trace its delicate fibres in the tissues where they lie hidden. The Jevator labii superioris aleque nasi on the other hand is perhaps the most conspicuously developed of all the facial muscles in this young deer. It arises from the malar and superior maxillary bones, and its fibres forming a strong flat muscle, pass directly for- ~wards, closely connected with the integument, and above the alveolar process of the upper jaw, to become blended with the fibres of the orbicularis oris in the upper lip, and are lost upon the ala of the nostril. The orbicularis palpebrarum is also pronounced, but presents us with nothing peculiar, or any marked departure from that muscle as we find it among the deer generally. I have, however, failed to make out satisfactorily an oceupito-froutalis, a levator anguli oris, a pyramidalis, and a number of other less important muscles of the face. In the adult, where through use they had become more clearly defined, no doubt a number of them could be traced, and I see that Professor Mivart has worked them out in an admirable manner in the cat, but they need not further concern us here. The musculature of the eye and ear, is, considering the age of the specimen, very completely advanced, and I suspect strongly developed in the case of the tormer structure in adult life. The Attolentes auriculum are a handsomely developed pair of muscles that nearly meet each other on the median line of the skull between the external ears. By their action these appendages of the organ of hearing may be powerfully drawn toward each other. A strong zygomato-auricularis is also seen as we remove the integuments of the head. It arises from the zygoma, and passing backwards and upwards is inserted upon the outer aspect of the pinna. Other representations of the group of muscles that control the varied movements of the external ear are easily traced, and in most cases well defined. A buccinator can be made out as we trace its delicate fibres in the sides of the lips, and as far back as the alveolar processes of the jaws extend. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233 As usual in mammals, the masseter is divided in two layers, the fibres of the outer one passing obliquely backwards, while those of the deep portion being more or less vertical. The muscle arises from the zygoma for its infero-anterior portion, and from the malar bone. Passing down in a way already indicated, they become inserted into the outer aspect of the ascending ramus of the lower jaw, completely filling the concavity there existing. A temporal muscle is no larger, if as large, as the masseter. Either one fills the shallow temporal fossa at the side of the skull, and measuring the distance between their nearest points to each other, over the vault of the skull, with a flexible tape measure, I find them to be separated by an interval of seven centimetres. The tendon of a temporal is inserted as usual into the coronoid process of the mandible, entirely upon its mesial side. The pterygoids are well-developed muscles, but present nothing worthy of especial note in these fetal specimens of our reindeer. 16 234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. NOTICE OF SOME ENTOZOA. BY PROF, JOSEPH LEIDY. Distoma crassum Busk. Cobbold: Proce. Linn. Soc., 1860, vol. V, p. 5. Mr. Busk, an English surgeon, in 1843 announced the occurrence, in the intestine of a Lascar or Hindoo seaman who died in London, of a large species of Fluke for which he suggested the name of Dis- toma crassum. Fourteen specimens obtained ranged from 4 to 6 em. long by 1:7 to 2 em. broad. The same parasite has since been reported as occurring in Chinese and in Europeans living in China.’ In our Proceedings for 1873, p. 864, I gave notice of a specimen from a Chinese boy, which I then supposed to be a larger individ- ual than usual of the more common D. hepaticum. On several occasions I have had the opportunity of examining some large Flukes from the liver of our Deer, Cervus Virginianus, and the Domestic Ox, which appear to be identical with the D. crassum. The specimens preserved in alcohol, and submitted to me, are as follow: Six individuals, obtained from the liver of a Doe, in the Adirondack Mts. of New York, by Dr. R. A. F. Penrose. These range from 5 to 6 em, long by 1°5 to 2°5 em. broad, and 1°5 to 2°5 mm. thick. Three individuals from the liver of a Calf, at Hot Springs, Ark., obtained by Dr. G. W. Lawrence. The specimens much contracted and hardened by strong alcohol, measure 3°5 cm. long by 2 to 2-4 em. broad. An imperfect one is from 3 to 4 mm. thick at the broken border; white for half the thickness dorsally and black ventrally. Two individuals recently received from Texas, from Dr. M. Fran- cis, Veterinary Surgeon, who writes that the monster Flukes occur there in cattle in limited number, “in the liver-tissue and not in the bile-ducts like the Distoma hepaticum. The specimens measure 3°5 and 4 em. long by 2 and 2°5 cm. broad. The Flukes from all three hosts accord in character except size, and in many points appear closely related with the D. hepaticum. They are elliptical in outline and of greater proportionate breadth than in the latter. The oral pole is conical but not abruptly pro- longed as in that species. The caudal pole is broadly rounded and 1 Cobbold, Parasites, 1879, 21. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235 entire or medially slightly emarginate. The dorsal surface is con- vex, smooth and cream-colored ; the ventral surface flat or slightly concave, minutely granulate or brownish margined with black, due to the vitelline organs shining through. The oral and ventral acet- abula are from 4 to 5 mm. apart; the former oral about 1:5 mm. wide ; the latter slightly larger. Genital aperture midway between the acetabula. Penis in some individuals exserted as a short tort- uous papilla. The sides of the body, extending from near the head to the tail, occupied by intensely black dendritic vitelline organs. The body is less tenacious than in D. hepaticum, is soft and easily broken. Accompanying the monster Flukes from Texas, were eighteen specimens of the ordinary Liver-Fluke, Distoma hepaticum, up to 3°) cm. long by 9 mm. broad, which Dr. Francis observes are very destructive to Cattle and Sheep in some parts of Texas. The facts related of the recent occurrence of the large Fluke in the Deer and Ox, in different portions of the United States, would impress one with the idea that the parasite is common with us, but in view of its conspicuous character and its not having been previously noticed such is probably not the case. May there be any relation between the occurrence of the parasite in this country and the influx of a Chinese population? The facts seem curiously coincidental with the first discovery of Trichina in man in England and its sub- sequent discovery in the hog in this country. The Guinea-worm is believed to have been introduced into tropical America with the Negro from Africa. Sclerostomum armatum Rudolphi, var. major Diesing: Syst. Helm. IT, 304, Dr. Edward Landis recently submitted to my examination three worms found coiled in as many thick-walled cysts, in the lung of a Horse. These appear to me to be the larger variety of the Scleros- tomum armatum, usually found occupying the intestines of the same animal, The specimens, all females, are from 25 to 30 mm. long by 1-5 mm. thick at the fore part. The body is robust, cylindrical, more tapering behind, brownish-red, annularly striate; head dome- like, defined by an annular stria; mouth large, surrounded by a prominent annular lip marked by eight radii; tail short, conical, obtuse. 236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Ascaris anoura Dujardin: Hist. Nat. des Helminthes, 1845, 221. Leidy: Proce. ALIN. UISD0, D1. Ascaris attenuata Molin: Prod. faunae helminth. venetae, 1860, 282. Ascaris rubicunda Schnyder: Monog. T. Nematodon, 1866, 42., From the stomach of a Python, P. molurus, which recently died in our Zoological Garden, Dr. John L. Hatch obtained a large mass of translucent red and green worms, which were submitted to my examination. These appear to be the Ascaris anoura of Dujardin, subsequently described under other names by Molin and Schnyder. The worms for the most part penetrated the recesses of three larger tumefactions of the mucous membrane of the stomach. The greater number of the worms were immature, translucent, of a blood-red color, with a darker intestine shining through, and ranging from 6 to 7 em. long by about 0°6 mm. thick. The mature females ranged from 10 to 20 em. long by 1°5 to 2°5 mm. thick. The males ranged from 7 to 16 em. long by 0°875 to 2 mm. thick. The body of the worms was most narrowed in advance, from pale red to nearly colorless in the largest and deeper to blood red in the smaller ones; with the intestine shining through of variable pea green to greenish-brown and dark brown in the latter, and with the tortuous ovaries and testes milk white. Cephalic extremity lighter colored, strongly tapering and with distinctly trilobate mouth. Tail very short, conical, the length about equal the breadth at base. The male of more slender proportions, with the caudal end incurved and the tail more pointed, with a row on each side of ten preanal papillee, one on each side of the anus and two rows of two on each side of the tail. Spicules of the penis long, linear, curved and equal. Pharynx long, cylindrical clavate; rectum very short. Worms closely agreeing with those of the Python I have observed from two of our common snakes, the Hog-nose Snake, Heterodon platyrhinus, and the other, from the accompanying description, supposed to be the Milk-snake, Ophibolus triangulus. A portion of the stomach of the latter, preserved with the worms, show them to have the same habits as those of the Python; partially occupy- ing the recesses of a tumefaction of the mucous membrane. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237 NOTE ON MESOZOIC MAMMALIA. BY O. C. MARSH. I have recently received from Prof. H. F. Osborn a pamphlet entitled “ A Review of the Cretaceous Mammalia,” which is intended as a criticism on two of my papers, and is the latest addition to his publications on Mesozoic mammals. This review contains no new facts, and is mainly an application of the author’s theories, which may in part prove to be true, but at present are without substantial basis. To attempt to refute all the assumptions he makes would involve a long discussion of known Mesozoic mammals, and take time from more important work. Ss) Viol TVi-Pl. Axaxcviit, fig? 12. = be es O. zebra W. G. B. & T. Bld., Land and densis. Fresh-water shells of N. A. vol. I, p. 216, figs. 370, 371. 318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (soe. O. undatus W. G. B., Manual of N. A. Land shells, p. 440, fig. 483. Family STENOGYRID& Fischer. Genus RUMINA Risso, 1826, Rumina (Subulina) trochlea Pfr. Abundant at Izamal, Yucatan (61496). It is certainly only a variety of S. octona. Rumina (Opeas) Caracasensis Rve. Hills around Orizaba ; and at Vera Cruz. Family SUCCINEIDZ. Genus SUCCINEA Drap. Succinea luteola Gould, Progreso, Yucatan (61495). Succinea sp. : A slender species, quite fragile and light brown in color, was col- lected at Santa Ana, near Calcehtok, Yucatan. (61546.) Succinea sp. San Juan, near Vera Cruz (61548). A single poor specimen. Succinea campestris Say. Specimens which I am unable to separate from this species were collected at Lake Texcoco, near the City of Mexico. (61541.) Family AURICULIDA. Genus CARYCHIUM Mill. Carychium exiguum var, Mexicanum Pilsbry, n. var. (pl. XIV, figs. 7, 8, 9). The Nautilus, iv (i1), May, 1891. Shell minute, cylindrical, tapering above to an obtuse apex; waxen whitish, somewhat translucent ; whorls 42, convex, separated by rather deep sutures. Aperture one-third the length of the shell, rather oblique ; outer lip expanded, thin above, suddenly becoming very much thickened on its outer portion by a heavy deposit of callus upon its face and inner edge; columellar margin having an obtuse projection (scarcely a tooth) below, and an acute entering fold above. Surface having very delicate oblique striz of growth. Alt. 1°8, diam. *8 mm. Hills around Orizaba, at an altitude of about 500 feet above the town. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319 In The Nautilus for 1891, vol. IV, p. 109, I gave a brief notice of the forms cf Carychium found within the United States. In my study of the Mexican specimens I was obliged to go over the whole subject anew, and to examine very extensive suites of American spec- imens. In the present condition of our knowledge, so far as the collections examined permit me to see, three species may be distin- guished and two varieties; viz. C. exiguum, C. exiguum var. Mex- icanum, C. exile, C. exile var. Jamaicensis, and C. occidentalis. Only the collection of specimens from points geographically inter- mediate between the extremes of the range of this genus, and the examination of such material by a competent person, can finally decide the question of the number of naturally defined species, and which, it any of them, must be considered geographic races or sub- species. Carychium exiguum Say. (PI. XIV, figs. 1, 2,3; pl. XV, fig. 16.) Shell cylindrical, the last two whorls of about equal diameter. Whorls 43. Aperture decidedly over one-third the total altitude. Outer lip sinuous, moderately thickened, very strongly arcuate at its upper outer portion. This is the common East American form, ranging from Maine southward and westward, the limits of its range not exactly deter- mined as yet. Carychium exiguum var. Mexicanum Pilsbry (Pl. XIV, figs. 7, 8, 9.) Shell cylindrical. Whorls 45. Aperture equal to, or a trifle ex- ceeding one-third the total altitude of shell. Outer lip thickened at and below the middle by a very heavy deposit of callus upon its face. Lower fold of the columella sub-obsolete. Surface delicately striated. Orizaba, Mexico. Carychium occidentalis Pilsbry. (PI. XIV, figs. 4, 5, 6.) Shell distinctly conical, tapering. Whorls 5. Aperture very oblique, larger than in C. exiguum, the outer lip flatly expanded, thin, not at all thickened on its face. Portland, Oregon, is the only locality from which I have seen this species. Carychium exile H. C. Lea. (PI. XLV, figs. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14.) Shell elongated. Whorls 5-53. Aperture small, very oblique, about one-third the length of the shell. Outer lip more or less thick- ened. Surface closely, regularly and very distinctly striated. 320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Eastern Pennsylvania (H. C. Lea) ; Kent, Ohio (Geo. W. Dean.) Lea found this form on the Wissahickon Creek, near Philadel- phia, but I have not been able to rediscover it there. Carychium exile var. Jamaicensis Pilsbry ;Pl. XIV, figs. 15, 16.) Much elongated, similar to C. exile, but the surface smooth, not perceptibly striated. Jamaica (Robert Swift collection). Genus MELAMPUS Monttf. Melampus coffea L. Progreso and Silam (61470), Yucatan. Melampus coffea var. microspira Pilsbry n. var. Distinctly shouldered, spire extremely short, the earlier whorls very closely coiled, the last whorl becoming wide ; color uniform pinkish- olive. Alt. 13 mm., diam 83 mm., length of aperture 12 mm. Progreso, Yucatan (61471). Family LIMN AIDA. Genus LIMNZA Lam. Limnza attenuata Say, Lake Chaleo, Mexico (61483). This common form bears the same relation to our northern ZL. reflexa, that Planorbis tenuis bears to Pl. trivolvis. Limneza Cubensis Pfr. Rather small specimens of this were collected in the stream at Orizaba (61482 and 61481). They vary much in the degree of exsertion of the spire. A few notes on the synonymy of this and allied species may not be out of place here. The LZ. umbilicata C. B. Ad. is completely synonymous with L. Cub- ensis. Havana specimens of the latter are absolutely indistinguish- able from the Vermont J. wmbilicata in our collection, received from Professor Adams himself. LL. Cubensis (+-umbilicata) is perfectly distinct from LZ. caperata Say, and from LZ. humilis Say, with both of which it has been confused by some authors. The typical Cubensis ranges at least as far west as the Mississippi River, and eastern Texas. West and southwest of this it gives place to L. techella Hald., and L. bulimoides Lea. The last form may be considered a geographic race or subspecies of the Cubensis. L. techella Hald. is nearly identical with wmbilicata. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321 The synonymy and range of the forms mentioned may be summarized as follows: L. Cubensis Pfr. Syn.: L. umbilicata C, B. Ad.; L techella Hald. Habitat : New England to Cuba; westward to St. Louis, Missouri, southwest to Texas and Province of Vera Cruz, Mexico. L. Cubensis var. bulimoides Lea. : Habitat: Western U.S., east to Dakota, Central Nebraska (at Ogallala, coll. by Simpson), and Western Texas. The European ZL. truncatula Miill. is scarcely separable from Cubensis in conchological characters. I have retained the European and American forms separate because their areas of distribution are now so distinct that interbreeding can no longer occur. The L. humilis Say is likely to be confused with small examples of LZ. Cubensis, but it differs in having the expansion of the columella much narrower and of a wholly different form. Say’s types of L. humilis are before me. Genus ANCYLUS Geoff. Ancylus excentricus Morelet. Shkolak, Yucatan (61787). I may mention here that Ancylus excentricus Morelet has been collected in Comal Creek at New Braunfels, Texas, and therefore may be expected throughout Eastern Mexico. The same is true of Planor bis cultratus Orb., which I have also received from Southern Texas. Genus PLANORBIS!? Guettard. Planorbis tenuis Phil. An abundant species in the vicinity of the City of Mexico (61607 ; 61780; 61781; 61625). The form called var. Boucardi by Crosse & Fischer intergrades perfectly with the typical tenwis in Lake Chalco. In Lake Patz- cuaro a form was collected which is referable to P. tenuis v. Bou- cardi, but in which the characters of that variety are considerably exaggerated. One of these (No. 61625 ofthe collection) is figured 1 Planorbis glabratus Say has not been found in Mexico; nor does it range in the United States, outside of the peninsula of Florida. The ?. g/abratus of authors is not the true g/abratus of Say. 322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891.. on pl. XV, fig. 4. See, in this connection, the remarks under Physa Patzcuarensis. Planorbis Caribeus Orb. Shkolak, Yucatan (61778). The specimens correspond in every detail with Havana examples of P. Caribeus received from Arango. Planorbis tumidus Ptr. Vera Cruz (61775; 61591); Orizaba (61779). Planorbis Maya Morelet. Merida, Yucatan (61538; 61529). These are larger than indi- cated by MM. Crosse & Fischer, measuring, alt. 27, diam. maj. 113, diam. min. 9 mm. Planorbis orbiculus Morelet (1849). (Syn. PP. Haldemani Dir., 1850, not C. B, Ad. 1849.) San Juan, near Vera Cruz (61593). Planorbis Liebmanni Dkr. Vera Cruz. A form closely allied to the preceding, but smaller, with the last whorl wider. I regard the identification as undoubtedly correct. This species occurs in Texas also, as far north as Austin. Planorbis retusus Morelet? Specimens probably referable to this species were collected at Shkolak, Yucatan (61777). Planorbis parvus Say. Specimens in every respect typical were collected at Yautepec, Mexico (61592). : Genus PLANORBULA Hald. Planorbula obstructa Morelet. Ticul, Yucatan (61589). This species occurs abundantly in Texas as far north as Austin. Family PHYSIDA& Dall. Genus PHYSA Drap. The Mexican Phys have been referred by MM. Crosse & Fischer to six species, as follows: Mexicana Phil., Boucardi C. & F., Strebeli C. & F., Berendti Dkr.. squalida Morelet and Tehuantepecensis C. & F. Of these names, Boucardi is a synonym of osculans 1591.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323 (= Mexicana, vid. infra); Strebeli, Berendti and Tehuantepecensis are very closely allied to squalida, being perhaps only local forms. A critical review of the Phys of the United States' causes me to recognize in that area eleven species and about the same number of local forms or geographic races susceptible of diagnosis.’ Most Mexican specimens of Physa differ from those of the East- ern United States in lacking a thickening or rib within the lip- margin in the adult state. This is probably due to the far less amount of difference between the seasons, and the consequent lack of periodicity of growth in the shells. This peculiarity extends, as might be expected, to the Californian species ; but in some arid local- ities, zestivation during the season of excessive drought produces practically the same shell-structure as that caused by the winter hybernation of our Northern Physe. Physa osculans Hald. Lake Chaleo, City of Mexico (61627); City of Mexico (61584 and 61586) ; Lake Texcoco (61585) ; Between San Angel and Coyoa- can, south of the City of Mexico (61587); Yautepec (61788 and 61526). An examination of Haldeman’s types of Physa osculans (Monog. Limniades, pl. 2, figs. 11, 12), renders it certain that the Physa Mexicana of Philippi is synonymous. The fig. 13 of Haldeman’s plate is a different species, as the author of the Monog. Limniades himself supposed. The Physa Boucardi of Crosse and Fischer is likewise a mere form (not a variety) of osculans, the alleged differ- ences having no specific or varietal weight, whatever, in this genus. Physa osculans is readily distinguishable from the eastern forms P. hetrostropha, integra and gyrina ; but several described Californian Physas present no differences from the Mexican species, and must be considered synonyms. Physa osculans var. Patzcuarensis Pilsbry, n. var. (PI. XV, fig. 5.) Shell thin, light, obconic, very broad across the upper part of the body-whorl, narrow below ; spire short, small, acute, composed of four rapidly enlarging whorls, the first one black. Columella long, vertical, slightly sinuous; lip strongly arcuate above, thin; color light-brown or whitish; surface shining, wholly lacking spiral lines, 1 See Shells of Forest and Stream, a handbook of Northern United States land and fresh-water shell<, now in preparation. 2 During the course of my studies of U.S. Piysa I have examined type spec- imens of almost every one of the described species, nearly fifty in number. 324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF sot obscurely and finely longitudinally plicated. There are no variceal thickenings, no internal lip-rib, and the surface is nowhere mal- leated. Alt. 15, diam. 11; alt. of apert. 123, greatest width 64 mm. Pp g Lake Patzecuaro, Mexico (61629). Animals of the same suite in aleohol. This shell resembles the more extreme forms of Physa ancillaria Say (known as Ph. Lordi Bd. and Ph. Parkeri Cur.) ; and it perhaps bears the same relation to Ph. oseu/ans Hald. that Ph. ancillaria v. Lordi bears toward Ph. heterostropha. The relation of my new form to the boreal American types named is, however, only one of analogy; for the Lordi is demonstrably an extreme development of the heterostropha type, while my Mexican shells belong to the group of Ph. osculans, being in my opinion a geographic race of that species. The cause of the dilation of the body-whorl in these shouldered Physas has not been explained. I would suggest that the form in these cases is correlated with an increase in the capacity of the air sack or lung, which occupies that part of the shell. Observation of tlhe habits of the snail would probably reveal the reason for this additional lung capacity. It is not unlikely the result of a more con- tinous or prolonged subaquatic residence. Precisely the same modi- fication is found in the Planorbis before me from this same Mexican lake (Patzcuaro), evidently induced by the action of the same causes. Physa squalida Morelet. Orizaba (61530; 61583; 61598; 61581); Vera Cruz (61582). A very abundant species at Orizaba. This is the Mexican rep- resentative of the Physa integra of Haldeman, a species usually confounded in the United States with P. heterostropha Say. I have compared the Orizaba specimens with squalida received from Morelet. This species frequently exhibits variceal thickenings (indicating former peristomes), like its Northern ally P. integra. In this respect it difters from Ph. oseulans. The more lengthened forms of Ph. squalida resemble somewhat Ph. pomilia Conrad. Genus APLEXA Flem. The number of Mexican species of this genus has been about fifty per cent over-estimated by Crosse and Fischer. This opinion is 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325 founded on an examination of many specimens, and I express it with all due respect to the authors named. They seem to have overlooked the description and figure of Physa (—Aplexa) princeps Phillips, described from Yucatan, in the Pro- ceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, IT, p- 66, pl. 1, fig. 11 (May, 1846). The figure is very good. Aplexa cisternina Morelet. Izamal (61601), Tekanto (61599), Shkolak (61770) and Merida (61524), Yucatan. Aplexa nitens Phil. Vera Cruz; San Juan, near Vera Cruz (61771). Aplexa nitens var. spiculata Morel. Merida, Yucatan (61600). Aplexa sp. Shkolak (61772, 61773). Forms I have been unable to identify. Family CYCLOPHORIDE. Genus CYCLOTUS Guilding. Cyclotus Dysoni Pfr. One of the most abundant land shells of northern Yucatan. It was collected at Silam (61458; 61461), Shkolak (61459), Tekanto (61452), Labna (61455), Tunkas (61452), Ticul (61460), Sitilpech (61402), Tabi (61463), and between Sitilpech and Tunkas (61457). The specimens from Tabi, Ticul and some other localities are prettily varied by numerous dark spiral lines and bands ; these may be named form multilineatus. Many specimens have the costulze of the surface simple, not all undulating, not anastomosing. Cyclophorus (Cyrtotoma)—? Two broken specimens of a species apparently new, were collected at Orizaba (61486). Family AMPULLARIID/A. Genus AMPULLARIA Lam. Ampullaria flagellata Say. My examination of Say’s type of this species proves that A. ma/- leata Jonas is a synonym. The specimen, now before me, upon which Say founded his species, is a dead shell, lacking the epidermis ; it is moderately but not conspicuously malleated, and on the latter 326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [189T. part of the body-whorl obscurely plicated in the direction of the lip-edge. It is multifasciate with brown. The species is excessively abundant in the environs of Vera Cruz (whence Say vrocured it). It varies widely in respect to sculpture and color, but the numerous Vera Cruz specimens before me are rather constant in size, agreeing inthe main with Say’s type, which measures as follows :— Alt. 38 mm.; diam. 35 mm.; greatest length of mouth 32 mm.; width of mouth (measured at a right angle to its length) 212 mm. The aperture of this specimen is expanded,—a variation not uncom- mon in the series before me from Vera Cruz. (No’s. 61447, 61446, 61448, Acad. Coll.) The illustrations given by Crosse & Fischer on pl. 44, figs. 6, 6a, 6b, 6c, 6d and 6e, of the Expéd. Scientifique du Mex., represent the species as found around Vera Cruz, but smoother forms are also abundant, and spiral dark bands are visible on most specimens. Ampullaria sp. San Juan, near Vera Cruz (61450). Ampullaria Yucatanensis Crosse & Fischer. “Twin cenotas,”’ Shkolak, Yucatan (61456). ) Family VALVATIDE. Genus VALVATA Miill. Of this genus six species are found on the mainland of North America. Valvata humeralis Say. Lakes around the City of Mexico (61484). Lake Patzcuaro, West Mexico (61444). The specimens from the last locality I at first regarded as a dis- tinct species; but making due allowance for the modification under- gone by all species of snails found in this lake, I am disposed to con- sider it a variety of humeralis. Compared with Say’s type specimen of the latter, the L. Patzcuaro shells have the whorls more rapidly increasing, the last whorl being notably of greater diameter than, the corresponding volution of humeralis ; the umbilicus is narrower, the subsutural flattening, so obvious in Say’s shell, is not at all con- spicuous. The obtuse basal carina isasin thetype. No good figure of humeralis has-been published, that given by Strebel having the spire too much raised ; it is rather obtuse in the shells beture me 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327 from the City of Mexico, as well as in Say’s type; the exact locality of the latter is not given on the label, which is in the fine hand-writ- ing of Mrs. Say, like many of Say’s labelled types. Results of great importance to biology might be derived from a study of the conditions of life in Lake Patzcuaro; the shells of various genera seem to be modified in such derinite directions that the problem of the origin of certain forms would probably be pre- sented to the observer in comparatively simple terms. It is un- fortunate that although some hundreds of shells of various species were collected there by Prof. Heilprin and Mr. Baker, their limited time did not permit them to gather information on the physical char- -acteristics of the lake. Family AMNICOLIDAs Tryon. Genus POTAMOPYRGUS Stimpson, This genus of spinose rissoids is represented throughout Central America and the West Indies by numerous forms; also extending into Northern South America, and to the northward ranging as far as Comal County, Texas. The species are excessively polymorphic, and their number can only be ascertained after a great number of specimens have been examined. As arule, without exception, every species (or variety, whichever the forms prove to be) is dimorphic; there is a spinose, angulate form, and an acuminate, ecarinate one. Generally both are found in the same locality. This curious dimorphism has caused at least two names to be applied to every species or form. Thus, Paludina erystallina Pfr. is the ecarinate form of P. coronata Pfr.; Hydrobia Texana Pilsbry bears a like relation to P. spinosa Call & Pilsbry, ete., etc. Potamopyrgus is a genus of great antiquity, extending at least as far back as the early eocene. It now comprises all of the fresh- water rissoids of New Zealand, a majority of those of Australia, with species in west Africa and tropical America. As a contribution to the life-history of these interesting little snails, | may mention that the form discovered by me in Texas, P. (coronatus var ?) spinosus C. & P., is viviparous. The young are globular, translucent, having a little over one whor! at birth. 1 As a sectional term under Amnicola I would propose the name CINCIN- NATIA for A. Cincinnatiensis, founding the distinction upon its more minute :radula and the far finer denticulation of the teeth. 328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. As to the number of naturally defined Neotropical species Iam in doubt; but the examination of ny material (including as many as a pint of the shells of some species) causes me to believe that there are about four or five, although this may possibly be either over or under estimated. I do not undertake here a revision of them for the reason that Crosse and Fischer have already reached the Hydro- biide in the progress of their magnificent work. Ancey’s Pyrgophorus (Bull. Soc. Mal. Fr. v, p. 188, 192, 1888) is a synonym of Potamopyrgus. Curiously enough, Mr. Ancey does not seem to be aware that any spinose rissoids had been described from America! He proposes the name P. coronatus (de novo, not. of Pfei#er), for the form found at Vera Cruz, which Strebel calls P. coronatus Pfeiffer. This form is doubtless the same as my P. spin- osus from Texas, but it is doubtfully distinct from the species as found further South. Potamopyrgus coronatus Pfr. Var. Highly sculptured forms, probably referable to this species were collected at Shkolak (61595), Merida (61597) and between Sitilpech and Tunkas (61576), in Yucatan. Potamopyrgus Bakeri Pilsbry, n. sp. (pl. XV, figs. 9, 10, 11.) P. Bakeri Pilsbry, The Nautilus iv, May, 1891. Shell slender, elongated, tapering, the altitude more than twice the diameter. Whorls 52, very convex, separated by deeply impressed sutures; apex somewhat obtuse. Aperture small, ovate, its length contained more than three times in the length of the shell ; peristome continuous, thin. Umbilicus a closed rimation behind the inner lip. Surface marked by delicate growth-lines, having low, inconspicuous longitudinal folds (sometimes quite regular and well marked on the upper whorls), and encircled by numerous fine, subobsolete spiral strie. Alt. 4, diam. 1:9 mm. Dug from the bank of a stream east of Yautepec, Mexico. (61578). The specimens being subfossil are denuded of the epidermis and white in color. They are in sculpture not unlike some feebly sculptured forms of that truly protean species Tryonia protea Gld., but are readily distinguishable from that type specifically, and even, as I believe, generically ; for the present species seems to me to bean aspinose form of Potamopyrgus, differing from all other known species and forms of that genus in its much more slender, narrow 1891. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329 contour. I have given the name in recognition of the services of Mr. F. C. Baker, who collected the specimens. Genus PYRGULOPSIS Call & Pilsbry. Proc. Davenport Acad. Nat. Sci. vol. v, p. 9, May, 1886. This genus was proposed for a number of small shells which agree in being ovate-conical or turreted, the whorls having a single strong carina at the periphery, which may or may not be concealed on the spire. The apex is acute. There are 43 to 6 whorls. Aperture ovate, peristome continuous. Axis imperforate. The dentition is figured in the place cited above. The genus has nothing to do with Pyrgula, which belongs to a different subfamily (Batkaliine).' LIyrodus of Doring’ may prove more nearly related. It has been suggested to me that the finding of carinate forms of P. Nevadensis proves that the carinate forms are distorted by the influ- ence of the concentrated waters of the lakes inhabited by the species ; but would any malacologist seriously advocate the view that the smooth spineless forms of Potamopyrgus hold a like relation to the spinose, carinate types? or that the two Mississippi Valley species of Pyrgulopsis (found in company with perfectly normal specimens of Amnicola, Bythinella, etc.) owe their carinate contours to the same cause ? Besides the original illustrated monograph of this genus by Pro- fessor Call and myself in the Proceedings of the Davenport Academy of Natural Sciences for 1886,* there has been an “ Etude monogra- phique du genre Pyrgulopsis” (Bull. Soc. Mal. France, v, p. 185) written by Mr. C. F. Ancey. This paper shows in a high degree the futility of writing about things an author knows nothing about. The species of this genus are as follows :-— P. Nevadensis Stearns. Pyrgula Nevadensis Stearns, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 178, figure, (1883). —Call and Beecher, Am. Nat., Sept. 1884, Vol. XVIII., pp. 851-855.—Call, Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 1], 1884. Pyrgulopsis Nevadensis Call & Pilsbry, Proc. Dav. Acad. Nat. Sci. Vol. V, p. 10, 1886.-—Ancey, Bull: Soc. Mal. Fr. 1888, p. 189. This form has been found thus far only in northwestern Nevada, jn Walker and Pyramid Lakes. Entirely smooth forms, not dis- 1 Beecher is wholly in error in referring Pyrgu/a to the Melaniide ; a family distinguished from Amnicolide and Rissoide by the most obvious external char- acters, such, for instance, as the genitalia. 2 Daring, in Boletin de la Acad. Nac. de Cien. en Cordoba, vii, p. 461, 1885 3 In this paper, Potamopyrgus spinosus was considered a Pyrgulopsis. I had at that time not yet examined its dentition. See under Potamopyrgus. 330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. tinguishable from Amnicola have been found. The species is not closely allied to the two following, either of which it would be better to regard as the type of the genus. P. scalariformis Wolf. Pyrgula scalariformis Wolf, Amer. Journ. of Conch. vol. v. p. 198, pl. xvii, fig. 3, 1869. Pyrgulopsis scalariformis Call & Pilsbry, Proc. Dav. Acad. Nat. Sci., vol. v, p. 14, 1886.—Pilsbry, Shells of Forest and Stream, pl. 14, fig. 26.—Ancey, Bull. Soc. Mal. Fr. 1888, p. 190. For description and figures see Shells of Forest and Stream (Gn preparation). It has been found only at the original locality, “on the Tazewell shore of the Illinois River.” No living specimens have been taken. This species it would be best to regard as the type of Pyrgulopsis. P. Mississippiensis Call & Pilsbry. Pyrgula scalariformis var. Mississtppiensts Pilsbry, Amer. Naturalist, Jan. 1886; p- 79. Pyrgulopsis Mississippiensis Call & Pilsbry, Proc. Dav. Acad. Nat. Sci. vol. v, p. 13, 1886.—Ancey, Bull. Soc. Mal. France, 1888, p. 191.—Pilsbry, Shells of Forest and-Stream, pl. 14, figs. 28, 24, 25. Of this species I have examined very many specimens, dredged by myself in the Mississippi River, at and just below the mouth of Rock River, Illinois. It has characters constantly separating it from the scalariformis. Both are figured and described in my hand- book of northern U.S. mollusks, Shells of Forest and Stream. The following species is referred provisionally to Pyrgulopsis on account of its similarity in contour to the shells of that genus. In possessing fine spiral lines it resembles Potamopyrgus; and if it is found to have the very characteristic dental characters of the last named genus, and is viviparous, it must be transferred. Pyrgulopsis (?) Patzcuarensis Pilsbry n. sp. (Pl. XV, fig. 8). The Nautilus, May, 1891. Shell turrited-conic, elevated. Number of whorls unknown, the specimen being broken ; the remaining 33 whorls are strongly cari- nated in the middle, concave immediately above and below the keel ; the last whorl is obtusely shouldered midway between keel and suture, and the median carina becomes less conspicuous. The aper- ture is oval, not oblique; peristome continuous, its inner margin thickened. Umbilicus reduced to a narrow fissure. Color of epidermis olive ; surface marked by delicate growth lines and exces- sively fine close spiral striz. Alt. 5-2, diam. 3 mm.; Alt. of apert. 2, width 1°35 mm. Lake Patzcuaro, Mexico (61588). 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 331 This form is so distinct that I unhesitatingly describe it, although no perfect specimens were obtained. In general form the shell recalls the P. Nevadensis Stearns, de- scribed from Pyramid Lake, Nevada; but the encircling carina is less strong, the portion of the whorl above the keel is much more convex. The fine spiral sculpture of the Mexican shell also dis- tinguishes it. Genus COCHLIOPA Tryon. Cochliopa Tryoniana Pilsbry, (pl. XV, fig. 12 .) C. Tryoniana Pilsbry, The Nautilus iv, p. 52, September, 1890. Figures are here given of this species, which is the second of the genus described. It is from Polyon and Rio Fula, Nicaragua. A large number of specimens are before me. They vary greatly in form and sculpture. Sometimes the body-whorl is acutely carinated, and the surface encircled with numerous acute lirule, but on some specimens this sculpture is almost obsolete. Old Specimens become thick and solid, losing to a great extent, the spiral sculpture. The measurements of two specimens are as follows: Alt. 4, greater diam. 43, lesser 4 mill. Alt. 34, greater diam. 4, lesser 34 mill. Family CYCLOSTOMID 2. Genus CHONDROPOMA Ptr. Chondropoma (Cistula) Largillierti Pfr. An extremely abundant species in northern Yucatan. After examining several hundred specimens I find that a separation of the more coarsely ribbed forms from the finely decussated examples is not practicable, and I therefore agree with Dr. von Martens in uniting the Cistula Grateloupi to C. Largillierti. The apex is some- times retained perfect in adult specimens of this species, several of these anomalous individuals being before me. The exact localities are: Labna (61472), Santa Ana, near Cal- cehtok (61473), Silam (61416), Merida (61466), Tekanto (61468, 61467), Tunkas (61464), Uxmal (61463), between Sitilpech and Tunkas (61475), and at Tabi (61474). The polymorphism of this species is wonderful. Adult specimens vary in length from 174 to9 mm. The color varies from a clear yellowish-white with numerous rows of brown spots, to dark red. The shape also is subject to great mutations, isu) Co bo PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Family HELICINIDA. Genus HELICINA Lam. Helicina arenicola Morelet. A most abundant species in northern Yucatan. The published illustrations very inadequately represent this beautiful species, which is as variable in coloration as the H. orbiculata Say. Specimens were collected at Silam (61442), Ticul (61440), Labna (61438), Tabi (614387), Uxmal (61448), Tunkas (61456), Santa Ana near Caleehtok (61439), and between Sitilpech and Tunkas (61441). Helicina lirata Pfr. ; Numerous specimens taken at Labna, Yucatan (61479). Spec- imens were collected by Mr. C. T. Simpson at Utilla Island, off Honduras. Helicina fragilis Morelet. Specimens of a small, thin, greenish-horn colored turbinate species were collected at Orizaba (61478), and at Vera Cruz (61477). The columella is toothed exactly asin Strebel’s figures (referred by Martens to this species), but the color is not as described by Strebel. Helicina cinctella Shutt. Orizaba (61480). Helicina beatrix Angas. This species was not collected by the Expedition. From an ex- amination of Gabb’s specimens I am led to believe that von Mar- tens is in error in referring this species to H. flavida Mke. Adult specimens of H. beatriz measure alt. 10, diam. 9 mm., and differ as much from Guatemala specimens of H. flavida as most Helicinas do from one another—certainly enough for specific discrimination. The illustrious writer in the Biologia Centr. Amer. probably had not seen authentic specimens. Sub-genus SCHAZICHEILA Shutt. Schazicheila alata Mke. Orizaba (61485). Family PROSERPINIDA. Genus PROSERPINA Gray. Proserpina (Ceres) Salleana Cuming. Both the red and the buff forms were collected at Orizaba (61455 and 61454). 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399 APPENDIX A. During the few hours spent in Havana the following species were collected by Mr. Baker: Oleacina solidula Pfr. (61605). Stenogyra octona Ch. (61573). Patula vortex Pfr. (61604). Polygyra paludosa Ptr. Carocolus (Thelidomus) auricoma Fér., var. zeta Pfr. (61572.) Bulimulus sp. Limneza Cubensis Pfr. Vaginulus occidentalis Guild. The specimens were marked by a longitudinal row of angular black spots on each side of the middle, on most individuals coales- centfinto black stripes. Ampullaria conica Wood. (61574.) EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLATE XIV. Figs. 1,2. Carychium exiguum Say, typical. Drawn from speci- mens from Kent, Ohio, collected by Geo. W. Dean. 3. Carychium exiquum Say, showing umbilicus. Specimen from Vermont. 4,5, 6. Carycnium occidentalis Pilsbry. Portland, Oregon. ie 8, 9. Carychium Mexicanum Pilsbry. Orizaba, Mexico. 0, 11. Carychium exile H. C. Lea. Kent, Ohio. 12,13, 14. Carychium exile Lea. Specimen with thick peri- stome. 15,16. Carychium exile var. Jamaicense Pilsbry. Jamaica. (Swift Collection). Nore. The profile views are all drawn with the shell rolled to the left only enough to bring the plane of the inner and outer lips coin- cident with the line of vision. The figures of this plate are drawn to the same scale. PLATE Xv. Figs. 1, 2,3. Patula intonsa Pilsbry. Three views of type, spec- imen, highly magnified. 4. Planorbis tenuis Phil. var. Boucardi C. & F. Lake Patz- cuaro, W. Mexico. Natural size. 5. Physa osculans Hald, var. Patzcuarensis Pilsbry. Lake Patzeuaro. Natural size. 6,7. Oryzosoma Tabiensis Pilsbry. Magnified view of the type, with profile of aperture. Hacienda of Tabi, Yucatan. 8. Pyrgulopsis? Patzcuarensis Pilsbry. Magnified view of the type. Lake Patzcuaro, W. Mexico. 334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 9,10, 11. Potamopyrgus Bakeri Pilsbry. Three individuals, showing variation in contour. 12. Cochliopa Tryoniana Pilsbry. View of a highly sculp- tured form, enlarged. : 13,13a. Cylindrella Bourguignatiana Ancey. Utilla Island, off Honduras. Specimen collected by Chas. ‘T. Simpson. 14, 14a. Cylindrella spelunce var. dubia Pilsbry. 15, 15a. Cylindrella spelunee Pfr. Specimen from Ticul, Yucatan. 16. Carychium exiguum Say. Specimen broken to show the internal continuation of the columellar folds. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 300 JUNE 2. Mr. THomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Forty persons present. Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— “ A Memoir on the Genus Palzosyops Leidy, and its allies,” by Charles Earle. “New American Myxomycetes,” by Geo. A. Rex, M. D. Henry C. Chapman, M. D., was elected Curator to fill the vacancy caused by the death of Dr. Leidy. JUNE 9. Mr. Cuas. P. Perot in the chair. Thirty-three persons present. “A Memoir of Joseph Leidy, M. D., LL.D.,” by Henry C. Chapman, M. D., was presented for publication. JUNE 16. Mr. THomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Twenty persons present. JUNE 28. Mr. THomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Twenty-four persons present. A paper entitled “ Description of a new species of Vampyrops,” by Harrison Allen, M. D., was presented for publication. JUNE 380. Dr. Geo. H. Horn in the chair. Twenty-one persons present. On the Wings of Bats—Dr. Harrison ALLEN spoke of the man- ner in which the membranes of bats are sustained in the intervals 336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. between the several parts of the normal skeleton. The so called calcaneum is an accessory process to the tarsus and is designed to support the interfemoral membrane. Dr. Allen proposed to name this process the calcar. In Vesperugo noctula he had found a pro- cess passing down from the calcar, in the form ofa delicate rod, mid- way between the base and the free end. An accessory cartilage at the side of the tip of the fifth metacarpal bone, was next alluded to. It is apparently intended to give additional support to the mesopat- agium. It is absent in Pteropodidee, Megadermadidz and Phyllos- tomididee. In Nycteris the terminal segment to the caudal series is widely expanded and serves to support the margin of the interfemoral membrane. The fact that the preserving of these various minor adaptations is not universal, suggests the conclusion that the mechan- ism of the flight of the bats is not the same in all the forms, and that something of the same kind of differences that are known to exist in birds, could be detected if the facilities which are available in case of the latter, existed for their investigation. Wm. J. Serrill and B. Alexander Randall, M. D., were elected members. August Weismann of Freiburg, i. B. and Elias Metschnikoff of Dorpat, were elected correspondents. The following were ordered to be published :— 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. B37 ECHINODERMS FROM THE BAHAMA ISLANDS. BY J. E. IVES. In the years 1887 and 1888, Mr. Frederick Stearns of Detroit, made a collection of Invertebrates in the Bahama Islands, He col- lected upon Andros and other islands near Nassau. The following list represents the Echinoderms obtained by him. It includes a description of a new species of Amphiura. The accompanying plate has been prepared for publication through Mr. Stearns’ liberality. ECHINOIDEA. Cidaris tribuloides Lamarck. Numerous specimens collected. Echinometra subangularis Leske. Numerous specimens found in living sponges, in three fathoms of water, on the west side of Andros Island. Toxopneustes variegatus Lamarck. Hipponoe esculenta Leske. Numerous specimens collected. Echinanthus rosaceus Linnzeus. A single specimen collected. ASTEROIDEA. Astropecten articulatus Say. Pl. XVI, figs. 4-8. Asterias articulaia Siy, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. (1), vol. V, p. 141, 1825; Miiller und Troschel. System der Asteriden, p. 72, 1842; Dujardin et Hupé, Suites 4 Buffon, Echinodermes, p. 419, 1862; Liitken, Vidensk. Meddel. pp. 127-128, 1864; Perrier, Arch. Zool. Expér. t. 5, pp. 290-291, 1878, (pars.) A single specimen of this species was collected. Two such eminent authorities as Dr. Liitken and Professor Alexander Agassiz' have differed as to the identification of Say’s species. Professor Perrier in the “ Revision des Stellérides,” has given Professor Agassiz’s A. articulatus as synonymous with Dr. Liitken’s A. articulatus, but a comparison of Professor Agassiz’s figures with Dr. Liitken’s description, at once shows the difference between the two forms. Say’s description, in my opinion, would re- fer more precisely to the form described by Dr. Liitken, than to that described by Professor Agassiz. Say states that the species he 1 Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol. V, pp. 114-116, Pl. RIK: 338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. described “is very common on the coast of East Florida and on the sea Islands of Georgia.” My friend Mr. C. W. Johnson, who has collected for eight years at St. Augustine, on the east coast of Florida, informs me that the form described by Liitken is the only species of Astropecten which he has found in that region. There appears to me, therefore, to be very little doubt that this is the form originally described by Say. The species figured by Professor Agassiz as Astropecten articu- latus Say, I believe to be the Astropecten duplicatus of Gray.’ Prof. Perrier has included A. dubius Gray under the synonymy of A. articulatus, but this species is undoubtedly distinct from A. articulatus Say, as defined by Dr. Lititken, and is probably identical with A. duplicatus Gray. Below is given a translation of Dr. Liitken’s careful description of A. articulatus. In addition to this it may be said that in the living animal the upper side-arm-plates are orange-colored, the paxilla- area of the disk and arms purple, and the side-arm-spines purple. “ Of quite considerable size, (about 6 inches in diameter), with rather long and pointed arms. Proportion between the radii about as 1:4. Arm angles acute. Edge-plates about 50. In the middle of the arms the paxilla-belt is still twice as wide as the edge-plates ; the paxille, whose structure and arrangement are as usual on the disk, become larger and are composed of larger grains ; in the mid- dle of the disk they became again smaller and more delicate. The madreporic plate lies nearer to the edge-plates than to the middle of the disk. The upper edge plates are covered with grains, which become fine and bristle-like around the edges of the plates. On the outer half of the arm there may appear on each of these plates, a little low spine or protuberance. It is not unusual for it to be missing on one or another plate, or on several successive plates, but it is very unusual for it to go beyond the middle of the arm. I dare not assert positively that it can be absent entirely, as it may, perhaps, have been only lost through wear, in the examples in which I have not been able to convince myself of its existence. The 1 See Prof. Perrier, Arch. Zool. Expér. pp. 271-272. In my paper entitled ‘*‘ Echinoderms from the northern coast of Yucatan and the harbor of Vera Cruz,’ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 330-331, I identified an Astropecten, collected at Vera Cruz, as Astropecten articulatus Say, on account of its resemblance to Prof. Agassiz’s figures. If, as assumed above, the true 4. articulatus Say is the form described by Liitken, then the specimen collected at Vera Cruz is the 4. duplicatus Gray. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339 lower edge-plates are closely covered with small spines of somewhat diverse size; the finest small bristles are situated around their edges ; the largest form a transverse row along the aboral edge, and consti- tute a transition to the two rather short and weak, somewhat curved, horizontal edge-spines placed side by side, with which each plate is provided. The foot-papille usually form two rows; in the inner row are three slender spines in a group, of which the inner- most is the longest and somewhat curved ; in the outer row are two broad, flat, low, equally truncated, spade-formed papille side by side, of which the one nearest to the mouth (the adoral) in all respects stands behind the other; more rarely there are three papil- le in this row. Outside of it, there are, as a rule, in addition, 1-5 small papillz, which in the neighborhood of the mouth become larger and more numerous, so that 7-8 can be counted in each group besides the 3 or 4 which belong to the inner row. Mouth plates covered closely by scale-like papille. ” * Astropecten duplicatus Gray. Luidia clathrata Say. A single specimen collected. Pentaceros reticulatus Linnzus. A single specimen collected. Linckia Guildingii Gray. Echinaster spinosus Retzius. A single specimen collected. OPHIUROIDEA. Ophiura cinerea Muller und Troschel. A single specimen collected. Ophiactis Miilleri Lutken. Numerous specimens found in sponges on Andros Bank. AmphiuraStearnsi n. sp. PI. XVI, figs. 1-3. Disk angular, outer edge of the interbrachial spaces strongly concave; covered above and below with fine scales, some larger scales are found in the brachial spaces. Radial shields of moderate length, very narrow, widely separated by the scales of the disk, parallel with each other. Mouth shields large, sub-pentagonal, one of the angles directed towards the mouth, widest at the aboral 1 I wish to express my indebtedness to Mr. Fred. F. Myhlertz, the Danish Consul in Philadelphia, for having examined this translation for me. 540 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. edge, aboral edge convex, lateral edges slightly concave. Side- mouth-shields pyriform, the angle directed inwards and towards the mouth shield. Mouth papillee usually ten to each angle, the second and third counting from without inwards, the largest, angular; the fourth and fifth more slender, rounded; the first or outermost small and angular. Arms long, about ten times as long as the diameter of the disk. Upper-arm-plates sub-triangular, the apex of the triangle pointing towards the end of the arm, and much rounded off. Lower-arm- plates quadrilateral, the aboral and lateral edges slightly concave. Side-arm-plates about as high as the width of the upper-arm-plates ; meeting neither above nor below. Three stout arm-spines about as long as the upper-arm-plates. One large oblong tentacle scale, about two-thirds of the length of the under-arm-plate. General color of the dried specimen described, white; dorsal sur- face of the arms with a dark mottled band upon every fourth plate. In the specimen described, diameter of the disk 5°5 mm., and length of an arm about 50 mm. This species is characterized by the fine scaling of the disk, with the interspersed larger rounded scales; the very narrow and widely separated radial shields; the banded arms; the single large tentacle scale, and the five mouth papillz on each side of the mouth angle. It approximates Amphiura nereis' and Amphiura tumida* but differs among other things in the single large tentacle scale and the widely separated radial shields. A single specimen found in a living sponge on Andros Bank. Ophiothrix Oerstedii Lutken. Numerous specimens found in living sponges on Andros Bank. Astrophyton costatum Lyman. A single specimen sent to Mr. Stearns from the Bahamas. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. Fig. 1. Amphiura Stearnsin.sp. Portion of the dorsal surface of the disk and arms, much enlarged. Fig. 2. Portion of the ventral surface of the disk and arm, much enlarged. Fig. 3. Portion of the lateral surface of an arm near its base, much enlarged. 1 Lyman, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol. X, p. 250, Pl. V, figs. 61-63. 2 Lyman, op. cit. Vol. V, p. 225, Pl. II, figs. 28-30. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 341 Fig. 4. Astropecten articulatus Say. Dorsal surface, natural size. Fig. 5. Ventral surface, natural size. Fig. 6. Portion of dorsal surface of an arm, at about one-third of the distance from its base, enlarged. Fig. 7. Portion of lateral surface of an arm, near its base, en- larged. Fig. 8. Portion of ventral surface of an arm, at_about one-third of the distance from its base, enlarged. 342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. MEMOIR OF JOSEPH LEIDY, M. D., LL. D. BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D. ** And this our life, exempt from public haunt, finds tongues in trees, books in the running brooks, sermons in stones and good in everything.” It falls to the lot of but few, living in the midst of a great com- munity for nearly three score years and ten, to have never made an enemy during that long period, but to have gained universal af- fection, esteem and respect. Yet such may in truth be said of the subject of this memoir. : The ancestors of Dr. Joseph Leidy were of French-German ex- traction and came to this country as missionaries. Mr. Philip Leidy, his father, was born in Montgomery County, Penna., December 5, 1791, and removed, when a young man, to Philadelphia, where he engaged in the trade of a hatter. He soon retired from business in which he had been unusually successful. He married Catherine Melick, a descendant of the well known Melick family, the founders of the celebrated “Old Farm” in New Jersey. Joseph Leidy, the third of four children by this marriage, was born September 9th, 1823, in Philadelphia, at his father’s house, No. 312 N. 3rd. St., which isstill standing. When but a yearand a half old, he experienced in the death of his mother a loss that would be usually and justly regarded as irreparable. His father, however, in marrying shortly afterwards, Christiana, the sister of his first wife, gave to Joseph, a step-mother it is true, but one who never knew any difference between him and her own children. He loved her as a mother, for as he said upon one occasion, “I knew no other mother ; to her I owe every advancement in life.” His early education was obtained at private schools. While still a child, he showed an appreciation of natural objects, taking par- ticular interest in minerals and plants. The boy, however, had early evinced such remarkable ability as a draughtsman that his father had taken him away from school when about sixteen years of age with the intention of educating him as an artist. ' At about this period, the youth passed much of his time in a wholesale drug-store near his home. Such good use did he make of 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343 the opportunity there presented of learning the nature of drugs and the art of compounding medicines, that the proprietor recommended him as competent to take temporary charge of the retail drug-store of a customer. The success attending his conduct of the business was such as to make him consider it seriously, as a means of live- lihood.. The dissection of a few cats, dogs and chickens had, how- ever, in the mean time, developed an interest in the study of anat- omy and he had shown such an aptitude for dissection that Mrs. Leidy, proud of Joseph’s talents and ever watchful of his interests, made up her mind that her son should become neither an artist nor an apothecary, but a physician. As Dr. Leidy said fifty years afterward in referring to the circumstances connected with his taking up the study of medicine as a profession: “My father intended I should be an artist, but my mother said that her children should learn the professions. She, being the stronger, carrie the point.” In the year 1842, at the age of nineteen, Joseph Leidy began the study of medicine at the University of Pennsylvania, his preceptors being Dr. Paul B. Goddard and Dr. James McClintock. He presented to the Faculty a thesis on “The Comparative Anatomy of the Eye of Vertebrated Animals” and having complied in other respects with what was in those days deemed essential as a pre-requisite to graduation, in 1844 he received the degree of Doc- tor of Medicine. He at once began the practice of his profession, to which he devoted himself about two years. During that period, and even before, he had worked in the laboratory of the celebrated Dr. Robert Hare, and had assisted Dr. Goddard who was then Demonstrator of Anatomy at the University. Becoming impressed with the grave responsibilities incurred in the practice of medicine, of the demands on the time of the successful practitioner and the little leisure left to him for study, Dr. Leidy finally decided to give up the practice of medicine, with all hone of its emolument, and to devote his life entirely to study and teaching, trusting that event- ually, in the attainment of a Professorship, he would obtain at least the means of livelihood. Haud facile emergunt, quorum virtutibus obstat res angusta domi. For some time, young Dr. Leidy experienced that struggle with hardships and obstacles, incidental to the lives of so many great men, which talent, when accompanied with hard and continuous work, alone overcomes. While a student, however, Dr. Leidy, by his skill in o4t4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF prsote dissecting, had impressed Professor Hornor most favorably and he was, therefore, shortly after his graduation, appointed to the position of Prosector to the chair of Anatomy. During the summer of 1845 Dr. Leidy was elected a member of the Boston Society of Natural History, a compliment greatly appre- ciated, he being so young a man. ». 106. ; 90. Remarks on the fossil Ox. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1852, p. 117. 91. Remarks on some fossil teeth of a Rhinoceros from Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1852, p. 2. 92. Ona Fossil Turtle from Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1852, p. a4. 93. On a new species of fossil Delphinus and a new Saurian Thoracosaurus grandis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VI, 1852-53, p. 35. 94. Ursus amplidens, new fossil species. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VI, 1852-43, p. 303. 95. On some fossil Cetacean remains. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VI, 1852- 53, pp. 377-378. 96. Description of the remains of extinct Mammalia and Chelonia from Nebraska Territory, collected during the Geological Survey under the direction of Dr. David Dale Owen. kept. of Geol. Surv. of Wisconsin, Iowa and Minnesota, D. D. Owen, 1852, pp. 540-572. 97. On the organization of the genus Gregarina Dufour, 1851. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. X, 1853, pp. 233-240. 98. Some observations on Nematoidea imperfecta, and descriptions of three parasitic Infusoria. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. X, 1853, pp. 241-244. 99. Description of an extinct species of American Lion, Felis atrox, 1852. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. X, 1853, pp. 319-322. 100. A memoir on the extinct Dicotylinze of America, 1852. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. X, 18538, pp. 323-344. . 101. A Flora and Fauna within Living Animals, 1851. Smithson. Contrib. V, 1853. 102. Memoir on the extinct species of American Ox, 1852. Smithson. Contrib. V, 1858. 103. Remarks on various fossil teeth. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, 1853, p. 241. 104. On some fossil fragments from Natchez Miss. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1853, p. 303. 105. Remarks on a collection of Fossil Mammalia and Chelonia from the Mauvaises Terres of Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1853, pp. 892-894. 106. Character explained of nodular bodies found in the tails and fins of fishes from Cold Pond, N. H. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1843, p. 438. 107. Lecture introductory to the course of Anatomy delivered in the University of Pennsylvania. 8vo T. Phila. 1853, pp. 1-22. 108. The ancient Fauna of Nebraska; or a description of remains of extinct Mammalia and Chelonia, from the Mauvaises Terres of Nebraska, 1852. Smith- sonian Contrib. VI, 1854, pp. 392-394. 109. On Brimosaurus grandis, n. g. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854, p. We 110. On Bison latifrons. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854, p. 89. 111. On Dinictis filina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1854, p. 127. 112. On Prof. Lindley’s review of “A fauna and flora within living animals.” Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1854, pp. 128-129. 113. On Hydrachna. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1854, p. 202. 114. Hippodon and Merycodus, new fossil genera indicated. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854-55, p. 90. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379 115. Synopsis of extinct Mammalia, the remains of which have been discovered in the eocene formations of Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854— 55, pp. 156-158. 116. Description of a fossil apparently indicating an extinct species of the Camel tribe. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila: VII, 1854-55, pp. 172-173. 117. On Urnatella gracilis and a new species of Plumatella. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854-45, pp. 191-192. 118. Notice of some fossil bones discovered by Mr. Francis A. Lincke, in the banks of the Ohio River, Indiana. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phila. VII, 1854-55, pp- 199-201. 119. Remarks on the question of the identity of Bootherium cavifrons with Oribos moschatus or O. maximus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854-55, pp- 209-210. 120. Indications of twelve species of Fossil Fishes from New Jersey and S. Carolina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 1854-55, pp. 395-397. 121. Indications of five species, with two new genera, ofextinct Fishes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, VII, 1854-55, p. 414. 122. Notices of some Tape Worms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VII, 854-55, pp. 443-444. 123. A memoir on the extinct Sloth Tribe of North America, 1853. Smithson. Contrib. VII, 1855. 124. On a so-called fossilman. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1855, p. 340. 125. Contributions toward a knowledge of the Marine Invertebrate Fauna of the coasts of Rhode Island and New Jersey. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. III 1855-58, pp. 135-152. 126. Descriptions of some remains of Fishes from the Carboniferous and De- vonian Formations of the United States. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. III, 1855-58, pp. 159-165. 127. Descriptions of some remains of extinct Mammalia. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. III, 1855-58, pp. 166-171. 128. Descriptions of two Ichthyodorulites. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 11-12. Silliman’s Journ. XX1, 1856, pp. 421-422. 129. A Synopsis of Entozoa and some of the Ecto-congeners. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 42-48. 130. Notices of some remains of extinct Mammalia, discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden in the Bad Lands of Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci Phila. VII[, 1856, . 99-60. PPL. Notices of remains of extinct Reptiles and Fishes, discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden in the Bad Lands of the Judith River, Nebraska Territory. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 72-76. Silliman’s Journ. XXI, 1856, pp. 422- 425. 132. Notices of remains of extinct Mammalia, discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden, in Nebraska Territory. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila VIII, 1856, pp. 88-90. 133. Notices of the remains ofa species of Seal, from the post-pliocene deposit of the Ottawa River. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 90-91. 154. Notices of several genera of extinct Mammalia, previously less perfectly characterized. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 91-92. 135. Notices of some remains of extinct Vertebrated Animals. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 162-165. 136. Notices of some remains of extinct Vertebrated Animals of New Jersey, collected by Prof. Cook. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 220-221. 137. Notices of remains of extinct Vertebrated Animals, discovered by Professor E. Emmons. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 255-256. Silliman’s Journ XXIII, 1857, pp. 271-272. 138. Notices of some remains of Fishes, discovered by Dr. John E. Evans. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 256-257. 139. Notices of remains of two species of Seals. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, p. 265. ’ 376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1891. 140. Remarks on certain extinct species of Fishes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, VIII, 1856, pp. 301-302. 141. Notices of remains of extinct Turtles of New Jersey. collected by Prof. Cook. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp 803-304. 142. Notices of extinct Vertebrata, discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden, during the expedition to the Sioux country. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1856, pp. 311-812. 148. List of extinct Vertebrata, the remains of which have been discovered in the region of the Missouri river; with remarks on their geological age. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. IX, 1857, pp. 89-91. 144. Notices of some remains of extinct Fishes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. IX, 1857, pp. 167-168. 145. Remark on a large species of Gordius and larva of CEstrus. Pree. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. IX, 1857, p. 204. 146. On a boring Sponge. Silliman'’s Journ. XXIII, 1857, pp. 281-282. 147. Observations on Entozoa found in the Natades. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 18. 148. On Coprolites and Shales with Posidoniz. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857. p. 149. ‘ 149. On New Red Sandstone fossils from the Gwynnedd Tunnel, North Penna. R. Road. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 150. 150. Rectificationof the references of the extinct Mammalian genera of Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, pp. 175-176. 151. On the dentition of the Mosasaurus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 176. 152. On Oecanthus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 177. 153. On a curious animalcule on stones and dead plants in the Schuylkill and Delaware Rivers. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 204. 154. Observations on the introduction of the Camel into North America. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, p. 210. 155. Notices of remains of extinct Vertebrata, from the Valley of the Niobrara River, collected during the Exploring expedition of 1857, in Nebraska, by Dr. F. V. Hayden. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. X, 1858, pp. 20-29. 156. Contributions to Helminthology. Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci. Phila. X, 1858, pp. 110-112. 157. On Urnatella gracilis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 1. 158. Remarks on Fossil Mammatia from Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat.Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 7. 139) Notice of Remains of extinct vertebrata from the valley of the Niobrara River. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 11. 160. Remarks on a cast of a Mastodon tooth. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 12. 161. Remarks on fossil remains from Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, pp. 89-90. 162. Remarks on Chrysalides of the canker worm. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 137. 163. Remarks on Rhyncodemus sylvaticus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, . 171-172. PP 64. Remarks on a specimen of Cryolite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, aeliiite : 165. Remarks on Antler of Reindeer. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, p. 179. 166. Remarks on Polyzoa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, pp. 188-190. 167. Remarks on Hadrosaurus Foulkii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1858, pp- 215-218. ; 168. Valedictory address to the class of Medical Graduatesat the University of Pennsylvania. March 27, 1858, pp. 1-32. 169. Lecture introductory to the course on Anatomy in the University of Pennsyl- vania for the session of 1858-59, 8voT. Phila. 1859, pp. 1-24. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. old 170. Observations on three kinds of dipterous larve from man. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. XI, 1859, pp. 7-8. 171. On Manayunkia speciosa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 2. 172. On Hystracanthus arcuatus and Cladodus occidentalis. | Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 3. 173. Remarks on tooth of Mastodon and bones of Mosasaurus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, pp. 91-92. 174. emarks on teeth of Clepsysaurus, Eurydorus serridens and Compsosaurus, from Phoenixville tunnel, Chester Co. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p- 110. 175. Remarks on fossils from Bethany, Va., and also from the Green Sand, Monmouth Co., N. J. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 110. 176. Memcrks on Ossite from Sombrero, W. I. on skull of Ursus Americanus from the drift, Claiborne, Miss. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 111. 177. Remarks on fragment of jaw of Mosasaurus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. _ 1859, p. 150. 178. Onspecimens of Palzeotrochus from sub-silurian strata. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 150. 179. Remarks on Dromatherium sylvestre and other fossils from Chatham Co., N.C. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 162. 181). Remarks on antler of the Reindeer found at Sing-Sing, and remarks on Freija Americana from Newport. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, p. 194. 18]. On the seat of the vesicating principle of Lytta vittata. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859. p. 256. 182. Introductory lecture to the course of Anatomy delivered in the U niversity of Pennsylvania, Oct. 11,1859. 8vo T. Phila. 1859, pp. 1-23. 183. Notices of remains of the W alrus, discovered on the coast of the United States, 1856. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860, pp. 83-87. 184. Descriptions of the remains of fishes from the carboniferous limestone of - lllinois and Missouri, 1856. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860, pp. 87-90. 185. Remarks on Saurocephalus and its allies, 1856. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860. pp. 91-95. 186. Observations on the extinct Peccary of North America; being a sequel to “A memoir on the extinct Dicotylinee of America,’ 1856. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860, pp. 97-105. 187. Remarks on the structure of the feet of Megalonyx, 1856. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860, pp. 107-108. 188. Extinct Vertebrata from the Judith River and gréat lignite formations of Nebraska. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans. XI, 1860, pp. 139-154. 189. Remarks on Albertite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 54. 190. Remarks on Hyalonema mirabilis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 85. 191. Remarks on experiments with Trichina spiralis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 96. 192. Notice of specimen of Hyla. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 305. 193. Remarks on fossil teeth of Hippotherium from Washington County, Texas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 416. 194. Remarks on an extinct Peccary from Dr. D.D. Owen. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p.416. 195. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON HUMAN ANATOMY, with three-hundred and ninety-two illustrations, pp. I-XXIV, 17-663, Phila. 1861. SEconp EDITION oF SAME, with four-hundred and ninety five illustrations, pp. 1-950, Phila. 1889. 196. On the discovery of lignite at the border of the new red sandstone on Plymouth Creek. Proc. Acad. Nat Sci. Phila. 1861, p. 77 197. Remarks on certain minerals found in or nearthe city. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1862, p. 507. 198. Remarks on a female Phalangopsis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1863, p- 212. 25 378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 199. Cretaceous reptiles of the United States, 1864. Smithsonian Reports, 1864, pp. 66-73. Smithsonian Contrib. XIV, 1865, (A7t. 6). Geol. Mag. V. 1868, pp. 432-435. 200. Fossil remains of Horses from California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 94. : 201. Fossil remains of Rhinoceros from Texas and California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, pp. 176-177. 202. Observations on the existence of a boring sponge during the cretaceous period. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 95. 203. Observations on a Kjdkkenmédding at Cape Henlopen. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 95. 204. Remarks on a foetal Acanthias Americanus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 175. 205. Observations on Cryolite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Phila. 1865, p. 181. 206. Remarks on specimens of Oolitic Phosphates of Lime and Alumina, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 181. 207.-On bones and stone implements from Guano deposits in the Island of Or- chilla. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, pp. 181-183. 208. Observations on Indian relics. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 1. 209. Remarks on a phalanx of an extinct reptile. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 9. 210. Remarks on cancer of liver in Turkey and on Trichina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 9. 211. Remarks on human relics at Petite Anse, La. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 109. 212. Remarks on fossils presented June 5th. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 237. 213. Observations on the Kitchen Middens of Cape Henlopen. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, pp, 290-291. 214. On Fossil bones from Mauvaises Terres, Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 345. 215. Remarks on the skull of Bison latifrons. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, p. 85. 216. Exhibition of the skull of Geomys bursarius. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, p. 97. O17. OF an antique copper hammer. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, p. 97. 218. Of the skull of Castoroides Ohioensis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, 5 re ; 219. Of specimens of black horn-stone. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1867, p. 125. 220. Notices of some Vertebrate remains from Hardin Co., Texas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 174-176. 221. Indication of an Elotherium in California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, p. 177. 222. Notices of some Reptilian remains from Nevada. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 177-178. 223. Notices of some Vertebrate remains from the West Indian Islands. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 178 180. 224. Notices of some remains of horses. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, p. 195. 225. Notices of some extinct Cetaceans. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 196-197. 226. Remarks ona jaw fragment of Megalosaurus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 197-199. 227. Remarks on Conosaurus Gibbes. Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 200-202. 228. Notices of American species of Ptychodus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 205-208. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379 229. Notices of some American Leeches. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868 pp. 229-230. 230. Notices of some remains of extinct Pachyderms: Dicotyles nasutus, Anchippus Texanus, Anchippodus riparius, Lophiodon occidentalis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 280-233. 231. Notices of some remains of extinct Insectivora from Dakota. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 315-316. 232. Description of Wolffia Columbiana. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 6-7. 238. Description of a new sponge: Pheronema Anne. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Biol. and Micr. Section, 1868, pp. 9-11. 234. Remarks on Sombrero Guano. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 156-157. 235. On the food of the shad. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, p. 228. 236. Onsupposed Coprolites from the Huronian slates of Minnesota. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, pp. 802-303. 237. On the iridescence of opals. Proc. Acad Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, p. 303. 238. On asterism in Mica. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868. p. 313. 239. On photograph of fossil bones from Topeka, Kansas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868, p. 315. 240. On the extinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, including an account of some allied forms from other localities. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Journ. VII, 1869, pp. 23-362. 241. Synopsis of extinct Mammalia of North America. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Journ. VII, 1869, pp. 363-472. 242. Notices of some extinct Vertebrates from Wyoming and Dakota. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1869, pp. 63-67. 243. Elasmosaurus platyurus Cope. Amer. Journ. Sci. XLIX, 1870, p. 392. 244. Fossil Sivatherium from Colorado Megacerops coloradensis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 1-15. 245. Remarks on Poicilopleuron valens, Baptemys Wyomingensis, Emys Stev- ensonianus and other fossils, from Middle Park, Colorado. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 3-5. 246. On Reptilian remains from the cretaceous formation near Fort Wallace, Kansas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 9-10. 247. On a fossil mandible from near Fort Bridger, Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 10-11. 248. Remarks on Xiphactinus audax and other Ichthyodorulites. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 12-13. 249. Remarks on Asteracanthus siderius. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p- 13. 250. On Hadrosaurus andits allies. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 67-68. 251. Descriptions of Oncobatis pentagonus and Mylocyprinus robustus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 69-71. 252. On a new species of leech from near Philadelphia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 89-90 253. On Mastodon remains of the Warren Museum and the Cambridge Uni- versity Museum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 96-99. 254. On Crocodilus Elliotti. Proc. Acad. Nat Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 100, 122. 255. On Urnatella, a genus of ciliated polyps of the family Pedicellinidae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 100-102. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. VII, 1871, pp- 309-3812. 256. On some fossils from the Sweet Water River, Wyoming Territory. Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 109-110. 257. Description of a new species of Oreodon: O.superbus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 111-112. 380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 258. On Anchitherium Condoni and Cordylophora Americana. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 112-118. 259. Descriptions of Palzeosyops paludosus, Microsus cuspidatus and Notharctus tenebrosus. Proc. Acad. Nat, Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 113-114. 260. Descriptions of Graphiodon vinearius, a fossil reptile. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 122. 261. Reptilian remains from Wyoming; Emys Jeanesi, E. Haydeni, Bzna arenosa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 123-124. 262. Fossil remains of a Lacertian, discovered near Granger: Saniwa ensidens. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 124-125. 263. Fossil fragment of the‘lower jaw of a small pachyderm; Lophiotherium sylvaticum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 126. 264. On the humerus of a sloth resembling Mylodon robustus and on Dromo- therium sylvestre. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 8-9. 265. On specimens of Vertebral bodies from the New Jersey green sand. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 10. 266. On Ichthyodorulites. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 12-13. 267. On fossil remains from Illinois. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 13. 268. On Discosaurus and its allies. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 18- 22. 269. Gn the internal organs of generation ofahog. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870), p. 65. 270. On fossil bones from Dakota and Nebraska. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 65-686. 271. On fossil remains from Idaho, Utah and Oregon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 67-68. 272. On Anguillulide. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 68-69. 273. On fossils from the vicinity of Burlington, Kansas, and from the Rocky Mts. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 69. 274. On the relations of European and American fauna. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 72-73. 275. On a jaw fragment of Ovibos cayifrons. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, 276. On Nothosaurops occiduus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 74. 277. On leeches. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 89-90. 278. On Mastodon remains. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 96-99. 279. Ow fossil remains in the Museum of Amherst College. Proc. Acad Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 98. 280. On fossils from Bridge Creek, Oregon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 111-113. 281. On Cordylophora. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 113. 282. On fossils from Church Buttes, Wyoming Territory. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 113-114. 283. On fossils found under Table Mountain, Cal. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 125-126. 284. Exhibition of the lower jaw of an aged man, and a wood carving from St. Paul de Loando.- Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, p. 138. 285. On the reversed viscera of a human subject. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phiia. 1870, p. 134. 286. Remarks on some curious Sponges. Amer. Nat. IV, 1871, pp. 17-22. 287. On Teenia mediocanellata. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1871. pp. 53-55. 288. On Some extinct Turtles from Wyoming Territory. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1870, pp. 102-108. 289. Remains of extinct Mammals from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 113-116. 290. Remains of Palzosyops from Fort Bridger. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 118. 1891.] NATURAL SCFENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381 291. Remarks on a fossil Testudo from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 154. 292. Remarks on supposed fossil Turtle Eggs. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 154-155. 293. Fossils from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 197. 294. Remarks on fossil vertebrates from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 228-229. 295. Notice of some extinct Rodents from Wyoming, and description of My- sops minimus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 230-232. 296. Remarks onthe Minerals of Mount Mica. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 245-247. 297. Remarks on Fossils from Oregon; Hadrohyus supremus, Rhinoceros pacificus. Stylemys Oregonensis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 247-248. 298 Notice of anew Tape-worm; Dibothrium cordiceps. Proc. Acad. Nat. Phila. 1881, pp. 305-307. 299. On a small collection of fossils from California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 50. 300. On Polydactylism in a horse. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 112. 301. On remains of Mastodon and Horse in North Carolina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 113. 302. Remarks on the Garnets of Green’s Creek, Delaware Co. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 155. 303. Remarks on Mastodon, etc. of California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 198-199. 304. Note on Anchitherium. Proc. Acad. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 199. 305. Remarks on fossil vertebrates from Wyoming. Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, pp. 228-229. 306. Flies as means of communicating contagious diseases. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1871, p. 297. 307. On some new species of fossil mammalia from Wyoming; Palzeosyops humilis, Uintatherium robustum, Uintamastix atrox. Amer. Journ. Sci. IV, 1872, pp- 289-240. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 167-169. 308. Notices of Corundum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 19. 309. Remarks on fossils from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 19-21. 310. Remarks on some extinct Mammals. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp- 37-388. 311. Remarks on some extinct Vertebrates; Felis augustus, Oligosimus grand- zevus. Tylosteus ornatus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 38-40. 312. On a new genus of extinct Turtles. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 162. 313. On some remains of cretaceous fishes; Otodus divaricatus, Oxyrhina ex- tenta, Acrodus humilis, Pycnodus faba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 162-164. 314. On Artemia salina from Salt Lake, Utah. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 164-166. 315. Remarks on the habits of an Ant. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 218. 316. Remarks on mineral springs, etc. of Wyoming and Utah. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 218-220. 317. Notice of a corundum mine in Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 238-239. 318. Remarks on fossil Mammals from Wyoming; Uintatherium robustum, Palzeosyops major. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 240-242. 319. Remarks on chipped stones from Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, pp. 242-243. 32). Remarks on fossils from Wyoming; Palzeosyops junior, Uintacyon edax, U. vorax, Chameleo pristinus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 277. 382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 321. On a Mite inthe Ear ofan Ox. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, 1872. pp 322. Note on Gamasus of the Ox. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 138. 23. Remarks on Mastodon from New Mexico. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 142. 324. Remarks on fossil shark teeth. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 166. 325. Remarks on the action of windand sand on rocks. Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1872, p. 243. 326. CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE EXTINCT FAUNA OF THE WESTERN TERRITORIES. Rept. U. S. Geol. Sur. of Ter. (Hayden), I, 1873, pp. 1-358, pls. I-XX XVII. 327. Notice of fossil Vertebrates from the Miocene of Virginia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 15. 328. Notice of remains of fishes in Bridger Tertiary formation of Wyoming. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, pp. 97-99. 329. Remarks on the occurrence of anextinct Hog in America. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 207. 330. Remarks on extinct Mammals in California. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, pp. 259-260. 331. Fungus Parasite on a Mouse. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, pp. 260-261. 332. On Distona hepaticum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phiia. 1873, pp. 364-365. 333. Remarks on fossil Elephant teeth. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. pp. 416-417. 334. On circulatory movement in Vaucheria. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 420. 835. On Iron Pyrites in Coal. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 257. 336. On a specimen of Mus rattus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 257. 337. On Dufrenite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 257. 338. On Lingula in a fish of the Susquehanna. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1873, p. 41 5-416. 339. Remarks on Hydra. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 10. 840. Remarks on Protozoa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 13. 341. On the Mode of Growth of Desmids. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, 15. _ 842. On Actinophrys sol. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 28. 343. Note on the Enemies of Difflugia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. doe 344. Remarks on a supposed Compound derived from Leather. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 75. 345. Notices of some New Fresh-water Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 77. 346. Notices of some Fresh-water and Terrestrial Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 86-88. 347. Remarks on the Revivification of Rotifer vulgaris. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 88-89. 348. On Pectinatella magnifica. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 139. 349. Ona Parasitic Worm of the House-fly. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 139. 351). Notices of some Fresh Water Infusoria. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 140. 351. Notice of aremarkable Amceba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 142-143. 352. On the Mode in which Amceba swallows its Food. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 148. 303. On the Motive Power of Diatoms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 148. 354. Remarks on Sponges. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 144. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383 355. Notices of some Rhizopods, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 155-— 157. 356. Note on Dryocampa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p. 160. 357. Notice of remains of Titanotherium. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp- 165-166. 358. Note of Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 166-168. 359. On Supposed Spermaries in Amceba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, . 168. if 360. On Specific Gravity. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, p- 218. 361. Remarks on Fossils presented. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 223-224. ; 362. Notices of Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1874, pp. 225-227. 363. Description of vertebrate remains chiefly from the Phosphate Beds of South Carolina. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. VIII, 1874-81, pp. 209-261. 364. The Parasites of the Termites. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1874-81, pp. 425-447. 365. Remarks on Bathygnathus borealis. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. VIII, 1874-81, pp. 449-451. 366. On a Fungus ina Flamingo. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 11-12. 367. Notes on some Parasitic Worms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 14-16. 368. Notes on some Parasitic Worms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 17-18. 369. Remarks on some marine Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 73-76. P3870. Remarks on a Coal Fossil, ete. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, p. 120. 371. Remarks on Elephant Remains. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875. p. 121. 372. On a Curious Rhizopod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, p. 124. 373. On Psorospherms in a Mallard Duck. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, . 125. " 374. On a Mouthless Fish. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 125-126. 375. On Ouramoeba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 126-127. 376. On Mermis acuminata. Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, p. 400. 377. Remarks on Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, pp. 413-415. 378. Quercus heterophylla. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1875, p. 415. 379. On Petalodus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 9. 380. Mastodon andium. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 38. 381. Remarks on Arcella, etc. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp- 04-58. 382. Remarks on Fossils from the Ashley Phosphate Beds. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp. 80-81, 86-87. 383. Fish Remains of the Mesozoic Red Shales. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 81. peepee on Fossils from the Ashley Phosphate Beds. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp. 86-87. 385. Remarks on Vertebrate Fossils from the Phosphate Beds of S. Carolina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp. 114-115. 386. Remarks on the Rhizopod Genus Nebela. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp. 115-119. 387. Bituminous Sediment of the Schuylkill River. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 193. 388. Remarks on the Structure of Precious Opal. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, pp. 195-197. 389. Observations on Rhizopods. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 197. 390. On Ozocerite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p- 325. 391. On Hyraceum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1876, p. 325. 392. Impurities in Drinking Water. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 20. 893. On Eozoon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 20. O84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 394. On the Diaphragm. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 20. 395. Remarks on the Yellow Ant. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila 1877, p. 145. 396. On Intestinal Parasites of Termes flavipes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 146-149. 397. Remarks on Gregarines. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 196-198. 398. On Chilomonas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877. p. 198. 399. On Flukes infesting Mollusks. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 200. 400. Remarks on some Parasitic Infusoria. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 259-260. 491. Remarks on the Seventeen-Year Locust, the Hessian Fly and a Chelifer. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 260-261. 402. Birth of a Rhizopod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1877, pp. 261-265. 403. On the Bed-bug and its Allies. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 284. 404. On the Feeding of Dinamceba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 288-290. 405. Concretions resembling Bones. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 290. 406. Apparent Discriminative Power in the Selection of Food by a Heliozoon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 291-292. 407. Remarks on Rhizopods and Notice of a New Form. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 293-294. 408. On Fossil Fishes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 294. 409. Remarks on Ants. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 804-305. 410. Remarks on the American Species of Difflugia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, pp. 306-808. 411. Circumspection of Ants. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 320. 412. Rhizopods in an Apple Tree. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1877, p. 321. 413. On Citrine or Yellow Quartz. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 40. 414. On Hippopotamus Tusk. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 99. 415. On Amceba. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 99. 416. A Louse of the Pelican. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, 100-101. 417. On Parasitic Worms inthe Shad. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 418. Species of Euglypha, Trinema, Pamphagus and Cyphoderia, with Synonyma and Descriptions of New Forms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, pp. 171-173. 419. Foraminifera of the Coast of New Jersey. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 292. 42@. On the Black Mildew of Walls. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 331. 421. Remarks on Mactra. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, pp. 332-333. 422. Foraminiferous Shells of our Coast. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 336. 423. On Crustaceans at Cape May, N. J. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, pp. 386-337. 424. Notice of a Tetrarhynchus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 340. 425. On Donax fossar. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, pp. 382-383. 426. Notices of Gordius in the Cockroach and Leech. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, pp. 883-884. 427. On Tenia mediocanellata. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1878, p. 405. 428. FresH-WaATER RuIzopops oF NoRTH AMERICA. Rept. U.S. Geol. Surv. of Ter. (Hayden), XII, 1879, pp. i-ix, 1-324, pls. I-XLVIII. 429. On Gordizs and on some Parasites of the Rat. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 10-11. 45). Fossil Remains of a Caribou. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 32- 33. 431. On Rhizopods occurring inSphagnum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp- 162-168. 432. Fossil Foot Tracks of the Anthracite Coal Measures. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 164-165. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385 433. Explosion of a Diamond. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, p. 195. 434. Remarks on Orgyia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 195-196. 455. Notices of some Animals on the coast of New Jersey. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 198-199. 436. On Cristatella Ida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 203-204. 437. On Ameceba Blattee. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 204-205. 438. Wards Natural Science Establishment. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1879, pp. 208-209. 439. Notice of the Cruel Thread Worm, Filaria immitis of the Dog. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1880, pp. 10-12. 440. On a Filaria Reported tohave come from a Man. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1880, pp. 130-131. : 441. Remarks on Pond Life. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1880, pp. 156-158. 442. Rhizopods in the Mosses of the Summit of Roane Mountain, N. Carolina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1880, pp. 333-340. 443. Bone Caves of Pennsylvania. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1880, pp. 346-349. 444. Rhizopods as Food for Young Fishes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1881, pp. 9-10. 445. Remarks on some Rock Specimens. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 10-12. 446. Filaria of the Black Bass. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 69. 447. On Tourmalines. - Proc. Acad. Nat. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 71-73. 448. On Balanoglossus, ete. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 93. 449. Scolithus in Gravel. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 93. 450. On Sagitta, ete. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 102-103. 451. On some Entozoa of Birds. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 109. 452. On a Coprolite and a pebble resembling an Indian hammer. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 109-110. 453. On Bacillus. Anthracis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 145. 454. On Enchytraeus, Distichopus and their parasites. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 145-148. 455. The Yellow Ant with its flocks of Aphis and Coccus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 148. 456. Colorless Garnet and Tourmaline. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 149. 457. On Balanus, etc. at Bass Rocks, Mass. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 224-225. 458. On the Tobacco Worm, etc. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 237- 238. 459. Rotifera without Rotary Organs. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 243-250. 460. A new Infusorian belonging to the genus Pyxicola. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 252-253. 461. Actinosphzrium Eichhornii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 260- 261. 462. On Topaz and Biotite. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, p. 261. 463. On Actinospherium, ete. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 261-262. 464. On Tubularia, etc. from Atlantic City. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, . 262. : 465. On Remains of Horses. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 290-291. 466. On an Extinct Peccary. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 188%, pp. 301-302. 467. On the Reproduction and Parasites of Anodonta fluviatilis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1883, pp. 44-46. : 468. Pediculus vestimenti. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1883, p. 46. 469. A Flint Nodule from the Green Sand of New Jersey. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1883, p. 76. 470. A Social Heliozoan. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1882, pp. 95-96. 386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 471. Mineralogical Notes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1883, p. 202. 472. Manayunkia speciosa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 204-212. 473. On Manayunkia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1883, p. 203. 474. A study of the Temporal Bone. Science, I, 1883, pp. 880-385, 475-477, 506-7. 475. Crystals in the Bark of Trees. Science, II, 1883, pp. 707-8. 476. Urnatella gracilis, a fresh-water Polyzoan. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. IX, 1884, pp. 5-16. 477. Antinfected with a Fungus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 9. 478. Cassiterite from Black Hills, Dakota. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 9: , 479. The New Jersey Coast after the storm of Jan. 8, 1884. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, pp. 12-13. 48(). Fossil Bones from Louisiana. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 22. 481. Foraminifera in the Drift of Minnesota. Proc. Acad. Nat Sci. Phila. 1884, pp. 22-23. 482. Distomaand Filariae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, pp. 47-48. 483. Dictyophora as Apsilus vorax. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, pp. 50-51. 484. On Eumeces chalcides. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 66. 485. Vertebrate Fossils from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, pp. 118-119. 486. A Rare Human Tape Worm. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 137. 487. Pentastomum proboscideum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 140. 488. Organisms in Ice. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1884, p. 260. 489. On some Parasitic Worms of Birds. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 9-11. 490. Rhinoceros and Hippotherium from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 32-33. 491. Remarks on Mylodon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 49-51. 492. Bothriocephalus in a Trout. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 122- 123. 493. Worms in Ice. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 408-409. 494. An address on evolution and the pathological importance of lower forms of life. Therapeutic Gazette, Detroit, 1886. 495. Mastodonand Llama from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, pp. 11-12. 496. Extinct Boar from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, pp. 87-38. 497. Caries in the Mastodon. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, p. 38. 498. On Amia and its probable Tzenia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, pp- 62-63. 499. Toxodon and other remains from Nicaragua.’ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, 275-277. 500. Notices on Nematoid Worms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886, pp. 308-313. 501. Remarks on Parasites and Scorpions. Trans. Col. Phys. Phila. 3rd. Ser. VIII, 1886, pp. 441-443. 502. Notice of some Parasitic Worms. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, pp. 20-24. 503. Parasite of a Bat. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, p. 38. 504. Asplanchna Ebbesbornii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, p. 157. 505. Fossil Bones from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, pp. 3809- 310. 506. Remarks on Hydra. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, pp. 310-313. 507. Bot-larve in the Terrapin. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1887, pp. 393- 394. 508. Tape-worms in Birds. Journ.Comp. Med. and Surg. VIII, 1887, pp. 1-11. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387 509. Ona Fossil ofthe Puma. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 9-10. 510. Chzetopterus from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, 73-74. 511. Criolana feasting on the Edible Crab. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p- 80. 512. On Bopyrus palemoneticola. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 80. 513. Note on Lepas fascicularis. | Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 80- 81. 514. Reputed Tape-Worm in a Cucumber. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p- 81. 515. Habit of Cirolana concharum. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 124-125. 516. Parasites of the Striped Bass. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 125. 517. Tremotodes of the Muskrat. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 126. 518. Entozoa of the Terrapin. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 127-128. 519. A Crustacean Parasite of the Red Snapper. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 138-139. 520. Distinctive characters of Odontaspis littoralis. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 162-164. 521. Parasitic Crustacea. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 165. 522. Parasites of the Rock Fish. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 166- 523. Louse of the Pelican. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 167-168. ~ 524. Parasites of the Pickerel. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 169. 525. Megalonyx Jeffersonii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 273. 526. Anomalies of the Human Skull. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, p. 527. Remarks on the Fauna of Beach Haven, N. J. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1888, pp. 329-333. 528. Food of Barnacles. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1885, pp. 481-482. 529. Parasites of the Shad and Herring. Journ. Comp. Med. and Surg. IX, 1888, pp. 211-215. 530. On several Gregarines, and a singular mode of conjugation of one of them. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, pp. 9-11. 531. The Sabre-Toothed Tiger of Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, pp. 29-31. 32. Note on Gonyleptes and Solpuga. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, p. 45. 533. The Boring Sponge, Cliona. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, 70-75. 534. A Parasitic Copepod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, p. 95. 535. Fossil Vertebrates from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1889, pp. 536. Notice ofsome fossil human bones. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. II, 1889, pp. 9-12. 537. Description of Mammalian remains from a rock-crevice Florida. ‘Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. Il, 1889, pp. 13-17. 538. Description of Vertebrate remains from Peace Creek, Florida. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. II, 1889, pp. 19-31. 539. Notice of some Mammalian remains from the Salt Mine of Petite Anse, Louisiana. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. II, 1889, pp. 33-40. 540. On Platygonus, an extinct genus allied to the Peccaries. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. I1, 1889, pp. 41-50. 541. Remarks on the nature of organic species. Trans. Wagner Free. Inst. Sci. II, 1889, pp. 51-53. 542. .Hypoderas in the Little Blue Heron. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890. p- 68. 543. Notice of an Ichneumon Fly. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, p. 63. 544. Fossil Vertebrates from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 64-65. 388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. 545. Hippotherium and Rhinoceros from Florida. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 182-183. 546. Mastodon and Capybara of South Carolina. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 184-185. 547. Remarks on Tics. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 278-280. 548. Parasites of Mola rotunda. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 281— 282. 549. Beroe on the New Jersey Coast. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 341-342. 550. Remarks on Velella. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 408-409. 551. Notices of Entozoa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1890, pp. 410-418. 552. Note on the Boring Sponge of the Oyster. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1891, p. 122. 553. Notice ofsome Entozoa. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1891, 234-236. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 389 NEW AMERICAN MYXOMYCETES. GEO. A. REX, M. D. Physarum nucleatum. Sporangia exactly spherical, about °5 mm. in diameter, stipitate, erect or slightly nodding ; wall of sporangium membranaceous, rup- turing irregularly, generally thickly studded with rounded, white lime granules. Stipes from 1 to 1°5:mm. in height, subulate, yellowish-white, lon- gitudinally rugose. Columella wanting ; capillitium composed of a very closely meshed net of delicate snow-white tubules with minute round or rounded white granules of lime at the intersections. In the center of the capillitium net, there is usually a conspicuous mass of lime generally forming a shining white ball, not continuous with the stipe, although sometimes having a prolongation downward toward it, this ball being rarely supplanted by a closely com- pacted mass of irregular lime granules holding the same relative position. Spores 6-7 . in diam., brown violet in color; epispores delicately spinulose, although apparently smooth when examined under medium power lenses. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia. This species most nearly resembles in appearance and habit of growth Phys. Petersii B. & C. var. Farlowi Rost., but may be dis- tinguished from it by the absence of a columella, by the central ball of lime and the very small rounded lime granules in the meshes of the capillitium. Exceptionally the lime granules of the sporangium wall are sparse or absent entirely, in which case the wall has a sil- very or coppery metallic lustre. Physarum penetrale. Sporangia erect, stipitate, generally ellipsoidal or pyriform, rarely globose, from*5 X'5 mm. to’) "7 mm.indiameter. Sporangium walls membranaceous, semitransparent, studded sparsely with rounded, pale yellow or yellow-gray lime granules, rupturing to the base into from two to four segments. Stipes very variable, from °5 to 2 mm. in height, slender, subulate, longitudinally rugose, flattened laterally toward the base, translucent, dull red or golden red in color. Columella formed by a continuation of the stipe penetrating the sporangium to about four-fifths its height, reddish-yellow in color, slender, tapering to a wedge-shaped end. Capillitium composed of 390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. a closely and irregularly meshed reticulation of delicate white tub- ules with a variable number of obtuse angled or irregularly rounded, pale yellow granules of lime at the intersections. Spores 6-6°5 p. in diameter, brown in mass, delicately spinulose, although appar- ently smooth under lenses of medium power. Fairmount Park, Phila., Adirondack Mts., N. Y., White Mts., N. H., Rangeley, Maine and Ohio (A. P. Morgan). The leading characteristic of this species is its columella, which is longer than that of any described Physarum. It is a true columella and not a mere aggregation or columella-like mass of lime granules, such as may be found in many species of Physarum. Chondrioderma aculeatum. Sporangia sessile, lenticular or hemispherical, flattened above, and concave, sometimes umbilicate, below. Walls of sporangia double, separated by a well marked interspace ; external wall dusky or yellowish-white, papyraceous, wrinkled when dry, ultimately cracking and rupturing irregularly ; internal wall thin, membrana- ceous, semi-transparent, grayish, rarely iridescent. Columella irregular, sometimes small and hardly evident ; upper surface rugose with ridges or thickenings, the edges of which bristle with well marked spine-like processes. Columella and inner surface of base of sporangium uniformly nut brown in color. Capillitium pure white, scanty, composed of simple, sparsely branched sinuous threads attached to the spines of the columella in a slightly fasciculate manner, and radiating thence to the inner wall of the sporangium. Spores dark violet, 12-15 ».in diameter, spinulose under medium powers. Bar Harbor, Me; Adirondack Mts., N. Y. This species is a true Diderma analogous to C. difforme and C. testaceum but is sufficiently distinguished by its tough parchment- like external wall and its spinose columella. Stemonitis Webberi. Sporangia gregarious, standing on a common hypothallus, erect, stipitate, more or less cylindrical, obtuse, sometimes slightly clavate, sometimes recurved at the apex, 10-12 mm. in height including stipes. Stipes black, shining, about 2 mm. high. Columella central, run- ing nearly to the apex where it subdivides into several branches. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391 Capillitium composed of widely separated radial threads of a brown violet color, originating by triangular plasmodic expansions at the point of attachment to the columella, connecting with each other by lateral branches given off close to the columella, often forming a second series of expansions at the junctions, then running to the sur- face where they branch and form a delicate surface net-work of a pale brown color with large irregularly oblong meshes, varying from 40 to 160 ». in length. Terminal and recurved portion of surface net-work, frequently composed of thickened threads which unite with the terminal branches of the columella forming an irregular plexus. Spores 7-8 ». in diameter, ferruginous color in mass, with thick, delicately spinulose epispores which are apparently smooth under lenses of medium power. Manhattan, Kansas, H. J. Webber. This is a well marked species with distinctive characters. The meshes of the surface net-work are larger than those of any species yet described. It is still further distinguished from Stemonitis splendens Rost. or any allied species by its ferruginous colored spores and pale, delicate surface capillitium. Stemonitis Virginiensis. Sporangia erect, stipitate, gregarious, growing on a common hypothallus, usually found in small isolated clusters, occasionally, however, in continuous masses, from 3-3°5 mm. in height, including stipes, about °5 mm. in width, cylindrical or elongated ovate, rounded at apex or terminating in a short blunt point, and often umbilicate at the base. Stipes averaging 1°5 mm. in length, black and shining. Colu- mella central, running to the apex where it joins the capillitium by several terminal branches. Capillitium composed of an intricate net-work of numerous slen- der, dark brown, flexuous threads orginating in the columella and joined together by numerous arcuate lateral branches, terminating in a surface net parallel to the walls of the sporangium ; meshes of the surface net irregular in shape, 6-12 . in diameter, often evanes- cent in the upper part of the sporangium, breaking away by the dispersion of the spores. Spores umber brown in mass, 5°5 to 6°5 yp. in diameter, epispores conspicuously reticulated with about 10-12 reticulations to the hemisphere. Allegheny Mts., Virginia. 392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. This species resembles in its general appearance, Comatricha typhina Roth. The threads composing the meshes of the surface net often have dark bulbous thickenings of about twice their usual diameter, occurring irregularly in their course or at their intersec- tions. The spores are beautifully and clearly sculptured with deep reticulations, which can be determined readily with a lens of medium power. The species may be distinguished from S. dictyospora, by its more strongly marked spore, the smaller size of its sporangia and its comatricha-like habit of growth. Stemonitis nigrescens. Sporangia gregarious, standing on a common hypothallus, erect, more or less cylindrical, entire height with stipe about 4 mm. Stipes ‘5 mm. long, black. Columella central, running to apex of sporangium, then subdivid- ing into several branches. Capillitium, violet black in the center, arcuate, flexuous, forming a loose meshed central reticulation which becomes dark violet as it nearsthe surface. Surface net-work, com- plete and characteristic of the genus only on the lower third of the sporangium, being usually irregular in the middle portion and evanescent or falling away with thespores toward the apex. When perfect, the meshes of the surface net vary from 12-20 ». in diam- eter. Spores 8 . in diameter, nearly black in mass, deep blackish violet singly under a microscope. Epispores thick, sharply and promi- nently spinulose with a quite moderate amplification. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia. This species is noteworthy for its comparatively short stipes, its very spinulose spores and its black or nearly black color, the slight violet tint being only apparent on. close inspection, especially in fresh, moist specimens. It is a species which illustrates the difficulty of determination in a case where the diagnostic characters of two adjoining genera apparently blend together. Although characters of both Stemonitis and Comatricha are to be found in it, yet those of the former genus seem to predominate and the species is, therefore, so referred. Such borderland species as this and Comatricha sub- cespitosa Pk., seem to point to the necessity for a revision of the boundary lines between the two genera, which, in these examples, are practically narrowed down to the question of the degree of the parallelism of the surface net to the walls of the sporangium. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Bue Comatricha irregularis. Sporangia gregarious, standing on a common hypothallus, semi- erect, drooping, total height with stipes 3°5 to 7 mm. usually about 4 mm., very irregular and variable in outline and size, either irregularly cylindrical distorted by one or more nodulose swellings, or irregularly elongated conical or ovate, or cylindrical and flattened laterally with longitudinal grooves on the flattened sides, or occasion- ally regularly cylindrical. Stipes black, slender, usually equalling the length of the sporan- gia but varying from one-half to twice their length. Columella central, slender, flexuous, running to the apex where it branches and joins the capillitium. Capillitium composed of arcuate threads which radiate from the columella and are joined together forming a central irregular reticulation of large, coarse loops or meshes, at first brown, then becoming paler and more slender as they approach the surface, finally forming an irregular exterior reticulation of delicate, pure white or colorless threads which ter- minate on the surface everywhere in free ends. Peripheral capillitium very evanescent. Spores dark brown in mass, from 7-8 , in diameter. Epispores thick, warted, with dark rounded warts. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia ; New Jersey (Ellis) ; Ohio (Mor- gan). Although this species has the general habit of growth of Stemonitis, I have not been able, in any of the specimens which I have examined, to detect even a fragment of the characteristic surface net-work of that genus. The peripheral branches of the capillitium are pure white, giv- ing under a reflector a frosted or hoary appearance strongly con- trasting with the darker threads beneath. They are exceedingly delicate, breaking away easily with the spores which seem to have more tendency to agglutination than those of other species. Cribraria violacea. Sporangia stipitate, erect or slightly nodding, total height with stipe ‘5 mm. to 1 mm., dark violet with a metallic sheen, ellipsoidal or ovoid, rarely globose. Stipes °3 to ‘5 mm. high, slender, subulate, longitudinally rugose, dark blackish-violet becoming black at the base. : Sporangium wall formed ofa pale violet membrane, thickly studded with dark violet plasmodic granules, externally wrinkled, entire for 26 394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. two-thirds or more of its basal portion forming a permanent recepta- cle, the upper third being in effect lacerated into irregularly shaped fragments, which are joined by a few simple threads forming a sparse irregular net-work. Exceptionally the apical portion is nearly entire, being simply perforated with three or four oval or rounded openings. Spores 8 ». in diameter, dark violet-red color in mass, but pale red under the microscope, epispores thick, delicately but clearly warted, though apparently smooth under medium powers. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, Adirondack Mts., N. Y. and Manhattan, Kansas (W. T. Swingle). This species originates from a deep violet-black plasmodium. As usually found, it is diminutive, rivalling Cribraria microsecopica B. & C. Its marked characters are its color, its proportionally large receptacle and its large delicately spinulose spores which are not exceeded or probably equalled in size by those of any recorded Cribraria. Cribraria languescens. Sporangia scattered, drooping, spherical -25 to 35 mm. in diam- eter. Receptacle about one-third of the periphery of the sporangium, red-brown, shining, minutely striate with granular lines, serrated more or less regularly about the margin. Net-work red-brown, composed of simple threads with polygonal knots, having usually five or six angles and straight or only slightly concave sides, forming more or less triangular interspaces at the inter- sections. Stipes about 2°5 to 3 mm. high, slender, subulate, dark red-brown, somewhat sinuous or wavy, longitudinally rugose. Spores when recent, dull red in mass, becoming paler in time, averaging 6 ». in diameter. Shawangunk and Adirondack Mts., N. Y. The excessive variability which characterizes the genus Cribraria is especially shown by the group of species having net-works with angular knots at the intersections. The type species of Schrader have served their purpose so well for nearly a century that all later monographers have continued them without question and with few additions to their numbers. There is, however, in American speci- mens at least, a steady and well marked intergradation between these central types, evolving an infinite number of variations which serve to confuse and perplex the student. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395 There are also many intermediate types, some of which are quite as constant and possess quite as marked an individuality as the Schraderian types, which cannot legitimately be referred to them even as varieties. The species just described may be cited as an exam- ple. I have found specimens of it several years apart, growing in widely different habitats and yet the specific characters are constant in all cases. In its scattered and solitary growth, its tall slender stipes and relaxed habit, it resembles C. microcarpa, in its net-work it approaches C. tenella, and its spores have the color of the paler forms of C. purpurea. With all of these resemblances, however, it has a marked individ- uality. Trichia Andersoni. Sporangia sessile, closely aggregated in clusters, globose, flattened, sometimes a little elongated, usually -4—5 mm. in diameter. Walls of sporangia sometimes roughened or corrugated showing under the lens fine lines or striz radiating from local centers. Color of the unbroken sporangia dark olivaceous. Capillitium composed of cylindrical elaters of a deep orange yel- low color, 3°75 ». in diameter, provided with four spirals winding evenly and closely, withovt or with very narrow interspaces. Ends of elaters tapering, 18 ». long, the outer half being smooth or free from spirals. Spores greenish-yellow or olivaceous 11-12 vp. in diameter, delicately spinulose, but apparently smooth under medium power lenses. Sand Couleé, Montana, F. W. Anderson. This Trichia presents a strong contrast between its olivaceous spores and its deep orange capillitium. It differs from the Tvrichia chrysosperma group of sessile aggregate Trichias, in the absence of interspiral or longitudinal filaments. Hemiarcyria obscura. Sporangia sessile, scattered, globose, or elongated globose slightly curved, dusky or brownish-red in color, inconspicuous, ‘4 to 1 mm. in length by about ‘4 mm. in width. Capiilitium of a dull brick red color, composed of a sparingly branched, loose meshed net-work with few or no free ends. Tubes of capillitium slender, uniform, without expansions, 2°5 mm. in diam- eter, provided with seven or eight spirals winding evenly with nar- row interspaces, faint and inconspicuous under medium power lenses. 396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Spores 10-10.5 ». delicately warted and of a pale lemon-yellow color. Sand Couleé, Montana, F. W. Anderson. The noteworthy features in this Hemiarcyria are the slender and faintly marked capillitium and the strong contrast in color, as in the preceding species, between the spores and capillitium. Hemiarcyria longifila. Sporangia simple, stipitate, erect, golden-yellow in color, globose- turbinate or pyriform, rupturing irregularly at the top leaving a short funnel-shaped receptacle. Sporangium wall thin, translucent, shining. Height of sporangium, including stipe, averaging 1°3 mm. Stipes dark red-brown, longitudinally rugose. Capillitium composed usually of single long threads, not branched or very sparingly branched. These threads are doubled in their course into a succession of loops which are usually twisted upon themselves, the whole expanding upon the rupture of the sporangium wall into an elongated tangled mass. Tubes of capillitium 3°5-4 ». in diameter, provided usually with four spirals sparsely spinulose with short, sharp spines, winding evenly and regularly and separated by wide interspaces two or three times their width ; adjoining spirals connected by conspicuous longitu- dinal filaments. Capillitium and spores concolorous, being orange-yellow in mass. Spores delicately warted, 9-10 ». in diameter. Fairmount Park, Philadelphia. Externally this species resembles Hemiarcyria clavata Pers. and has probably often been mistaken for it. The capillitium, however, in its structural details and habit of growth is widely different. The partial untwisting of the loops of the capillitium by drying, after the rupture of the sporangium, causes it to be projected and elon- gated, sometimes two or three times the length of the sporangium. In this particular it resembles Hemiarcyria rubiformis, but the mass of capillitium is not nearly so dense. Hemiarcyria Varneyi. Sporangia stipitate, erect, elongated ovate, about 1 mm. high including stipes. Sporangium wall evanescent above, breaking away at maturity leaving a shallow cup-like receptacle at the base. Stipes short, ‘2 mm. or less in height, dull brown. Capillitium dull ochre, attached to the center of the receptacle, elongated, form- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397 ing a closely meshed reticulation, having numerous short, slightly clavate free ends which proceed from the peripheral meshes. Tubes of capillitium 3°2-3°5 ». wide, provided with seven or eight spirals winding unevenly with interspaces averaging the width of a spiral. The free ends and the external loops of the capillitium from which they proceed, spinulose with short, blunt spines attached to.the spirals. Spores 6°25 ». in diameter, pale, smooth. Kansas, Miss May Varney (com. W. T. Swingle). This species must be referred to the comprehensive genus Hemiar- eyria by reason of the spiral structure of its capillitium ; in all other respects, it resembles the genus Arcyria and would unhesitatingly be referred to it, without a microscopic examination of the threads. The habit of growth of the sporangium with its evanescent upper wall and permanent saucer-like base, the close mesh of the capilli- tium net, and the small, smooth, thin walled spores are all charac- teristic of the genus Arcyria. Together with the neighboring American species Hemiarcyria stipata Swz. which has an analogous structure, it properly forms a separate subsection of the genus. DIANEMA Novy. Gen. Sporangia simple or plasmodiocarpous with membranaceous non- caleareous walls. Capillitium composed of threads without characteristic thicken- ings, running entirely across the sporangium, attached both to the base and to the opposite wall, and not joined together to form a net-work. Dianema Harveyi. Sporangia sessile, generally rounded or cushion-shaped, flattened above, averaging about 1 mm.indiameter,35 mm. in height, sometimes elongated and bent into an ‘irregular horse-shoe-shape, color gold bronze, with a metallic lustre. Sporangium walls membranaceous, thin, translucent, containing no trace of lime, rupturing irregularly. Capillitium and spores concolorous, being brownish-yellow in mass. Capillitium composed of numerous slender threads from 1°5 to 2 yw. in diameter, not connected with each other, simple, without free branches but often forked two or three times near their origin or in- sertion, nearly parallel, taut, running from base to the top of the sporangium. Spores 8 ». in diameter, pale yellow under a micro- 398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. scope, delicately spinulose, but apparently smooth under medium power lenses. Orono, Maine, F. L. Harvey. This is in some respects an anomalous genus which it is difficult to classify satisfactorily. In the structural relation of the capilli- tium to the sporangium walls, it is analogous to the sessile species of the Didymiacez, but it lacks the violaceous colored spores and the calcareous external walls characteristic of that family. It is most nearly allied to the Perichzenaceze by reason of the color of its spores and its simple unmarked capillitium, but cannot correctly be classified with that family, at least in the classification of recent monographers without some modification of their definition of the family limitations. At present it stands as a single representative of a new and sep- arate family adjoining the Perichzenacez in the order Calonemez Rost. It has been deemed advisable in the present paper, to specify ap- proximately the amplification used in the foregoing descriptions of the sculpturing of the spores and capillitium of the species repre- sented, in order to prevent errors in determination. By medium power lenses, therefore, such lenses are meant as the one-quarter or one-fifth inch objectives in common use, which will give an amplification with a one inch ocular, of from 400 to 500 dia- meters. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399 JULY 7: Mr. THomAs MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Twenty-five persons present. The death of Richard M. Schomburg, a correspondent, March 24, 1891, was announced. JULY 14. Mr. THomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Twenty-two persons present. JULY 21. Mr. Toomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Sixteen persons present. A paper entitled “The Summer Birds of Harvey’s Lake, Luzerne Co., Penna., with remarks on the Faunal Position of the Region,” by Witmer Stone, was presented for publication. JULY 28. Mr. THomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Thirteen persons present. John L. Kinsey and Charles W. Dulles, M. D. were elected members. The following was ordered to be printed :— 400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF VAMPYROPS. BY HARRISON ALLEN, M. D. Vampyrops zarhinus, sp. nov. Horizontal portion of nose-leaf free-projecting ; upper lip crossed by a row of small warts. Outer margin of the tragus scarcely ser- rate and bears a single tooth at the upper border of the well-defined notch. The tipscarcely acuminate. The auricle moderately elongate, shorter thanjthe head, external basal lobe rounded with a sharply inverted border anteriorly. Fur dark brown above, lighter shade of brown beneath. The dorsal aspect of forearm covered with short hair. Two lateral white head stripes are present. A faint median napal white stripe is dis- cernible which disappears between the shoulders, and a trace only again seen for a short distance farther down. Interfemoral mem- brane excised on a level with the distal third of the tibia. Back of thigh, and leg hairy; a thin sparse growth seen on the dorsum of the interfemoral membrane. The first phalanx of the third digit over one-half the length of the second; the third phalanx twice the length of the second. In other respects as in J. lineatus. The manal formula’ is as follows: 1st interspace, 3mm., 2nd interspace, 17 mm., 3rd interspace, 25 mm. Difference between 2nd and 8rd,8 mm. Forearm, 37 mm. Skull 22 mm. long; greatest breadth (bi-auricular), 102 mm. ; least width (at proencephalon),6 mm. Mesopterygoid fossa narrow, acu- minate ; pterygoid produced in a distinct spine ; angular process of the mandible practically nil, posterior border of the coronoid pro- cess concave. 1 I proposed the term manal formula for the widths of the spaces between the metacarpal bones at the distal ends when the wing is extended—as compared with the length of the forearm—in 1690. (See Proc. Amer. Philosoph. Soc. xxvii, Jan. 23rd.) This formula has been found by me to be of value in distin- guishing species in a group in which many of the best characters are not found on the periphery. It has been suggested to me that this term should be ‘ manual” instead of “manal.” I avoided the term ‘‘ manual” since the significance uni- formly attached to this adjective forbad in my judgment its employment in this new connection, and that it was permissible to slight!y modify the spelling of the word. If, however, such a course be found inadmissible the word * pteral”” may be substituted. 1891. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401 Teeth. The maxillary incisors much smaller than in J. lineutus, without notch on cutting edge, converging but not touching; the interval between them equalling that between the rudimental lateral incisor and the canine. First premolar not touching second pre- molar, compressed from before backward. Second premolar with well defined denticle on posterior border. Canine with a narrow groove on posterior surface just outside axis of tooth-row ; first molar smaller than second ; no disposition for basis of paracone and meta- cone to join protocone, but the grinding surface is broad and simple ; protocone and hypocone are rudimental, scarcely raised above the gum. The paracone sending caliciform lines about the base of the metacone limb and partially enclosing it. The characters of the second molar quite as first. The third molar in tooth row, and about one-fourth the size of the second molar,—rudiments of protocone, paracone and metacone being discernible. The mandibular incisors with intervals between the teeth and between third tooth and canine. The canine and premolar much asin V. lineatus ; the posterior border of the paracone of the second premolar is distinguished by being crenulated. The canine as high as the second premolar. The molars are more rudimental than those of V. dineatus. The last molar is not acuminate as in this species, but is flat and, relatively to the size of the second molar, is much larger, being indeed one-third the size of the second and rela- tively larger than in V. dineatus. The molar teeth throughout with disposition to marginal cusps,—the grinding surface being smooth and concaye. MEASUREMENTS. MM Head and body (from crown of head to base of tail), 433 Length of arm, 21 Length of forearm, 37 First digit { Length of first metacarpal bone, 3 ( Length of first phalanx, 5 Second digit { Length of second metacarpal bone, 28 ( Length of first phalanx, 33 ~ Length of third metacarpal bone, ot | gs I Ae tactic j Length of first phalanx, 15 ; Length of second phalanx, 21 | Length of third phalanx, 103 402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. MM. ( Length of fourth metacarpal bone, 30 Fourth digit < Length of first phalanx, 11 ( Length of second phalanx, 13 Length of fifth metacarpal bone, 36 Fifth digit Length of first phalanx, 8 Length of second phalanx, 11 Length of head, 14 Height of ear, 15 Height of tragus, i) Length of thigh, 10 Length of tibia, 13 Length of foot, 10 One adult female (gravid) in alcohol. Mus. Comp. Zool. Cam- bridge, Mass. Habitat Brazil. Collected by Thayer expedition. I am indebted to Prof. Alexander Agassiz for the opportunity of studying this form. V. zarhinus agrees with V. vittatus, V. infuscus, and V. lineatus in the possession of three molars in the upper jaw, but is smaller than any of these species, since the forearm is but 35 mm. long and the distance from the front of the canine to the back of the second molar is but 7 mm. It resembles V. infuscus in the indistinct dor- sal stripe but is distinguished therefrom by the presence of well defined facial stripes. In the rudimental angular process of the lower jaw and the long pointed mesopterygoid fossa, V. zarhinus is readily distinguished from V. lineatus the only other species which I have examined. In none of the species, even including the aberrant V. carraciolae Thomas, are the incisor teeth as wide apart as in V. zarhinus and in this respect it recalls the species of Chiroderma. The rudimental condition of the angular process of the mandible if found to be a constant character in all the species of Vampyrops will serve to distinguish this genus from its ally Chiroderma in which the process examined is of immense size, quite as large, indeed, as in Brachyphylla. Remarks on Vampyrops lineatus. The only other species of the genus with which I am familiar is V. lineatus. In this form the nose-leaf is not free and projecting at the horizontal portion; the auricle is more deeply emarginate than in V. zarhinus and is without the incuryation of the anterior part of the basal lobe. The tragus is more distinctly crenulate and has a much smaller basal notch. The 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403 notch in the interfemoral membrane is on a line with the proximal third of the femur. The manal formula is widely different. It is as follows: 2nd interspace, 5 mm., 3rd interspace, 20 mm., 4th interspace, 36mm. Difference between 3rd and 4th, 16mm. Forearm, 48 mm. Skull. The greatest length, 25 mm.; greatest width, 10 mm.; least width, 64 mm.; distance from front of maxillary canine to posterior border of second molar, 9 mm.; angular process much larger than in V. zarhinus, but smaller than in any other stenoder- matous genus examined.' Mesopterygoid fossa broad, rounded at anterior end; pterygoid not produced ; posterior border of coronoid process not concave. The following embrace the more important measurements of V. lineatus : MM. Head and body (from crown of head to base of tail), 57 Length of forearm, 48 Length of first phalanx, 18 Third digit Length of second phalanx, 23 Length of third phalanx, 15 . . f Length of first phalanx, 133 ae | Length of second phalanx, 16 ; hk Length of first phalanx, 192 oe | Length of second phalanx, 12 Length of head, 27 Height of ear, 17 Height of tragus, Length of thigh, 15 Length of tibia, Wf Length of foot, 10 Teeth of V. lineatus. Incisor teeth with notch on cutting edge not touching each other or the canines; proportions much as in J. zar- hinus but the centrals somewhat wider and larger. First premolar compressed from before backward, in contact with oblique posterior border of the canine ; proportions as in V. zarhinus. Second premolar with broad denticle on posterior border. Maxillary molars with markings about base of metacone more distinct than in V. zarhinus. The palatal aspect of paracone fretted. The first molar with large conical protoconid; paraconid rudimental, not differentiated from 1 This list includes all the genera excepting Pygoderma, Ametrida and Sten- oderma. 404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. the conspicuous lingual cingulum, a sharply projected anterior basal lobe continuous with commissure (overlapping the crown of the second premolar in part) forms the anterior border of the tooth. To the outer side of the lingual cingulum, 7. e., on the grinding face of crown, are two nodules in position of metaconid; hypoconid inconspicuous; entoconid conspicuous, cusp-like and joined by a high posterior commissure. The second molar with opposed proto- conid and paraconid followed by a deep posterior prolongation with a cresent-like posterior border which is accentuated on lingual side to form a cusp (entoconid). Remarks on Chiroderma. Since Mr. Oldfield Thomas (Am. Mag. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV, 1889) has claimed that Chiroderma is not dis- tinct from Vampyrops, an examination of the dentition of C. Salvini was substituted with the following result: The maxillary incisors with slender cylindroid centrals which are four times the length of the laterals end without notched free edges. Canines as long as the. combined length of the molars (measured from buccal aspect) and delicately fluted on the posterior surface. First premolar about one-fourth the size of the second and contiguous with canine. An interval is defined between the premolars; the second premolar is with well developed basal cusps both anteriorly and posteriorly, but is without denticle on the posterior border. The first molar. The thickened conjoined base of the sectorial paracone and metacone contiguous with the base of the protocone on the grinding surface of the tooth ; no basal development in meta- cone such as is seen in Vampyrops; hypocone reduced to a depressed rudiment without cusp. Protocone robust, cuspidate, twice the height of the same in Vampyrops. The second molar. The base of the paracone and metacone not conjoined or touching the base of the protocone; hypocone absent ; first mandibular premolar rudimental, flat, scarcely raised above the gum line, touching canine but not second premolar. The second premolar long, prominent, almost as high as the canine,—a sharp ledge-like cingulum at base anteriorly. Paraconid large, trenchant and deeply fluted on anterior surface; hypoconid much lower than it but also trenchant. The rest of the tooth broad, low, flat, without raised border in region of the entoconid. Last molar with protoconid larger than the paraconid. A com- missure extends from the protoconid to be continuous with the lin- gual cingulum. Paraconid not developed from cingulum; hypo- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405 conid simple but well defined, conoidal ; entoconid well developed. An unnamed nodule on posterior border of the tooth at the buccal side of the entoconid. The molars throughout with cusps directly on the grinding surface, i. e,, not confined to the margins. The’cranium is in like manner distinct from Vampyrops in the great size of the angular process of the mandible. In my judgment differences from Vampyrops of the kind denoted in the above description are sufficient to separate Chiroderma from other Sternoderms, until the shapes of the molar teeth shall be shown to have less taxonomic value in this group than in others of the order. The disposition to dorsal elongation of the anterior nasal aperture is a feature so unusual that it should have also weight in distinguishing Chiroderma even after acknowledging that the cleft disappears in old individuals. 406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. AvcGustT 4. Mr. Cuas. Roperts in the chair. Sixteen persons present. Aveust 11. Mr. Cuas. Morris in the chair. Eleven persons present. Aveust 18. Mr. Cuas. Morets in the chair. Sixteen persons present. Avcust 25. Mr. Cuas. Morris in the chair. Seventeen persons present. Mollusea from Nantucket, Mass—Mr. H. A. Pitspry exhibited four trays and one bottle of land and fresh-water mollusks collected by Dr. Harrison Allen in Nantucket, and stated that with the excep- tion of Helix hortensis no land or fresh-water shells had heretofore been reported from that island. The species collected are as follows: Helix hortensis, Zonites (Hyalinia) arboreus, Limnea columella var. and a small species of the bivalve Pisidiwm. The two latter are typically fresh-water mol- lusks. Helix hortensis has been lately regarded by some concholo- gists as a native American, not an importation from Europe as all earlier students of our shells supposed. There is much evidence in favor of this view. Dr. W. H. Dallin conversation with the speaker has stated that the shells have been found in pre-historic shell-heaps (kitchen-middings) on the Maine coast, at considerable depths. The genitalia of specimens collected alive in Nantucket by Dr. Allen seem to agree very closely with the figures of German and English specimens given by Schmidt and Ashford. They have the charac- teristic dart-sack, the mucus or multifid glands composed of four long ccecze, ete. Zonites arboreus is not different from specimens of that species found over the greater part of North America. The specimens referred to Limnea columella are very small, slender, ex- 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407 cessively fragile, and are beautifully decussated by spiral strise and growth-lines, which cut the surface into little squares. Whorls 33, length 8°2, width 4:2 mill.; length of aperture 5:6, width 3 mm.; color light brown. It is probably a local race, as I have seen none like them from the mainland. The Pisidium is a small form which I have not identified specific- ally. A specimen of Ancylus found by Dr. Allen was lost. Geological Features of the Meteoric Iron Locality in Arizona.— Dr. A. E. Foote described the remarkable geological features of the locality where he had found meteoric iron containing diamonds, an unreported communication on which had been made by Prof. G. A. Koenig before the Academy at the meeting of June 25rd, 1891. Nearly all the small meteoric fragments were found at a point about ten miles southeast from Cafion Diablo near the base of a nearly circular elevation which strikingly resembles an old crater and is known locally as “ Crater Mountain.” He believed this to to be the same as Sunset Knoll figured on the topographical sheets of the U. S. Geological Survey. It is 185 miles due north from Tueson and 500 miles west of Albuquerque. The signet iron was discovered about 30 miles from Tucson. This elevation, according to the Survey, rises 432 feet above the plain. Its center is occupied by a cavity nearly three-quarters of a mile in diameter, the sides of which are so steep that animals which have descended into it have been unable to escape and have left their bleached bones at the bottom, which seemed to be from fifty to one hundred feet below the surrounding plain. The rocks which form the rim of the so-called “ crater” are sandstone and limestone and are uplifted on all sides at an almost uniform angle of from thirty-five to forty degrees. A careful search, however, failed to reveal any lava, obsidian or other volcanic production. Prof. Gilbert had suggested that this so-called “ crater’? was like the depressions on the surface of the moon produced by the impact of an enormous meteoric mass. This view had been supported by other gentlemen, one of whom said that the diamonds at Kimberly probably came from the decomposition of meteorites that had pro- duced the depressions in which the precious stones are found. Hemiarcyria clavata Pers—Dr. Gro. H. Rex described the structure of the capillitium of Hemiarcyria clavata, illustrating his remarks by a mounted slide under the microscope. As most of the descriptions of the Mycetozoa have been drawn from examinations made with objectives of moderate powers, many very interesting and unexpected results in the study of even familiar and well known species may be obtained by the use of homogeneous immersion or other higher power objectives. As an example of one of the surprises of this kind, the speaker instanced the common Hemiarcyria clavata Pers. 408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. The monographers of the Mycetozoa have described the capilli- tium of this species as being composed of a network of tubes having five smooth spiral thickenings wound evenly around them, at inter- vals equal to about three times the width of the spirals, The speaker had, examined specimens from many American localities and found in every case that the spirals were not smooth but were really fringed by a single row of upright, cylindric-clavate, some- times capitate processes of an exceedingly transparent, plasmodic structure, which followed the median line of the spirals and pro- jected rigidly from it. _ These processes equal in height the diameter of the spirals, and are quite transparent, but can be better seen by aniline staining. They stand in rank closely together, on some specimens being distinct and separate, while on “others they are so closely ranged that the bases seem almost to be joined together, the clavate or cap- itate ends, however, being distinct. The speaker had examined only American specimens and therefore was not prepared to state that this peculiarity of structure was universal. This condition is distinct from that existing in Hemiarcyria leioc- curpa Cke., a closely allied species in which the few scattered spines on the spirals are very different in size and character. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409 SEPTEMBER 1. Mr. THoomas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Twenty-two persons present. Lermy Memortau Meerrnc. Through an oversight a serious omission occurs in the record of the meeting held May 12, on the occasion of the death of Dr. Joseph Leidy, late President of the Academy. ‘The first paper read was by Dr. Winitam Hunt, who wrote of the personal history and character of the deceased Presi- dent. The absence of Dr. Hunt’s name from the list of those who read papers on the occasion is the more to be regretted as his con- tribution was prepared with loving appreciation and knowledge of his life-long friend. SEPTEMBER 8. Mr. THomAas MEEHAN, Vice-President, in the chair. Seventy-five persons present. North Greenland Expedition. Preliminary reports were read from Messrs Peary, Sharp and Heilprin of the operations of the Expedition fitted out under the auspices of the Academy for the exploration of Greenland, which sailed from Brooklyn, June 6th, at 5 P.M. Detailed accounts of the scientific observations made during the voyage will be published in the Proceedings of a,later date. SEPTEMBER 15. Rey. H. C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair. Three hundred and ninety-eight persons present. The Ornithological Section reported its organization with the fol- lowing officers :— Director, Spencer F. Trotter, M. D. Vice- Director, George S. Morris. Recorder, Samuel N. Rhoads. Treasurer, Isaac C. Martindale. 27 410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Secretary, Charles E. Ridenour. Conservator, Witmer Stone. The third Monday of each month was selected as the time of meeting. Pror. HEILPRIN made the first of a series of communications on the physiography of Greenland which was followed by an exhibi- tion by means of lantern and screen, of photographs taken during the expedition by Dr. BENJAMIN SHARP. SEPTEMBER 22. Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair. One hundred and eighty-three persons present. SEPTEMBER 29, Mr. Joun H. REDFIELD in the chair. Seventy-three persons. present. The death of Dr. John G. Lee, a member, September 9, was an- nounced. Messrs Angelo Heilprin, J. P. Lesley, Persifor Frazer, Wm. B. Scott and Benjamin Smith Lyman were appointed as the Committee on the Hayden Memorial Geological Award. Dr. Wm. E. Hughes and Dr. John MacFarlane were elected members. The following were ordered to be printed :— 1891.) - NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411 NOTES ON SOME LITTLE KNOWN AMERICAN FOSSIL TORTOISES. BY DR. G. BAUR. 1. COMPSEMYS Leidy. The genus Compsemys was established by Prof. Leidy’ in 1856 on a vertebral and costal bone of a tortoise from the Laramie formation of the Judith River. The only character given at that time, was: “ The free surface of all the bones is thickly studded with granular tu- bercles, which give to it a shagreened appearance, differing from anything observed in recent turtles.” The type of the genus is Compsemys victus Leidy. It was figured by Prof. Leidy’ three years later, in the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society. Prof. Cope’ adopted this genus and referred to it Emys obscurus Leidy, published at the same time with Compsemys victus. In 1875 he added Compsemys ogmius Cope from the Milk River.* In 1876 Prof. Cope’ established two more species from the Lara- mie of Montana, under the names of Compsemys imbricarius, and C. variolosus. All the species described to this date were from the Laramie Formation. In 1877 a new species of Compsemys was described by Prof. Cope’ from the Jurassic Beds of Colorado, under the name of Compsemys plicatulus. The remains of this species were found with those of Dinosaurs by Mr. C. W. Lucas of Canyon City, Colorado; they represent the oldest American tortoise. The species was based on “ portions of both carapace and plastron of several individuals.” So far the genus Compsemys was only known from the carapace and plastron, from which its characters were taken ; ‘tortoises with 1 Leidy, Joseph. Notices of extinct Vertebrata discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden, during the expedition to the Sioux country, under the command of Lieut. G. K. Warren. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., vol. viii, 1856, p. 312, Phila., 1857. 2Leidy, Joseph. Extinct Vertebrata from the Judith River and great Lignite Formations of Nebraska. Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. 1859, p. 152, pl. xi., figs. 5, 6, 7. 3 Cope, E. D. Synopsis of the Extinct Batrachia and Reptilia of North America. Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., vol. xiv, Phila., 1870, p. 124. *Cope, E. D. The Vertebrata of the Cretaceous Formations of the West. Washington, 1875, p. 41. 5 Cope, E. D. Descriptions of some Vertebrate Remains from the Fort Union Beds of Montana, Paleontol. Bulletin, No. 22, p. 10 (published Nov. 138, 1876), also Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1876. 6 Cope, E. D. On Reptilian Remains from the Dakota Beds of Colorado, Paleont. Bulletin, No. 26 (November 21, 1877), pp. 195. 196, reprinted from American Philos. Soc. xvii, 1877, pp, 195, 196. 412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF = (1891. marginal bones completely united with solid plastron, and the usual dermal scuta, and which differ from HEmys in their Trionyx-like sculpture.” Cope, p. 195. In 1886, I began my researches on the Testudinata; lately I have examined the collections of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and the Smithsonian Institution, containing the types of Prof. Leidy ; also the collection of Prof. Cope who permitted me to study his types at different times with the greatest liberality. The result of my examination is, that Compsemys proves to be a member of the Pleurosternide, having the pelvis free from carapace and plastron, a complete mesoplastron and a continuous series of neural bones; having also infra-marginals and an intergular. The extensive material of Compsemys plicatulus Cope, in the Peabody Museum from the Jurassic of Como, Wyoming, the same locality which yielded the numerous mammals and dinosaurs, was examined at the sametime. Compsemvys plicatulus was found to be a very abundant form in this horizon and it was possible to study nearly all the parts of the skeleton. Of the Laramie forms nothing but the shell is known so far, and this shows all the characters of the Jurassic form ; it is therefore impossible, at present, to separate the Laramie and Jurassic tortoises generically from each other. The Laramie form very often has ali the elements of the carapace and plastron so strongly united, that the sutures, especially on the plastron, cannot be distinguished. In a short note on the classification of the Testu- dinata,’ I have given the principal characters of the generalized sub-order Amphichelydia, Lydekker. These characters were gained from the study of the Jurassie form Compsemys plicatulus Cope. They are :“ Nasals free; a squamoso-parietal arch; descending processes of prefrontals joining vomer; stapes in an open groove of the quadrate; pterygoids narrow in the middle, without wing-like lateral expansions, separating quadrate and basisphenoid ; epiptery- goid well developed and free; dentary bones distinct. Cervical vertebree with well developed transverse processes, more in front of vertebra, with single articular faces, biconcave; dorsal vertebre, sacral vertebrae, with well-developed ribs; ribs of sacral vertebree connected with centrum and neuroid. Pelvis not anchylosed to the carapace and plastron. Epiplastra in contact with hyoplastra, ento- plastron oval or rhomboidal; a complete series of peripheralia connected with the ribs.” 7 Baur, G. On the Classification of the Testudinata. “American Naturalist, June, 1890, pp. 530-5386. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413 Shortly after this a note appeared by Prof. Marsh* in the August number of the American Journal of Science, entitled: “Notice of Some Extinct Testudinata.” In this paper Compsemys plicatulus appears under a new gen- eric and specific name: Glyptops ornatus, Marsh. The skull, as figured in Pl. VII, fig. 1, gives only an idea of the general shape. The description is given in the following words: “ A striking feat- ure of this skull is that its entire external surface is elaborately sculptured. This character, hitherto unknown in the Testudinata, has suggested the name proposed. “Tn its general features, this skull resembles that of Chelydra ser- pentina Linn. It is wedge-shaped in form, when seen from above. The orbits are small, and well in front. The nasal opening is di- rected upward, rather than forward. The premaxillaries project downward in front into a tooth-like beak. The nasals appear to be distinct. The maxillaries are deeply grooved below, but show no indications of true teeth. The skull is roofed over posteriorly, as in Chelone, and some other sea-turtles. “There is a posttemporal arch. The occipital condyle is nearly round, and has a deep pit in the center. The condyle is formed en- tirely of the basioccipital, as the thin exoccipital plates do not reach the articular surface. The basioccipital processes are prominent and directed backward. The pterygoids separate the quadrates and the basisphenoid. At their union with each other, they are much constricted, but expand in front. The quadrate is stout and curved, and its articular face is deeply notched. “The lower jaws referred to this species are slender and much less sculptured than the skull. The dentary bones unite at the sym- physis by a short, open suture and form a sharp, elevated point to meet the decurved tooth-like beak above. The upper border is quite sharp, and fits well into the deep alveolar sulcus of the maxil- lary.” THE SKULL. I shall go now successively over those characters which are not quite correct. It is an interesting and important fact that the sculpturing of the skull agrees exactly with the sculpturing of the carapace and plastron. The nasals are distinct and meet in the 8 Marsh, O. C. Notice of some Extinct Testudinata. Am. Journ. Se., vol. XL, August, 1890, pp. 177-179, pl. VII, VIII. 414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. median line; the same character I have observed in the skull of Toxochelys from the Cretaceous of Kansas. Prof. Marsh says the maxillaries show no indications of true teeth; but they show no indications of teeth whatever and are not different in this respect from any other Testudinata living or extinct. It is stated that “the skull is roofed over posteriorly, as in Chelone and some other sea-turtles.” It is a character of all the sea-turtles (Pinnata) to have the skull roofed over. “There is a post-temporal arch.” I do not know what Professor Marsh wants to express by this. “The occipital condyle is nearly round and has a deep pit in the center.” This pit is very common among the Testudinata and is found always where the basioccipital meets the exoccipitals. The statement that “the condyle is formed entirely of the basioccipital ” is incorrect. The exoccipitals take part in the formation of the condyle just as in Chelydra. If Professor Marsh means by “ ex- occipital plates,” the upper part of the exoccipital, he is right in the statement that they do not reach the articular surface. They do not reach this surface in any of the Testudinata. I shall now give some supplementary remarks on the same skull. At first it must be stated that the sutures are very difficult to distinguish, and that I was unable to define them on the upper part of the skull, with the exception of the nasals and the median suture. As stated before, the whole skull is sculptured like the shell. It is somewhat compressed laterally behind, and is therefore broader than shown in Prof. Marsh’s figure. Seen from the side it resembles very much the skull of Chelydra, but is even more emarginated in the region where the jugal meets the quadratojugal. The whole palatal aspect agrees with Chelydra ; the foramina palatina are very large. The petrosal is not produced in front. The orbit is not closed behind by bone, but is open. The skull as a whole shows characters which we expect to find in the ancestors of Cryptodira and Pleurodira. The quadrate resembles mostly that of the Pinnata, the whole arrangement of palate, pterygoid, basisphenoid is that of the Cryptodira, the presence of the epipterygoid is also a character of the Cryptodira and so is the union of the descending processes of the prefrontal with the vomer. But the free nasals, the suturally united dentary bones, and the absence of the production" of the petrosal are characteristic of the Pleurodira. 1 This production is only absent in Dermochelys among the Cryptodira. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415 The Cryptodira developed from the Amphichelydia of which Compsemys is the best known member, by the union of the nasals with tke prefrontals; the union of the dentary bones, and the development of the production on the petrosal. The Pleurodira developed from the Amphichelydia, by the lateral expansion of the pterygoid bones, the reduction of the posterior process of these bones, resulting in the non-separation of quadrates and basi-sphenoid, by the disappearance of the union between vomer and descending processes of prefrontals, and the disappearance of the epipterygoid as a separate element. I have now to discuss the other parts of the skeleton. CARAPACE AND PLASTRON. Prof. Marsh thinks that the carapace represented in Plate VII, fig. 2 was not found with the “skull, and may possibly represent a distinct form.” There is not the slightest proof of the latter statement. First, as mentioned above, the skull shows exactly the same (not similar, Marsh) sculpture as the shell; and second all the numerous remains of tortoises from this locality belong to the genus Compsemys, and probably to the same species, Compsemys plicatulus, Cope. I. Dermal Shields or Scutes. (Scuta.)* a. CARAPACE. Vertebral-scutes. Lateral-scutes. Supramarginal-scutes (among living Testudinata only in Afacrochelys). b. Disc. Marginal-scutes, the front one generally called nuchal shield, I called cerz7- cal, to distinguish it from the underlying bone (nuchal-bone). The pos- terior one, if single, I called cauda/-scute. c. PLASTRON. Intergulare (ia). Inframarginalia (Axillare, Inguinale). Gularia. Submarginalia (only seen in a great number of Brachialia. a young Chelonia spec. from the Galapagos Is- Pectoralia. lands [Am. Nat., May, 1890, p. 487] ). Abdominalia. Femoralia. Analia. Interanale (only in Cheloniidae). Il. Dermal Ossifications. a. CARAPACE. Neuralia. Postneuralia (the elements between the last neural and the pygale). Pleuralia (generally called costal bones). b. Disc. Peripheralia (generally called marginal bones), nuchale, pygale. *I have adopted the above nomenclature for the dermal shields and dermal ossifications of the carapace and plastron of the Testudinata. (Zool. Anz., No. 285, 1888.) 416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. c. PLASTRON. Epiplastron—clavicle-+-dermal ossification. Endoplastron=interclavicle +dermal ossification. Hyoplastron | Mesoplastron Hypoplastron Xiphiplastron | In the figure of the carapace given by Prof. Marsh no indication of the impressions of dermal shields is to beseen. I may state, that the shields become indistinct in old individuals, but can generally be seen on the peripherals (marginals). There is a distinct cervical (nuchal) in this genus, the vertebral shields are very broad. There are eight neuralia and two post-neuralia all touching each other and preventing the pleuralia from meeting in the middle line. In the drawing given by Prof. Marsh, which is partially restored, only one postneural is given, but in other specimens two such elements are present. Pleurale has a sharp edge on its lower side as in Pleurodira and some Cryptodira. The hyoplastron is united to the first pleural bones by gomphosis; there is a distinct groove for the union with this element; the hypoplastron reaches the pleurale 5 and 6; on the union of both a short but deep groove for the end of the hypoplastron isfound. The plastron is united with the carapace by gomphosis, and reaches from pleur. 2 to pleurale 8. The ends of the ribs project a little over the end of the pleuralia. The plastron is rounded behind, and only very little emarginated. The median end of the right mesoplastron is not so broad as that of the left one; and both the mesoplastra become attenuated at the middle. The Xiphiplastron shows a small pit for the reception of the pubis. The dermal shields agree essentially with Pleurosternon. + ==abdominal ribs+-dermal ossification. | THE VERTEBRE. 1. Cervicals. The most remarkable fact in the cervical vertebrie is that they are biccelous; like the Pleurodira, they have single articular faces and show no ginglymoid articulations like the Cryp- todira and Trionychia. In a former paper’ I have tabulated the dif- ferent modifications found in the living Testudinata; it is very much to be regretted that so very little or hardly anything is known about the condition found in the older fossil forms. Chitracephalus Dollo has all the cervicals preserved, but nothing is published yet about the condition of the articular faces, which probably show some interesting points and may help to explain the arrangement 1 Bauer, G. Revision meiner Mittheilungen im Zoologischen Anzeiger mit Nachtraegen. (Die Halswirbel der Testudinata.) Zool. Anz. No. 806, 1889. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417 seen in the Trionychia. The splendid specimens of Idiochelys in the Museum of Lyons (France), also have the cervicals preserved, but we know nothing about their structure. In the living Testudinata we find the following conditions :— I. Ginglymoid-articulations absent. a. Only one vertebra biconvex, the second; all the following coneavo-convex: Podoenemididae,' Sternothaeridae. b. Two vertebre biconvex, the fifth and the eighth ; 2-4 convex- concave, 6 concave-convex, 7 biconcave: Chelyiidae. II. Ginglymoid-articulations present. a. Only one vertebra biconvex. 1. The second, Dermatemydidae.’ . The third, Staurotypidae, Cinosternidae. . The fourth, Chelydridae, Cheloniidae, Dermochelyiide. The jifth, one specimen of Chelonia Mydas, in the Nat- ural History Mus., Brussels. The sizth ; not known. The seventh ; not known. The eighth; not known in this group but one specimen of Testudo Leithit in the Peabody Mus. shows this condition. b. Two vertebrie biconvex ; one of these is ae the eighth ; the other may be 1. The second, one specimen of one of the ‘Testudinidae, species not defined (Vaillant). . The third, Testudinidae, part, Emydidae part. 3. The fourth, Testudinidae, part, Emydidae part, Platy- sternidae. 4. The fifth, a single specimen of Testudo tabulata Walb. (Smithsonian Institution.) . The sixth, not known. 6. The seventh ; impossible. mo bo ao bo Or 1 The saddle-shaped articular faces of some cervicals in the Podocnemididae (Podocnemis, Peltocephalus) described by me (Zool. Anz. No. 298, 1888 and Amer. Naturalist, May, 1890, pp. 482-484) have to be considered as derived from a form like Zxymnochelys and the Sternothaeridae (Sternothaerus, Pelomedusa). 2 This condition I have also observed in a single specimen of the Cinoster- nidae, C. flavescens. 418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. ce. All vertebrie convex-concave: Trionychia.' d. All vertebree concave-convex: Pyvxis. From this list we see, that in all living Testudinata the posterior articular face of the eighth cervical (the Trionychia perhaps excepted) is convex; the anterior face of the first dorsal, therefore, concave. In Compsemys the first dorsal has this face also concave; we ought to expect, therefore, that-the eighth cervical has the posterior articu- lar face convex, but this is not the case. In the vertebra which I consider the eighth the posterior articular face consists of two portions. The upper one which corresponds to the original central part is slightly concave, the lower one which extends to the median keel on the lower side of the vertebra is convex. The tendency is there to form a convex articular face, but the original concave condition is still visible. The anterior face is slightly concave. The neuroids are elevated, the postzygapophyses are horizontal, very near together but not confluent. In the seventh cervical we have similar condi- tions, but the articular faces are more concave than in the eighth. There are two other vertebree which I consider as the second and - third, both are biconcave, but the neuroids are not elevated. In all these vertebrie the zygapophyses are horizontal ; the lower side of the vertebrxe are provided with a keel; the diapophyses are well developed and are not placed entirely in the middle,’ but more in front; there is no neurocentral suture. All these conditions agree more with the Pleurodira than with the Cryptodira. It may be possible that the vertebrae between the third and seventh may be of different condition, but this is not probable, because even the 8th 1 Jt is a very remarkable fact, that in 7rionyx foveatus Leidy, from the Laramie, of which I have worked out and studied a nearly complete specimen in the Peabody Museum, collected by J. B. Hatcher, the cervicals show exactly the same condition as in the living forms; even the posterior face of the 8th cervical is of the same nature. It is probable that this face has been convex in the more ancient types, as in all living Testudinata, or it may have been concave as in the Amphichelydia. The Trionychia are a very old type, which has undergone hardly any morphological changes since the Laramie in which formation they make their appearance. Iam unable to find any generic difference in the splendid Laramie species, from the living American forms of 77zomyx. If the skull is known it may prove to be different, but shell, vertebrae and limbs do not allow a generic separation. I may mention here the interesting fact, that the Trionychia are found to-day in rivers and also lakes in which we also find the old representatives of fishes. In North America, the Trionychia are met together with Lefzdostews, Amia, Spatula- via, in Africa with Polypterus and Calamoichthys; in Asia with Psephurus. Already in the Laramie we find the Trionychia together with Ginglymodi. An- other similar case we see in the geographical distribution of the Pleurodira and Dipnoi; South America, Africa, Australia; and we may perhaps yet find repre- sentatives of the Dipnoi or other ancient groups in Papua. 2 T have seen a similar case in Peltocephalus tracaxa Spix. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419 cervical, which in all living Testudinata has the posterior face con- vex, shows distinct traces of concavity. The dorsals, sacrals and caudals. There are ten dorsals and two sacrals, the number of the caudals is not known. The first dorsal is entirely pleurodiran ; all the dorsals have well developed ribs which unite with the pleurals; the rib-heads are well developed. The tenth dorsal also has a rib, which broadens distally and is suturally united to the eighth pleural which contains the rib of the ninth dorsal. The rib of the tenth dorsal is often found free from the eighth pleural, and in this case this pleural contains a deep groove for the rib. The rib of the tenth dorsal reaches only to the lower middle of the eighth pleural. On the broad distal face of the tenth rib the ilium stands, exactly as in the Emydidae and Testudinidae. The neuralia are only loosely attached to the corresponding neu- roids of the dorsals. All the neuroids are suturally united to each other. The two sacrals have well-developed ribs which are con- nected with both the centrum and the neuroids. In the first sacral the anterior and posterior neurapophyses are well developed, allow- ing not only a motion between the sacrum and the last dorsal, but also some motion between the two sacrals; the same we find in the Chelydridae. The first sacral is flat behind. I do not know the condition of the caudals. From this description it results that the arrangement of the poste- rior dorsals and sacrals is entirely Cryptodiran and not Pleurodiran. To understand this more fully I give a synopsis of the different condition of the posterior dorsals and the sacrals in the Cryptodira, Pleurodira and Trionychia. LICR YETODER A: 1. CHELONiIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal well developed ; either (dis- tally) suturally united with the eighth pleural ( Chelonia) or free ( Thalassochelys). DERMOCHELYIDAE ribs of tenth dorsal developed ; free. CHELYDRIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal generally absent.’ 1 Tn one case I have seen a rib on one side, in another case the ribs were pres- ent on both sides but only distally ossified. In the latter case a distinct sutural union took place with the eighth pleural and the ribs even reached the eleventh peripheral, forming a little groove there for union. In the same specimen, 676 of the Peabody Museum, the pygal was divided by a median suture. This case's interest- ing. Riitimeyer states that in Platychelys a distinct face is seen on the eighth pleural for the ilium, but this face which extends over to the eleventh peripheral, is probably nothing but the face for the union of the pleuroid of the tenth dorsal. ‘ 420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. STAUROTYPIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal absent.” CINOSTERNIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal absent.’ DERMATEMYDIDAB; ribs of tenth dorsal present, free. PLATYSTERNIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. Emyp1IpAx; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. : TESTUDINIDAE; ribsof tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. ApocipAe; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. II. PLEURODIRA. STERNOTHAERIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. PopOocNEMIDIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. CHELYIIDAE; ribs of tenth dorsal present, suturally united with eighth pleural. [it “PRION Y CEA: TRIONYCHIDAE ; ribs of tenth dorsal present, or absent, when pre- sent free. The oldest condition seems to be a free rib on the tenth dorsal; this may become suturally united with the eighth pleural and become reduced secondarily afterwards; or it may become reduced before its union with the eighth pleural. In the condition of the sacral vertebrae Compsemys agrees with the Cryptodira. I have shown in a previous communication,’ that the sacrum of the Pleurodira has undergone great reductions, and that the sacral vertebrze have at last partially become caudals. Nothing of this kind is to be seen in Compsemys, which agrees in the construction of the sacrum with the Cryptodira. 2 In none of the Staurotypidae or Cinosternidae have I observed a rib on the tenth dorsal; in these two families, which are very close together and ought to be considered as subfamilies of a single family, tu which also the Anostirinae belong, the rib-heads of the eighth pleural are always absent, so that the eighth pleural is in no connection with the tenth dorsal. Thisisa secondary condition, for in Psezdo- trionyx, Dollo, which probably also belongs to this group, the rib-heads are still present. 8 Baur, G. Osteologische Notizen iiber Reptilien. (Fortsetzung III.) Zool. Anz., No. 285, 1888. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421 We see that the vertebree of Compsemys also combine characters of both the Pleurodira and Cryptodira. The Cryptodira developed by changing the condition of the cervicals; the Pleurodira by changing that of the sacrals. THE SHOULDER-GIRDLE. The scapula and coracoid of different individuals are pre- served. The scapula resembles the same element in Chelydra, but has a more slender neck. The coracoid is very much broad- ened distally, as in Chelys and some other Pleurodira and the Testudinidae. I may add here some words on the morphology of the scapula of the Testudinata. There has always been much difference of opinion about this element. The scapula consists, as is well known, of two branches. The upper one generally called scapula s.s., and the lower one, which is either regarded as pre- coracoid (Huxley, Parker, Gegenbaur, etc.) or as clavicle (Goette, Wiedersheim, Hoffman). That it cannot represent the clavicle is clear ; because this element is contained in the epi-plastron of the plastron as I have shown definitely by the comparison of the Stegocephalia, Proganosauria and Testudinata." It remains to examine now whether it represents the precoracoid or whether it is a secondary formation of the scapula. It is well known that we find a very similar scapula among the Plesiosauria ; a step to this condition is also seen in Metriorhynchus, as described by Dr. Hulke in a late volume of the Proc. of the Zoo- logical Society, which I have not at hand at present. In Met- riorhynchus the ventral element of the scapula, which I have called proseapula,’ is very well developed ; but it is nothing but a process of the scapula. If this process becomes larger we have the condi- tions of the Plesiosauria and Testudinata.’ This seems to be the only reasonable explanation. It cannot represent the precoracoid, the opinion of Huxley, Gegenbaur, Parker and others. The pre- coracoid, when it is free and at all recognizable, is placed between the true coracoid and the scapula outside the acetabulum, in the formation of which it may take part or not. In this condition we find it in the Monotremata and the Theromora. If the element 1 Baur, G. Palzeohatteria Credner and the Proganosauria, Am. Journ. Sc. Arts, vol. xxxvii, April, 1889, p. 312. 2 In Zittel, Handbuch der Palaeontologie, Vol. III, p. 509. 3 In the oldest Plesiosauria, Vothosaurus, Lariosaurus, the lower part of the scapula is also very little developed. 422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. called precoracoid by Huxley and the others would represent really this bone, it would have a position entirely different; it would not be placed between the coracoid and scapula outside the acetabulum, but inside of it. The ventral process of the scapula in Testudinata and Plesiosauria, which I have named proscapula, seems to be, therefore, nothing but a secondary evolution. THE PELVIS. All the elements of the pelvis are preserved in different in- dividuals. The ilium resembles very much that in Baéna arenosa Leidy. It has the same posterior process as this form. The pubis has a very massive pectineal process which stands on the xiphiplastron, the true pubis is a slender element meeting that of the other side in the middle line. The ischium is /arger than the pubis, so that at first sight the two bones are easily confounded. The posterior process of the ischium is greatly developed and on the union of this process with the true ischium this element rests on the xiphiplastron. The branches of the ischium meet in the median line but are not united with the pubis. In structure the pelvis of Compsemys is between that of Chelydra and Chelys. The ances- tors of Chelys, which had the pelvis free from carapace and plastron, must have been very much like Compsemys in this regard. THE Fore Limes. The fore limbs are long and resemble the elements of the Emydidae. The humerus is not so much curved as in the Pleurodira and resembles in shape that bone in Terrapene; an ectepicondylar foramen is present. The hand must have been very much like that of the Emydidae. The hind limbs were of the same character, so far as known; the femur agreeing with the Emydidae; whether four or five claws were present cannot be stated at present. Conclusions. From the foregoing descriptions we see that Comps- emys is wonderfully mixed in its characters. It is half Pleurodiran half Cryptodiran. The group Amphichelydiato which it belongs must be considered as ancestral to both Cryptodira and Pleurodira. The Cryptodira developed through modification of the cervicals and the plastron; the mesoplastron disappeared successively, and in some forms also the intergular and inframarginals. The Pinnata still contain these elements, but there is no trace of a mesoplastron left. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425 The Dermatemydidae retain the inframarginals which become very much reduced in the Chelydridae, Staurotypidae and Cinosternidae ; but none of these forms have preserved a mesoplastron. The extinct Adocidae, which belong tothe same group, have lost the mesoplastron as early as in the Cretaceous, but the Jurassic Platychelis, which is probably an ancestor of these forms, still contains a vestige of this element. Another branch is represented by the Platysternidae, Emydidae and Testudinidae. The Pleurodira developed from the Amphichelydia, through specialization of the head and the carapace and plastron. One of the living forms retained the complete mesoplastron (Sternothaerus) ; in others it became reduced, Pelomedusa, Podoenemididae ; in others, Chelyiidae, it disappeared entirely. The inframarginals must have been reduced very early, for in none of the living forms do we find these elements; the intergular is always retained. A true Pleuro- diran is present already in the Cretaceous of New Jersey, Taphros- phys Cope, which is identical, with very little doubt, with Bothremys Leidy. The early history of the Testudinata remains as dark as before, even the oldest form we know, Proganochelys, which may be iden- tical perhaps with Chelytheriwm of H. v. Meyer, gives no clue. It is a typical tortoise. It may have been, in its skull and cervicals, like Compsemys, but we have to wait for new material for the solution of this question. A very peculiar circumstance in the Testudinata is the small number of presacral vertebrae. |The original number is eighteen; eight cervicals, ten dorsals. There is only one reptile with this number, all others have higher numbers; this reptile is the Triassic (?) Pareiosaurus Owen, from South Africa. Here we have also 18 presacral vertebrae. It may be that the Pareiosauria, which are a highly developed group, and the Testudinata have a common ancestor, but such ideas are nothing but speculations, which may fall at any time after a new discovery has been made. Whether we may find some day true tortoises with teeth, or whether the ancestors of the tortoises had already lost these elements, is an- other question, which cannot beanswered to-day. The oldest skull of any tortoise we know to-day shows no indication whatever of teeth. Something which looks like an indication of the former existence of teeth is seen in Bothremys of Leidy, of which I have examined the type. In this form we have deep grooves in the upper and lower jaw which look very much like roots of alveoles of a large tusk ; 424 - PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [Soa they are very much deeper than is represented in the figure given by Prof. Leidy. This genus belongs to a peculiar family of the Pleurodira with the following characters : BorHREMYDIDAE; Vomer well developed; no free nasal bones, dentaries co-ossified, small mesoplastron present (in Taphrosphys, fide Cope). This family shows.characters of the Podocnemididae and Chelyidae; like the true Pleurodira it has no descending processes of the prefrontals meeting the vomer, notwithstanding this element is present. It has no free epipterygoid and there is no production of the petrosal. In the lower jaw only the dentary bones which are firmly co-ossified, and the coronoid, which takes part in the forma- tion of the large “alveole,” just as the palate takes part in the upper jaw, are free; all the other bones are united without trace of suture, a condition present in the Podocnemididae. From such a condition to one in which the lower jaw consists only of one bony complex on each side, as seen in the Mammalia and probably the Theromora, is only a small step. THE AFFINITIES OF COMPSEMYS. As already stated by Prof. Marsh on my authority, Compsemys resembles Helochelys from the Cretaceous Greensand, and Pleuro- sternum from the Purbeck. Of both I have examined the types in the British and Munich Museums. PLEUROSTERNUM has the xiphiplastrals deeply notched ; in Compsemys and Helochelys the plastron is rounded behind. PLEUROSTERNUM has no nuchal shield (cervicale), in Compsemys and Helochelys this element is present. PLEUROSTERNUM has the mesoplastron not attenuated in the middle, as in Compsemys, and the union of the two elements is dif- ferent from that in Compsemys. Hevocue ys has the impressions of the dermal shields very well marked, in Compsemys they are not distinct." The future may show that these three forms are all members of the same genus to which the name Pleurosternum, being the oldest, would have to be applied; but at present I think it better to accept the three genera, placing them in one family, the Pleuroster- nidae, as defined by Mr. R. Lydekker.’ 1 The shoulder girdle and pelvis seem to be very much alike in Compsemys and Pleurosternuni. 2 Lydekker, R., Catalogue of the Fossil Reptilia and Amphibia in the British Museum, Part III, p. 205; also Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1889, p. 518, has de- scribed thee parts in Plewrosternum. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425 Compsemys is very nearly related to the Tertiary genus Baéna, which has probably to be considered as its direct successor. 2. BAENA. This genus of which Baéna arenosa Leidy is the type was established by Leidy in 1870. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 128 ; 1871; p. 228.) It is fully described and figured by Leidy in his Contributions to the Extinct Vertebrate Fauna of the Western Territories, Washington, 1873, pp. 160-169. Pl. XIII, figs. 1-3, XV, figs. 1-5, Pl. XVI, figs. 8-9. According to Leidy “ It partook of characters of the snappers or Chelydroids, the terrapins or Emydoids, and the sea-turtles or Chelonoids.” The principal characters given by Leidy are, the “ two pairs of gular scute areas, which together with the other scute areas, made seven pairs to the plaston ;” the presence of inframarginal scutes; and the obliteration of the sutures in the shell. To this character Prof. Cope' added the presence of a meso- plastron, and referred Leidy’s Chisternon, so far characterized by the presence of this bone, to Baéna. He also stated, that in three species he observed five costal scuta instead of four. ‘The accessory one is anterior, and is taken from the usual first costal and first vertebral, both of which are contracted in consequence.” Prof. Cope remarks, that “this character is unique in the order Testudinata,” but it is to be found in Lepidochelys, (Colpochelys), Thalassochelys, and Eurys- ternum. He also states that the double intergular exists in Tropi- demys of Riitimeyer. This is not correct ; it is found in Plesiochelys. The presence of fourteen marginal scuta is probably coincident with the increase of the costal scuta; we find the same in Lepidochelys and Thalassochelys. In regard to the affinities Prof. Copesays: ‘The affinities of this genus are complex and interesting. It would be a Pleurodire, but for the fact that the pelvis is not co-ossified with the plastron; nevertheless, there are rudiments of this union in the form of a shallow pit on each side.’ _Baéna is placed in a special family “ Baénidae,” with the characters :—Plastron uniting with the costal bones of the carapace by suture, with ascending axillary and inguinal buttresses ; inter-sternal bones [mesoplastra] present ; inter- gular scuta ; caudal vertebrze opisthoccelous. This family is adopted by Boulenger (Encyclopedia Brit., 9th ed., vol. 23, 1888, p. 457) with the following definition: “ Plastral bones eleven, mesoplastra being present. Nuchal bone without (Gayere 1, IDE The Vertebrata of the Tertiary Formations of henweee Book I, Washington, 1884, »p. 144-146. 28 426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. costiform processes. Carapace with epidermic scutes. Caudal vertebra: opisthoccelous.” I have studied, through the kindness of Dr. Brown Goode and Mr. Fred. A. Lucas, the type specimen of Baéna arenosa Leidy, now in the Smithsonian Institution. Different parts, which were still in the rock, were worked out more fully and some new points could be made out. Baéna proved to be nearly related to the older Laramie Compsemys, of which it seems to be the direct successor. The meso- plastra are more reduced, only meeting in a point in the middle line. ‘The sutures in the carapace and plastron disappear in old specimens as in the oider Laramie forms; this of course cannot be considered as a generic character, as we find the same in Terrapene Carolina L. in old specimens. The plastron is thickened across the axillary and inguinal region, agreeing thus with the Laramie and Jurassic Compsemys. The carapace is emarginated behind as described by Leidy and Cope. The dorsal vertebree are co-ossified with each other. There are eight plenralia very much asin Chelydra ; the rib-heads, however, are not so long as in this genus. ‘The third dorsal forms a sharp keel below, which also extends to the second and fourth. The tenth dorsal has a distinct rib, which is suturally united distally with the eighth pleural. The posterior face of this vertebra is deeply concave, and the center is entirely circular. The hypoplastron extends far inside between the fifth and sixth pleurals, very much as in Che/ys; and it is probable that Baéna was a good swimmer. ‘The sternal chambers are very much more developed than in Compsemys. The first sacral is very little convex in front, flat behind with a trifling indication of concavity. The second sacral is flat in front, concave behind. ‘The first and second sacrals have well developed zygapophyses; the sacral ribs are united to both centrum and neuroid. I am glad to be able to correct a gross blunder which I made some time ago. In my paper on the systematic position of Meiol- ania Owen (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Jan., 1889, p. 58), I made the following remark: “ All Testudinata have the second sacral verte- bra convex behind. ‘There is no exception whatever. Prof. Leidy, it is true, states that ‘the posterior articular surface of the second (sacral) centrum is concave’ in Baéna. But this is not correct: what Prof. Leidy describes as the posterior articular surface of the second, is the anterior of the first sacral vertebra. The second sa- eral vertebra of Baéna is convex behind, as in all other Testudinata.” 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427 To this idea, which is entirely wrong, I was brought by the figure given by Prof. Leidy, not by examination of the specimen. Now, after an examination of the original, I find that Prof. Leidy is abso- lutely correct in his statements; the posterior articular face of the second sacral is really concave, and the caudal vertebra, therefore, have probably all been convex-concave or opisthoceelian. If no bi- ceelian vertebra appeared, it is probable that in Compsemys, which is not known yet in this regard, we will find the same condition. The pelvis is directly referable to that of Compsemys, but is a step in advance towards the Pleurodiran type of structure. The pectineal process is short but massive, directed downwards where it meets the xiphiplastron. The inner branch of the pubis (the true pubis) is broader than in Compsemys. The ischium shows distally a curved rough face, which touches the xiphiplastron ; there is only a step to sutural union. The ilium is figured by Leidy. The sa- eral ribs are touching the upper anterior part of the ilium; they are suturally united to each other at this end, the first sacral rib forming the principal portion for the attachment with the ilium. There is a small tubercle on the outer and anterior side of the ilium similar to that seen in the Cinosternidae, but very much smaller. The sketch gives the ends of pubis and ischium meeting the plas- tron in Chelys and Baéna. In Chelys the impression of pubis and ischium on the xiphiplastron are separated considerably from each other. In Baéna there is a special process extending forward, with the tendency to join the impression of the pectineal process of the pubis. 428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Nothing is known about theskull and cervicals of Baéna. So far I think it best to leave Baéna in a special family Baénidae, nearly related to the Pleurosternidae, as proposed by Mr. Lydekker.’ I believe that the Baénidae belong to a distinct branch of this family, which died out without leaving any successors. It is probable that the Chelydridae developed from forms similar to Platychelys; in which the mesoplastron was reduced more and more, until it dis- appeared ; and in which the union between carapace and plastron became looser, until it became ligamentary. That all forms of Tortoise in which the carapace and plastron are united by ligament ( Trionychia included) are derived from forms which had these parts united by suture, there can be no longer any doubt. 38. ADOCUS Cope. The genus Adocus was established by Prof. Cope in 1868, Proce. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., with EHmys beatus Leidy from the Creta- ceous Greensand as type. The character was (Synopsis Batr. and Rept., p. 252). “Anterior and posterior lobe of the plastron abbreviated, narrowed, and not emarginate. Eight paired sternal bones ; twelve sternal scuta, the humerals extending anteriorly, the pectorals and gulars both small. A series of plates, “ intermarginals, within the marginals, in the sternal bridge. Rib-heads, 7. e., the capitula, wanting in the species whose costals have been examined.” To this genus is also referred Leidy’s genus Baptemys (Synopsis, p- 255), but in the Tertiary vertebrata it appears under the name of Dermatemys. I have examined the type of Adocus beatus Leidy from the Cretaceous of New Jersey, and can say that it agrees en- tirely with the specimens figured by Prof. Marsh (1. c.) under the new name Adocus punctatus. The specimen figured by Prof. Marsh was put together by me; it is an absolutely complete shell, both carapace and plastron in splen- did condition, and I am very sorry that the latter has not been fig- ured by Prof. Marsh. I give now the characters of Adocus: ante- rior (especially) and posterior ribs of plastron abbreviated, a little narrowed, not emarginate. Eight paired plastrals, twelve sternal shields. Inframarginals as in Pleurodira, not reaching median suture; but intergular divided by a median line. Carapace not emar- ginate in front, seven neural bones; the seventh separated from the sixth by the intervening seventh and eighth pleurals ; one post-neural. Vertebral shields 2-5, longer than wide; costals 2-4, broader than 1. Lydekker R. Cat. Foss. Rept. Brit. Mus., Part III, London, 1889, p. 205. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429 long ; costals 1, extending over the peripherals ; costals 2-4, placed en- tirely on the pleurals, cervical shield very small. Rib-heads of pleura- lia very short, resembling somewhat those in the Cinosternidae. Dorsal 10, with a well-developed rib which is suturally united dis- tally with the eighth pleural; pelvis free from carapace and plastron.’ Baptemys Leidy is a distinct genus related to Adocus; it differs by the presence of a complete series of neural bones from both Dermatemys and Adocus; from Adocus it differs besides in the entirely different arrangement of the costal shields. The nuchal has a lateral process, the hyoplastron stands between periph. 2 and 3 and is only very little connected with the first pleural. It may be ‘characterized in this way :— Anterior and posterior lobe of plastron abbreviated and much narrower, not emarginate. Eight paired plastrals, probably twelve sternal shields; inframarginals. Carapace not emarginate in front. A complete series of neural bones. All costal shields extending over peripheral bones. Agomphus Cope (Amphiemys Cope)* belongs AS to this group and is near Adocus. It contains the stoutest tortoises known; the bones of the plastron of a specimen about a foot long may be nearly an inch thick. In all essential characters it agrees with Adocus, but the anterior and posterior lobes of the plastron are even more narrowed than in Baptemys, the cervical shield is more developed as in Adocus, the nuchal has costiform processes which reach to the second peripheral, piercing the first ; something similar we see in Dermatemys. The sternal bridge is shorter than in Adocus ; it reaches from the fourth to the eighth peripheral. In all these three forms eleven peripheralia are present. The only living form that can be compared with these tortoises is the Central American genus Dermatemys,’ which represents a 1 I once believed that the ilium was suturally united to the eighth pleural, but the suture was only the suture for the rib of the tenth dorsal. Cope E. D. A new species of Adocidae from the Tertiary of Georgia Pal. Bullet., 25, p. 2-4. Baur, G., Osteologische Notizen iiber Reptilien. Fortsetz. 4, Zool. Ang, 291, 1888. 3 This genus is rare in museums, especially in the form of skeletons; the only complete skeleton I know of is preserved in the Zoological Museum of Basel ; the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia is in pessession of a skull; the Smithsonian Institution of shells of various ages; but I do not know of a single complete skeleton in this country; there is also no skeleton in the British Museum, 450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. distinct family. But this genus shows considerable differences in the plastron. It is much emarginate behind, and the arrangement of the dermal shields is also different. I follow, therefore, Prof. Cope in adopting his.family name Adocidae for this group. This family may be characterized thus: Adocidae; Anterior and posterior lobes of plastron more or less attenuated and shortened, never emarginate behind. Twelve pairs of plastral scutes ; inframar- ginals; no mesoplastron; neural bones complete or interrupted be- hind. Pelvis free from carapace and plastron. as faras I know. ‘This genus is very common in some parts of Central America, especially Guatemala; but all my numerous efforts to get specimens from there have been so far without success. A similar rare Central American genus is Staurotypus, of which I know complete skeletons only from Stuttgart, Basel and. the British Museum at London, es . 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431 THE SUMMER BIRDS OF HARVEY’S LAKE, LUZERNE CO., PENNA., WITH REMARKS ON THE FAUNAL POSITION OF THE REGION. BY WITMER STONE. The present paper is based upon field notes made during a collect- ing trip to Harvey’s Lake in the mountains of Pennsylvania, June 15th to 20th, 1891. The trip was undertaken with a view to ascertain- ing what species of birds passed the summer in this part of the Alleghanies and to determine what faunal belts were here represented. I am greatly indebted to my friend Mr. Stewardson Brown with whom I made the trip, for assistance in various ways. Harvey’s Lake is situated in the northern portion of Luzerne Co., Pennsylvania, just south of the main ridge of the Alleghanies, some nine miles north of the valley of the east branch of the Susquehanna River. The lake has an elevation of 1250 ft. above the sea level while the mountains immediately around it rise 100 to 150 ft. higher. The sheet of water is irregular in shape about eight miles in circum- ference and somewhat over two miles in length. The eastern side is thickly wooded with hemlock forests while the western banks have been cleared in many places for some dis- tance back from the lake. Several low meadows and swamps ex- tend back between the tracts of deep wood, which, together with the recent clearings furnish variety to the surroundings. The country about the lake seems divisible into three districts as regards the character of the birds. (1.) First the deep hemlock wood which is interspersed with Birch, Linden, Aspen and Sugar Maple with an undergrowth of Laurel and Viburnum. Here were found the Hairy and Pileated Wood- peckers ; Wood Pewee, Scarlet Tanager, Red-eyed Vireo, Golden- crowned Thrush; Black-throated Blue, Black-throated Green, Blackburnian and Magnolia Warblers, Winter Wren, Brown Creeper and Hermit Thrush, while on the edges of the thick wood were the Junco, Canada Warbler and Wood Thrush. The Hermits far outnumbered the Wood Thrushes and as a rule occupied the higher and deeper portions of the forest while the latter frequented the immediate border of the lake. Sometimes, however, they could be heard singing almost side by side. 452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. (II.) The second district includes the open ground and old clear- ings on the edge of the lake and about the houses, and was char- acterized by the presence of the Pewee, Song Sparrow, Chipping Sparrow, Yellow Warbler, Crested Fly-catcher, Kingbird, Balti- more Oriole, Goldfinch, Indigo Bird, Cedar Bird, Barn Swallow, Catbird and Robin. Of these the first four were the most abundant while many of the others’were represented by only a few pairs. (III.) The third district comprises the clearings which occupy mainly the lower country extending back from the meadows, though in some places they reach well up among the higher hills and are steadily encroaching on the forest. Here the most prominent spe- cies were the Mourning Dove, Towhee, Chestnut-sided and Black and White Warblers, Maryland Yellow-throat and House Wren, while a few Flickers, Brown Thrashers and a single pair of Chats were seen. As all the birds found at the time at which this trip was taken may safely be regarded as breeding and settled for the summer, the distribution of the various species furnishes one of the best means of ascertaining the faunal areas or life zones which are represented about the lake. The difference in elevation between the lake itself and the tops of the ridges immediately surrounding it is so slight that it is not possible to draw a line at any altitude which would indicate a division between a higher or boreal and a lower or more southern faunal belt, though on the southern slope of the mountains the limitation of certain species to higher and others to lower alti- tudes would undoubtedly be apparent. The fauna about the lake is, however, by no means homogeneous throughout and both northern and southern elements are present, but the former seem restricted to the deep hemlock forest and the latter to the open clearings. The region as a whole may be considered as situated in what is known as the Alleghanian faunal belt, with a strong tinge of the Canadian fauna in the deep forest and a slight Carolinian element in the lower clearings. Of the whole number of birds which came under our notice, twenty-nine, or rather more than half of the species, have a wide distribution during the breeding season and occur throughout the Carolinian, Alleghanian and Canadian zones, so that their presence is of no special significance in studying the faunal position of this region. 1891.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435 Of the remainder, eight are characteristic of the Canadian fauna: Junco, Black-throated Blue, Canadian, Blackburnian and Magnolia Warblers, Winter Wren, Brown Creeper and Hermit Thrush. Four are common to the Canadian and Alleghanian zones but breed no farther south: Yellow-bellied Sapsucker, Chestnut-sided and Black-throated Green Warblers, and Black-capped Chickadee. Twelve do not breed north of the Alleghanian zone, many of them being decidedly more typical of the Carolinian: Mourning Dove, Black-billed Cuckoo, Whip-poor-will, Baltimore Oriole, Field Sparrow, Towhee, Indigo Bird, Scarlet Tanager, Catbird, Brown Thrasher, House Wren and Wood Thrush. Many of these were represented by only a few pairs and the Tanager was the only species which could be said to be abundant. But one species, the Yellow-breasted Chat, was typical of the Caro- linian fauna and but a single pair was found. As regards the number of individuals, the more northern species, or those included in the first two lists, far outranked those of the last list, so that although the number of species seems nearly equal, the boreal element was really more prominent than would appear from the lists. Upon examination of the flora of the region about Harvey’s Lake we also find a marked boreal element. It is difficult, however, to designate which species are characteristic of the Canadian zone and which of the Allezhanian as the limits of the distribution of plants are much less clearly defined than is the case with birds. The most characteristic plants which distinguish this mountain region from the Carolinian belt which occupies the southeastern portion of Pennsylvania are: Anemone acutiloba. Geum rivale. Coptis trifolia. Lonicera ciliata. Acteea alba. Sambucus pubens. 1 Tt should be noted that the species given in the first list as representing the Canadian element are not the most typical species of this fauna. In reply to an inquiry regarding their breeding range, Dr. J. A. Allen writes me that they all ** breed sporadically below what we regard as the southern border of the Canadian fauna and may be considered rather more southerly in breeding range than some of the other Canadian species. At the same time they are not to be regarded as Alleghanian, at least where they occur in numbers.” The same fact is true in regard to the plants, as will be seen below. Many of those most typical of the Canadian flora are absent while there are at the same time a number that are hardly to be considered as Alleghanian. 454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1891. Viola rotundifolia. Viburnum lantanoides. Viola canadensis. Pyrola secunda. Oxalis acetosella. Populus grandidentata. Acer pennsylvanicum. Populus tremuloides. Tiarella cordifolia. Betula lutea. Ribes lacustre. Habenaria orbieulata. Circea alpina. Clintonia borealis. Rubus strigosus. Trillium erectum. Rubus odoratus. Trillium erythrocarpum. Rubus triflorus. Streptopus roseus. Prunus pennsylvanica. Taxus baecata canadensis. Ilex monticola. A few of these, such as Coptis trifolia, Viola canadensis, Tiarella cordifolia, Ribes lacustre, Circea alpina, Trillium erectum and Tril- lium erythrocarpum, are mentioned by Dr. Merriam in his provisional list of plants characteristic of a Canadian flora’ (Mammals of the Adirondacks p. 26) but most of the others are doubtless to be con- sidered as Alleghanian. Many of the plants most typical of the Canadian flora, including the Black Spruce (Abies nigra) which with Abies fraseri seems so clearly to mark the limits of the Canadian belt in the lower Alleghanies’, were entirely absent about Harvey’s Lake. On the whole the character of the flora seems to but substantiate the conclusions already reached from a study of the birds, namely that the Harvey’s Lake region must be considered as situated in the Alleghanian zone with, however, a very strong tinge of Canadian forms. Doubtless in the higher parts of the North Mountain just over the Wyoming County line, still more pronounced Canadian elements would be found in the flora and fauna, and the same may be said of the Pocono Mountain farther east, where the plants are decidedly more boreal. On the mountain slopes to the south of Harvey’s Lake on the other hand, the southern elements will be found to increase as one approaches the valley of the Susquehanna. ase ceeceeeerees 48 BIG PN ASG .< 5:3 seisesresese cs dnceceneenses 20m Gnathodontidze,..s.s-..scssecereseeeeee 48 Bry, did ce en ceeeeeteeeee 352 Athylacodeseervccreesces ssc saseee sete ATUe || WKOCISSAR ssc cdacieoseectenccoeeeces 441, 442 Mhysanophoralecsscc-csseeceese asec Biss | Wroleuca seccacceseosnecc sea eeneceee 443 Mirella os! 6 sqseeiceec ssn eceeetesers ASA: WirOsal pinks. cassccecss esse eteeeeneee 51 Mntanothenumy:.s-sessee eye ae seece ee S62") Maciniluse.---ccscseoseccess cee teeeeees 333 Mita. sccsstacstee ese saaigasineaetensaseees S6) |) Wallvatal...sscconscescotescevecdenenseeeet 326 AOD RA ScidooGadn Ipadocos apeodooadanAcbe AGE Wiallvatidaer ae rwcccceaseceisisscioceeseearne 326 Morenmaticarsesscsetseee jonGOcBIS AGG DilA | Wampyropssnscrcosee.-ne see eeciee 400-405 Moriniakccsscsceses cece secrete eee sects 5a | WerieriG aes, .os..0ccesccenassnccnaseeeee 47 Hlionnatinasse cece eeeace coeerncsee secs 490 WEWCNUS .sc¢seceeccecorss 47, 141, 142, 148 Mornatinidzery.-cecee case secu cecencesets AQ)| Vieratnum\ecc-ces sccaccsosces coseeeeceee MorUlatcesescoreseocwct seccedecs segereess ST), MenMelidee --22. cin cinsce cescecen's soccer 53 MOXOCHELYS cazeenccses ae soee det ees - 44> |, “Wermetts...a0. 5.0: c.-cseecoeeeeees 472 PROXOPHEUSUES|araceassscmaaelmesnee D4, Soe Mermiculanias.sc.aceseoeeeseoce tar 53, 78 MBrachy Gora soe s-ses 00. se secteeenes: OS iim | PVIESPentilions-pssccrereeeceeeer reas 208, 209 Morigen al weesscsesecessecssdscsseseas sense Sila) MVESPenUe Os-csc-eeceree eel aeceeeree eee 336 BRricheGus’...ccccsssse shee nceuont oar 8657 i|iVespertis s.secccerecetheceeeree aes se. 466 MICh ia a sescuceceec eae acco teses ceeeecees 395 | Yivbupnuma.5s:-sscscsscianen eee 434 Apri CHiNa’s.scccssscasieeiasenonseasecerss 352 | Ail Psaaeseccogsobod ssndasocacos sac6ocond: 299 Mbrifoliumbectceckesneccecn cre scams cece SOAs Violates: achccacwecsuncucneseoseeccerees 434 4 Nabicatols sieoreeraceseddbosoanracnsesiccrs HSN| MVANEO shen csessocceennsacecsteoteceeeteeee 436 april OLISseecenenecs teow ences: 1 eee Bu] “VitiSccearecctdsctestsecacccsentectoes 93, 275 Biprallvanrtepeee sk ceeh at tecaes eee ABAM|\ Violazis st nsetsabontet tcout eee 473 SRIOGCO PSs ce o.coeenaeeeenceaeaeeees 313; 314 | Volutella......2.:....-.. Ue seeeae ee seeeee 93 Awionychia...¢.s.cscsecere 418, 420, 428 | Vorticella.......... ee 10-12 sbrionychidces..%2..2-.. 281 to 296) = ‘ : . August 11, 1891. SOO fatorsoouee : ; . August 25, 1891. << 329) to 408) ~- : : . September 22, 1891. « 409 to 440 . : , . December 22, 1891. « 441 to 456 . ; : . January 5, 1892. fe 45 oto a2 & : : . January 19, 1892. ATO tOnOOObE : 3 . February 2, 1892. EDWARD J. NOLAN, Recording Secretary. PHILADELPHIA? BINDER & KELLY, PRINTERS. LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS. With reference to the several articles contributed by each. For Verbal Communications see General Index. Allen, Harrison, M. D. Description of a new Species of Vampyrops......... 400 fOnracnew Genus ols Viespertilionidser...csscscceateoscsceens- sates ee ceeen een senee 467 Baker, Frank C. Notes on a Collection of Shells from Southern Mexico..... 45 Remarks on the Muricidz with Description of new Species of Shells... 56 Baur, G. Notes on some little known American Fossil Tortoises.............0+8 411 Chapman, Henry C., M. D. A Memoir of Joseph Leidy, M. D. (with TROUT FT Le chond cact Segoe ree rie BOOP Aare Se BEERS EBS Shey nance 342 Chapman, Henry C., M. D. and Albert P. Brubaker, M.D. Researches upon twespiration. =| (Blates. Tori 0,t PNM) e250) ..tre sty cacanstedsneeesaucarees 13 Cope, Edw. D. On a Fin-back Whale (Balzenoptera) recently stranded on hea Ne Wim GnSeys COaStenes. dcsescseec cries socece cn teie crease es cetera ene e eee 474 Dall, Wm. H. Notes on some recent Brachiopods..................0seee+e0 172, 526 Dall, Wm. H. and H. A. Pilsbry. On some recent Japanese Brachiopoda with description of a Species believed to be new. (Plate IV.)......... 165 Dixon, Samuel G., M. D. Report of Experiments being pursued in the Bacteriological Laboratory of the Academy..............2-sscsessesessceeees 161 Bane. Charles. balccosyopsmand allied Genera ses.---6--s+cacet sanecceccaccerees 106 Ellis, J. B. and Benjamin M. Everhart. New Species of Fungi from various HOC ANTTEStemsamcmecsat a woeenendas Naneuc vac oe cheer cca c ae seesns ciboeme bees e oe cats eae 76 Eyerman, John. Preliminary Notice of some Minerals from the Serpentine ROCKS Meat sas Onlsass. sacess sess ieessadevansotec ch oscoscecstioveamnesetccee osters 464 Ford, John. Description of new Species of Anctus and Oliva................. 97 Goldsmith, Edward. Basanite from Crawford Co., Indiana..............c.0.00- 99 Green, Ashdown H. Description of a specimen of Chirolophus polyacto- Be]9) NINE: ocobocdbansscnbancn02 D0 SooS oC UDEDOOHC CONBe EO ccaaoaces GavenoSsoSebnSoTEDOscH 105 Heilprin, Angelo, Geological Researches in Yucatan..............ecssseseseceees 136 Ives, J. E. Crustacea from the Northern Coast of Yucatan, the harbor of Vera Cruz, the West Coast of Florida and the Bermuda Islands. (JPIBIES Wp Wl) hhcoé coqseroanaeoode d dae caboadccendcucce nereadaueoueeach cas necsreoan 176 Echinoderms and Arthropods from Japan, (Plates VII, VIII, IX, X, Sol OsG4) ee ean arencetghi ne jadocc at oor one cbr tens acne eeeoo OLD oe RE AE HeicRocoererns 210 Echinoderms from the Bahama Islands. ((elatesXeVile) Rreeecoersvesess sence 337 Reptiles and Batrachians of Northern Yucatan.............--scesscescesveeees 458 Echinoderms and Crustaceans collected by the West Greenland Expedi- (GTR TI a TCT ee eden ape CE COREE CSAS ROCHE Ce Me CREAR Ene wm eas 479 Keyes, Charles R. Fossil Faunas of Central Lowa......sssuseseeceseeceecereeeene 242 Koenig, Geo. A. On Paramelaconite and Associated Minerals...........+--++++ 284 Leidy, Joseph, M. I. Notice of some Entoz0a..........ssseeeeeeceeseceeseeserees 234 Marsh, O. C. Note on Mesozoic Mammalia...... Bb einacascsos0s0 ap soodcoosendeasades 237 Meehan, Thomas. Contributions to the Life-history of Plants, Not Wile (On the Causes affecting Variation in Linaria vulgaris. | On the Struc- ture of the Flowers in Dipteracanthus macranthus. Aerial Roots in Vitis vulpina. Additional note on the order of Flowering in the Catkins of Willows. Self-fertilizing Flowers.).....:.s.sscseseesseneeeeees 269 Osborn, Henry F. A review of the Cretaceous Mammalia..........ceee0ee00+« 124 Pilsbry, H. A. Note on the soft part and dentition of Stomatella.............. 71 On Land and Fresh-water Mollusca collected in Yucatan and Mexico. (Plates XLV 7 SOV) soo ssiscticaseinny suwteonenaiyacessoteemecscaene-ns en aenenencenacts 310 New and hitherto unfigured Japanese Mollusks. (Plates. XVII, XVIII, KIX.) ...scceccarseccsercdesenccccnararsccascesuee sesstesenssscorecrnsscssnsssesecsas 471 Rex, Geo. A., M. D. New American Myxomycetes.........cccccsceeeeeeseeseees 389 Ryder, John ie An Attempt to Illustrate some of the Primary Laws of Mechanical Evolution........0...-.ccssesseocssoeceeesdercsasecsesscorrseecsseons 62 Scribner, F. Lamson. Mexican Grasses. (Plate XIII.)........0. .c-sseseeeeeee 292 Schufeldt, R. W., M. D. On the External Characters of a Foetal Reindeer and! OLHET MOLES. 4o--0<4-ser0-ce>ncsrusbeempeee Sess eoe see onecoscnaptioe: 226 224 Stone, Witmer. On the Genus Psilorhinus Riippell.................eseeeeeeeee eee 94 The Summer Birds of Harvey’s Lake, Luzerne Co., Penna., with Remarks on the Faunal Position of the Region.......sscerssseceseesereeees 431 Catalogue of the Corvidz, Paradiseidz and Oriolidz in the Collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia..... ...........++++ 441 new - Mik a) —_ -t = eee ~ NOMLVYIdSTY NO Wayvanud ONY NVWdVvHO SSS ee ee CHAPMAN AND BRUBAKER ON RESPIRATION. CHAPMAN AND BRUBAKER ON RESPIRATION, —eullll < WI CHAPMAN AND BRUBAKER ON RESPIRATION. | y at ie - “a - ' 1 nee ire iy DALL & PILSBRY, ON JAPANESE BRACHIOPODA. ves, del IVES, CRUSTACEA FROM YUCATAN ETC. | an noccomcecccccemieear CL Ives, del. IVES, CRUSTACEA FROM YUCATAN ETC. Vil. PL. PHILA. 1891. NAT. SCl. PROG: ACAD. SAL Vi AABN IVES, JAPANESE ECHINODERMS, ETC. E. J. Lutz, del. PL. vitt. 1891. PHILA. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. IVES, JAPANESE ECHINODERMS, ETC, E, J. Lutz, del. IX. PL. PHILA. I891. SCl. PROC. ACAD. NAT. 4 AN - Pee Pe. Day POD Gi kodh ee ened oe eee sR IVES, JAPANESE ECHINODERMS, ETC, E. J. Lutz, del. PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1891. PEai